HomeMy WebLinkAboutBID - 8098 TIMBERLINE & HORSETOOTH INTERSECTION IMPROVEMENTS (3)SPECIFICATIONS
AND
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
FOR
HORSETOOTH & TIMBERLINE INTERSECTION
IMPROVEMENTS
BID NO. 8098
PURCHASING DIVISION
215 NORTH MASON STREET, 2ND FLOOR, FORT COLLINS
APRIL 21, 2015 – 3:00 P.M. (OUR CLOCK)
Financial Services
Purchasing Division
215 N. Mason St. 2nd Floor
PO Box 580
Fort Collins, CO 80522
970.221.6775
970.221.6707
fcgov.com/purchasing
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Pages
BID INFORMATION
00020 Notice Inviting Bids 00020-1 - 00020-2
00100 Instruction to Bidders 00100-1 - 00100-9
00300 Bid Form 00300-1 - 00300-3
00400 Supplements to Bid Forms 00400-1
00410 Bid Bond 00410-1 - 00410-2
00420 Statements of Bidders Qualifications 00420-1 - 00420-3
00430 Schedule of Major Subcontractors 00430-1
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
00500 Agreement Forms 00500-1
00510 Notice of Award 00510-0
00520 Agreement 00520-1 - 00520-6
00530 Notice to Proceed 00530-1
00600 Bonds and Certificates 00600-1
00610 Performance Bond 00610-1 - 00610-2
00615 Payment Bond 00615-1 - 00615-2
00630 Certificate of Insurance 00630-1
00635 Certificate of Substantial Completion 00635-1
00640 Certificate of Final Acceptance 00640-1
00650 Lien Waiver Release (Contractor) 00650-1 - 00650-2
00660 Consent of Surety 00660-1
00670 Application for Exemption Certificate 00670-1 - 00670-2
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
00700 General Conditions 00700-1 - 00700-34
Exhibit GC-A GC-A1 - GC-A2
00800 Supplementary Conditions 00800-1 - 00800-2
00900 Addenda, Modifications, and Payment 00900-1
00950 Contract Change Order 00950-1 - 00950-2
00960 Application for Payment 00960-1 - 00960-4
SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 00020
INVITATION TO BID
SECTION 00020
INVITATION TO BID
Date: March 27, 2015
Sealed Bids will be received by the City of Fort Collins (hereinafter referred to as OWNER), at
the office of the Purchasing Division, 3:00 P.M., our clock, on April 21, 2015, for the Horsetooth
& Timberline Intersection Improvements; BID NO. 8098. If delivered, they are to be delivered
to 215 North Mason Street, 2nd Floor, Fort Collins, Colorado, 80524. If mailed, the mailing
address is P. O. Box 580, Fort Collins, CO 80522-0580.
At said place and time, and promptly thereafter, all Bids that have been duly received will be
publicly opened and read aloud.
The Contract Documents provide for the construction of Bid 8098. The Work includes
reconstruction of East Horsetooth Road and South Timberline Road at the intersection and in
the immediate vicinity of the intersection. The project includes: removals as defined in the
plans, utility installation and coordination, earthwork, curb and gutter, concrete pavement,
asphalt pavement, sidewalks, raised medians, right turn pork chop islands, enhanced
crosswalks, erosion control, drainage systems, irrigation tap, temporary signal system, and
construction traffic control. Construction surveying, signing, striping, traffic fiber relocations,
permanent traffic signal work, and street light installation will be completed by the City of Fort
Collins. The project is funded in part through a federal grant and is a Colorado Department of
Transportation (CDOT) Local Agency (LA) project. CDOT will maintain oversight of the project
during construction.
All Bids must be in accordance with the Contract Documents on file with the City of Fort Collins,
215 North Mason St., 2nd floor, Fort Collins, Colorado 80524.
The City encourages all disadvantaged business enterprises to submit bid in response to all
invitations and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, national origin.
This project is partially funded through federal grants. The UDBE goal for this project is
9%. The On-the-Job Training Program Goal for this project is 640 hours.
A prebid conference and job walk with representatives of prospective Bidders will be
held at 11:00 AM, on April 6, 2015, in the Training Room (Conference Room 2E) at 215 N
Mason Street, Fort Collins.
Prospective Bidders are invited to present their questions relative to this Bid proposal at this
meeting.
The Contract Documents and Construction Drawings may be examined online at:
Rocky Mountain E-Purchasing System: www.rockymountainbidsystem.com
Bids will be received as set forth in the Bidding Documents.
The Work is expected to be commenced within the time as required by Section 2.3 of General
Conditions. Substantial Completion of the Work is required as specified in the Agreement.
The successful Bidder will be required to furnish a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond
guaranteeing faithful performance and the payment of all bills and obligations arising from the
performance of the Contract.
No Bid may be withdrawn within a period of forty-five (45) days after the date fixed for opening
Bids.
The OWNER reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any informalities and
irregularities therein.
Bid security in the amount of not less than 5% of the total Bid must accompany each Bid in the
form specified in the Instructions to Bidders.
Sales Prohibited/Conflict of Interest: No officer, employee, or member of City Council, shall have
a financial interest in the sale to the City of any real or personal property, equipment, material,
supplies or services where such officer or employee exercises directly or indirectly any decision-
making authority concerning such sale or any supervisory authority over the services to be
rendered. This rule also applies to subcontracts with the City. Soliciting or accepting any gift,
gratuity favor, entertainment, kickback or any items of monetary value from any person who has
or is seeking to do business with the City of Fort Collins is prohibited.
City of Fort Collins
Gerry S. Paul
Director of Purchasing & Risk Management
SECTION 00100
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SECTION 00100
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1.0 DEFINED TERMS
Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders which are defined in the Standard General
Conditions of the Construction Contract (No. 1910-8, 1990 ed.) have the meanings
assigned to them in the General Conditions. The term "Bidder" means one who submits
a Bid to OWNER, as distinct from a sub-bidder, who submits a Bid to Bidder. The terms
"Successful Bidder" means the lowest, qualified, responsible and responsive Bidder to
whom OWNER (on basis of OWNER's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an
award. The term "Bidding Documents" includes the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid,
Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Form, and the proposed Contract Documents (including
all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids).
2.0 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
2.1. Complete sets of Bidding Documents may be obtained as stated in the Invitation to
Bid. No partial sets will be issued. The Bidding Documents may be examined at the
locations identified in the Invitation to Bid.
2.2. Complete sets of Bidding Documents shall be used in preparing Bids; neither
OWNER nor Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations
resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.
2.3. The submitted Bid proposal shall include Sections 00300, 00410, 00420, and 00430
fully executed.
2.4. OWNER and Engineer, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the
above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and do not
confer a license or grant for any other use.
3.0 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS
3.1 To demonstrate qualifications to perform the Work, each Bidder must submit at the
time of the Bid opening, a written statement of qualifications including financial data,
a summary of previous experience, previous commitments and evidence of
authority to conduct business in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. Each
Bid must contain evidence of Bidder's qualification to do business in the state where
the Project is located or covenant to obtain such qualification prior to award of the
contract. The Statement of Qualifications shall be prepared on the form provided in
Section 00420.
3.2. In accordance with Section 8-160 of the Code of the City of Fort Collins in
determining whether a bidder is responsible, the following shall be considered: (1)
The ability, capacity and skill of the bidder to perform the contract or provide the
services required, (2) whether the bidder can perform the contract or provide the
service promptly and within the time specified without delay or interference, (3) the
character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience and efficiency of the bidder,
(4) the quality of the bidder's performance of previous contracts or services, (5) the
previous and existing compliance by the bidder with laws and ordinances relating to
the contract or service, (6) the sufficiency of the financial resources and ability of the
bidder to perform the contract or provide the service, (7) the quality, availability and
adaptability of the materials and services to the particular use required, (8) the
ability of the bidder to provide future maintenance and service for the use of the
subject of the contract, and (9) any other circumstances which will affect the
bidder's performance of the contract.
3.3. Each Bidder may be required to show that he has handled former Work so that no
just claims are pending against such Work. No Bid will be accepted from a Bidder
who is engaged on any other Work which would impair his ability to perform or
finance this Work.
3.4 No Bidder shall be in default on the performance of any other contract with the City
or in the payment of any taxes, licenses or other monies due to the City.
4.0 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE
4.1. It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the
Contract Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the site to familiarize himself with local
conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress or performance of the
Work, (c) familiarize himself with federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and
regulations that may in any manner affect cost, progress or performance of the
Work, (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract
Documents, and (e) notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the
Contract Documents.
4.2. Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for identification of: Subsurface
and Physical Conditions SC-4.2.
4.3. The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder
that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article 4, that without
exception the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by
the Contract Documents and such means, methods, techniques, sequences or
procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract
Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to
indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and
furnishing of the Work.
5.0 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA.
5.1. All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be
submitted in writing to the Engineer and the OWNER. Interpretation or clarifications
considered necessary in response to such questions will be issued only by
Addenda. Questions received less than seven days prior to the date for opening of
the Bids may not be answered. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda
will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal
effect.
5.2. All questions concerning the scope of this project should be directed to the
Engineer. Questions regarding submittal of bids should be directed to the City of
Fort Collins' Purchasing Division.
5.3. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed
advisable by OWNER or Engineer.
5.4. Addenda will be mailed or delivered to all parties recorded by the OWNER as
having received the Bidding documents.
6.0 BID SECURITY
6.1. Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to OWNER in the
amount stated in the Invitation to Bid. The required security must be in the form of a
certified or bank cashier's check payable to OWNER or a Bid Bond on the form
enclosed herewith. The Bid Bond must be executed by a surety meeting the
requirements of the General Conditions for surety bonds.
6.2. The Bid Security of the successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has
executed the Agreement and furnished the required contract security, whereupon
Bid Security will be returned. If the successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the
Agreement and furnish the required contract security within 15 days of the Notice of
Award, OWNER may annul the Notice of Award and the Bid Security of that Bidder
will be forfeited. The Bid Security of other Bidders whom OWNER believes to have
reasonable chance receiving the award may be retained by OWNER until the earlier
of the seventh day after the effective date of the Agreement or the thirty-first day
after the Bid Opening, whereupon Bid Security furnished by such Bidders will be
returned. Bid Security with Bids which are not competitive will be returned within
seven days after the Bid opening.
7.0 CONTRACT TIME.
The number of days within which, or the date by which the Work is to be substantially
complete and also completed and ready for Final Payment (the Contract Times) are set
forth in the Agreement.
8.0 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES.
Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Agreement.
9.0 SUBSTITUTE ("OR EQUAL") MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described on
the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible
substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated on the Drawings or specified in
the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item of material or equipment may be
furnished or used by CONTRACTOR if acceptable to Engineer, application for such
acceptance will not be considered by Engineer until after the "effective date of the
Agreement". The procedure for submittal of any such application by CONTRACTOR and
consideration by Engineer is set forth in the General Conditions which may be
supplemented in the General Requirements.
10.0 SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS
10.1. Each Bidder shall submit at the Bid opening to OWNER a list of principal
subcontractors he proposes to use in the Work. Refer to Section 00430 contained
within these Documents.
10.2. If OWNER or Engineer after due investigation has reasonable objection to any
proposed Subcontractor, either may, before the Notice of Award is given, request
the apparent successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an
increase in Bid price. If the apparent successful Bidder declines to make any
substitution, OWNER may award the contract to the next lowest responsive and
responsible Bidder that proposes to use acceptable subcontractors.
Subcontractors, suppliers, other persons or organization listed and to whom
OWNER or Engineer does not make written objection prior to the giving of the
Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER subject to
revocation of such acceptance after the effective date of the Agreement as
provided in the General Conditions.
10.3. CONTRACTOR shall not be required to employ any subcontractor, supplier or
other persons or organizations against whom he has reasonable objection. The
use of subcontractors listed by the Bidder and accepted by OWNER prior to the
Notice of Award will be required in the performance of the Work.
11.0 BID FORM.
11.1. A copy of the Bid Form is bound in the Contract Documents which may be retained
by the Bidder. A separate unbound copy is enclosed for submission with the Bid.
11.2. Bid Forms must be complete in ink or typed. All lump sum prices on the form must
be stated in words and numerals; in case of conflict, words will take precedence.
Unit prices shall govern over extensions of sums.
11.3. Bids by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a
vice-president (or other appropriate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to
sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed and attested by the secretary or an
assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be
shown below the corporate name.
11.4. Bids by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a
partner, his title must appear under his signature and the official address of the
partnership must be shown below the signature.
11.5. Bids by joint venture shall be signed by each participant in the joint venture or by
an authorized agent of each participant. The full name of each person or company
interested in the Bid shall be listed on the Bid Form.
11.6. The Bid shall contain an acknowledgement of receipt of all Addenda (the numbers
of which must be filled in on the Bid Form).
11.7. No alterations in Bids, or in the printed forms therefore, by erasures, interpolations,
or otherwise will be acceptable unless each such alteration is signed or initialed by
the Bidder; if initialed, OWNER may require the Bidder to identify any alteration so
initialed.
11.8. The address and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid shall be
shown.
12.0 BID PRICING.
Bids must be priced as set forth in the Bid Schedule or Schedules.
13.0 SUBMISSION OF BIDS.
13.1. Bids shall be submitted at the time and place indicated in the Invitation to Bid and
shall be enclosed in an opaque sealed envelope marked with the Project title, Bid
No., and name and address of the Bidder and accompanied by the Bid Security,
Bid Form, Bid Bond, Statement of Bidders Qualifications, and Schedule of
Subcontractors as required in Section 00430. If the Bid is sent through the mail or
other delivery system, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate
envelope with the notation "BID ENCLOSED" on the face of it.
13.2. Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for
receipt of Bids indicated in the Invitation to Bid, or any extension thereof made by
addendum. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned
unopened. Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location
designated for receipt of Bids.
13.3. Oral, telephonic, telegraphic, or facsimile Bids are invalid and will not receive
consideration.
13.4. No Bidder may submit more than one Bid. Multiple Bids under different names will
not be accepted from one firm or association.
14.0 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS.
14.1. Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in
a manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered to the place where Bids are
to be submitted at any time prior to the opening of Bids.
14.2. Bids may also be modified or withdrawn in person by the Bidder or an authorized
representative provided he can prove his identity and authority at any time prior to
the opening of Bids.
14.3. Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the time designated for the receipt of
Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to
Bidders.
15.0 OPENINGS OF BIDS.
Bids will be opened and (unless obviously non-responsive) read aloud publicly as
indicated in the Invitation to Bid. An abstract of the amounts of the Base Bids and major
alternates (if any) will be made available after the opening of Bids.
16.0 BIDS TO REMAIN OPEN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE.
All Bids shall remain open for forty-five (45) days after the day of the Bid Opening, but
OWNER may, in his sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid Security prior to
that date.
17.0 AWARD OF CONTRACT.
17.1. OWNER reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, to waive any and all
informalities not involving price, time or changes in the Work, to negotiate contract
terms with the Successful Bidder, and the right to disregard all nonconforming,
nonresponsive, unbalanced or conditional Bids. Also, OWNER reserves the right to
reject the Bid of any Bidder if OWNER believes that it would not be in the best
interest of the Project to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is
not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to
meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by OWNER.
Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct
sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum.
17.2. In evaluating Bids, OWNER will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether
or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit
prices and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of
Award.
17.3. OWNER may consider the qualification and experience of Subcontractors,
Suppliers, and other persons and organizations proposed for those portions of the
Work as to which the identity of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and
organizations is submitted as requested by OWNER. OWNER also may consider
the operating costs, maintenance requirements, performance data and guarantees
of major items of materials and equipment proposed for incorporation in the Work
when such data is required to be submitted prior to the Notice of Award.
17.4. OWNER may conduct such investigations as OWNER deems necessary to assist
in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and
financial ability of the Bidder's proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other
persons and organizations to do the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents to OWNER's satisfaction within the prescribed time.
17.5. If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsive and
responsible Bidder whose evaluation by OWNER indicates to OWNER that the
award will be in the best interest of the OWNER. Award shall be made on the
evaluated lowest base bid excluding alternates. The basis for award shall be the
lowest Bid total for the Schedule or, in the case of more than one schedule, for
sum of all schedules. Only one contract will be awarded.
17.6. If the Contract is to be awarded, OWNER will give the Successful Bidder a Notice
of Award within forty-five (45) days after the date of the Bid opening.
18.0 CONTRACT SECURITY.
The General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions set forth OWNER's
requirements as to performance and other Bonds. When the Successful Bidder delivers
the executed Agreement to the OWNER, it shall be accompanied by the required
Contract Security.
19.0 SIGNING OF AGREEMENT.
When OWNER gives a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompanied
by the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement with all other written
Contract Documents attached. Within fifteen (15) days thereafter, CONTRACTOR shall
sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement and attached
documents to OWNER with the required Bonds. Within ten (10) days thereafter,
OWNER hall deliver one fully signed counterpart to CONTRACTOR. Each counterpart is
to be accompanied by a complete set of the Drawings with appropriate identification.
20.0 TAXES.
OWNER is exempt from Colorado State Sales and Use Taxes on materials and
equipment to be incorporated in the Work. Said taxes shall not be included in the
Contract Price. Reference is made to the General and Supplementary Conditions.
21.0 RETAINAGE.
Provisions concerning retainage are set forth in the Agreement.
22.0 PURCHASING RESTRICTIONS.
Purchasing restrictions: The Bidder's authorized signature of this Bid assures the
Bidder's compliance with the City's purchasing restrictions. A copy of the resolutions is
available for review in the Purchasing and Risk Management Division or the City Clerk's
office.
A. Cement Restrictions: City of Fort Collins Resolution 91-121 requires that
suppliers and producers of cement or products containing cement to certify
that the cement was not made in cement kilns that burn hazardous waste as
a fuel.
23.0 COLLUSIVE OR SHAM BIDS.
Any Bid deemed by the City in its sole discretion to be a collusive or sham Bid will be
rejected and reported to authorities as such. Your authorized signature of this Bid
assures that such Bid is genuine and is not a collusive or sham Bid.
24.0 BID RESULTS.
For information regarding results for individual Bids send a self-addressed, self-stamped
envelope and a Bid tally will be mailed to you. Bid results will be posted in the
Purchasing office seven (7) days after the Bid Opening.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 00300
BID FORM
SECTION 00300
BID FORM
PROJECT: 8098 Horsetooth & Timberline Intersection Improvements
Place:
Date:
1. In compliance with your Invitation to Bid dated , 20 and subject to
all conditions thereof, the undersigned a (Corporation, Limited Liability Company,
Partnership, Joint Venture, or Sole Proprietor) authorized to do business in the State of
Colorado hereby proposes to furnish and do everything required by the Contract
Documents to which this refers for the construction of all items listed on the following Bid
Schedule or Bid Schedules.
2. The undersigned Bidder does hereby declare and stipulate that this proposal is made in
good faith, without collusion or connection with any other person or persons Bidding for
the same Work, and that it is made in pursuance of and subject to all the terms and
conditions of the Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders, the Agreement, the
detailed Specifications, and the Drawings pertaining to the Work to be done, all of which
have been examined by the undersigned.
3. Accompanying this Bid is a certified or cashier's check or standard Bid bond in the sum
of
($ ) in accordance with the Invitation To Bid and Instructions to
Bidders.
4. The undersigned Bidder agrees to execute the Agreement and a Performance Bond and
a Payment Bond for the amount of the total of this Bid within fifteen (15) calendar days
from the date when the written notice of the award of the contract is delivered to him at
the address given on this Bid. The name and address of the corporate surety with which
the Bidder proposes to furnish the specified performance and payment Bonds is as
follows: .
5. All the various phases of Work enumerated in the Contract Documents with their
individual jobs and overhead, whether specifically mentioned, included by implication or
appurtenant thereto, are to be performed by the CONTRACTOR under one of the items
listed in the Bid Schedule, irrespective of whether it is named in said list.
6. Payment for Work performed will be in accordance with the Bid Schedule or Bid
Schedules subject to changes as provided in the Contract Documents.
7. The undersigned Bidder hereby acknowledges receipt of Addenda No. through
.
8. BID SCHEDULE (Base Bid)
ITEM NO. ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY UNIT COST COST
201-01 CLEARING AND GRUBBING L S 1 $ -
202-01 REMOVAL OF TREE EACH 37 $ -
202-02 REMOVAL OF INLET EACH 3 $ -
202-03 REMOVAL OF MANHOLE EACH 1 $ -
202-04 REMOVAL OF VALVE EACH 1 $ -
202-05 REMOVAL OF PIPE LF 196 $ -
202-06 REMOVAL OF CONCRETE MEDIAN COVER MATERIAL SY 818 $ -
202-07 REMOVAL OF SIDEWALK SY 2282 $ -
202-08 REMOVAL OF CURB AND GUTTER LF 8394 $ -
202-09 REMOVAL OF CONCRETE CURB RAMP SY 69 $ -
202-10 REMOVAL OF CONCRETE PAVEMENT SY 3163 $ -
202-11 REMOVAL OF ASPHALT MAT SY 5201 $ -
202-12 REMOVAL OF ASPHALT MAT (PLANING) SY 13183 $ -
202-13 REMOVAL OF PAVEMENT MARKING SF 4000 $ -
202-14 REMOVAL OF TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT L S 1 $ -
203-01 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION (COMPLETE IN PLACE) CY 9812 $ -
203-02 MUCK EXCAVATION CY 1200 $ -
203-03 PROOF ROLLING HOUR 20 $ -
203-04 BACKHOE HOUR 30 $ -
203-05 COMBINATION LOADER HOUR 15 $ -
203-06 POTHOLING HOUR 100 $ -
206-01 FILTER MATERIAL (CLASS A) CY 117 $ -
207-01 TOPSOIL (SPECIAL) CY 1270 $ -
208-01 EROSION LOG LF 500 $ -
208-02 AGGREGATE BAG LF 300 $ -
208-03 CONCRETE WASHOUT STRUCTURE EACH 2 $ -
208-04 STORM DRAIN INLET PROTECTION EACH 6 $ -
208-05 VEHICLE TRACKING PAD EACH 2 $ -
208-06 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF SEDIMENT (LABOR) HOUR 70 $ -
208-07 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF SEDIMENT (EQUIPMENT) HOUR 30 $ -
208-08 SWEEPING (SEDIMENT REMOVAL) HOUR 20 $ -
208-09 EROSION CONTROL SUPERVISOR DAY 80 $ -
210-01 RESET WATER METER EACH 1 $ -
210-02 RESET FIRE HYDRANT EACH 2 $ -
210-03 RESET PULL BOX EACH 5 $ -
210-04 ADJUST MANHOLE EACH 5 $ -
210-05 MODIFY MANHOLE EACH 2 $ -
210-06 MODIFY STRUCTURE EACH 1 $ -
210-07 ADJUST VALVE BOX EACH 13 $ -
212-01 TREE RETENTION AND PROTECTION L S 1 $ -
213-01 LANDSCAPE BOULDER EACH 17 $ -
304-01 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE (CLASS 6) TON 6800 $ -
403-01 HOT MIX ASPHALT (PATCHING) (ASPHALT) TON 845 $ -
403-02 HOT MIX ASPHALT (GRADING S) (75) (PG 64-22) TON 1014 $ -
403-03 HOT MIX ASPHALT (GRADING SX) (100) (PG 64-22) TON 1794 $ -
412-01 CONCRETE PAVEMENT (6 INCH) SY 935 $ -
412-02 CONCRETE PAVEMENT (9 INCH) SY 5410 $ -
412-03 CONCRETE PAVEMENT (9 INCH) (SPECIAL) SY 659 $ -
412-04 CONCRETE PAVEMENT (9 INCH) (FAST TRACK) SY 1350 $ -
420-01 GEOTEXTILE (EROSION CONTROL) (CLASS 1) SY 1914 $ -
601-01 CONCRETE CLASS D CY 1.77 $ -
602-01 REINFORCING STEEL LBS 28.34 $ -
603-01 15 INCH REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE (COMPLETE IN PLACE) LF 182 $ -
604-01 INLET (SPECIAL) (DOUBLE) (5 FOOT) EACH 1 $ -
604-02 INLET (SPECIAL) (SINGLE) (5 FOOT) EACH 2 $ -
604-03 MANHOLE SLAB BASE (10 FOOT) EACH 1 $ -
605-01 4 INCH NON-PERFORATED PIPE UNDERDRAIN (SPECIAL) LF 281 $ -
605-02 4 INCH PERFORATED PIPE UNDERDRAIN (SPECIAL) LF 1397 $ -
607-01 FENCE (PLASTIC) LF 500 $ -
608-01 CONCRETE SIDEWALK (SPECIAL) SY 129 $ -
608-02 CONCRETE SIDEWALK (6 INCH) SY 1937 $ -
608-03 CONCRETE CURB RAMP SY 245 $ -
608-04 METAL SIDEWALK CULVERT LF 12 $ -
609-01 CURB TYPE 2 (SECTION B) LF 892 $ -
609-02 CURB AND GUTTER TYPE 2 (SECTION I-B) LF 3255 $ -
609-03 CURB AND GUTTER TYPE 2 (SECTION II-B) LF 5136 $ -
609-04 CURB AND GUTTER TYPE 2 (SPECIAL) LF 2926 $ -
610-01 MEDIAN COVER MATERIAL (DECORATIVE) SF 756 $ -
612-01 DELINEATOR (TYPE I) EACH 9 $ -
613-01 2 INCH ELECTRICAL CONDUIT (BORED) LF 170 $ -
613-02 2 INCH ELECTRICAL CONDUIT (PLASTIC) LF 1040 $ -
613-03 3 INCH ELECTRICAL CONDUIT (PLASTIC) LF 1240 $ -
613-04 PULL BOX (24"x36"x24") EACH 8 $ -
613-05 PULL BOX (30"x48"x24") EACH 1 $ -
619-01 WATER SERVICE EACH 1 $ -
619-02 WATER METER VAULT L S 1 $ -
620-01 SANITARY FACILITY EACH 1 $ -
621-01 DETOUR PAVEMENT SY 1600 $ -
623-01 PLASTIC PIPE (IRRIGATION SLEEVE) LF 625 $ -
626-01 MOBILIZATION L S 1 $ -
627-01 4 INCH PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE (REMOVABLE) LF 1600 $ -
627-02 8 INCH PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE (REMOVABLE) LF 1600 $ -
630-01 CONSTRUCTION ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL L S 1 $ -
630-02 FLAGGING HOUR 2500 $ -
630-03 UNIFORMED TRAFFIC CONTROL HOUR 40 $ -
630-04 TRAFFIC CONTROL INSPECTION DAY 50 $ -
630-05 TRAFFIC CONTROL MANAGEMENT DAY 130 $ -
630-06 BUSINESS ACCESS SPECIALTY SIGN EACH 10 $ -
630-07 PORTABLE MESSAGE SIGN PANEL DAY 80 $ -
630-08 CONCRETE BARRIER (TEMPORARY) LF 1700 $ -
630-09 IMPACT ATTENUATOR (TEMPORARY) EACH 2 $ -
630-10 TRAFFIC SIGNAL (TEMPORARY) EACH 1 $ -
9. PRICES
The foregoing prices shall include all labor, materials, transportation, shoring, removal,
dewatering, overhead, profit, insurance, etc., to cover the complete Work in place of the
several kinds called for.
Bidder acknowledges that the OWNER has the right to delete items in the Bid or change
quantities at his sole discretion without affecting the Agreement or prices of any item so
long as the deletion or change does not exceed twenty-five percent (25%) of the total
Agreement Price.
RESPECTFULLY SUBMITTED:
CONTRACTOR
BY:
Printed Date
Title
License Number (If Applicable)
(Seal - if Bid is by corporation) Attest:
Address
Telephone
Email
700-01 F/A MINOR CONTRACT REVISIONS FA 1 $100,000.00 $ 100,000.00
700-02 F/A PARTNERING FA 1 $3,000.00 $ 3,000.00
700-03 F/A FUEL COST ADJUSTMENT FA 1 $15,000.00 $ 15,000.00
700-04 F/A ASPHALT CEMENT COST ADJUSTMENT FA 1 $20,000.00 $ 20,000.00
700-05 F/A ON-THE-JOB TRAINEE HOUR 640 $3.00 $ 1,920.00
700-06 F/A EROSION CONTROL FA 1 $5,000.00 $ 5,000.00
IN WORDS:
TOTAL BASE BID
Force Account
SECTION 00400
SUPPLEMENTS TO BID FORMS
00410 Bid Bond
00420 Statement of Bidder's Qualifications
00430 Schedule of Subcontractors
SECTION 00410
BID BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that we, the undersigned
as Principal, and , as Surety, are hereby held and firmly
bound unto the City of Fort Collins, Colorado, as OWNER, in the sum of $
for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind
ourselves, successors, and assigns.
THE CONDITION of this obligation is such that whereas the Principal has submitted to the City
of Fort Collins, Colorado the accompanying Bid and hereby made a part hereof to enter into a
Construction Agreement for the construction of Fort Collins Project, 8098 Horsetooth &
Timberline Intersection Improvements.
NOW THEREFORE,
(a) If said Bid shall be rejected, or
(b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a Contract in the
form of Contract attached hereto (properly completed in accordance with said Bid) and
shall furnish a BOND for his faithful performance of said Contract, and for payment of all
persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all
other respects perform the Agreement created by the acceptance of said Bid, then this
obligation shall be void; otherwise the same shall remain in force and effect, it being
expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims
hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein
stated.
The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety
and its BOND shall be in no way impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which
the OWNER may accept such Bid; and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such
extension.
Surety Companies executing bonds must be authorized to transact business in the State of
Colorado and be accepted by the OWNER.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have hereunto set their hands and seals
this day of , 20__, and such of them as are corporations have caused
their corporate seals to be hereto affixed and these presents to be signed by their proper
officers, the day and year first set forth above.
PRINCIPAL SURETY
Name:
Address:
By: By:
Title: Title:
ATTEST:
By:
(SEAL) (SEAL)
SECTION 00420
STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS
All questions must be answered and the data given must be clear and comprehensive. This
statement must be notarized. If necessary, questions may be answered on separate attached
sheets. The Bidder may submit any additional information he desires.
1. Name of Bidder:
2. Permanent main office address:
3. When organized:
4. If a corporation, where incorporated:
5. How many years have you been engaged in the contracting business under your present
firm or trade name?
6. Contracts on hand: (Schedule these, showing the amount of each contract and the
appropriate anticipated dates of completion.)
7. General character of Work performed by your company:
8. Have you ever failed to complete any Work awarded to you?
If so, where and why?
9. Have you ever defaulted on a contract?
If so, where and why?
10. Are you debarred by any government agency?
If yes list agency name.
11. List the more important projects recently completed by your company, stating the
approximate cost of each, and the month and year completed, location and type of
construction.
12. List your major equipment available for this contract.
13. Experience in construction Work similar in importance to this project:
14. Background and experience of the principal members of your organization, including
officers:
15. Credit available: $
16. Bank Reference:
17. Will you, upon request, fill out a detailed financial statement and furnish any other
information that may be required by the OWNER?
18. Are you licensed as a General Contractor?
If yes, in what city, county and state?
What class, license and numbers?
19. Do you anticipate subcontracting Work under this Contract?
If yes, what percent of total contract?
And to whom?
20. Are any lawsuits pending against you or your firm at this time?
IF yes, DETAIL
21. What are the limits of your public liability? DETAIL
What company?
22. What are your company's bonding limitations?
23. The undersigned hereby authorizes and requests any person, firm or corporation to
furnish any information requested by the OWNER in verification of the recital comprising
this Statement of Bidder's Qualifications.
Dated at ________________ this ______ day of __________________, 20__.
Company:
By: Printed:
Title:
State of
County of
being duly sworn deposes and says that he
is of
(Name) (Organization)
and that the answers to the foregoing questions and all statements therein contained are true
and correct.
Subscribed and sworn to before me this _______ day of____________, 20__.
(Seal)
Notary Public
My commission expires: .
SECTION 00430
SCHEDULE OF SUBCONTRACTORS
List all subcontractors for the work items listed below and all subcontractors performing over
15% of the contract.
ITEM SUBCONTRACTOR
SECTION 00500
AGREEMENT FORMS
00510 Notice of Award
00520 Agreement
00530 Notice to Proceed
SECTION 00510
NOTICE OF AWARD
DATE: [Date]
TO: [Contractor]
PROJECT: 8098 Horsetooth & Timberline Intersection Improvements
OWNER: CITY OF FORT COLLINS (hereinafter referred to as "the OWNER")
You are hereby notified that your Bid dated [Contractor's Bid Date] for the above project has
been considered. You are the apparent successful Bidder and have been awarded an
Agreement for 8098 Horsetooth & Timberline Intersection Improvements.
The Price of your Agreement is ($ ).
Three (3) copies of each of the proposed Contract Documents (except Drawings) accompany
this Notice of Award. Three (3) sets of the Drawings will be delivered separately or otherwise
made available to you immediately.
You must comply with the following conditions precedent within fifteen (15) days of the date of
this Notice of Award, that is by [Date].
1. You must deliver to the OWNER three (3) fully executed counterparts of the Agreement
including all the Contract Documents. Each of the Contract Documents must bear your
signature on the cover of the page.
2. You must deliver with the executed Agreement the Contract Security (Bonds) as
specified in the Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions (Article 5.1) and
Supplementary Conditions.
Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle OWNER to consider
your Bid abandoned, to annul this Notice of Award and to declare your Bid Security forfeited.
Within ten (10) days after you comply with those conditions, OWNER will return to you one (1)
fully-signed counterpart of the Agreement with the Contract Documents attached.
City of Fort Collins
OWNER
By:
Gerry S. Paul
Director of Purchasing & Risk Management
SECTION 00520
AGREEMENT
THIS AGREEMENT is dated as of the [Day] day of [Month] in the year of 20[Year] and shall be
effective on the date this AGREEMENT is signed by the City.
The City of Fort Collins (hereinafter called OWNER) and
[Contractor] (hereinafter called CONTRACTOR)
OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth,
agree as follows:
ARTICLE 1. WORK
CONTRACTOR shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract
Documents. The Project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may
be the whole or only a part is defined as the construction of the 8098 Horsetooth
& Timberline Intersection Improvements and is generally described in Section
01010.
ARTICLE 2. ENGINEER
The Project has been designed by Muller Engineering Co. Inc. The City of Fort
Collins Engineering Department, who is hereinafter called ENGINEER will
assume all duties and responsibilities and will have the rights and authority
assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with
completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 3. CONTRACT TIMES
3.1 The Work shall be Substantially Complete within One Hundred Sixty-
Five(165) calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence
to run as provided in the General Conditions and completed and ready for
Final Payment and Acceptance in accordance with the General Conditions
within Fifteen (15) calendar days after the date when the Contract Times
commence to run.
3.2. Liquidated Damages. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is
of the essence of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss
if the Work is not completed within the times specified in paragraph 3.1.
above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of
the General Conditions.
They also recognize the delays, expenses and difficulties involved in
proving in a legal preceding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work
is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof,
OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as Liquidated damages for delay
(but not as penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER the amounts set
forth hereafter.
1) Substantial Completion:
Three Thousand Three Hundred Dollars ($3,300) for each calendar day
or fraction thereof that expires after the One Hundred Sixty-Five (165)
calendar day period for Substantial Completion of the Work until the
Work is Substantially Complete.
2) Final Acceptance:
After Substantial Completion, Three Thousand Three Hundred Dollars
($3,300) for each calendar day or fraction thereof that expires after the
Fifteen (15) calendar day period for Final Payment and Acceptance until
the Work is ready for Final Payment and Acceptance.
ARTICLE 4. CONTRACT PRICE
4.1 OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for performance of the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents in current funds as follows:
Dollars ($ ), in accordance with Section 00300, attached and
incorporated herein by this reference.
ARTICLE 5. PAYMENT PROCEDURES
CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article
14 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by
ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions.
5.1. PROGRESS PAYMENTS. OWNER shall make progress payments on
account of the Contract Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR's Application
for Payment as recommended by ENGINEER, once each month during
construction as provided below. All progress payments will be on the basis
of the progress of the Work measured by the schedule of values
established in paragraph 2.6 of the General Conditions and in the case of
Unit Price Work based on the number of units completed, and in
accordance with the General Requirements concerning Unit Price Work.
5.1.1. Prior to Substantial Completion, Owner will be entitled to withhold as
contract retainage five percent (5%) of each progress payment, but, in each
case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such
amounts as ENGINEER shall determine, or OWNER may withhold, in
accordance with paragraph 14.7 of the General Conditions. If , in the sole
discretion of Owner, on recommendation of Engineer, Owner determines
that the character and progress of the Work have been satisfactory to
OWNER and ENGINEER, OWNER may determine that as long as the
character and progress of the Work remain satisfactory to them, there will
be no additional retainage on account of Work completed in which case the
remaining progress payments prior to Substantial Completion will be in an
amount equal to 100% of the Work completed. 95% of materials and
equipment not incorporated in the Work (but delivered, suitably stored and
accompanied by documentation satisfactory to OWNER as provided in
paragraph 14.2 of the General Conditions) may be included in the
application Section 00520 Page 3 for payment.
5.1.2. Upon Substantial Completion payment will be made in an amount
sufficient, if necessary, to increase total payments to CONTRACTOR to
95% of the Contract Price, less such amounts as ENGINEER shall
determine or OWNER may withhold in accordance with paragraph 14.7 of
the General Conditions or as provided by law.
5.2. FINAL PAYMENT. Upon Final Completion and Acceptance of the Work in
accordance with paragraph 14.13 of the General Conditions, OWNER shall
pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by ENGINEER
as provided in said paragraph 14.13.
ARTICLE 6. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION
In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement, CONTRACTOR makes
the following representations:
6.1. CONTRACTOR has familiarized himself with the nature and extent of the
Contract Documents, Work, site, locality, and with all local conditions and
Laws and Regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress,
performance or furnishing of the Work.
6.2. CONTRACTOR has studied carefully all reports of explorations and tests of
subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions which are
identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in paragraph 4.2 of
the General Conditions.
6.3. CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes
responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations,
investigations, explorations, tests, reports, and studies (in addition to or to
supplement those referred to in paragraph 6.2 above) which pertain to the
subsurface or physical condition at or contiguous to the site or otherwise
may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work as
CONTRACTOR considers necessary for the performance or furnishing of
the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times and in
accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents,
including specifically the provisions of paragraph 4.2 of the General
Conditions; and no additional examinations, investigations, explorations,
tests, reports, studies or similar information or data are or will be required
by CONTRACTOR for such purposes.
6.4. CONTRACTOR has reviewed and checked all information and data shown
or indicated on the Contract Documents with respect to existing
Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site and assumes
responsibility for the accurate location of said Underground Facilities. No
additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies
or similar information or data in respect of said Underground Facilities are
or will be required by CONTRACTOR in order to perform and furnish the
Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times and in accordance
with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including
specifically the provision of paragraph 4.3. of the General Conditions.
6.5. CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all such observations,
examinations, investigations, tests, reports and data with the terms and
conditions of the Contract Documents.
6.6. CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors
or discrepancies that he has discovered in the Contract Documents and the
written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to CONTRACTOR.
ARTICLE 7. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
7.1 The Contract Documents which comprise the entire Agreement between
OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work consist of the General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, those items included in the
definition of “Contract Documents” in Article 1.10 of the General Conditions,
and such other items as are referenced in this Article 7, all of which are
incorporated herein by this reference.
7.2 Forms for use by CONTRACTOR in performing the Work and related
actions in carrying out the terms of this Agreement are deemed Contract
Documents and incorporated herein by this reference, and include, but are
not limited to, the following:
7.2.1 Certificate of Substantial Completion
7.2.2 Certificate of Final Acceptance
7.2.3 Lien Waiver Releases
7.2.4 Consent of Surety
7.2.5 Application for Exemption Certificate
7.2.6 Application for Payment
7.3 Drawings, consisting of a cover sheet and sheets numbered as follows:
1 TITLE SHEET
2 STANDARD PLANS LIST
3-6 GENERAL NOTES
7-12 TYPICAL SECTIONS
13-15 SUMMARY OF APPROXIMATE QUANTITIES
16 SUMMARY OF EARTHWORK
17 TABULATION OF REMOVALS, RESETS AND ADJUSTMENTS
18 TABULATION OF SURFACING QUANTITIES
19 TABULATION OF CONCRETE ITEMS
20 TABULATION OF DRIVEWAYS
21 SURVEY TABULATION
22-24 SURVEY CONTROL DIAGRAM
25 ROADWAY GEOMETRY TABLES
26-33 GEOMETRY PLANS
34-37 INTERSECTION CORNER DETAILS
38 MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS
39 LANDSCAPING DETAILS
40-47 ROADWAY PLANS
48 ROADWAY PROFILES
49-62 MEDIAN PROFILES
63-73 PANLINE PROFILES
74-82 ACCESS PLAN AND PROFILES
83-90 PAVEMENT PLANS
91-94 CONCRETE JOINTING PLANS
95-96 UTILITY POTHOLE LOG
97-104 UTILITY PLANS
105 TABULATION OF DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
106-108 DRAINAGE DETAILS
109-116 DRAINAGE PLANS
117 STRUCTURE PROFILES
118-126 EROSION CONTROL PLANS
127-130 TRAFFIC SIGNAL PLANS
131-132 TABULATIONS OF SIGNS AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS
133-140 SIGNING AND PAVEMENT MARKING PLANS
141-142 TRAFFIC CONTROL NOTES AND TABULATIONS
143-148 SUGGESTED CONSTRUCTION PHASING
149-168 CROSS SECTIONS
169-186 RIGHT-OF-WAY PLANS
The Contract Drawings shall be stamped "Final for Construction" and
dated. Any revisions made shall be clearly identified and dated.
7.4. Addenda Numbers to , inclusive.
7.5. The Contract Documents also include all written amendments and other
documents amending, modifying, or supplementing the Contract
Documents pursuant to paragraphs 3.5 and 3.6 of the General Conditions.
7.6. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed or incorporated
by reference in this Article 7. The Contract Documents may only be
amended, modified or supplemented as provided in paragraphs 3.5 and 3.6
of the General Conditions.
ARTICLE 8. MISCELLANEOUS
8.1. Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Article I of the General
Conditions shall have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions.
8.2. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the
Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the
written consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifically but not
without limitations, moneys that may become due and moneys that are due
may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the
effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically
stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment no
assignment will release or discharge that assignor from any duty or
responsibility under the Contract Document.
8.3. OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors,
assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners,
successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect to all covenants,
Agreement and obligations contained in the Contract Document.
OWNER: CITY OF FORT COLLINS CONTRACTOR: [CONTRACTOR]
By: By:
DARIN ATTEBERRY, CITY MANAGER
By:
GERRY S. PAUL PRINTED
DIRECTOR OF PURCHASING
AND RISK MANAGEMENT
Title: Title:
Date: Date:
Attest: (CORPORATE SEAL)
City Clerk
Address for giving notices:
P. O. Box 580
Fort Collins, CO 80522 Attest:
Approved as to Form Address for giving notices:
Assistant City Attorney
License No.:
SECTION 00530
NOTICE TO PROCEED
Description of Work: 8098 Horsetooth & Timberline Intersection Improvements
To: [Contractor]
This notice is to advise you:
That the contract covering the above described Work has been fully executed by the
CONTRACTOR and the OWNER.
That the required CONTRACTOR's Performance Bond and Payment Bond have been received
by the OWNER.
That the OWNER has approved the said Contract Documents.
Therefore, as the CONTRACTOR for the above described Work, you are hereby authorized and
directed to proceed within ( ) calendar days from receipt of this notice as
required by the Agreement.
Dated this day of , 20 .
The dates for Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance shall be , 20_ and
, 20__, respectively.
City of Fort Collins
OWNER
By:
Title:
ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF NOTICE
Receipt of the above Notice to Proceed is hereby acknowledged this day of
, 20__.
CONTRACTOR: [Contractor]
By:
Title:
SECTION 00600
BONDS AND CERTIFICATES
00610 Performance Bond
00615 Payment Bond
00630 Certificate of Insurance
00635 Certificate of Substantial Completion
00640 Certificate of Final Acceptance
00650 Lien Waiver Release (CONTRACTOR)
00660 Consent of Surety
00670 Application for Exemption Certificate
SECTION 00610
PERFORMANCE BOND
Bond No.
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that
(firm)
(address)
(an Individual), (a Partnership), (a Corporation), hereinafter referred to as the "Principal" and
(Firm)
(Address)
hereinafter referred to as "the Surety", are held and firmly bound unto City of Fort Collins, 300
Laporte Ave, Fort Collins, Colorado 80522 a (Municipal Corporation) hereinafter referred to as
the "OWNER", in the penal sum of Dollars ($ ) in lawful money of the United States,
for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors and
assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that whereas the Principal entered into a
certain Agreement with the OWNER, dated the [Day] day of [Month], 20[Year], a copy of which
is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the performance of The City of Fort Collins
Project, 8098 Horsetooth & Timberline Intersection Improvements.
NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall well, truly and faithfully perform its duties, all the
undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions and agreements of said Agreement during the
original term thereof, and any extensions thereof which may be granted by the OWNER, with or
without Notice to the Surety and during the life of the guaranty period, and if the Principal shall
satisfy all claims and demands incurred under such Agreement, and shall fully indemnify and
save harmless the OWNER from all cost and damages which it may suffer by reason of failure
to do so, and shall reimburse and repay the OWNER all outlay and expense which the OWNER
may incur in making good any default then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in
full force and effect.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees
that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the
Work to be performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in any way
affect its obligation on this bond; and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension
of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work or to the
Specifications.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR
shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the Surety Company must be authorized to transact business in
the State of Colorado and be acceptable to the OWNER.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in three (3) counterparts, each one of
which shall be deemed an original, this _____ day of _____ ____, 20__.
IN PRESENCE OF: Principal
(Title) (Title)
(Corporate Seal)
(Address)
IN PRESENCE OF: Other Partners
_____________________________ By:
_____________________________ By:
IN PRESENCE OF: Surety
_____________________________ By:_____________________________________
_____________________________
(Address)
(Surety Seal)
NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Agreement. If CONTRACTOR is
Partnership, all partners should execute Bond.
SECTION 00615
PAYMENT BOND
Bond No.
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that
(firm)
(address)
(an Individual), (a Partnership), (a Corporation), hereinafter referred to as the "Principal" and
(Firm)
(Address)
hereinafter referred to as "the Surety", are held and firmly bound unto the City of Fort Collins,
300 Laporte Ave., Fort Collins, Colorado 80522 a (Municipal Corporation) hereinafter referred to
as "the OWNER", in the penal sum of Dollars ($ ) in lawful money of the United
States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors
and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that whereas the Principal entered into a
certain Agreement with the OWNER, dated the [Day] day of [Month], 20[Year], a copy of which
is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the performance of The City of Fort Collins
Project, 8098 Horsetooth & Timberline Intersection Improvements.
NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall make payment to all persons, firms, subcontractors,
and corporations furnishing materials for or performing labor in the prosecution of the Work
provided for in such Agreement and any authorized extension or modification thereof, including
all amounts due for materials, lubricants, repairs on machinery, equipment and tools,
consumed, rented or used in connection with the construction of such Work, and all insurance
premiums on said Work, and for all labor, performed in such Work whether by subcontractor or
otherwise, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees
that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the
Work to be performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in any way
affect its obligation on this bond; and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension
of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work or to the
Specifications.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR
shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the Surety Company must be authorized to transact business in
the State of Colorado and be acceptable to the OWNER.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in three (3) counterparts,
each one of which shall be deemed an original, this day of , 20__.
IN PRESENCE OF: Principal
(Title) (Title)
(Corporate Seal)
(Address)
IN PRESENCE OF: Other Partners
_____________________________ By:
_____________________________ By:
IN PRESENCE OF: Surety
_____________________________ By:_____________________________________
_____________________________
(Address)
(Surety Seal)
NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Agreement. If CONTRACTOR is
Partnership, all partners should execute Bond.
SECTION 00630
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
CONTRACTOR shall insert his own standard form for Certificate of Insurance in accordance
with the following requirements:
1. The Contractor will provide, from insurance companies acceptable to the City, the
insurance coverage designated hereinafter and pay all costs. Before commencing work
under this bid, the Contractor shall furnish the City with certificates of insurance showing
the type, amount, class of operations covered, effective dates and date of expiration of
policies, and containing substantially the following statement:
“The insurance evidenced by this Certificate will not reduce coverage or limits and
will not be cancelled, except after thirty (30) days written notice has been received
by the City of Fort Collins.”
In case of the breach of any provision of the Insurance Requirements, the City, at its
option, may take out and maintain, at the expense of the Contractor, such insurance as
the City may deem proper and may deduct the cost of such insurance from any monies
which may be due or become due the Contractor under this Agreement. The City, its
officers, agents and employees shall be named as additional insureds on the Contractor
's general liability and automobile liability insurance policies for any claims arising out of
work performed under this Agreement.
2. Insurance coverages shall be as follows:
A. Workers' Compensation & Employer's Liability. The Contractor shall maintain
during the life of this Agreement for all of the Contractor's employees engaged in
work performed under this agreement:
1. Workers' Compensation insurance with statutory limits as required by
Colorado law.
2. Employer's Liability insurance with limits of $100,000 per accident,
$500,000 disease aggregate, and $100,000 disease each employee.
B. Commercial General & Vehicle Liability. The Contractor shall maintain during the
life of this Agreement such commercial general liability and automobile liability
insurance as will provide coverage for damage claims of personal injury, including
accidental death, as well as for claims for property damage, which may arise
directly or indirectly from the performance of work under this Agreement.
Coverage for property damage shall be on a "broad form" basis. The amount of
insurance for each coverage, Commercial General and Vehicle, shall not be less
than $1,000,000 combined single limits for bodily injury and property damage.
In the event any work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for
any liability directly or indirectly arising out of the work performed under this Agreement by a
subcontractor, which liability is not covered by the subcontractor's insurance
SECTION 00635
CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
TO: CITY OF FORT COLLINS (OWNER)
DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: PROJECT TITLE: 8098 Horsetooth &
Timberline Intersection Improvements
PROJECT OR SPECIFIED PART SHALL LOCATION: Fort Collins, Colorado
INCLUDE:
OWNER: City of Fort Collins
CONTRACTOR: [Contractor]
CONTRACT DATE: [Date]
The Work performed under this contract has been inspected by authorized representatives of
the OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and the ENGINEER and the project or specified part of the
project, as indicated above) is hereby declared to be substantially completed on the above date.
A tentative list of items to be completed or corrected is appended hereto. This list may not be
exhaustive, and the failure to include an item on it does not alter the responsibility of the
CONTRACTOR to complete all the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
ENGINEER AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
DATE
The CONTRACTOR accepts the above Certificate of Substantial Completion and agrees to
complete and correct the items on the tentative list within the time indicated.
CONTRACTOR AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
DATE
The OWNER accepts the project or specified area of the project as substantially complete and
will assume full possession of the project or specified area of the project at 12:01 a.m., on
. The responsibility for heat, utilities, security, and insurance under
the Contract Documents shall be as set forth under "Remarks" below.
CITY OF FORT COLLINS, COLORADO By:
OWNER AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
DATE
REMARKS:
SECTION 00640
CERTIFICATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE
, 20__
TO: [Contractor]
Gentlemen:
You are hereby notified that on the day of , 20__, the City of
Fort Collins, Colorado, has accepted the Work completed by [Contractor] for the City of Fort
Collins project, 8098 Horsetooth & Timberline Intersection Improvements.
A check is attached hereto in the amount of $ as Final
Payment for all Work done, subject to the terms of the Contract Documents which are dated
[Contract Date].
In conformance with the Contract Documents for this project, your obligations and guarantees
will continue for the specified time from the following date:____________ _, 20__.
Sincerely,
OWNER: City of Fort Collins
By:
Title:
ATTEST:
Title:
SECTION 00650
LIEN WAIVER RELEASE
(CONTRACTOR)
TO: City of Fort Collins, Colorado (OWNER)
FROM: [Contractor] (CONTRACTOR)
PROJECT: 8098 Horsetooth & Timberline Intersection Improvements
1. The CONTRACTOR acknowledges having received payment, except retainage from the
OWNER for all work, labor, skill and material furnished, delivered and performed by the
CONTRACTOR for the OWNER or for anyone in the construction, design, improvement,
alteration, addition or repair of the above described project.
2. In consideration of such payment and other good and valuable consideration, the receipt
and adequacy of which are hereby acknowledged, the CONTRACTOR voluntarily waives
all rights, claims and liens, including but not limited to, mechanic's liens, Miller Act claims
(40 U.S.C.A. 270 a and b), stop notices, equitable liens and labor and material bond rights
which the CONTRACTOR may now or may afterward have, claim or assert for all and any
work, labor, skill or materials furnished, delivered or performed for the construction,
design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the above described project, against
the OWNER or its officers, agents, employees or assigns, against any fund of or in the
possession or control of the OWNER, against the project or against all land and the
buildings on and appurtenances to the land improved by the project.
3. The CONTRACTOR affirms that all work, labor and materials, furnished, delivered or
performed to or for the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of
the project were furnished, delivered or performed by the CONTRACTOR or its agents,
employees, and servants, or by and through the CONTRACTOR by various
Subcontractors or materialmen or their agents, employees and servants and further
affirms the same have been paid in full and have released in full any and all existing or
possible future mechanic's liens or rights or claims against the project or any funds in the
OWNER'S possession or control concerning the project or against the OWNER or its
officers, agents, employees or assigns arising out of the project.
4. The CONTRACTOR agrees to defend and hold harmless the OWNER, the lender, if any,
and the Surety on the project against and from any claim hereinafter made by the
CONTRACTOR'S Subcontractors, materialmen, employees, servants, agents or assigns
against the project or against the OWNER or its officers, employees, agents or assigns
arising out of the project for all loss, damage and costs, including reasonable attorneys
fees, incurred as a result of such claims.
5. The parties acknowledge that the description of the project set forth above constitutes and
adequate description of the property and improvements to which this Lien Waiver Release
pertains. It is further acknowledged that this Lien Waiver Release is for the benefit of and
may be relied upon by the OWNER, the lender, if any, and Surety on any labor and
material bonds for the project.
Signed this day of , 20__.
CONTRACTOR: [CONTRACTOR]
By:
Title:
ATTEST:
Secretary
STATE OF COLORADO )
)ss.
COUNTY OF LARIMER )
Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of 20__,
by .
Witness my hand and official seal.
Notary Public
My Commission Expires:
SECTION 00660
CONSENT OF SURETY
TO: City of Fort Collins, Colorado (hereinafter referred to as the "OWNER")
CONTRACTOR: [Contractor]
PROJECT: 8098 Horsetooth & Timberline Intersection Improvements
CONTRACT DATE: [Date]
In accordance with the provisions of the Contract between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR
as indicated above, for .
(Surety)
on bond of
hereby approves of the Final Payment to the CONTRACTOR, and agrees that Final Payment to
the CONTRACTOR shall not relieve the Surety Company of any of its obligations to the
OWNER, as set forth in the said Surety Company's Bond.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety Company has hereunto set its hand this
day of , 20____ .
(Surety Company)
By:
ATTACH: Power of Attorney and Certificate of Authority of Attorney(s)-in-Fact.
SECTION 00670
APPLICATION FOR EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE
Special Notice
Contractors who have completed this application in the past, please note the following changes
in procedure:
The Department will no longer issue individual Certificates of exemption to subcontractors. Only
prime contractors will receive a Contractor’s Exemption Certificate on exempt projects.
Upon receipt of the Certificate, the prime contractor should make a copy for each subcontractor
involved in the project and complete it by filling in the subcontractor’s name and address and
signing it.
The original Certificate should always be retained by the prime contractor. Copies of all
Certificates that the prime contractor issued to subcontractors should be kept at the prime
contractor’s place of business for a minimum of three years and be available for inspection in
the event of an audit.
Once an 89# has been assigned to you, please use the next five numbers following it for any
applications submitted for future projects. This should be your permanent number. For
instance, if you were assigned 89-12345-0001, every application submitted thereafter should
contain 89-12345 on the application. The succeeding numbers will be issued by the
Department of Revenue. DO NOT enter what you believe to be the next in sequence as this
may delay processing of your application.
SECTION 00700
GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION 00800
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SECTION 00800
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Conditions of the Contract
These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the General Conditions of the
Construction Contract (EJCDC General Conditions 1910-8, 1990 edition with City of Fort Collins
modifications) and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below.
SC-4.2 Subsurface and Physical Conditions:
A. Add the following language to paragraph 4.2.1 of the General Conditions.
4.2.1.1.1 The following report(s) of exploration and tests of subsurface conditions
at the site of the Work:
Geotechnical Investigation, Rocksol Consulting Group Inc, Project No.
315.01, dated January 2, 2014.
Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in the
geotechnical documents, but not upon nontechnical data, interpretations or
opinions contained therein or upon the completeness of any information in the
report.
B. 4.2.1.2.1 No drawing of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or
subsurface structures (except Underground Facilities referred to in Paragraph
4.3) which are at or contiguous to the site have been utilized by the Engineer in
preparation of the Contract Documents, except the following:
None
SC-5.4.8 Limits of Liability
A. Add the following language at the end of paragraph 5.4.8.
The limits of liability for the insurance required by the paragraph numbers of the
General Conditions listed below are as follows:
5.4.1 and 5.4.2
Coverage A - Statutory Limits
Coverage B - $100,000/$100,000/$500,000
5.4.3 and 5.4.5 Commercial General Liability policy will have limits of
$1,000,000 combined single limits (CSL). This policy will include coverage
for Explosion, Collapse, and Underground coverage unless waived by the
Owner.
5.4.6 The Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance policy will have
limits of $1,000,000 combined single limits (CSL).
5.4.9 This policy will include completed operations coverage/product
liability coverage with limits of $1,000,000 combined single limits (CSL).
SC-12.3 Add the following language to the end of paragraph 12.3.
Contractor will include in the project schedule zero (0) days lost due to abnormal
weather conditions.
SECTION 00900
ADDENDA, MODIFICATIONS AND PAYMENT
00950 Contract Change Order
00960 Application for Payment
SECTION 00950
CHANGE ORDER NO.
PROJECT TITLE: Horsetooth & Timberline Intersection Improvements
CONTRACTOR: [Contractor]
PROJECT NUMBER: 8098
DESCRIPTION:
1. Reason for change:
2. Description of Change:
3. Change in Contract Cost:
4. Change in Contract Time:
ORIGINAL CONTRACT COST $ .00
TOTAL APPROVED CHANGE ORDER .00
TOTAL PENDING CHANGE ORDER .00
TOTAL THIS CHANGE ORDER .00
TOTAL % OF THIS CHANGE ORDER %
TOTAL C.O.% OF ORIGNINAL CONTRACT %
ADJUSTED CONTRACT COST $ .00
(Assuming all change orders approved)
ACCEPTED BY: DATE:
Contractor's Representative
ACCEPTED BY: DATE:
Project Manager
REVIEWED BY: DATE:
Title:
APPROVED BY: DATE:
Title:
APPROVED BY: DATE:
Purchasing Agent over $30,000
cc: City Clerk Contractor Engineer
Project File Architect Purchasing
Section 00960
APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PAGE 1 OF 4
OWNER: City of Fort Collins PROJECT: APPLICATION NUMBER:
APPLICATION DATE:
PERIOD BEGINNING:
ENGINEER: CONTRACTOR: PERIOD ENDING:
PROJECT NUMBER:
CHANGE ORDERS Application is made for Payment as shown below in connection with Contract
NUMBER DATE AMOUNT
The present status of the account for this Contract is as
follows:
1
2 Original Contract Amount:
3 Net Change by Change Order:
Current contract Amount: $0.00
Total Completed and Stored to Date:
Less Previous Applications:
Amount Due this Application - Before Retainage: $0.00
Less Retainage:
Net Change by Change Order $0.00 AMOUNT DUE THIS APPLICATION: $0.00
CERTIFICATION:
The undersigned CONTRACTOR certifies that all obligations of CONTRACTOR incurred in connection with
the Work have been satisfied as required in Paragraph 14.3. of the General Conditions of the Contract.
The above Amount Due This Application is requested by the CONTRACTOR.
Date: By:
Payment of the above Amount Due This Application is recommended by the ENGINEER.
Date: By:
Payment of the above Amount Due This Application has been reviewed by the OWNER'S Project Manager.
Date: By:
Payment of the above Amount Due This Application is approved by the OWNER.
Date: By:
CONTRACT AMOUNTS
APPLICATION FOR
PAYMENT PAGE 2 OF 4
Work
Completed
Work
Completed
Work
Completed Stored
Bid
This
Month
Previous
Periods
To
Date Materials Total
Item This Earned Percent
Number Description Quantity Units
Unit
Price Amount Qty. Amount Qty. Amount Qty. Amount Period
To
Date Billed
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
TOTALS $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
CHANGE ORDERS APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PAGE 3 OF 4
Work
Completed
Work
Completed
Work
Completed Stored
Bid
This
Month
Previous
Periods
To
Date Materials Total
Item This Earned Percent
Number Description Quantity Units
Unit
Price Amount Qty. Amount Qty. Amount Qty. Amount Period
To
Date Billed
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
TOTALS CHANGE
ORDERS $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
PROJECT TOTALS $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
STORED MATERIALS
SUMMARY PAGE 4 OF 4
On Hand Received Installed On Hand
Item Invoice Previous This This This
Number Number Description Application Period Period Application
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
TOTALS $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
1
PROJECT AND STANDARD SPECIAL
PROVISIONS
Horsetooth Road / Timberline Road
Operational Improvement Project
Federal Aid Project No. AQC M455-010 (19307)
Bid No. 8084
Prepared for:
City of Fort Collins
Engineering Department
281 North College Avenue
Fort Collins, CO 80522-0580
(970) 221-6605
March 16, 2015
2
PROJECT SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3
COLORADO DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
CITY OF FORT COLLINS, COLORADO
HORSETOOTH RD/TIMBERLINE ROAD OPERATIONAL IMPROVEMENT PROJECT
FEDERAL AID PROJECT NO. AQC M455-010 (19307)
PROJECT SPECIAL PROVISIONS
The General Conditions of the Construction Contract and the Colorado Department of Transportation’s (CDOT)
Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, 2011 Edition, control construction of this project.
Where there are conflicts between the two, the more stringent shall control.
The following Special Provisions supplement or modify the CDOT Standard Specifications and take precedence
over the Standard Specifications and plans.
Item Page
Index Pages…………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3
Notice to Bidders…………………………………………………………………………………………………… 5
Commencement and Completion of Work……………….………………………………………………………… 6
Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Contract Goal……………………………….………………Error! Bookmark not
OJT Contract Goal…………………………………………………………………………………………………..9
Revision of Section 101 - Definitions of Terms…………………………………………………………………...10
Revision of Section 102 - Project Plans and Other Data …………………………………………………………..11
Revision of Section 105 - Control of Work………………………………………………………………………..12
Revision of Section 105 - Claims for Contract Adjustment……………………………………………………….15
Revision of Section 106 - Control of Material……………………………………………………………………..16
Revision of Section 107 - Insurance……………………………………………………………………………….20
Revision of Section 107 - Environmental Controls………………………………………………………………..21
Revision of Section 107 - Legal Relations and Responsibility to Public………………………………………….23
Revision of Section 108 - Prosecution and Progress………………………………………………………………24
Revision of Section 108 - Limitation of Operations……………………………………………………………….27
Revision of Section 201 - Clearing and Grubbing…………………………………………………………………28
Revision of Section 202 - Removal of Inlet………………………………………………………………………..29
Revision of Section 202 - Removal of Pipe………………………………………………………………………..30
Revision of Section 202 - Removal of Sidewalk…………………………………………………………………..31
Revision of Section 202 - Removal of Curb and Gutter and Median Cover………………………………………32
Revision of Section 202 - Removal of Concrete Pavement………………………………………………………..33
Revision of Section 202 - Removal of Asphalt Mat……………………………………………………………….34
Revision of Section 207 - Topsoil (Special)……………………………………………………………………….35
Revision of Section 208 - Erosion Control………………………………………………………………………...37
Revision of Section 210 - Reset Water Meter……………………………………………………………………...38
Revision of Section 210 - Reset Fire Hydrant……………………………………………………………………..39
Revision of Section 210 - Modify Manhole……………………………………………………………………….40
Revision of Section 210 - Modify Structure……………………………………………………………………….41
Revision of Section 212 - Tree Retention and Protection………………………………………………………….42
Revision of Section 304 - Aggregate Base Course………………………………………………………………...47
Revision of Section 403 - Hot Mix Asphalt………………………………………………………………………..48
Revision of Section 403 - Hot Mix Asphalt (Warranty) …………………………………………………………..51
Revision of Section 412 - Portland Cement Concrete Pavement…………………………………………………..59
Revision of Section 412 - Fast Track Portland Cement Concrete Pavement………………………………………60
Revision of Section 412 - Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Warranty)……………………………………...62
Revision of Section 604 - Inlet (Special)…………………………………………………………………………..64
Revision of Section 605 - Subsurface Drains (Special) …………………………………………………………..65
Revision of Section 608 - Sidewalks………………………………………………………………………………66
Revision of Section 608 - Concrete Curb Ramp…………………………………………………………………...68
4
Revision of Section 609 - Curb and Gutter………………………………………………………………………...70
Revision of Section 610 - Median Cover Material………………………………………………………………...71
Revision of Section 619 - Water Service…………………………………………………………………………..72
Revision of Section 619 - Water Lines…………………………………………………………………………….73
Section 621 - Detour Pavement…………………………………………………………………………………….74
Revision of Section 623 - Plastic Pipe (Irrigation Sleeve)…………………………………………………………76
Revision of Section 625 - Construction Surveying………………………………………………………………...77
Revision of Section 627 - Pavement Marking……………………………………………………………………..79
Revision of Section 630 - Construction Zone Traffic Control……………………………………………………..80
Revision of Section 630 - Impact Attenuator (Temporary)………………………………………………………..82
Revision of Section 630 - Temporary Traffic Signal……………………………………………………………... 84
Force Account Items……………………………………………………………………………………………….85
Traffic Control Plan - General……………………………………………………………………………………..86
Utilities……………………………………………………………………………………………………………..88
5
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
Pursuant to subsections 102.04 and 102.05, it is recommended that bidders on this project review the work site
and plan details with an authorized City representative. Prospective bidders shall contact one of the following
listed authorized City representatives at least 12 hours in advance of the time they wish to go over the project.
Project Manager - Tim Kemp, Civil Engineer
Phone: (970) 416-2719
Cell Phone: (970) 219-9762
Project Engineer - Caleb Feaver, Civil Engineer
Cell Phone: (503) 477-0545
Project Inspector - Craig Farver, Senior Construction Inspector
Cell Phone: (970) 222-0854
The above referenced individuals are the only representatives of the City with authority to provide any
information, clarification, or interpretation regarding the plans, specifications, and any other contract documents
or requirements.
Questions received from bidders along with City responses will be posted as an addendum online at the City of
Fort Collins Buy Speed Webpage, www.fcgov.com/eprocurement as they become available.
All questions shall be directed to the City contacts listed above no later than 7:00 A.M. one week prior to the
bid opening.
Questions and answers shall be used for reference only and shall not be considered part of the Contract.
6
COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION OF WORK
The Contractor shall commence work under the Contract on or before the 10th day following the issuance of the
"Notice to Proceed." The Contractor shall complete all work in accordance with the Contract within one hundred-
eighty calendar days.
Section 108 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Stockpiling of materials before the beginning date is subject to the Engineer's approval. If such approval is given,
stockpiled material will be paid for in accordance with Sections l09 and 626.
Subsection 108.03 shall include the following:
The progress schedule shall consist of a Critical Path Method (CPM) schedule prepared using the Microsoft
Project software and submitted in hard and electronic formats.
The Contractor shall be responsible for planning, scheduling, coordinating, and reporting the progress of the work
to be completed by City of Fort Collins Forces. The City of Fort Collins Forces shall be considered as
subcontractor for the purposes of scheduling the work. The City will comment on the Contractors initial schedule
submittal for coordination of the completion of their work items.
Salient features to be shown on the Contractor's progress schedule are:
Mobilization
Construction Surveying (By City Forces)
Erosion Control
Construction Traffic Control
Removals and Adjustments
Roadway Earthwork
Drainage System
Curb, Gutter and Sidewalk
Asphalt Pavement
Concrete Pavement
Signing and Striping (By City Forces)
Traffic Signals and Controller Reset (By City Forces)
Utility Coordination and Relocations
Subsection 108.08 shall include the following:
Substantial Completion
o Substantial Completion is defined by:
Traffic is following the lane arrangements shown on the plans for finished roadway
All curb and gutter, pavement, joint sealing, median and island construction is complete
Traffic control devices and pavement markings are within their final positions.
Off-peak hour lane closures (9:30 AM to 11:30 AM and 1:30 PM to 3:30 PM) will be
permitted for minor work required to reach final completion.
o Substantial Completion will be completed within one hundred sixty-five (165) calendar days. In
accordance with the “Schedule of Liquidated Damages” in Section 108.09, Liquidated Damages
per Calendar Day will be $3,300.00 per day.
7
COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION OF WORK
Final Completion
o Final Completion is defined by:
All sidewalks, final grading, , clean up, project record documents shall be turned over to
the owner, all punch list items completed, and all processing of change orders.
The work must be ready for final payment and acceptance.
Off-peak hour lane closures (9:30 AM to 11:30 AM and 1:30 PM to 3:30 PM) will be
permitted for minor work required to reach final completion.
o Final completion will be within fifteen (15) calendar days of substantial completion date. In
accordance with the “Schedule of Liquidated Damages” in Section 108.09, Liquidated Damages
per Calendar Day will be $3,300.00 per day.
8
DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (DBE) CONTRACT GOAL
This is a federally-assisted construction project. As described in the CDOT DBE Standard Special Provision, the
Bidder shall make good faith efforts to meet the following contract goal:
9 Percent DBE participation.
9
OJT CONTRACT GOAL
The Department has determined that on-the-job training shall be provided to trainees with the goal of developing
full journey workers in the types of trade or classification involved. The contract goal for on-the-job trainees
working in an approved training plan in this Contract has been established as follows:
Minimum number of total On-the-Job training hours required 640 hours
10
REVISION OF SECTION 101
DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
Technical Specifications related to construction materials and methods for the work embraced under this Contract
shall consist of the “Colorado Department of Transportation, State of Colorado, Standard Specifications for Road
and Bridge Construction” dated 2011.
Certain terms utilized in the Specifications referred to in the paragraph above shall be interpreted to have different
meanings within the scope of this Contract. A summary of redefinitions follows:
Where reference is made in the plans and specifications to Owner, Department, Chief Engineer, Resident
Engineer, Project Engineer, Engineer, and Inspection and Testing Agency it is understood to mean the
City of Fort Collins, Colorado or the City’s representative.
Where reference is made in the plans and specifications to Surveyor it is understood to mean provided by
the City of Fort Collins with City of Fort Collins crews, but acting as a subcontractor to the project.
The sections shown on the following pages are revisions to the Technical Specifications for this project.
11
REVISION OF SECTION 102
PROJECT PLANS AND OTHER DATA
Section 102 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 102.05 shall include the following:
A copy of the bid may be obtained as follows:
1. Download the Proposal/Bid from the BuySpeed Webpage, www.fcgov.com/eprocurement
2. Come by Purchasing at 215 North Mason St. 2nd floor, Fort Collins, and request a copy of the Bid
The following supporting information is available:
Pavement Design Report, Horsetooth Road and Timberline Road Intersection Improvements, report by
RockSol Consulting Group, Inc., report dated January 2, 2014
Upon receiving Concurrence to Award from Colorado Department of Transportation, the low responsive,
responsible bidder may obtain from the City of Fort Collins at no cost;
3 sets of 11x17 plans, 1 full size set, and 3 sets of special provisions
12
REVISION OF SECTION 105
CONTROL OF WORK
Section 105 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 105.10 shall include:
Coordination with Property Owners and Tenants
The City of Fort Collins is committed to maintaining a positive working relationship with the businesses and
residents in the project area. Every effort will be made to maintain pedestrian and bicycle flow and to
accommodate special events and holidays for businesses, pedestrians, parking, and vehicle traffic. The Contractor
shall be responsible to coordinate all work activities with private property owners and tenants along the project
corridor. Access shall be maintained at all times. The Contractor shall be responsible for communicating
accurate scheduling information to the project team to assure proper notification of businesses and residents.
In particular, any proposed disruption or closure to an existing access must be communicated to the property
Owners and tenants with as much notice as possible. The minimum notice that will be allowed for any proposed
access change is 48 hours. The Contractor shall ensure that adequate alternate access is in place for vehicles and
pedestrians and any property-specific access needs are addressed prior to any change in existing access. The
Contractor shall coordinate his method of maintaining these accesses with the City of Fort Collins Traffic
Operations Department.
Coordination with Traffic Engineer and Traffic Control Supervisor
The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner’s Traffic Engineer for all traffic control activities. Requests for
initial Setup of the major project phases (road closures) must be made 3 weeks prior to projected set up. Allow up
to 5 days for advanced warning signs. Requests for flaggers must be made and updated at the weekly progress
meetings for the following week. Requests for minor traffic control set ups (lane drops, etc.) must be made 72
hours in advance of set up. Increased Traffic Control costs caused by delays assessed to the Contractor will be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
Delete subsection 105.12 and replace with the following:
The City, County, CDOT, and local utilities including but not limited to Xcel Energy and CenturyLink may
contract for and perform other or additional work on or near the Work of the project. When separate contracts are
let within the limits of the project, each Contractor shall conduct the Work without interfering or hindering the
progress or completion of the work performed by other contractors. Contractors working on the same project
shall cooperate with each other as directed.
City forces will perform the following work as required by this project:
Permanent Pavement Marking
Permanent Signing
Traffic Signals/Fiber Optic Lines
Street Lights
13
REVISION OF SECTION 105
CONTROL OF WORK
Traffic Coordination
1. The Contractor shall coordinate with the City Traffic Engineer for all traffic control activities.
This shall include, but not be limited to, closure of any City Streets, closure of any partial intersection
movements, lane reductions, and detours.
City Traffic Control Contact: Syl Mireles
Phone: (970)221-6815
Email: smireles@fcgov.com
2. The City will remove existing and install all new traffic signal equipment.
City Traffic Signal Contact: Britney Sorenson
Phone: 970-222-5533
Email: bsorenson@fcgov.com
3. The Contractor shall coordinate with the City Traffic Engineer to schedule the traffic signal work/fiber
optic line relocation in conjunction with other project activities taking into account time needed for
order and delivery of materials. The Contractor shall cooperate with the City Traffic Department in
their removal and installation operations so that progress is expedited, duplication of work is
minimized, and impacts to traffic are minimized.
4. The City will remove and install all permanent signing. The City will install all permanent
pavement markings.
City Signing and Striping Contact: Rich Brewbaker
Phone: 970-221-6792
Email:
rbrewbaker@fcgov.com
5. The Contractor is responsible for removal of pavement markings and installation and maintenance of
temporary pavement markings necessary to control traffic during construction.
This work will not be paid separately, but shall be included in Construction Traffic Control, Lump
Sum. The Contractor shall coordinate with the City Traffic Engineer to schedule permanent signing and
striping work in conjunction with other project activities. Full-compliance pavement markings in
accordance with Section 627 shall be in place prior to opening the roadway to traffic. The Contractor
shall cooperate with the City Traffic Department in their removal and installation operations so that
progress is expedited, duplication of work is minimized, and impacts to traffic are minimized.
Street Light Coordination
1. City Light and Power Crews will remove and install all street lighting and associated electric
utilities for the project.
City Survey Contact: Justin Fields
Phone: (970) 221-6700
Email: jfields@fcgov.com
2. The Contractor shall cooperate with the City Light and Power Department in their removal and
installation operations so that progress is expedited, duplication of work is minimized, and impacts to
traffic are minimized. Refer to Utility specification for additional information.
Each Contractor involved shall assume all liability, financial or otherwise, in connection with the Contract and
shall protect and save harmless the Owner from any and all damages or claims that may arise because of
inconvenience, delay , or loss because of the presence and operations of Contractors working within the limits
of the same or adjacent project.
Contractor is responsible to coordinate with private utilities. Any work to be performed by private utilities
shall be identified in Contractor’s schedule. Delays due to coordination issues will be the responsibility of the
contractor.
14
REVISION OF SECTION 105
CONTROL OF WORK
Subsection 105.13 shall include:
Surveying Coordination
A. The Owner will provide construction surveying for the project. City Survey Crews will perform the
surveying required.
B. The Contractor must submit a survey request form to the City Surveyors a minimum of 72 hours prior to
needing surveying.
C. If the requested surveying cannot be accomplished in the time frame requested by the Contractor, the survey
personnel shall notify the Contractor with the date on which the requested work will be completed.
D. Should a sudden change in the Contractor’s operations or schedule require the survey personnel to work
overtime, the Contractor shall pay the additional overtime expense.
E. The Contractor shall protect all survey monuments and construction stakes. If it is unavoidable to remove a
survey monument or construction stakes, the Contractor is responsible for notifying the Surveyor and
allowing enough time for the monuments or stakes to be relocated. The Contractor will be responsible for the
cost of restaking construction stakes and for the cost of re-establishing a destroyed monument.
F. The Contractor shall be responsible for transferring the information from the construction staked to any
necessary forms and for constructing all pipelines, drainage ways, pavements, inlets, walls, and other
structures in accordance with the information on the stakes and grade sheets supplied by the Owner.
15
REVISION OF SECTION 105
CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENT
Section 105 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsections 105.22, 105.23 and 105.24 shall be revised as follows:
The Colorado Department of Transportation will not participate in the resolution process for any claims filed by
the Contractor.
16
REVISION OF SECTION 106
CONTROL OF MATERIAL
Section 106 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 106.01 shall include:
Substitutions and Product Options
A. Description:
1. This section describes the procedure required by the Contractor for product substitutions.
2. Requests for Substitution:
a. Base all bids on materials, equipment and procedures specified.
b. Certain types of equipment and kinds of material are described in specifications by means of trade
names and catalog numbers, and/or manufacturer’s names. Where this occurs, it is not intended to
exclude from consideration such types of equipment and kinds of material bearing other trade names,
catalog numbers and/or manufacturer’s names, capable of accomplishing purpose of types of
equipment or kinds of material specifically indicated.
c. Other types of equipment and kinds of material may be acceptable to the Owner and Engineer.
d. Types of equipment, kinds of material and methods of construction, if not specifically indicated must
be approved in writing by Engineer and the Owner.
3. Submission of Requests for Substitution:
a. After Notice to Proceed, the Owner / Engineer will consider written requests for substitutions of
products, materials, systems or other items.
b. The Engineer reserves the right to require substitute items to comply color and pattern-wise with base
specified items, if necessary to secure “design intent”.
c. Submit six (6) copies of request for substitution. Include in request:
1) Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitute with Contract Documents.
2) For products:
i. Product identification, including manufacturer’s name.
ii. Manufacturer’s literature, marked to indicate specific model, type, size, and options to be
considered: Product description; performance and test data; reference standards; difference in
power demand; dimensional differences for specified unit.
iii. Name and address of similar projects on which product were used date of installation and
field performance data.
17
REVISION OF SECTION 106
CONTROL OF MATERIAL
3) For construction methods:
i. Detailed description of proposed method.
ii. Drawings illustrating methods.
4) Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method specified.
5) Data relating to changes in construction schedule.
6) Relation to separate contracts.
7) Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product or method specified.
d. In making request for substitution, or in using an approved substitute item, Supplier / Manufacturer
represents:
1) He has personally investigated proposed product or method, and has determined that it is equal or
superior in all respects to that specified and that it will perform function for which it is intended.
2) He will provide same guarantee for substitute item as for product or method specified.
3) He will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into work, to include building
modifications if necessary, making such changes as may be required for work to be complete in
all aspects.
4) He waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution which subsequently become
apparent.
4. Substitutions: Request sufficiently in advance to avoid delay in construction.
5. Contractor’s Option:
a. For products specified only by reference standards, select any product meeting standards by any
manufacturer indicate selected type in submission.
b. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any product and
manufacturer named, indicate selected type in submission.
c. For products specified by naming one or more products, but indicating option of selecting equivalent
products by stating “or equivalent” after specified product, Contractor must submit request, as
required for substitution, for any product not specifically named.
6. Rejection of Substitution or Optional Item: Substitutions and/or options will not be considered if they are
indicated or implied on shop drawings, or project data submittals, without formal request submitted in
accordance with this section.
18
REVISION OF SECTION 106
CONTROL OF MATERIAL
Add subsection 106.14 as follows:
106.14 Quality Control For Warranted Hot Mix Asphalt and Concrete Pavements
Quality Control (QC) is the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall establish and maintain
all necessary inspection and materials testing procedures to assure the quality of work and the completed
pavement.
The Contractor's QC Manager is responsible for compliance with the quality requirements specified in the
Contract and the Contractor's approved QC plan (QCP). The QC Manager shall not be the Contractor's
Superintendent.
The Contractor shall make provisions such that the Engineer can inspect QC work in progress, including
sampling, testing, plants, and the Contractor's testing facilities at any time.
A. Quality Control Plan (QCP). The Contractor shall submit a written QCP to the Engineer at least two weeks
prior to the beginning of work that is controlled by the QCP. The QCP shall list all inspection and
materials testing procedures utilized by the Contractor to ensure that the work conforms to contract
requirements.
The QCP shall address the following:
1. The name, qualifications, duties, responsibilities and authorities of each person assigned a QC
function.
The QC Manager shall be the person responsible for the process control sampling and testing. This
person must possess at least one of the following qualifications:
a. Registration as a Professional Engineer in the State of Colorado.
b. Level II A, B, and C certifications from the Laboratory Certification for Asphalt Technicians
(LABCAT).
Technician Qualifications. Technicians taking samples and performing tests must possess the
following qualifications:
a. Technicians taking samples and conducting compaction tests must have Level II A
certification from the Laboratory Certification for Asphalt Technicians (LABCAT).
b. Technicians conducting process control tests must have Level II B certification from the
Laboratory Certification for Asphalt Technicians (LABCAT).
c. Technicians determining asphalt mixture volumetrics and strength characteristics must have Level
II C certification from the Laboratory Certification for Asphalt Technicians (LABCAT).
2. A description of the responsibilities and authority, and a resume of experience, of the QC
Manager.
3. Materials testing schedule, showing sampling and testing procedures and frequencies.
19
REVISION OF SECTION 106
CONTROL OF MATERIAL
4. The standards to which the pavement is to be constructed, such as: in place density, asphalt content, voids
criteria, gradation, or all other criterion the Contractor intends to use to maintain the quality of the work.
5. Reporting procedures, including proposed reporting formats for materials sampling, testing, and inspection
for all phases of the work.
6. Names of testing and engineering firms to be used, if any, with licenses as appropriate.
7. Procedures for identifying, evaluating, and reporting non-conformance discovered during QC inspections and
testing.
8. Provisions for increased frequencies of inspection and testing when work does not conform to the standards
set for the construction.
B. Documentation. The Contractor shall maintain current records of quality control operations activities, and
tests performed including the work of vendors and subcontractors. These records shall be in the form
shown in the QCP and shall indicate, as a minimum, the subcontractor, if any, the number of personnel
working, the weather conditions encountered, delays encountered, locations corresponding to project
stationing as shown on the plans, and acknowledgment of deficiencies noted along with the corrective
actions taken on deficiencies. These records shall include factual evidence that required activities or tests
have been performed, including but not limited to the following:
1. Type and number of quality control activities and tests involved.
2. Results of quality control activities or tests.
3. Nature of defects, causes for rejection, etc.
4. Proposed remedial action.
5. Corrective actions taken.
Such records shall cover both conforming and defective or deficient features and shall include a
statement that work and materials incorporated in the project comply with this Contract. Copies of these
records shall be reviewed by the QC Manager and submitted to the Engineer prior to payment for
the work.
C. Frequency. QC inspection and testing at all intervals of work shall be performed at the frequencies in the
accepted QCP.
D. Certification. Prior to acceptance of the project, the Contractor's QC Manager shall certify, in writing, that
all work and materials incorporated into the project meet the requirements of the Contract.
20
REVISION OF SECTION 107
INSURANCE
Section 107.18 is hereby revised to read:
For this project all insurance certificates shall name the City of Fort Collins and the Colorado Department of
Transportation as an additionally insured party.
21
REVISION OF SECTION 107
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
Section 107 of the Standard Specifications is hereby modified to include the following:
Environmental Controls
The work of this section consists of obtaining permits and providing environmental controls consistent with
regulatory permits through the duration of the work required under this project.
A. Dust Control Application:
1. The Contractor shall execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations.
2. The Contractor shall provide and apply dust control at all times, including evenings, holidays and
weekends, as required to abate dust nuisance on and about the site that is a direct result of construction
activities. The use of non-approved chemicals, oil, or similar palliatives will not be allowed. Dust
control agents may be used only after prior approval of the Owner. The Contractor shall be required to
provide sufficient quantities of equipment and personnel for dust control sufficient to prevent dust
nuisance on and about the site.
3. The Owner will have authority to order dust control work whenever in its opinion it is required, and there
shall be no additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall be expected to maintain dust control
measures effectively whether the Owner or Engineer specifically orders such Work.
B. Preservation of Natural Features: Confine operations as much as possible. Exercise special care to maintain
natural surroundings in an undamaged condition. Within the work limits, barricade trees and natural features
to be preserved.
C. Housekeeping: Keep project neat, orderly, and in a safe condition at all times. Store and use equipment,
tools, and materials in a manner that does not present a hazard. Immediately remove all rubbish. Do not
allow rubbish to accumulate. Provide on-site containers for collection of rubbish and dispose of it at frequent
intervals during progress of work.
D. Disposal
1. Disposal of Waste (Unsuitable) Materials: All material determined by the Engineer to be waste will be
disposed of in approved landfill in a manner meeting all regulations. Dispose of waste materials, legally,
at public or private dumping areas. Do not bury wastes inside of the limits of construction. All costs for
dump fees, permits, etc., shall be borne by the Contractor.
2. Disposal of Garbage and Other Construction Materials: Provide sanitary containers/dumpsters and haul
away contents such that no overflow exists.
3. Excess excavation shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be legally disposed of by him
outside the limits of construction to an approved disposal site. Excess excavated material suitable for
backfill shall not be disposed of until all backfill operations are complete.
4. The Contractor is to immediately inform Engineer of any hazardous materials encountered during
construction. Dispose of waste materials legally at private or public facilities.
E. Burning: No burning of debris will be permitted.
22
REVISION OF SECTION 107
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
F. Noise Control: All mechanical equipment shall be equipped with the best available mufflers to reduce noise.
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining any necessary permits and shall limit noise to the permitted
levels. Noise level monitoring shall be performed by the Contractor as necessary to show that the permitted
levels are not being exceeded.
Permission from Owner must be obtained prior to the operation of any machinery and/or vehicles between the
hours of 6 p.m. and 7 a.m.
G. Erosion and Sediment Control: It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to prepare and obtain an
approved Erosion and Sediment Control Plan from the Owner.
H. Permits:
1. All work must be performed in accordance with all applicable regulatory permits.
2. It shall be the responsibility of the Owner to prepare a Stormwater Management Plan (SWMP), and
submit the SWMP to the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment for review and
approval. The SWMP shall be transferred to the Contractor’s possession prior to beginning the Work.
The Contractor shall also provide inspection reports as required by the SWMP to the Owner upon
completion of each inspection.
3. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all other necessary permits associated with the Work.
23
REVISION OF SECTION 107
LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITY TO PUBLIC
Section 107 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 107.25 shall include the following:
This work consists of the proper treatment and disposal of ground water collected from dewatering operations
during excavation activities.
The Contractor shall obtain a construction dewatering permit from the Colorado Department of Public Health and
Environment (CDPHE). A completed application must be submitted to CDPHE at least 30 days prior to
dewatering operations. Dewatering operations shall be conducted in a manner that avoids pollution and erosion.
Water from dewatering operations shall not be directly discharged into any state waters including wetlands,
irrigation ditches, canals, or storm sewers, unless allowed by a permit. Discharge into sanitary sewers will not be
allowed unless written permission is obtained from the owner or controlling authority and a copy of this approval
is submitted to the Engineer. Unless prohibited by law or otherwise specified in the Contract, the water from
dewatering operations shall be contained in basins for dissipation by infiltration or evaporation, shall be hauled
away from the project for disposal in accordance with applicable laws and regulations, or shall be land applied to
approved non-wetland vegetated areas.
Depending upon the quality of the water, land application of water to vegetated areas may require a written
concurrence or permit from CDPHE and from the owner of the facility. Based on guidelines and criteria from
CDPHE, the Contractor shall determine the quality of the water, obtain applicable concurrences or permits, and
furnish copies of the concurrences or permits obtained to the Engineer.
24
REVISION OF SECTION 108
PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS
Section 108 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised as follows:
Subsection 108.03 shall include the following:
Project Meetings
A. Pre-Construction Conference: A Pre-Construction Conference will be held after Notice of Award and before
the Notice to Proceed, the date, time and location will be determined after Notice of Award.
The conference shall be attended by:
1. Contractor and Contractor’s Superintendent
2. Contractor’s Subcontractors (including the city provided Surveyor)
3. Engineer
4. Owner
5. Utility Companies
6. Others as requested by the Contractor, Owner, or Engineer.
Unless previously submitted to the Owner, the Contractor shall bring to the conference a tentative schedule of
the construction project, include in the schedule shop drawings and other submittals. Any submittals
requiring long lead times and therefore must be expedited shall be submitted at the pre-construction
conference, or as soon thereafter as possible.
The purpose of the conference is to designate responsible personnel and establish a working relationship.
Matters requiring coordination will be discussed and procedures for handling such matters established. The
agenda will include:
1. Contractor’s tentative Schedule
2. Permit applications and submittals, including Dewatering Permit, Erosion and Sediment Control
Plan, and Traffic Control Plan
3. Transmittal, review and distribution of Contractor’s submittals
4. Processing applications for payment
5. Maintaining record documents
6. Critical work sequencing
7. Field decision and change orders
8. Use of premises, office and storage areas, staging area, security, housekeeping, and Owner’s needs
9. Contractor’s assignment of safety and first aid
B. Construction Progress Meetings for the Federal Aid Project No. AQC M455-010 (19307): Progress meetings
will be conducted weekly or at some other frequency, if approved by the Engineer. These meetings shall be
attended by the Owner, the Engineer, the Contractor’s representative and any others invited by these people.
The Engineer will conduct the meeting and the Engineer will arrange for keeping the minutes and distributing
the minutes to all persons in attendance.
The agenda of these project meetings will include construction progress, the status of submittal reviews, and
the status of information requests, critical work sequencing, review of strategies for connections into existing
facilities, status of field orders and change orders, and any general business.
The Contractor will prepare a “two week look ahead” schedule to facilitate coordination of work items.
25
REVISION OF SECTION 108
PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS
Modifications to Time of Completion in the Approved Schedule
The date of beginning and the time for completion of the work are essential conditions of the Contract Documents
and the work embraced shall be commenced on a date specified in the Notice to Proceed.
The Contractor will proceed with the work at such rate of progress to ensure full completion within the contract
time. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between the Contractor and the Owner that the contract time
for the completion of the work described herein is a reasonable time, taking into consideration the climatic and
other factors prevailing in the locality of the work.
Every effort shall be made by the Contractor to complete the project within the "Contract Time" shown in the
proposal. The "Contract Time" anticipates "Normal" weather and climate conditions in and around the vicinity of
the Project site during the times of year that the construction will be carried out. Extensions of time based upon
weather conditions shall be granted only if the Contractor demonstrates clearly that such conditions were
"unusually severe," would not have been reasonably anticipated, and that such conditions adversely affected the
Contractor’s work and thus required additional time to complete the work.
The following specifies the procedure for the determination of time extensions for unusually severe weather. The
listing below defines the anticipated number of calendar days lost to adverse weather for each month and is based
upon National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) or similar data for the geographic location of
the project.
Monthly Anticipated Calendar Days Lost to Adverse Weather Conditions
JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC
(7) (4) (4) (4) (6) (3) (4) (2) (3) (3) (2) (5)
The above schedule of anticipated adverse weather will constitute the base line for monthly (or portion thereof)
weather time evaluations. Upon acknowledgment of the Notice to Proceed and continuing throughout the
contract on a monthly basis, actual adverse weather days and the impact of adverse weather days that delay the
work will be recorded on a day-to-day basis. It is assumed that the work will be carried out Mondays through
Fridays (holidays accepted) unless an approved construction schedule or written authorization from the Owner
indicates otherwise. The number of days of delayed work due to adverse weather or the impact thereof will then
be compared to the monthly adverse weather schedule above.
An actual adverse weather day must prevent work for 50 percent or more of the Contractor’s workday, delay work
critical to the timely completion of the project, and be documented by the Contractor. The City Representative
observing the construction shall determine on a daily basis whether or not work can proceed or if work is delayed
due to adverse weather or the effects thereof. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of any
disagreement as to whether or not work can proceed on a given date, within 2 calendar days of that date. The
Owner will use the above written notification in determining the number of calendar days for which work was
delayed during each month.
At the end of each month, if the number of work days for which work was delayed due to adverse weather
exceeds that shown in the above schedule, a Change Order will be executed which increases the Contract Time.
The number of work days delayed due to adverse weather or the impact thereof will then be converted to Calendar
Days based on the contract completion day and date. This conversion assumes a 5-day work week, Mondays
through Fridays, holidays excepted; should the Contractor have authorization to work weekends and/or holidays,
and then the method of conversion of workdays to calendar days would take this into consideration. The contract
time period will then be increased by the number of calendar days calculated above and a new contract
completion day and date will be set.
26
REVISION OF SECTION 108
PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS
The Contractor’s schedule must reflect the above-anticipated adverse weather delays on all weather-dependent
activities.
While extensions of time shall be granted for "unusually severe" weather or climate conditions, the Owner shall
make no monetary compensation for any costs to the Contractor arising out of such delays. The Contractor shall
comply with the portions of the Contract Documents relating to his project schedule and amendments thereto
which result from the "unusually severe" weather condition.
Breakdowns in equipment or lack of performance by the Contractor will not be considered justification for an
extension of time. Liquidated damages will be assessed as delineated elsewhere.
The Contractor shall not be charged with liquidated damages or any excess cost when the delay in completion of
the work is due to the following, and the Contractor has promptly given written notice of such delay to the Owner
or Engineer.
1. To any preference, priority, or allocation order duly issued by the Owner.
2. To unforeseeable causes beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor,
including but not restricted to, acts of God, or of the public enemy, acts of the Owner, acts of another
Contractor in the performance of a contract with the Owner, fires, floods, epidemics, quarantine
restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes, and abnormal and unforeseeable weather as provided above.
3. To any delays of Subcontractors occasioned by any of the causes specified in paragraphs 1 and 2, above.
27
REVISION OF SECTION 108
LIMITATION OF OPERATIONS
Section 108 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised as follows:
Subsection 108.05 shall include the following:
Work Hours: Work hours are 7 AM to 6 PM, Monday through Friday. Extended hours and weekend work are
anticipated and will be permitted with written approval from the Project Manager. Night time work shall be
permitted with written approval from Project Manager. Work shall be permitted on holidays with written
approval from the Project Manager. Work requests beyond working hours must be submitted to the Project
Manager a minimum of (5) working days prior to the request date.
Night and weekend work will be allowed with 5 days prior notice to the Project Manager. All costs associated
with nighttime work will be incidental to the work.
Demolition work will not be permitted before 7 AM or after 6 PM.
28
REVISION OF SECTION 201
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
Section 201 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 201.02 shall include the following:
Ralph Zentz, Assistant City Forester (970-221-6302), shall be responsible for identifying the removal of tree
branches, stumps, shrubs and/or other plant materials beyond those trees identified in the removal plans for
removal and/or transplant. Coordinate with the Assistant City Forester to have tree branches, stumps, shrubs, and
other plant materials marked for removal.
Clearing and grubbing shall include the removal of trees less than six (6) inches in diameter, bushes and shrubs as
identified by the Engineer or the Assistant City Forester to be either removed or trimmed. All removed debris
shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the project site, not buried on-site.
Subsection 201.04 shall include the following:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Clearing and Grubbing Lump Sum
29
REVISION OF SECTION 202
REMOVAL OF INLET
Section 202 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 202.01 shall include the following:
This work includes removal and disposal of existing concrete inlet within the project limits as shown on the plans
or at locations directed by the Engineer.
In Subsection 202.02 delete the seventh paragraph and replace with the following:
The inlet shall be removed in a manner that minimizes disturbance to the surrounding area. All removed inlet
materials shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of outside the project site legally.
Subsection 202.11 shall include the following:
The removal of the existing concrete inlet will be measured by the number of inlets removed, and accepted.
Location of sawcutting shall be as directed by the Engineer. Sawcutting, excavation and backfilling will not be
paid separately and shall be included in the cost for removal of inlet.
Subsection 202.12 shall include the following:
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Removal of Inlet Each
Work shall include all material, equipment, labor, and disposal of materials to complete the work.
30
REVISION OF SECTION 202
REMOVAL OF PIPE
Section 202 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 202.01 shall include the following:
This work includes removal and disposal of existing pipe within the project limits as shown on the plans or at
locations directed by the Engineer.
In Subsection 202.02 delete the seventh paragraph and replace with the following:
The removed pipe shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of outside the project site
legally.
Subsection 202.11 shall include the following:
The removal of the existing pipe will be measured by the linear foot of pipe removed, and accepted.
Excavation and backfilling will not be paid separately and shall be included in the cost for removal of pipe.
Subsection 202.12 shall include the following:
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Removal of Pipe Linear Foot
Work shall include all material, equipment, labor, and disposal of materials to complete the work.
31
REVISION OF SECTION 202
REMOVAL OF SIDEWALK
Section 202 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 202.01 shall include the following:
This work includes removal and disposal of existing sidewalk within the project limits as shown on the plans or at
locations directed by the Engineer. This item includes the removal of the existing concrete drain and sidewalk
drain as shown on the plans.
In subsection 202.02 delete the seventh paragraph and replace with the following:
The existing sidewalk (assumed 4-6 inches thick) shall be removed in a manner that minimizes contamination of
the removed sidewalk with underlying material. The removed sidewalk shall become the property of the
Contractor and shall be disposed of outside the project site legally. The Contractor may dispose the removed
sidewalk at the City of Fort Collins Recycling Center at 1380 Hoffman Mill Road. It is the responsibility of the
Contractor to be familiar with acceptable disposal specifications of the City Recycling Center.
Subsection 202.11 shall include the following:
The removal of the existing sidewalk will be measured by the square yard of sidewalk removed to the required
depth, and accepted.
Sawcutting will not be paid separately and shall be included in the cost for removal of sidewalk.
Subsection 202.12 shall include the following:
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Removal of Sidewalk Square Yard
Work shall include all material, equipment, labor, and disposal of materials, including hauling, to complete the
work.
32
REVISION OF SECTION 202
REMOVAL OF CURB AND GUTTER AND MEDIAN COVER
Section 202 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 202.01 shall include the following:
This work includes removal and disposal of existing curb and gutter and median cover within the project limits as
shown on the plans or at locations directed by the Engineer.
In subsection 202.02 delete the seventh paragraph and replace with the following:
The removed curb and gutter shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of outside the
project site legally. The Contractor may dispose the removed curb and median cover at the City of Fort Collins
Recycling Center at 1380 Hoffman Mill Road. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to be familiar with
acceptable disposal specifications of the City Recycling Center.
Subsection 202.11 shall include the following:
The removal of the existing curb and gutter will be measured by the linear foot of curb and gutter removed, and
accepted. The removal of existing median cover will be measured by the square yard removed and accepted.
Sawcutting will not be paid separately and shall be included in the cost for removal of curb and median cover.
Subsection 202.12 shall include the following:
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Removal of Curb and Gutter Linear Foot
Removal of Median Cover Square Yard
Work shall include all material, equipment, labor, and disposal of materials, including hauling, to complete the
work.
33
REVISION OF SECTION 202
REMOVAL OF CONCRETE PAVEMENT
Section 202 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 202.01 shall include the following:
This work includes removal and disposal of existing concrete pavement within the project limits as shown on the
plans or at locations directed by the Engineer.
In Subsection 202.02 delete the seventh paragraph and replace with the following:
The existing concrete pavement (assumed 9 inches thick) shall be removed in a manner that minimizes
contamination of the removed pavement with underlying material. The removed pavement shall become the
property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of outside the project site legally. The Contractor may dispose
the removed pavement at the City of Fort Collins Recycling Center at 1380 Hoffman Mill Road. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor to be familiar with acceptable disposal specifications of the City Recycling
Center.
Subsection 202.11 shall include the following:
The removal of the existing concrete pavement will be measured by the square yard of pavement removed to the
required depth, and accepted.
Location of sawcutting shall be as directed by the Engineer. Sawcutting will not be paid separately and shall be
included in the cost for removal of concrete pavement.
Subsection 202.12 shall include the following:
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Removal of Concrete Pavement Square Yard
Work shall include all material, equipment, labor, and disposal of materials, including hauling, to complete the
work.
34
REVISION OF SECTION 202
REMOVAL OF ASPHALT MAT
Section 202 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 202.01 shall include the following:
This work includes removal and disposal of existing asphalt mat within the project limits as shown on the plans or
at locations directed by the Engineer.
In Subsection 202.02 delete the seventh paragraph and replace with the following:
The existing asphalt mat (assumed 10 inches thick) shall be removed in a manner that minimizes contamination of
the removed asphalt with underlying material. The removed mat shall become the property of the City and be
disposed of by any one or more of the following described methods:
1. Place material in bottom of fills as approved by the Engineer.
2. Haul offsite to City of Fort Collins Recycling Center at:
1380 Hoffman Mill Road
Fort Collins, Colorado
(970)482-1249
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to be familiar with acceptable disposal specifications of the City
Recycling Center.
Subsection 202.09 shall include the following:
Removal of Asphalt Mat will be full depth asphalt removal.
Asphalt planing will be variable depth milling from 0 to 3 inches in depth.
Subsection 202.11 shall include the following:
The removal of the existing asphalt mat will be measured by the square yard of mat removed, and accepted.
Location of sawcutting shall be as directed by the Engineer. Sawcutting will not be paid separately and shall be
included in the cost for removal of asphalt mat.
Subsection 202.12 shall include the following:
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Removal of Asphalt Mat Square Yard
Removal of Asphalt Mat (Planing) Square Yard
Work shall include all material, equipment, labor, and disposal of materials, including hauling, to complete the
work.
35
REVISION OF SECTION 207
TOPSOIL (SPECIAL)
Section 207 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 207.01 shall be revised to include the following:
The Contractor will have the option to either purchase amended topsoil that meets the following requirements or
mix the existing material on-site to meet the requirements. If mixed on site, this work shall consist of using the
onsite stockpiled topsoil and mixing with the required imported soil amending material to produce the standard
75/25 topsoil mix material. This material shall be placed in the designated landscape medians and parkway areas
indicated on the plans.
Subsection 207.02 shall include the following:
Topsoil for this project shall consist of loose friable loam amended with organic enhancements.
A. Amended Topsoil Onsite shall have the following characteristics:
Shall have a range of three to four percent organic matter as determined by the ignition of moisture free
sample dried to determine loss in accordance with current methods of the Association of Official Agriculture
Chemists.
Shall have a pH between 6.5 to 8.0.
Sodium Absorption Rate (SAR) and Electrical Conductivity (EC) readings are not to exceed three
mmhos/cm.
Particle Sizes: Topsoil shall be loam to sandy loam.
Must be weed free at the time of spreading operations. This can be achieved by following subsection 217.03
B. Soil Amendment:
Onsite amended topsoil - Material brought to the site for amendment process shall meet the amendments at
the following rate:
3 cubic yards per 1,000 square feet of organic amendment
The organic amendment shall include the following:
An organic product containing a mixture of composted cow or sheep manure and wood residue that has been
aerobically and naturally processed in such a manner as to maintain a consistent temperature of 60 degrees
Celsius (140 degrees Fahrenheit) or greater for a period of time that is long enough to accomplish the
following specifications:
1. The windrows of composted organic amendment (cow or sheep manure) have to be composted for 70 to
90 days. Certification must be provided to prove the product has gone through this process.
2. Eradicate harmful pathogens, including coliform bacteria.
3. Create a carbon to nitrogen ratio of no less than 15/1 to 25/1
4. Contain no solid particle greater than ½ inch in diameter.
5. Have a non-offensive smell similar to fresh turned soil.
6. Contain no significant level of dirt or soil and contain a maximum of 30 percent composted wood residue
(pine or aspen wood).
The ph after composting shall be between 5.0 and 7.5 with an organic matter content of no less than 30
percent. The Contractor shall submit a 2 lb. Sample of the product four weeks before its use on the project
36
REVISION OF SECTION 207
TOPSOIL (SPECIAL)
site revision for the Engineer’s approval. A Certificate of Compliance shall be provided to the Engineer to
verify the organic matter content, pH and carbon matter to nitrogen ratio.
The Contractor shall submit two samples of topsoil to a soils laboratory for analysis. The cost of the test shall
be at the Contractor’s expense. The results will be submitted to the Engineer for review at least 60 days prior
to placement. Based on the results, the Engineer can request soil amendments appropriate to have topsoil
conform to these specifications at no cost to the project. The organic amendment shall be an organic product
containing a mixture of composted cow or sheep manure and wood residue that has been aerobically and
naturally processed in such a manner as to maintain a consistent temperature of 140 degrees. Fahrenheit or
greater for a period of time of 70 to 90 days, and be approved by the Engineer.
Subsection 207.03 shall include the following:
All areas planted behind the curb (parkway area) shall have the top 8 inches of soil tilled. Upon completion
of tilling, the Contractor shall disk soil so as to break up all dirt clods to a size of two inches or smaller.
Topsoil placement shall occur immediately after disking is complete. All areas shall be seeded or temporarily
stabilized within seven calendar days after topsoil placement is completed.
Spread topsoil over all areas to be planted with shrubs, to a depth of three inches. Begin placement after all
rough grading, tilling, and disking operations are complete.
Ten days before notice to proceed, Contractor shall submit a weed mitigation plan t the Engineer for approval.
This plan shall include a graphic time line showing milestone and completion dates of herbicide treatment,
topsoil stockpiling, topsoil spreading and all seeding and planting times.
Delete Subsection 207.04 and replace with the following:
Topsoil salvaged from the roadway placed in stockpile shall paid by the cubic yard per plan quantity as Stockpile
Topsoil.
Topsoil special shall be measured in place by measuring random depths of topsoil, and computing the volume by
multiplying the area times the average depth. Topsoil special includes the amended material secured from a
source outside the right-of-way, mixing the stockpiled topsoil material with the amended material to meet the
requirements for an approved 75/25 mix, and placing in the designated areas.
Subsection 207.05 shall include the following:
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Topsoil (Special) Cubic Yard
Tilling and disking operations will not be paid for separately, but shall be included in the work. Organic
amendment will not be paid for separately but shall also be included in the work.
37
REVISION OF SECTION 208
EROSION CONTROL
Section 208 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Section 208.01 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project to include the following:
Any loss of time or materials related to erosion shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Any damage to
surrounding properties or facilities (either on site or off site) related to erosion caused by construction of this
project, will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
Subsection 208.05 shall include the following:
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all roadways near the project are kept clean of
construction debris.
Section 208.12 shall include the following:
All erosion control measures identified in the Contract and as directed by the Project Manager will not be
measured and paid for separately but will be the plan quantities. The unit cost price bid will be full compensation
for all work required to complete the item.
38
REVISION OF SECTION 210
RESET WATER METER
Section 210 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 210.02 shall include the following:
Reseet Water Meter consists of removing the existing water meter pit, curb stop, and other necessary water
improvements and resetting to a new location as shown on the plans or as directed by the City of Fort Collins
project representative. Contractor shall plan to replace existing water service improvements with new materials
meeting the requirements of the current City of Fort Collins Water Utility Standard Construction Specifications.
Contractor shall coordinate with the City’s Meter Shop on relocation work. Cavities left by the removal of the
structure shall be filled to the level of the surrounding ground with suitable material and shall be compacted in
accordance with subsection 203.06. The Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate with the property owner and
the City of Fort Collins Water Utility Department when shutting off water to minimize downtime to customers.
Subsection 210.12 shall include the following:
Reset Water Meter will be measured by the actual number reset and shall include all work and materials necessary
to remove items from their existing location and reset them at the new location and to install the new water meter.
Subsection 210.13 shall include the following:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Reset Water Meter Each
All work necessary to reset the water meter, curb stop, and other water service improvements, including materials,
labor, backfill, sawcutting of existing improvements, shall be incidental to the line item.
39
REVISION OF SECTION 210
RESET FIRE HYDRANT
Section 210 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 210.02 shall include the following:
Reset Fire Hydrant consists of removing the existing fire hydrant assembly and installing a new fire hydrant
assembly at the location shown on the plans or as directed by the City of Fort Collins project representative.
Contractor shall plan to replace existing hydrant materials with new materials meeting the requirements of the
current City of Fort Collins Water Utility Standard Construction Specifications. Work includes removing the
watervalve and installing a blind flange at the existing tee. Work includes installing a new 6” stainless steel
taping saddle to the existing 8” pvc main, installing a 6” pvc (C-900) to the new hydrant location, installing a new
hydrant assembly, and backfilling with flowable fill concrete.
The Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate with the property owner and the City of Fort Collins Water Utility
Department when shutting off water to minimize downtime to customers.
Subsection 210.12 shall include the following:
Reset Fire Hydrant will be measured by the actual number reset and shall include all work and materials necessary
to remove items from their existing location and reset them at the new location and to install the new water meter.
Subsection 210.13 shall include the following:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Reset Fire Hydrant Each
40
REVISION OF SECTION 210
MODIFY MANHOLE
Section 210 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 210.02 shall include the following:
Modify Manhole shall include all work necessary to remove the existing pipe connection and connect the
proposed pipe.
Subsection 210.12 shall include the following:
Modify Manhole will be measured by the actual number modified and shall include all work and materials
necessary to modify the manhole.
Subsection 210.13 shall include the following:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Modify Manhole Each
Structure excavation and structure backfill required for "Modify Manhole" will not be measured and paid for
separately but shall be included in the work. Reinforcing steel, structural concrete, manhole rings and covers, as
well as all other materials required to complete the item shall be included in the work.
41
REVISION OF SECTION 210
MODIFY STRUCTURE
Section 210 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 210.02 shall include the following:
Modify Structure consists of modifying the manhole and lid for the existing vault as shown on the plans according
to the requirements of the current Fort Collins Light & Power Construction Specifications.
Subsection 210.12 shall include the following:
Modify Structure will be measured by the actual number modified and shall include all work and materials
necessary to modify the vault.
Subsection 210.13 shall include the following:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Modify Structure Each
Reinforcing steel, structural concrete, manhole rings and covers, as well as all other materials required to
complete the item shall be included in the work.
42
REVISION OF SECTION 212
TREE RETENTION AND PROTECTION
Section 212 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 212.01 shall include the following:
Tree Retention and protection includes general protection and pruning of existing trees and plants that are affected
by execution of the Work, whether temporary or permanent construction. The following definitions apply:
1) Caliper: Diameter of a trunk measured by a diameter tape or the average of the smallest and largest
diameters at 6 inches above the ground for trees up to, and including, 4-inch size; and 12 inches
above the ground for trees larger than 4-inch size.
2) Plant-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other
vegetation to be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawings.
3) Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during
construction, and defined by a circle concentric with each tree with a radius 1.5 times the diameter of the
drip line unless otherwise indicated.
4) Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.
Subsection 212.02 shall include the following:
(d) Protection-Zone Fencing: Fencing fixed in position and meeting the following
requirements. Previously used materials may be used when approved by Engineer. Protection-
Zone fencing will be considered incidental to the “Tree Retention and Protection” line item and
will not be paid for separately.
1. Plastic Protection-Zone Fencing: Plastic construction fencing constructed of high-density
extruded and stretched polyethylene fabric with 2-inch maximum opening in pattern and
weighing a minimum of 0.4 lb/ft.; remaining flexible from minus 60 to plus 200 deg F; inert to
most chemicals and acids; minimum tensile yield strength of 2000 psi and ultimate tensile
strength of 2680 psi; secured with plastic bands or galvanized-steel or stainless- steel wire
ties; and supported by tubular or T-shape galvanized-steel posts spaced not more than 8 feet
apart.
a. Height: 5 feet
b. Color: High-visibility orange, nonfading.
Add Subsection 212.061 immediately following Subsection 212.06
212.61 Tree Retention and Protection
A. SUBMITTALS
1) Samples for Verification: For each type of the following:
a. Protection-Zone Fencing: Assembled Samples of manufacturer's standard size made
from full-size components.
2) Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings indicated to remain, which establishes
preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by construction activities.
a. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or videotape.
b. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each
tree or other plants designated to remain.
43
REVISION OF SECTION 212
TREE RETENTION AND PROTECTION
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1) Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
a. Review methods and procedures related to temporary tree and plant protection
including, but not limited to, the following:
i. Construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, personnel, and equipment
needed to make progress and avoid delays.
ii. Enforcing requirements for protection zones.
iii. Field quality control.
C. PROJECT CONDITIONS
1) The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:
a. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.
b. Parking vehicles or equipment.
c. Foot traffic.
d. Erection of sheds or structures.
e. Impoundment of water.
f. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.
g. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise
indicated.
2) Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust toward protection zones.
3) Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones and
organic mulch.
D. PREPARATION
Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or to be relocated. Tie a 1- inch
blue-vinyl tape around each tree trunk at 54 inches above the ground.
Protect tree root systems from damage caused by runoff or spillage of noxious materials while
mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from ponding, eroding, or
excessive wetting caused by dewatering operations.
Within the drip line of any protected existing tree, there shall be no cut or fill over a four-inch depth
unless a qualified arborist or forester has evaluated and approved the disturbance.
Prior and during construction, barriers shall be erected around all protected existing trees with such barriers
to be of orange fencing a minimum of (5) feet in height, secured with metal T-Posts, no closer than six
(6) feet from the trunk or at the drip line, whichever is greater. There shall be no storage or movement
of equipment, material, debris or fill within the fenced tree protection zone. Modification of protective
fence locations to accommodate construction shall be approved by the City Forester prior to moving or
erecting a protective fence. Where the drip line of trees touch or overlap, place fence around groups of
trees.
During construction there shall be no cleaning of equipment or materials or the storage and disposal of
waste material such as paints, oils, solvents, asphalt, concrete, motor oil or any other material harmful to
the life of a tree within the drip line of any protected tree or group of trees.
No damaging attachments, wires, signs or permits may be fastened to any protected tree.
44
REVISION OF SECTION 212
TREE RETENTION AND PROTECTION
The installation of utilities, irrigation lines or any underground fixture requiring excavation deeper than
six (6) inches shall be accomplished by boring under the root system of protected existing trees at a
minimum depth of twenty-four (24) inches. The auger distance is established from the face of the tree
(outer bark) and is scaled from the tree diameter at breast height as described in the tree protection chart
of the Fort Collins Land use Code Section 3.2.1.
Construction shall be performed in a manner to not damage any existing tree. Clearance pruning of any
tree on site shall only be by a Fort Collins Licensed Arborist under the direction of the City Forester.
Equipment access/drives shall be positioned to minimize travel over the root system of any existing tree.
Equipment drive locations over the root system of any significant tree shall be approved by the City
Forester with requirements to protect the compaction of exposed soil.
Prior to construction the contractor shall meet the City Forester on site to verify protected existing trees
and the application of tree protection specifications.
The Contractor shall wrap protected trees with concrete blankets or equivalent treatment whenever directed
by the owner’s representative.
E. TREE- AND PLANT-PROTECTION ZONES
Protection-Zone Fencing: Install protection-zone fencing along edges of protection zones before
materials or equipment are brought on the site and construction operations begin in a manner that will
prevent people from easily entering protected. Construct fencing so as not to obstruct safe passage or
visibility at vehicle intersections where fencing is located adjacent to pedestrian walkways or in close
proximity to street intersections, drives, or other vehicular circulation.
Maintain protection zones free of weeds and trash.
Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged
by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect.
Maintain protection-zone fencing and signage in good condition as acceptable to Architect and
remove when construction operations are complete and equipment has been removed from the site.
1) Do not remove protection-zone fencing, even temporarily, to allow deliveries or equipment access
through the protection zone.
F. EXCAVATION
General: Excavate at edge of protection zones and for trenches indicated within protection zones
according to requirements in Section 200 Earth Work.
Trenching near Trees: Where utility trenches are required within protection zones, hand excavate under or
around tree roots or tunnel under the roots by drilling, auger boring, or pipe jacking. Do not cut main lateral
tree roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities. Cut roots as required
for root pruning.
45
REVISION OF SECTION 212
TREE RETENTION AND PROTECTION
Redirect roots in backfill areas where possible. If encountering large, main lateral roots, expose roots
beyond excavation limits as required to bend and redirect them without breaking. If encountered
immediately adjacent to location of new construction and redirection is not practical, cut roots approximately
3 inches back from new construction and as required for root pruning.
Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before placing permanent backfill. Provide temporary earth cover
or pack with peat moss and wrap with burlap. Water and maintain in a moist condition. Temporarily
support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently relocated and covered with soil.
G. ROOT PRUNING
Prune roots that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Pruning roots 2” in
diameter or greater must be reviewed by City Forester prior to pruning. Prune roots as shown on
Drawings and as follows:
1) Cut roots manually by digging a trench and cutting exposed roots with sharp pruning
instruments; do not break, tear, chop, or slant the cuts. Do not use a backhoe or other
equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.
2) Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently redirected and
covered with soil.
3) Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly.
4) Backfill as soon as possible according to requirements in Section 203 Excavation and
Embankment.
Root Pruning at Edge of Protection Zone: Prune roots 12 inches outside of the protection zone, by cleanly
cutting all roots impacted to the depth of the required excavation.
H. CROWN PRUNING
Prune all existing trees retained on City property by cleaning and thinning the canopy. Prune
branches that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune branches as shown on the
Drawings and as follows:
1) Pruning Standards: Prune trees according to the City of Fort Collins Tree Management
Standards
I. REGRADING
Lowering Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope grade
beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone.
Raising Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated above existing grade around trees, slope grade
beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone.
46
REVISION OF SECTION 212
TREE RETENTION AND PROTECTION
J. REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
General: Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are
damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect/Owner’s Rep.
1) Submit details of proposed root cutting and tree and shrub repairs.
2) Treat damaged trunks, limbs, and roots according to an ISA certified arborist's written instructions.
3) Perform repairs within 24 hours.
4) Replace vegetation that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by
Landscape Architect/Owner’s Rep.
Protected trees that are damaged during construction will be appraised by a qualified arborist, and the
amount of damage appraised will be billed to the Contractor.
Trees: Remove and replace trees indicated to remain that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy
condition before the end of the corrections period or are damaged during construction operations that
Landscape Architect/Owner’s Rep determines are incapable of restoring to normal growth pattern.
1) Provide new trees of same size and species as those being replaced for each tree that measures 6
inches or smaller in caliper size.
K. DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
Disposal: Remove excess excavated material, displaced trees, trash and debris, and legally dispose of
them off Owner's property.
Subsection 212.07 shall include the following:
Tree retention and protection will not be measured, but will be paid for on a lump sum basis. The lump sum
price bid will be full compensation for all work required to complete the item, including installation and
maintenance of protection-zone fencing.
Subsection 212.08 shall include the following:
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Tree Retention and Protection Lump Sum
47
REVISION OF SECTION 304
AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
Section 304 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 304.02 shall include the following:
Materials for the base course shall be Aggregate Base Course (Class 6) as shown in Subsection 703.03.
Subsection 304.04 shall include the following:
Any excavation and fill required to place the aggregate base course and the preparation of the subgrade will not be
measured and paid for separately, but shall be included in the work. Any excess excavated material not used on
site shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of at the City of Fort Collins Recycling
Center at Hoffman Mill Road. Materials not accepted at the City Recycling Center shall be disposed of outside
the project site.
Subsection 304.08 shall include the following:
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Aggregate Base Course (Class 6) Ton
Work shall include all material, equipment, labor, and disposal of any excess excavated materials, including
hauling, to complete the work.
48
REVISION OF SECTION 403
HOT MIX ASPHALT
Section 403 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 403.02 shall include the following:
The design mix for hot mix asphalt shall conform to the following:
TABLE 403-1
Property Test
Method
Value For Grading
SX (100) S (75)
Air Voids, percent at:
N (design) CPL 5115
3.5 – 4.5
3.5 – 4.5
Lab Compaction (Revolutions):
N (design) CPL 5115
100
75
Stability, minimum CPL 5106 28 28
Minimum % of the aggregate
retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4)
sieve having at least 2 mechanically
induced fractured faces
CP 45 60 60
Accelerated Moisture Susceptibility
Tensile Strength Ratio (Lottman),
minimum
CPL 5109
Method B
80
80
Minimum Dry Split Tensile
Strength, kPa (psi)
CPL 5109
Method B 205 (30) 205 (30)
Grade of Asphalt Cement, Top
Layer PG 64-22
Grade of Asphalt Cement, Layers
below Top PG 64-22
Voids in the Mineral Aggregate
(VMA) % minimum CP 48
See Table
403-2
See Table
403-2
Voids Filled with Asphalt (VFA), % AI MS-2 65-80 65-80
Dust to Asphalt Ratio
Fine Gradation
Coarse Gradation
CP 50
0.6 - 1.2
0.8 - 1.6
0.6 - 1.2
0.8 - 1.6
Note: AI MS-2 = Asphalt Institute Manual Series 2
Note: The current version of CPL 5115 is available from the Region Materials Engineer.
Note: Mixes with gradations having less than 40% passing the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall be
approached with caution because of constructability problems.
Note: Gradations for mixes with a nominal maximum aggregate size of one-inch or larger are
49
REVISION OF SECTION 403
HOT MIX ASPHALT
All mix designs shall be run with a gyratory compaction angle of 1.25 degrees and properties must satisfy Table
403-1. Form 43 will establish construction targets for Asphalt Cement and all mix properties at Air Voids up to
1.0 percent below the mix design optimum
Table 403-2
Minimum Voids in the Mineral Aggregate (VMA)
Nominal
Maximum Size*,
mm (inches)
***Design Air Voids **
3.5% 4.0% 4.5% 5.0%
37.5 (1½) 11.6 11.7 11.8
N/A
25.0 (1) 12.6 12.7 12.8
19.0 (¾) 13.6 13.7 13.8
12.5 (½) 14.6 14.7 14.8
9.5 (⅜) 15.6 15.7 15.8
4.75 (No. 4) 16.6 16.7 16.8 16.9
* The Nominal Maximum Size is defined as one sieve
larger than the first sieve to retain more than 10%.
** Interpolate specified VMA values for design air voids
between those listed.
*** Extrapolate specified VMA values for production air
voids beyond those listed.
The Contractor shall prepare a quality control plan outlining the steps taken to minimize segregation of HMA.
This plan shall be submitted to the Engineer and approved prior to beginning the paving operations. When the
Engineer determines that segregation is unacceptable, the paving shall stop and the cause of segregation shall be
corrected before paving operations will be allowed to resume.
The hot mix asphalt top layer shall not contain any reclaimed or recycled asphalt pavement.
Hot mix asphalt for patching shall conform to the gradation requirements for Hot Mix Asphalt (Grading S) (100).
To prevent stripping, a minimum of 1 percent hydrated lime by weight of the combined aggregate shall be added
to the aggregate for all hot mix asphalt.
Acceptance samples shall be taken at the location specified in Method B of CP-41.
Subsection 403.03 shall include the following:
The Contractor shall construct the work such that all roadway pavement placed prior to the time paving operations
end for the year, shall be completed to the full thickness required by the plans. The Contractor's Progress
Schedule shall show the methods to be used to comply with this requirement.
50
REVISION OF SECTION 403
HOT MIX ASPHALT
Delete subsection 403.05 and replace with the following:
403.05 The accepted quantities of hot mix asphalt will be paid for in accordance with subsection 401.22, at the
contract unit price per ton for the bituminous mixture.
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Hot Mix Asphalt (Patching) (Asphalt) Ton
Hot Mix Asphalt (Grading S) (75) (PG 64-22) Ton
Hot Mix Asphalt (Grading SX) (100) (PG 64-22) Ton
Aggregate, asphalt recycling agent, additives, hydrated lime, and all other work necessary to complete each hot
mix asphalt item will not be paid for separately, but shall be included in the unit price bid. When the pay item
includes the PG binder grade, the asphalt cement will not be measured and paid for separately, but shall be
included in the work. When the pay item does not include the PG binder grade, asphalt cement will be measured
and paid for in accordance with Section 411. Asphalt cement used in Hot Mix Asphalt (Patching) will not be
measured and paid for separately, but shall be included in the work.
Excavation, preparation, and tack coat of areas to be patched will not be measured and paid for separately, but
shall be included in the work.
51
REVISION OF SECTION 403
HOT MIX ASPHALT (WARRANTY)
Section 403 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project to include the following:
DESCRIPTION
This work consists of the construction of warranted hot mix asphalt in accordance with these specifications,
and in conformity with the lines and grades shown on the plans or established.
MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
The provisions of Section 401 do not apply to warranted hot mix asphalt except for the following: Longitudinal
joints shall conform to the requirements of subsection 401.16. Roadway smoothness shall conform to the
requirements of subsection 401.20. Paving limitations shall conform to the requirements of subsection 401.07.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the hot mix asphalt mix design, production, placement, performance,
process and thickness control testing, and warranty work for a period of 2 years from the date of pavement
acceptance.
The warranted hot mix asphalt shall be a mixture of aggregate, filler or additives if used, bituminous
material, hydrated lime, and reclaimed material if used. A minimum of one percent hydrated lime by weight
of the combined aggregate shall be added to the aggregate for all warranted hot mix asphalt.
The Contractor shall establish the materials mix design (MMD) for the hot mix asphalt. The MMD consists of
an aggregate gradation based on percentages of the material passing various sieve sizes, a percentage by weight
of bituminous material to be added to the aggregate, and a temperature for the mixture at discharge from the
mixing plant. The Contractor shall select all materials to be used in the mixture including the asphalt cement.
Transverse cracking shall not be included in the performance warranty if the asphalt cement meets or exceeds
the low temperature required for Superpave performance grade PG 64-28 conforming to subsection 702.01.
The minimum thickness placed shall be as shown on the plans.
Two weeks before starting paving, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer the MMD, the method of
developing the MMD, all MMD testing, a list of materials, and all thickness testing methods.
The hot mix asphalt shall be warranted for 2 years against the types of distress listed in (d) below.
(a) Warranty and Warranty Bond. By submission of its bid in response to this specification, the Contractor
warrants that all of the hot mix asphalt placed on the project shall be free of defective materials and
workmanship for a period of 2 years from the date of pavement acceptance as defined in the Revision
of Section Acceptance.
The Contractor further warrants that it will ensure proper and prompt performance and completion of
warranty work in accordance with this specification. Warranty work shall be performed when any defect
occurs in the hot mix asphalt materials or workmanship within that 2 year period and warranty work is
required or needed on that pavement. Prompt performance and completion of warranty work includes
payment for all labor performed and for all equipment and materials used.
52
REVISION OF SECTION 403
HOT MIX ASPHALT (WARRANTY)
All such warranty work shall be solely at the Contractor’s expense up to $150,000. The City may elect to
have additional work performed and will be responsible for payment of actual expenses incurred by the
Contractor. Additional work shall be authorized in writing by the Engineer. All documentation of actual
costs incurred in the performance of warranty work shall be made available for audit by the City.
The Contractor shall provide a warranty performance bond ("warranty bond") to guarantee the full
performance of the warranty work described in this specification. The warranty bond shall be in the
amount of $150,000.
The warranty bond shall be a single term 2 year (plus an additional nine months in certain circumstances)
warranty bond that will be in effect for the entire warranty period. The warranty bond shall be in effect
upon pavement acceptance, and it shall remain in effect for the total of 2 years from that date. The
Contractor shall provide a 2 year warranty bond that fully complies with this specification to the
Department at the time of execution of the Contract.
The need for warranty work, and the performance of that warranty work, shall be determined in
accordance with (d) below. The Contractor will be released from further warranty work at the end of the
warranty period or upon completion of any delay warranty work, as described above, whichever is later,
provided all required warranty work has been satisfactorily completed.
(b) Pavement Evaluation Team (PET). The PET shall have the final decision authority for all warranty work.
The PET shall consist of three subject matter experts not affiliated with the project. One member will be a
City of Fort Collins staff person, the second member will represent the asphalt paving industry, and the
third will be mutually agreed upon by the other two members. Each member of the PET shall have a
minimum 15 years experience in one or a combination of the following disciplines: pavement
management, asphalt pavement design, asphalt pavement construction, maintenance management or
asphalt pavement maintenance. The City will cover expenses associated with performing the duties of the
PET for the City member and the mutually agreed upon third party. The Contractor shall cover expenses
associated with performing the duties of the PET for the asphalt paving industry member
Members will be replaced as necessary based upon the criteria above.
The City representative on the PET shall be responsible for scheduling distress surveys, preparing the
reports, and notifying the Engineer when warranty work is required.
(c) Warranty Work. During the warranty period the warranty work shall be performed at no cost to the City
and shall be based on the results of the pavement distress survey. Warranty work to be performed and
materials to be used shall be in accordance with the remedial actions and other requirements in (d). The
Contractor may propose alternative actions for warranty work to the Engineer who will submit the
proposal to the PET. All warranty work to repair distresses shall be done in accordance with the project
specifications and plans and current City of Fort Collins and CDOT standards and coordinated with the
Engineer. Innovative materials and techniques may be considered. The PET will render a final decision
by majority vote.
53
REVISION OF SECTION 403
HOT MIX ASPHALT (WARRANTY)
During the warranty period, the Contractor may monitor the pavement in question using nondestructive
procedures. All proposed remedial actions shall be coordinated with the Engineer. Coring, milling or
other destructive procedures shall not be performed by the Contractor without prior written consent of the
Engineer. The Contractor is not responsible for damages that are a result of coring, milling or other
destructive procedures conducted by the City, utility companies or other entities not under the control of
the Contractor.
When notified by the PET that warranty work is required, the Engineer will notify the Contractor and
Surety, in writing. If the Contractor or Surety fails to respond in writing within fifteen days after receiving
written notice from the Engineer, the City may make repairs or contract to have the repairs made and the
Contractor and surety shall be responsible for the total cost of these repairs including lane rental fees.
At least 30 days before the expiration of the warranty, and at any other time during the warranty period as
deemed necessary by the Engineer, the PET shall conduct a pavement distress survey. If the Engineer is
notified by the PET that warranty work is required in accordance with the distress indicators, the Engineer
will notify the Contractor and surety in writing. If the Contractor or the Surety fails to respond in writing
within 15 days after receiving written notice from the Engineer, the City will complete the repairs or
contract to have the repairs completed and the Contractor and Surety shall be responsible for the total cost
of these repairs including the lane rental fees. If it is necessary to delay performance of the final warranty
work due to weather limitations or other reasons in the public interest, the Contractor and City shall agree
to the extent of work to be performed. Any additional distress resulting from the delay will be the
responsibility of the Department.
Warranty work that requires a resurfacing of the pavement shall be performed only when weather
conditions are in accordance with subsection 401.07.
The Contractor shall maintain traffic at all times as detailed in the Traffic Control Plan. Warranty work
shall be performed during the times of day and days of week specified for the original contract work.
(d) Pavement Distress Indicators, Thresholds and Remedial Action. Pavement distress indicators shown
below shall be used as the basis for determining the distress types to be considered for repair under the
warranty and as the basis for determining the methods for measuring distresses.
The pavement distress surveys are conducted by dividing the roadway into nominal one-mile sections. A
one-tenth mile segment in each mile will be evaluated for pavement distress. The segment evaluated shall be
from 0.3 to 0.4 miles from the start of the section. In addition, in each section, a random one-tenth mile
segment will be surveyed. The random one-tenth mile segments will be determined by the PET each time a
survey is conducted.
The PET will conduct intermediate surveys if requested in writing by the Engineer. The PET will notify
the Engineer in writing of the survey results within 15 days. The Engineer will immediately notify the
Contractor in writing. Traffic control for conducting the surveys will be the responsibility of the
Department.
If any survey requires remedial action and the Contractor does not dispute the survey results, the
Contractor shall remedy the distress. If the survey requires remedial action and the Contractor disputes the
survey results, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing within 15 days of receiving notice. The
notification shall describe the contractual and legal basis for the disagreement with the survey results. The
54
REVISION OF SECTION 403
HOT MIX ASPHALT (WARRANTY)
Engineer will transmit the Contractor's notification to the PET which will render a final decision and
notify the Engineer in writing within 30 days of the Contractor's notification.
The PET shall determine the remedial action to be performed in all segments in the project where the
threshold level is met or exceeded. If areas outside the survey segments are suspected of meeting or
exceeding a threshold level, the PET will divide the entire project into 0.1 mile segments and conduct the
distress survey in any, or all, segments to see if a threshold level has been met or exceeded. Unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer remedial action shall be performed in the same calendar year as the
survey that indicated the threshold level is met or exceeded. Remedial action shall be applied to each entire
segment in which the threshold level is met or exceeded unless otherwise noted under remedial action.
When the remedial action required includes an overlay, the action shall also be performed on the hot mix
asphalt shoulders and adjacent lanes.
If remedial action necessitates a corrective action to the pavement markings, adjacent lanes or
roadway shoulders, then such corrective action to the pavement markings, adjacent lanes and
shoulders shall be performed at the expense of the Contractor.
When remedial action requires the removal of pavement, the pavement shall be replaced with a mix
approved by the PET. The mix shall be placed according to the Contractor's QCP. Pavement shall be
removed by cutting neat lines vertically for the full depth of the affected layer unless otherwise specified.
Removal areas shall be rectangular, and the sides and bottoms shall be thoroughly coated with an
approved tack coat prior to pavement replacement.
If, anytime during the warranty period, 30 percent or more of the project segments require or have received
remedial action, then the entire project shall receive a remedial action as determined by the PET.
The Contractor will not be held responsible for distresses which are caused by factors beyond the control of
the Contractor. A finding that the distress is due to factors outside the control of the Contractor shall be
based on evidence submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer. The PET will make the final
determination.
Distress types to be warranted, the threshold levels requiring remedial action, and the remedial
action to be performed by the Contractor shall be according to the following pavement distress
indicators:
1. Permanent Deformation - Rutting and Shoving. Rutting is longitudinal surface depression in
the wheel path. Shoving is longitudinal displacement of a localized area of the pavement
surface caused by traffic pushing against the pavement. Rutting shall be measured at 50 foot
intervals using a 6 foot straight edge, and taking several measurements transversely across the
pavement to determine the maximum rut depth. Rut depths shall be rounded to the nearest
0.10 inch.
Severity
Quantity Preferred Actions
(Actual action to be approved by PET)
Low
> 0.3 to 0.5 inch Micromill or diamond grind to remove ruts, chip
seal, microsurface or remove and replace.
Moderate
> 0.5 to 1 inch Micromill or diamond grind to remove ruts then
microsurface or remove and replace.
High
> 1 inch Evaluate the cause and then remove and replace.
55
REVISION OF SECTION 403
HOT MIX ASPHALT (WARRANTY)
The Permanent Deformation - Correction of rutting and shoving will not be required when
the accumulated design lane Equivalent Single Axle Loads (ESAL's) exceed "w" at time
intervals shown below:
Table A: 2 year Warranty Rutting Rate of Loading
Table
Time after Pavement Acceptance
(sampling intervals)
Maximum Accumulated ESAL's
(where D = 3 year projection design lane
ESAL's) "w"
6 months 0.25 x D
12 months 0.50 x D
18 months 0.75 x D
24 months D
If the rutting is suspected to be caused by the base or subgrade, coring (or cross sectional
sampling) will be conducted by the Department to determine the cause of the rutting.
The Contractor shall have the option to obtain cores and cross-section samples at his own
expense, including repair of the sampled areas, and traffic control.
2. Pot Holes. Pot holes are bowl shaped depressions of various sizes in the pavement surface
caused by loss of pavement mix.
Severity
Quantity Preferred Actions
(Actual action to be approved by PET)
Low < 1 inch deep and > 0.2 feet
2
Seal coat or crack / joint seal
Moderate 1 inch to 2 in. deep and > 0.2 feet
2
Patch
High > 2 inch deep and > 0.2 feet
2
Remove and replace to 2 feet beyond
apparent distress.
56
REVISION OF SECTION 403
HOT MIX ASPHALT (WARRANTY)
3. Longitudinal Joint Separation. Longitudinal joint separation is loss of the pavement surface
or depressions within 18 inches of a longitudinal joint.
Severity
Quantity
(Mean
Width)
Preferred Actions
(Actual action to be approved by PET)
Low
≤ 0.25 inch Seal cracks with hot poured joint and crack
sealant materials that meet the requirements of
ASTM D 3405.
Moderate
> 0.25 inch and ≤ 0.75 inch Seal cracks with hot poured joint and crack
sealant materials which meet the requirments
of ASTM D 3405, ASTM D 5078 or ASTM D
5078 with 22% scrap rubber
High
> 0.75 in. Remove and replace a minimum of 6 inches
beyond distress laterally and 2 feet beyond
distress longitudinally. In no instance shall
resulting joints be placed in the wheelpath.
4. Raveling and Weathering. Raveling and weathering are the wearing away of the pavement
surface caused by the dislodging of aggregate particles (raveling) and the loss of asphalt binder
(weathering). Affected area shall be repaired to 24” beyond apparent distress. Preferred actions
include slurry seal, chip seal, Novachip, ultra-thin overlay or remove and replace. The actual
action shall be approved by the PET.
5. Bleeding. Bleeding is a film of bituminous material on the pavement surface which creates
a shiny, glass-like, reflective surface.
Severity
Quantity Preferred Actions
(Actual action to be approved by PET)
Low
Coloring of surface visible Observe more frequently
Moderate
Asphalt free on surface Microsurface or SMA overlay
High
Asphalt free on surface
and tire tracks
Remove and replace full width of lane or
shoulder to two feet longitudinally beyond
affected area.
57
REVISION OF SECTION 403
HOT MIX ASPHALT (WARRANTY)
6. Delamination of Pavement Layers. Delamination of pavement is the separation of one layer from
the layer below it.
Remedial action for delamination: affected area shall be removed and replaced to one foot beyond the
apparent distress.
7. Transverse Cracking. Transverse cracks are cracks relatively perpendicular to the pavement centerline.
The highest severity level present for at least 10% of the total length of the crack shall be assigned.
Random cracks with transverse cracks are cracks that occur randomly and are within two feet of the
transverse crack. Since the top mat of asphalt pavement will be placed over Portland Cement Concrete
Pavement, transverse cracks determined to be caused by existing joints in the concrete pavement will
not be included as part of the warranty. Spalling with transverse cracks is the cracking, breaking or
chipping of the pavement surface within two feet of the transverse crack.
Severity
Quantity Preferred Action
(actual action to be approved by
PET)
Low
< 0.25 inch wide Seal cracks with hot poured joint
and crack sealant materials that
meet the requirements of ASTM D
3405.
Moderate
< 0.75 inch wide
< 0.25 inch wide with spalling or
random cracking
Seal cracks with hot poured joint
and crack sealant materials which
meet the requirments of ASTM D
3405, ASTM D 5078 or
ASTM D 5078 with 22% scrap
rubber.
High
≥ 0.75 in. wide
< 0.75 in. wide with spalling and
random cracking
Remove and replace full width of
lane or shoulder to one foot
longitudinally beyond the
apparent distress.
58
REVISION OF SECTION 403
HOT MIX ASPHALT (WARRANTY)
(e) Elective or Preventive Action. Elective or Preventive action shall be a Contractor or Surety option, at the
Contractor or Surety expense, subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor or Surety shall notify
the Engineer in writing if it proposes to perform elective or preventive work. Elective or Preventive work
shall be done during times set forth in the Contract for original contract work. Lane rental fees will be
assessed.
(f) Emergency Work. For warranted distresses, the Engineer may request, in writing, immediate action of the
Contractor and Surety for the safety of the traveling public. The Contractor or Surety shall have the first
option to perform the emergency work. If the Contractor or Surety cannot perform the emergency work
within 24 hours, the Engineer may have the emergency work done by other forces and seek reimbursement
from the Contractor or Surety accordingly. Emergency work performed by other forces shall not alter the
requirements, responsibilities, or obligations of the warranty.
(g) Traffic Control. Construction Traffic control for warranty work shall be performed in accordance with
Section 630 at the Contractor's expense.
(h) Process Control Testing: The Contractor shall perform process control testing in accordance with the
Revision of Section 106, Quality Control for Warranted Hot mix asphalt.
Cost of the two year warranty will be incidental to the placement of all hot mix asphalt pavement.
59
REVISION OF SECTION 412
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
Section 412 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 412.03 shall include the following:
Concrete (9 Inch): Concrete shall be Class “P” concrete. The unit price shall include the entire cost of the
installation. Price will include saw cutting, furnishing and installing dowel bars and keyways; supplying,
forming, placing, finishing, and edging the concrete surface; curring and sealing materials, joint materials and
sealers.
Concrete Pavement (9 Inch) (Special): Concrete crosswalks shall be Class “P” concrete. The concrete shall
be integrally colored with the required lbs. of Davis Color “Tile Red” per sack of cement. The texture will be
Brickform Texture Mats FM-3500 Cal Weave, 24”x24” (or approved equal). The surface of the concrete
crosswalk shall be sealed and protected from drying with Davis W-1000 Clear Cure and Seal (or approved
equal). The unit price shall include the entire cost of the installation. Price will include saw cutting,
furnishing and installing dowel bars and keyways; supplying, forming, placing, finishing, stamping and
edging the concrete surface; curring and sealing materials, joint materials and sealers; texturing equipment.
Contractor shall provide up to three mock-up slabs of each colored concrete paving. Finished products that do not
match the approved test slab shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
Subsection 412.03 shall include the following:
Driveway approaches shall be class P concrete in accordance with Section 601 and shall be installed in
accordance with details 706 and 707 as shown on the plans.
Subsection 412.18 shall include the following:
The Contractor shall cut the transverse and longitudinal joints to the width and depth required. The cut shall be
made with a power drive saw equipped with diamond blades. The residue from sawing shall be removed from the
pavement by the Contractor. The material shall be removed at the time of the sawing operation using equipment
designed for that purpose. Any damage to the concrete pavement such as spalling or fracturing shall be repaired
by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer at no cost to the project. The joints shall be immediately flushed
with water to remove any sawing residue.
Cleaning, repairing, and proper curing of any spills, fractures, breaks, or voids in the concrete surface of the joints
shall be accomplished prior to installing the backer rod material or joint sealant.
The backer rod shall be placed in such a manner that the grade for the proper depth of the seal material is
maintained.
Subsection 412.24(a) shall include the following:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Concrete Pavement (9 Inch) Square Yard
Concrete Pavement (9 Inch) (Special) Square Yard
The price of all pay items shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials including test slabs,
and demolition of test slabs, excavation, concrete, color additives, stamp mold, forms, joint materials,
reinforcement, tooling and finishing.
60
REVISION OF SECTION 412
FAST TRACK PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
Section 412 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 412.03 shall include the following:
Where Concrete Pavement (Fast Track) is specified by the Engineer, the concrete shall be Concrete Class E and
shall conform to the requirements for Concrete Class E as described in Section 601. Substitution of other classes
of concrete will not be allowed. Use of Fast Track Concrete Pavement without the direction of the Engineer shall
be paid as 412-00900 Concrete Pavement (9 Inch).
Subsection 412.04 shall include the following:
For Concrete Class E, the Contractor shall develop maturity relationships in accordance with ASTM C 1074 with
the following additions or modifications:
1. The cylinders used to establish the compressive strength vs. maturity relationship shall be cast and cured
in the field in conditions similar to the project.
2. These cylinders shall be tested in pairs at times which yield compressive strengths three sets of which are
at or below 17 Mpa (2500 psi) and one of which is above 17 Mpa (2500 psi).
3. Testing to determine datum temperature or activation energy will not be required.
4. A test slab shall be cast at the same time and location as the cylinders. The test slab shall have a length
and width of 2 m x 2 m (6 feet x 6 feet) and a thickness equal to the pavement design thickness. The
maturity of the test slab, when used in the compressive strength vs. maturity relationship from the
cylinders, shall indicate that a compressive strength of 17 Mpa (2500 psi) is achieved in the required time.
Slab maturity will be determined with two probes located in the slab approximately 300 mm and 600 mm
(1 and 2 feet) from the edge. The test slab shall be covered with a blanket similar to the one to be used on
the pavement.
The development of the maturity relationship and maturity determination of the test slab is part of the trial mix
and shall thus be documented in the Concrete Mix Design Report.
The Contractor shall provide a multi-channel maturity meter and all necessary wire and connectors. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the placement and maintenance of the maturity meter and wire. Placement
shall be as directed by the Engineer.
Calcium chloride will not be allowed.
Admixtures which conform to AASHTO M 194 Type F (water reducing, high range) and Type G (water reducing,
high range and retarding) will be permitted for Concrete Class E.
Subsection 412.18 shall include the following:
The transverse and untied longitudinal joints of Concrete Pavement (Fast Track) shall be cleaned and sealed with
preformed compression joint seals prior to opening of the pavement to traffic.
61
REVISION OF SECTION 412
FAST TRACK PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
Subsection 412.23 shall include the following:
The quantities for Concrete Pavement (9 Inch) (Fast Track) will be paid only when required by the Project
Engineer in critical locations. All other uses of high early concrete in order to meet paving and/or schedule
requirements will be considered incidental to the work covered in pay item “Concrete Pavement (9 Inch)”.
Subsection 412.24(a) shall include the following:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Concrete Pavement (9 Inch) (Fast Track) Square Yard
Furnishing, calibrating and use of the maturity meter, wire, and other appurtenances including the molding, curing
and breaking of cylinders for calibration, and placement of the slab will not be measured and paid for separately,
but shall be included in the work.
62
REVISION OF SECTION 412
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT (WARRANTY)
Section 412 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 412.16 shall include the following:
A two year warranty period will be apparent for all Portland Cement Concrete Pavement placed as part of the
construction project. The warranty period will begin the date the project has reached final acceptance. All
improvements which do not meet the project’s contract specifications, be it through substandard materials or
workmanship, shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense.
The project will be inspected by City representatives on a quarterly basis throughout the duration of the two
year warranty period. The City will develop a list of improvements which will need to be removed and
replaced and deliver this to the Contractor. The City and Contractor will meet to finalize the list of
improvements to be addressed along with determining the timing of the work to be completed. The following
failures will result in removal of the Portland Cement Concrete Pavement, adjustment of the underlying
material (if necessary), and the replacement with material meeting the project’s contract specifications:
Pavement slabs containing one or more cracks through the full depth of the slab that separate the slab
into two or more parts
Pavement slabs containing honeycombed areas
Pavement slabs containing an extreme void as defined above
Pavement slabs containing more than one void greater in depth than half the pavement
thickness
Pavement slabs containing a cumulative surface area of moderate and severe voids greater than
one percent of the slab’s total area
Pavement slabs containing 20 or more severe voids
Joints that are spalled over 50% their length
Concrete improvements constructed which do not meet specified grades in the plans. If water pools
greater than 0.5” after a storm event, concrete improvements will need to be removed to
nearest grades that meet the contract’s intent and replaced, enabling proper drainage
All pavement slabs to be removed shall be removed in a manner that minimizes contamination of the removed
pavement with underlying material. The removals shall be performed in accordance with the removal
specifications for Portland Cement Concrete Pavement as are defined in the contract. The damaged pavement
slab shall be cut in a straight, true line with a vertical face and shall be cut with a concrete saw. If the damage
to the slab does not extend past the mid point of the slab, half the panel can be removed and replaced. If the
damage extends past the mid point of the slab, the pavement shall be removed to the nearest joint. The removed
concrete pavement shall become the property of the Contractor and disposed of outside the project site legally.
All concrete pavement removed shall be replaced with concrete meeting the specifications for either Class P
concrete, and shall match the thickness and finish of the existing pavement. For repairs on arterial and collector
streets, concrete placed shall meet 3000 psi strength within 48 hours of placement. A minimum compressive
strength of 3000 psi or .80 Fc, whichever is greater, and a minimum flexural compressive strength of 450 psi
are required prior to opening the roadway to traffic. Prior to removing and replacing the damaged slab, a
concrete mix design shall be submitted and approved.
The Contractor shall provide all traffic control necessary to reroute traffic during the removal, replacement, and
curing for all concrete pavement not meeting the project’s contract specifications. All traffic control plans
shall be submitted to the City’s Traffic Operations Department for approval. The Contractor shall notify the
City’s project manager at least 48 hours prior to beginning any removals. If any striping or stenciling is
necessary after the work has been completed, the City will perform the striping. All costs incurred for the
striping will be the responsibility of the Contractor.
63
REVISION OF SECTION 412
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT (WARRANTY)
Cost of the two year warranty will be incidental to the placement of all concrete pavement.
64
REVISION OF SECTION 604
INLET (SPECIAL)
Section 604 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised to include the following:
Subsection 604.01 shall include the following:
This work consists of construction of a standard City of Fort Collins Inlet (either a curb opening inlet or a grate
inlet) with Vertical Curb and Gutter with the addition of a Snout (or approved equal).
Subsection 604.02 shall include the following:
All concrete products and construction shall be sulfate-resistant products in accordance with the sulfate exposure
class shown on the General Notes sheet of the plans.
All metals shall meet the requirements of subsection 712.06.
Subsection 604.04 shall be retitled as follows:
604.04 Manholes, Inlets, Inlet (Special) and Meter Vaults
Subsection 604.04 shall include the following:
(f) Inlet (Special)
Where inlets are placed in or adjacent to existing curbs or gutters, the Contractor shall carefully remove
sections of present curb, gutter, or curb and gutter. All damage to sections to remain in place shall be repaired
at the Contractor’s expense. The top portion of inlets shall be constructed concurrently with the adjacent curb
and gutter to insure proper alignment of grades unless otherwise permitted in writing. The inlet shall have a
Snout (or approved other) water quality structure installed as part of the cost of the inlet.
Subsection 604.06 shall include the following:
Inlet (Special) will be measured by the unit.
Structure excavation, structure backfill, filter material, concrete, reinforcing steel, inlet grates and frames, other
miscellaneous metals, connecting devices, Snout appurtenances and all other labor, equipment, materials and
incidentals required to construct the inlet (special) will not be measured and paid for separately, but shall be
included in the work.
Subsection 604.07 shall include the following:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Inlet (Special) Each
65
REVISION OF SECTION 605
SUBSURFACE DRAINS (SPECIAL)
Section 605 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 605.01 shall include the following:
This work consists of furnishing all materials and workmanship necessary to construct the underdrain, including
fittings and underdrain cleanouts per the details shown in the Construction Plans. The underdrain cleanouts (on
100’ center to center spacing) consist of a 4-Inch riser pipe, tee and screw-on cap. The underdrains will daylight
as shown in the construction plans.
Pay Item Pay Unit
4 Inch Perforated Pipe Underdrain (Special) Linear Foot
4 Inch Pipe Underdrain (Special) Linear Foot
66
REVISION OF SECTION 608
SIDEWALKS
Section 608 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 608.03 shall include the following:
Finished products that do not match the approved test slab shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no
cost to the Owner.
Record date, location, and quantity of pour, as well as air temperature at time of pour.
Subsection 608.03(b) shall include the following:
For Surfaces Exposed to View: Form faces must be free from raised grain, tears, worn edges, patches, dents, or
other defects which would impair texture of the concrete surfaces. Minimize number of seams in form material,
and arrange seams in an orderly fashion.
To minimize potential cracking, no section of concrete shall have any angle less than 90 degrees.
After stripping of the forms, if any concrete is found to be not formed as shown on the drawings, is out of
alignment of level, or shows a defective surface, it will be considered as not conforming with the intent of these
standards and specifications, and shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense, unless the Engineer
gives permission to patch the defective area.
Delete subsection 608.03(d) and replace with the following:
Sidewalk: Concrete sidewalks shall be medium broom finished.
All outside edges of the slab and all joints shall be edged with a 1/4-inch radius edging tool.
Thoroughly wash the surface with water prior to acceptance.
Surface Planeness for Concrete Paving. Unless otherwise specified, produce slabs with the following tolerance.
Finishes shall be true planes within 1/4-inch in 10 feet, as determined by a 10 foot straight edge placed anywhere
on the slab in any direction.
Subsection 608.03(e) shall include the following:
A. Expansion joints/construction joints/ for concrete paving:
1. Expansion joints to be spaced no greater than every 300 feet.
2. Extend joint filler the full depth of the slab. Hold back filler 1/2-inch from top of slab.
3. Joint sealant or caulk shall match color of concrete; caulking shall not extend above level of
pavement.
67
REVISION OF SECTION 608
SIDEWALKS
B. Score Joints.
1. Construct sawcut and tooled score joints as detailed on the plans.
2. Score joints shall be ¼ of paving depth.
3. Tooled joints to have a 1/4-inch radius and shall not incorporate a trowelled edge except where
indicated on the drawings. Score joints into plastic concrete during finishing operations.
Subsection 608.06 shall include the following:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Concrete Sidewalk (6 Inch) SY
Concrete Sidewalk (Special) SY
The price all pay items shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials including excavation,
concrete, forms, joint materials, reinforcement, tooling and finishing.
68
REVISION OF SECTION 608
CONCRETE CURB RAMP
Section 608 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 608.01 shall include the following:
This work includes the installation of detectable warnings on concrete curb ramps at the locations shown on the
plans and in accordance with the plans.
Subsection 608.02 shall include the following:
Detectable warnings on curb ramps shall be truncated domes of the dimensions shown on the plans. Domes shall
be prefabricated by the manufacturer as a pattern on cast steel pavers.
Pavers shall meet all Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements for truncated domes, and when
installed, shall be capable of producing the pattern of domes as shown on the plans.
Pavers shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 902 or ASTM C 936.
Alternate materials may be used, if pre-approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit a sample of the
product, the name of the selected supplier, and documentation that the product meets all contrast requirements and
will be fully compatible with the curb ramp surface to the Engineer for approval prior to start of work. Known
vendors of alternate products include but are not limited to the following:
Vendor Name Product Phone Numbers
TMA Construction Supply CAST in TACT Warning
Panels
303-295-6050
East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. Truncated Dome Plates 800-626-4653
Neenah Foundry Detectable Warning Plate 800-558-5075
The domes and the underlying surface shall have a minimum of 70% contrast with the light reflectivity of the
adjoining surface. The contrast shall be verified using the following equation:
100
1
1 2
B
Contrast B B
Where B1 = Light Reflectance Value (LRV) of the lighter area
B2 = LRV of the darker area
Absolute black and white will not be permitted.
The contrast shall be achieved by adding pigment during the fabrication of the paver. Prior to start of work, the
Contractor shall submit appropriate documentation from the manufacturer verifying that the contrast has been
met, along with a sample paver, to the Engineer for approval.
69
REVISION OF SECTION 608
CONCRETE CURB RAMP
Bedding and joint sand shall be free of deleterious or foreign matter. The sand shall be natural or manufactured
from crushed rock. Limestone screenings or stone dust shall not be used. Sand for bedding material shall
conform to ASTM C 33. Sand that is to be placed between joints shall conform to ASTM C 144.
Subsection 608.03 shall include the following:
(g) Detectable Warnings. Pre-fabricated pavers for detectable warnings shall be brought to the site in steel
banded, plastic banded or plastic wrapped cubes capable of being transported by a fork lift or clamp lift.
Pavers shall be carefully removed and stacked in a manner which results in the least amount of damage. All
pavers that are damaged during transport or delivery will be rejected and shall be replaced at the Contractor’s
expense. Minor cracks or chipping due to transport and handling that do not interfere with the structural
integrity of the paver or the overall pattern of truncated domes will not be deemed as grounds for rejection.
The Contractor shall spread the bedding sand evenly in the area defined and shall screed the sand to an
appropriate embedment depth as shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. Sufficient sand should be
placed to stay ahead of laid pavers
Pavers shall be placed in a running bond pattern. Domes shall be aligned to create a square grid in the
predominant direction of travel as shown in the plans. Pavers shall be installed such that the base of the
truncated dome is at the same elevation as the adjoining surface, allowing for a smooth transition between the
curb ramp and the detectable warning.
When cut pavers are required to fill gaps between the pavers and the edge of concrete, the Contractor shall
bevel portions of the truncated domes at a 45-degree angle to create a smooth transition between the partial
dome and the curb ramp surface. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, pavers shall be cut and installed
in such a manner that the domes on the cut sections will not significantly impact the overall pattern of the
truncated domes.
The Contractor shall use a plate vibrator to embed the pavers into the sand. The size and type of plate
vibrator shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, or as directed by the Engineer. All
pavers that are damaged during embedment shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.
Joint spacing between paver units shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, or as
approved by the Engineer. Joints shall be filled completely with joint sand. Excess sand shall be removed by
sweeping.
(h) Alternate products. Alternate materials shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
The concrete surface to which alternate materials are to be applied shall be prepared in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations. Material requirements, color and application shall be in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations and as approved by the Engineer.
Subsection 608.05 shall include the following:
Detectable warnings on curb ramps, including sand, pavers, alternate materials, and all other work and materials
necessary for fabrication, transport, and installation will not be measured and paid for separately, but shall be
included in the work.
70
REVISION OF SECTION 609
CURB AND GUTTER
Section 609 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 609.02 shall include the following:
All concrete mix designs utilized shall be submitted to the City representative and approved a minimum of one
week prior to the beginning of construction.
Concrete mixes will be subject to inspection and tests as required to assure compliance with quality requirements.
Subsection 609.03 shall include the following:
(j) Finishing. The surface finish for Curb and Gutter Type 2 (Special) shall be abrasive blast finish.
Subsection 609.06 shall include the following:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Curb Type 2 (Section B) LF
Curb and Gutter Type 2 (Section I-B) LF
Curb and Gutter Type 2 (Section II-B) LF
Curb and Gutter Type 2 (Special) LF
The price of all pay items shall be full compensation for all excavation, concrete, forms, joint materials,
reinforcement, tooling and finishing.
71
REVISION OF SECTION 610
MEDIAN COVER MATERIAL
Section 610 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In Subsection 610.02 delete the second paragraph and replace with the following:
All concrete used for median cover material shall be Class B and meet the requirements in Section 601. All
concrete mix designs utilized shall be submitted to the City representative and approved a minimum of one week
prior to the beginning of construction.
In Subsection 610.03 delete the third paragraph and replace with the following:
(b) Concrete. Construction requirements shall conform to the requirements of subsection 608.03. The surface
finish shall be abrasive blast finish.
A. Abrasive-Blast Finish: Provide abrasive-blast finish where indicated on the Drawings
1. Perform abrasive blasting 24 to 72 hours after casting when concrete strength ranges between 1000
and 1500 psi (6.9 and 10.3 MPa).
2. Coordinate with formwork construction, concrete placement schedule, and formwork removal to
ensure that surfaces to be abrasive blasted are treated at the same age for uniform results.
B. Surface Continuity: Perform abrasive-blast finishing in as continuous an operation as possible, utilizing
same work crew to maintain continuity of finish on each surface or area of Work. Maintain required
patterns or variances in depths of blast to match design reference sample or mockup.
C. Depth of Cut: Use an abrasive grit of proper type and gradation to expose aggregate and surrounding
matrix surfaces to match design reference sample or mockup, as follows:
1. Brush: Remove cement matrix to eliminate surface sheen and expose face of fine aggregate. No
reveal.
2. Light: Expose fine aggregate with occasional exposure of coarse aggregate and uniform color.
Maximum reveal 1/16-inch (1.5 mm).
3. Medium: Generally expose coarse aggregate with slight reveal. Maximum reveal 1/4-inch (6 mm).
4. Heavy: Expose and reveal coarse aggregate to a maximum projection of one-third of its diameter;
reveal 1/4- to 1/2-inch (6 to 12 mm).
D. Abrasive Blasting: Abrasive blast corners and edges of patterns carefully, using back-up boards, to
maintain uniform corner or edge line. Determine type of nozzle, nozzle pressure, and blasting techniques
required to match design reference sample or mockup.
E. Concrete Cleaning: After abrasive blasting to required depth is completed, clean surface with commercial
concrete cleaner, as produced by ProSoCo or equal, according to the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations.
1. Thoroughly neutralize and flush cleaning solution from finished surfaces with water under pressure.
2. Protect adjacent materials and finishes from washing and run-off.
Contractor shall provide concrete sample with range of sandblast finish textures for preliminary selection by
Landscape Architect. Contractor shall provide final 10 square foot sample of concrete for final approval.
Subsection 610.05 shall include the following:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Median Cover Material (Decorative) SF
The price for all pay items shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, excavation,
concrete, forms, joint materials, reinforcement, tooling, and finishing.
72
REVISION OF SECTION 619
WATER SERVICE
Section 619 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 619.01 shall include the following:
Water service consists of installing a new water service line for the irrigation controller at the location shown on
the plans according to the requirements of the current City of Fort Collins-Standards. Work includes installing
service line, taps and appurtenances, curb stop, backflow preventor, and backfilling with flowable fill concrete.
The Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate with the City of Fort Collins when shutting off water to minimize
downtime to customers.
Subsection 619.04 shall include the following:
Water Service will be measured by the actual number installed and shall include all work and materials necessary
to provide water service to the new irrigation controller.
Subsection 619.05 shall include the following:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Water Service Each
73
REVISION OF SECTION 619
WATER LINES
Section 619 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 619.01 shall include the following:
This work consists of furnishing all materials and workmanship necessary to abandon existing utilities, construct
a 4-inch water line and construct a 4-inch water meter vault per the Plans and the City of Fort Collins Standards.
The Contractor shall be responsible for potholing existing utilities and determining the profile of the water line.
The depth of the 4-inch meter vault shall be determined by the Contractor based off of water line profile.
Subsection 619.04 shall include the following:
Water Meter Vault will be measured as a single lump sum item. No measurement for payment shall be made of
any of the work, materials, and equipment required for this item.
Subsection 619.05 shall be include the following:
The Water Meter Vault lump sum quantity shall not be measured, but shall include all the Contractor’s cost
including, but not limited to, pipe, potholing of existing utilities, locating and protecting existing utilities,
excavation, bedding material, fittings, tracer wire, equipment, labor, backfilling, compaction, dewatering, permits,
coordination with the City of Fort Collins, creating the water line profile, installing vertical bends to avoid utility
conflicts, and testing to install the water line work per the Plans and City of Fort Collins Standards.
The lump sum quantity shall also include all the Contractor’s costs to furnish and install a 4-inch meter vault per
the City of Fort Collins Standard Details 17-A, 17-B, and 17-C. No separate payment shall be made for
determining vault depth, providing and installing vault piping and fittings, excavation, backfilling, spool pieces,
compaction, testing, labor or any other such incidentals related to the 4-inch meter vault work.
The lump sum quantity shall all also include the Contractor’s costs for materials, equipment, and labor necessary
to abandon the existing 4-inch water line and existing water meter vault per the Plans and City of Fort Collins
Standards.
Partial payments for this item may be made as the work progresses based on evaluation and determination of the
work completed by the Project Engineer.
Pay Item Pay Unit
Water Meter Vault Lump Sum
74
SECTION 621
DETOUR PAVEMENT
Section 621 is hereby added to the Standard Specifications for this project and shall include the following:
DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of construction of detour pavement as shown on the plans. It is the intent of the City that
this item include all work and materials necessary to provide a detour roadway meeting or exceeding the
requirements as contained herein and as shown on the plans.
MATERIALS
The Contractor shall be responsible for quality control required to assure adequate quality of Hot Mix Asphalt
used in the construction of the detour.
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
Detour pavement construction shall include grading, embankment material, planing and other items of work
necessary for the construction of detour pavement. The Contractor shall construct temporary ditches, temporary
culvert pipe, and maintain existing storm sewer necessary for the control of storm drainage. Detour pavement
thickness shall be at least the thickness shown on the plans. The Contractor shall remove the detour pavement
when it is no longer needed to maintain traffic.
Earthwork shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of Section 203.
The Contractor shall maintain the detour for the entire period that it is open to traffic. Any distress that affects the
ride, safety or serviceability of the detour roadway shall be corrected immediately at the Contractor’s expense as
directed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide smooth pavement transitions between new and existing roadways. Transverse joints
between new and existing pavement shall be constructed with Hot Mix Asphalt. Grade differences shall not
exceed 4% break-over. Longitudinal joints which have a vertical drop-off of one inch or greater shall be tapered
with Hot Mix Asphalt. Tapers shall be 8 horizontal to 1 vertical or flatter.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
Detour Pavement will be measured by the square yard of hot mix asphalt placed in the detour.
BASIS OF PAYMENT
The accepted quantities will be paid for at the contract unit price for each of the pay items listed below that
appears in the bid schedule.
Pay Item Pay Unit
Detour Pavement Square Yard
Embankment used in the detour that will become part of the ultimate roadway embankment will be measured and
paid for in accordance with Section 203. Placement of other embankment required for the detour and removal of
excess embankment when the detour is removed will not be paid for separately, but shall be included in the price
of detour pavement.
75
SECTION 621
DETOUR PAVEMENT
All work necessary and incidental to the construction, maintenance, and removal of the detour pavement,
including grading, temporary drainage facilities, temporary embankment material, asphalt, and planing will not be
measured and paid for separately but shall be included in the work.
76
REVISION OF SECTION 623
PLASTIC PIPE (IRRIGATION SLEEVE)
Section 623 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 623.01 shall include the following:
This work consists of furnishing all materials and workmanship necessary to install two 4 inch and one 2 inch
sleeves for future irrigation as shown on the plans.
The sixth paragraph of Subsection 623.32 shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
Plastic pipe will be measured by the linear foot of trench required to install two 4 inch and one 2 inch sleeves and
will include the cost of the detectable underground marking tape.
Subsection 623.33 shall include the following:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Plastic Pipe (Irrigation Sleeve) Linear Foot
Valve boxes will not be paid for separately, but shall be included in the cost of the plastic pipe.
77
REVISION OF SECTION 625
CONSTRUCTION SURVEYING
Section 625 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 625.01 is hereby revised to include the following:
The City of Fort Collins will provide all construction survey staking for the project. City Survey Crews will
perform the surveying required for the Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Widening/Reconstruction Project
No. AQC M455-010.
The Contractor must submit a survey request form to the City Surveyors a minimum of 72 hours prior to needing
any surveying.
If the requested survey cannot be accomplished in the time frame requested by the Contractor and it will affect the
critical path on the construction schedule, the City will utilize a Contract Surveyor at the owner’s expense.
Should a sudden change in the Contractor’s operations or schedule require the survey personnel to work overtime,
the Contractor shall pay the additional overtime expense.
The Contractor shall specify the offsets required for each survey item. This information shall be provided at the
pre-construction meeting.
All survey staking destroyed by the Contractor, vandalism or by any other reason will be replaced at the
Contractor’s expense. The Contractor’s designated representative will be required to authorize any requested re-
staking or additional services at the time the services are completed. Services designated as extra will be billed at
an hourly rate per the prevailing rate schedule of the surveyor.
The Contractor shall be responsible for transferring the information from the construction staked to any necessary
forms and for constructing all pipelines, drainage ways, pavements, inlets, walls, and other structures in
accordance with the information on the stakes and grade sheets supplied by the owner.
All existing survey monuments and property corner located outside of the project grading limits as defined on the
plans that are damaged or destroyed by the Contractor will be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.
The Contractor shall have supervision, knowledge of the project requirements and proper installation, and
construction procedures, available in the field at all times that work is progressing.
All existing survey monuments and property corners located within the project grading limits which are intended
to remain in place and intact as defined on the plans shall be protected by the Contractor. Where necessary
monuments, property corners, and section corners will be adjusted or replaced by the City for this project.
1. Control
Location of horizontal and vertical control points will be provided at approximately 1000-foot intervals.
Monuments will be set outside the limits of construction.
2. Easements and Right of Way
Temporary construction easements (TCE) and those portions of right of way between TCE’s will be staked at
100 foot intervals on tangents, PCs, 50 foot intervals on curves, angle points and corner points.
78
REVISION OF SECTION 625
CONSTRUCTION SURVEYING
3. Excavation and Embankment
a. One set of slope stakes at 50-foot intervals (stations) on each side of the proposed road including
intersections. Staking information to include cut/fill for
“limit of cut” or “limit of fill” location
decision point (ditch flowline or grade break)
edge of pavement
roadway centerline
b. One set of shoulder and/or curb stakes at 50-foot stations on each side of the road including intersections.
c. One set of slope or shoulder stakes for the grading of each driveway and field access.
d. Ditch grades shall be defined by the slope staking described above.
1. Storm Drainage
One set of offset stakes for each storm drain pipe and inlets.
2. Utility Crossing
One set of offset stakes for the utility conduit crossings.
3. Subgrade and Paving
a. One set of blue top subgrade stakes at 50-foot stations on tangents, PCs and PT’s after
completion of the subgrade preparation. Stakes to be set at 25-foot stations for horizontal
curves with radius less than 1,000 feet and at all vertical curves. Blue tops will be set on
centerline and the edge of pavement on both sides of the roadway. These blue tops will
remain in place to be used for the aggregate base course or paving operations.
4. Signs
One set of stakes to locate each sign.
5. Delineators
No survey will be provided. The Contractor shall install delineators as specified in the plans.
6. Striping
The City of Fort Collins will provide layout of all temporary pavement striping. The City of Fort
Collins will provide layout for the permenant striping.
7. Mailboxes, Newspaper Boxes and Address Posts
No survey will be provided. The Contractor shall reset all mailboxes, newspaper boxes and
address posts per agreement with the property owner and approval by the Engineer.
8. Property Corners and Section Corners
Reset property corners located along the right of way and section corners within the project
grading limits.
79
REVISION OF SECTION 627
PAVEMENT MARKING
Section 627 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 627.01 shall include the following:
The City of Fort Collins will furnish and install all permanent pavement markings and signing for the project.
The Contractor is required to coordinate with the City for the completion of the work.
Subsection 627.10 shall include the following:
All Pavement Marking Tape (Removable) shall be removed in a fashion as not to damage the concrete pavement
and top lift asphalt.
Subsection 627.12 shall be modified to include:
Removal of marking tape will be incidental to the cost of the Pavement Marking Tape (Removable).
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Pay Unit
4 Inch Pavement Marking Tape (Removable) LF
8 Inch Pavement Marking Tape (Removable) LF
80
REVISION OF SECTION 630
CONSTRUCTION ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
Section 630 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 630.01 shall include the following:
All devices, signs, temporary safety fencing (both orange plastic and chain link), and flagging necessary for the
construction zone traffic control shall be included in the lump sum line item “Construction Zone Traffic Control”.
Secondary line items for flagging and portable message signs have been included in the project under the line
items “Flagging” and “Portable Message Sign Panel”. These line items are intended for flagging and portable
message sign panels up and above what is necessary for the construction zone traffic control for the project. The
City will direct when additional flagging and portable message sign panels are to be used on the project.
The Contractor will create Business Access Specialty Signs to be used for the project. The Contractor will be
required to mount these signs on portable bases to be placed at business access points during construction. These
signs will be measured by how many signs are made for the project.
Subsection 630.10 shall include the following after the first paragraph:
The Contractor’s Superintendent and all others serving in a similar supervisory capacity shall have completed a
CDOT-approved two-day Traffic Control Supervisor training as offered by the CCA. The one-day ATSSA Traffic
Control Technician (TCT) training along with the two-day ATSSA Traffic Control Supervisor training will serve
as an alternate. If the alternate is chosen, the Contractor shall provide written evidence that at least an 80 percent
score was achieved in both of the two training classes. The certifications of completion or certifications of
achievement for all appropriate staff shall be submitted to the Engineer at the preconstruction conference.
If the Traffic Control Supervisor is replaced during the project, the Engineer shall be given a minimum of one (1)
week notice and qualifications shall be submitted for approval of the Traffic Control Supervisor’s replacement.
Subsection 630.10(a) shall include the following:
For this project, a MHT shall be prepared and submitted for approval to the City Traffic Division by 12:00 noon,
two working days prior to the commencement of work for simple lane closures. (Note: MHT’s for work done on
Monday and Tuesday shall be submitted the previous Friday by 9:00 a.m.). Facsimiles of plans shall not be
allowed. No phase of the construction shall start until the MHT has been approved. Failure to have an approved
MHT shall constitute cause for the City to stop work, as well as the Contractor's forfeiture of payment for all work
and materials at that location, with no adjustment in the contract time.
Subsection 630.14 shall include the following:
Additional flagging requested by others, including City Departments and utility representatives, must be approved
by the Engineer prior to performing the work.
Subsection 630.16 shall be revised as follows:
The Contractor shall supply and pay all costs associated with the traffic control for this project.
81
REVISION OF SECTION 630
CONSTRUCTION ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
The accepted quantities will be paid for at the contract unit price for each of the pay items listed below:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Flagging Hour
Business Access Specialty Sign Each
Portable Message Sign Panel Day
Construction Zone Traffic Control Lump Sum
Individual traffic control devices, labor required to erect and maintain traffic control in accordance with approved
MHT’s, Traffic Control Supervisor, Traffic Control Management, and Traffic Control Inspection will not be
measured and paid for separately, but shall be included in Construction Traffic Control, Lump Sum.
The flaggers shall be provided with communication devices (no cell phones) when required. These devices will
not be measured and paid for separately, but shall be included in the Work.
The cost of batteries, electricity and/or fuel for all lighting or warning devices shall not be paid for separately but
shall be considered subsidiary to the item and shall be included in the Work. Sandbags will not be measured and
paid for separately, but shall be included in the Work.
The Contractor may provide larger construction traffic signs than those typically used in accordance with the
MUTCD, if approved; however, no additional payment will be made for the larger signs.
The City shall not be responsible for any losses or damage due to theft or vandalism.
Work Hours: Work hours are 7 AM to 6 PM, Monday through Friday. Extended hours and weekend work are
anticipated and will be permitted with written approval from the Project Manager. Night time work shall be
permitted with written approval from Project Manager. Work shall be permitted on holidays with written
approval from the Project Manager. Work requests beyond working hours must be submitted to the Project
Manager a minimum of (5) working days prior to the request date.
Night and weekend work will be allowed with 5 days prior notice to the Project Manager. All costs associated
with nighttime work will be incidental to the work.
Work Zone Phasing: The City has provided Phasing Plans, for informational purposes only, as a suggested way
to construct the project. The Contractor will be required to submit Construction Phasing Plans to the City, for
approval, prior to the start of construction. The Contractor will maintain current through lanes and turn lanes, as
they existing today, for the intersection through May 31, 2015. For the dates of June 1, 2015 through August
15, 2015, the Contractor may request two, consecutive full closures of Horsetooth Road. The full closures
will be an east leg closure and a west leg closure, and each closure will be allowed for a maximum of four weeks.
During these dates, June 1, 2015 through August 15, 2015, the Contractor will be required to maintain four travel
lanes (two northbound and two southbound) on Timberline Road. Left turns from southbound and northbound
Timberline Road can be eliminated during the east leg and west leg closures on Horsetooth Road. After August
15, 2015, the Contractor will be required to have Horsetooth Road open to full traffic. Additionally, after August
15, 2015, the Contractor will need to maintain four travel lanes (two northbound and two southbound) on
Timberline Road with single left turn lanes in each direction from Timberline to Horsetooth. Single lanes on
Timberline may be allowed, at the Contractor’s request, for top mat paving operations.
82
REVISION OF SECTION 630
IMPACT ATTENUATOR (TEMPORARY)
Section 630 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project to include the following:
DESCRIPTION
This work consists of furnishing, installing, certifying, moving, repairing, maintaining, and removing temporary
impact attenuators in accordance with these specifications and in conformity with the lines and details shown on
the plans or established.
MATERIALS
Each impact attenuator shall be selected from the Crash Cushion and End Treatment Application Chart as listed in
the Safety Selection Guide on the CDOT Design and Construction Project Support web site. Impact attenuators
shall conform to the requirements of the manufacturer and be capable of bi-directional shielding of the objects
detailed and located on the plans. Filler materials shall be treated according to the manufacturer's
recommendations to prevent freezing to a temperature of -50 °F.
If the posted speed limits of the construction zone are 45 miles per hour or less, the impact attenuator shall meet
the requirements of NCHRP Report 350 TL-2. For posted speed limits in the construction zone greater than 45
miles per hour, the attenuator shall meet the requirements of TL-3.
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
If sand barrel arrays are used, the Contractor shall paint, with white epoxy paint, an outline and the weight of each
barrel on the pavement prior to final placement. All numbers shall be a minimum of 6 inches high. Barrel type
shall be one of those listed in the Safety Selection Guide.
The site shall be prepared to receive the impact attenuator by filling, excavating, smoothing, constructing the
paved foundation pad, installing approved transition and anchoring, and all other work necessary for the proper
installation of the attenuator.
The impact attenuator shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
The Contractor shall provide a copy of the manufacturer’s installation instructions and parts list to the Engineer
prior to installation of the device.
Each installation shall be supervised and certified as correct upon completion by a representative of the device
manufacturer or by an employee of the Contractor who is a certified installer. The certified installer shall have
completed device training and shall be registered with the manufacturer as a certified installer. The Contractor
shall submit all appropriate documentation to validate that the certified installer has completed device training and
has been registered with the manufacturer as a certified installer.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
Impact Attenuator (Temporary) will be measured by the number of attenuators shown on the plans, installed,
certified, and accepted.
.
83
REVISION OF SECTION 630
IMPACT ATTENUATOR (TEMPORARY)
BASIS OF PAYMENT
The accepted quantities will be paid for at the contract unit price for the pay item listed below:
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Impact Attenuator (Temporary) Each
Payment will be full compensation for all work and materials required to furnish, install, certify, move, repair,
maintain, and remove the impact attenuator. Site preparation, foundation pad, epoxy painting, and all necessary
hardware including anchors and transitions will not be paid for separately, but shall be included in the work.
84
REVISION OF SECTION 630
TEMPORARY TRAFFIC SIGNAL
Section 630 of the Standard Specifications are hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 630.04 shall include the following:
During construction, a temporary signal shall be provided. Temporary traffic signal installation shall provide at least
two overhead 12-inch signal faces and one side-of-pole 12-inch signal face for each through traffic movement and for
approach traffic on side approach streets. At least one signal face shall be provided for each protected turning
movement (arrows).
Temporary traffic signal installation can consist of a combination of existing equipment, temporary equipment and
new equipment as required to meet the needs of the temporary traffic patterns in the traffic control plans. Temporary
traffic signal installations shall conform to the minimum requirements of Chapter 4 of the Manual on Uniform Traffic
Control Devices (2009 Edition).
Temporary traffic signal plans shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. No work will commence on
modification of existing signals or removal of any existing signal equipment until the temporary traffic signal plan has
been approved.
The temporary traffic signal controller shall be capable of maintaining time-based coordination with adjacent traffic
signals. Up to four signal timing coordination plans shall be input into the signal controller by the Contractor. The
Contractor shall coordinate with the City of Fort Collins Traffic Engineer for obtaining the traffic signal timing data.
Subsection 630.15 shall include the following:
The unit price bid for Temporary Traffic Signal will include all work necessary to install the temporary traffic signal
prior to the commencement of construction. During construction, the Contractor will be responsible for signal head
adjustments and the City will be responsible for the wiring and maintenance of the controller and cabinet of the
temporary traffic signal.
Use of stop signs at signalized intersection will not be permitted.
Revise Subsection 630.16 to include the following pay items:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Traffic Signal (Temporary) Each
85
FORCE ACCOUNT ITEMS
DESCRIPTION
This special provision contains the estimate for force account items included in the Contract. The estimated
amounts marked with an asterisk will be added to the total bid to determine the amount of the performance and
payment bonds. Force Account work shall be performed as directed by the Engineer.
BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment will be made in accordance with subsection 109.04. Payment will constitute full compensation for all
work necessary to complete the item.
Force account work valued at $5,000 or less, that must be performed by a licensed journeyman in order to comply
with federal, state, or local codes, may be paid for after receipt of an itemized statement endorsed by the
Contractor.
Estimated
Force Account Item Quantity Amount
F/A Minor Contract Revisions 1 F.A. $ 200,000
F/A Partnering 1 F.A. $ 3,000
F/A Fuel Cost Adjustment 1 F.A. $ 15,000
F/A Asphalt Cement Cost Adjustment 1 F.A. $ 20,000
F/A OJT Colorado Training Program 640 Hours $ 1,920
F/A Erosion Control 1 F.A. $ 5,000
Force Account Item Descriptions:
F/A Minor Contract Revisions payment are for contract adjustments authorized through contract modification
orders.
F/A Fuel Cost Adjustment is for any unforeseen increases or decreases in the prices of gasoline and diesel fuels
from those in effect during the month in which bids were received for the Contract.
F/A Asphalt Cement Cost Adjustment payment for any unforeseen increases or decreases in the prices of crude
oil. These oil prices are based on Encana’s price for Western Canadian Select converted to American dollars per
ton.
F/A OJT Colorado Training Program payment is made for cost of maintaining on-the-job training program in
compliance with the provisions of On-The-Job Training in the Standard Special Provisions.
F/A Erosion Control payment is for any unforeseen storm water issues that require erosion control but not
included elsewhere in the plans or specifications. The work shall be approved by the Engineer prior to purchasing
and placing any erosion control items. If justification is not proven before implementation, payment will not be
made.
86
TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN – GENERAL
The key elements of the Contractor's method of handling traffic (MHT) are outlined in subsection 630.10.
The components of the Traffic Control Plan (TCP) for this project are included in the following:
(1) Subsection 104.04 and Section 630 of the specifications.
(1) City of Fort Collins Work Area Traffic Control Handbook, Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices,
2009 Edition, or applicable statutory requirements of authority having jurisdiction. Fort Collins
Handbook takes precedence over Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices.
(2) Standard Plan S-630-1, Revised December 8, 2014, Traffic Controls for Highway Construction, Case No.
2, 18, 19, 20, 24 and Standard Plan S-630-2.
(3) Traffic Control Notes and Tabulation of Traffic Control Devices of the plans
(4) Construction Phasing Plans of the plans
Special Traffic Control Plan requirements for this project are as follows:
A. The Contractor will provide all construction traffic control for the project. The Contractor shall
coordinate all construction phasing and construction traffic control requests with the City Traffic Dept.
Submittals for major project phases shall be made at least three weeks before implementation of any
element of the plan. Adjustments to the approved plan may be required by the Owner based on actual
traffic operation.
B. No work interfering with traffic flow shall be permitted during the hours of 7:00 AM to 6:00 PM unless
authorized in writing by the Traffic Engineer.
C. Road closures will follow the phasing plan provided in the construction documents and plans, unless
approved otherwise by the City of Fort Collins.
D. The Contractor shall maintain pedestrian and bicycle movements through the project site and the
surrounding trails. The Traffic Control plan shall address the method of handling these movements.
E. The Contractor shall, at all times, provide for emergency vehicle access into and through the construction
site.
F. Keep traffic areas free of excavated material, construction equipment, pipe, and other materials and
equipment.
G. Keep fire hydrants and water control valves free from obstruction and available for use at all times.
H. Conduct operations in a manner to avoid unnecessary interference with public and private roads and
drives.
I. Provide and maintain continual temporary access for businesses and residences.
J. Roadway Usage Between Operations – At all times when work is not actually in progress, Contractor
shall make passable and shall open to traffic such portions of the project and temporary roadways or
portions thereof as may be agreed upon between Contractor and Owner and all authorities having
jurisdiction over any properties involved.
K. The Contractor shall not have construction equipment or materials in the lanes open to traffic at any time,
unless directed.
L. The Contractor shall coordinate Traffic Control activities with the City of Fort Collins Traffic
87
TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN – GENERAL
Engineering and Electric Departments to assure that work activities by those departments are coordinated
with the Contractor’s activities. At the least 48 hours notice is required.
M. The Contractor shall maintain 11’ lanes throughout the project.
N. The Contractor shall provide a flagger for equipment, trucks, or other pertinent construction equipment
entering or leaving the construction area into traffic at all times.
O. During the construction of this project:
1.) From the start of construction through May 31, 2015 (Phases 1 and 2), the Contractor will
maintain current through lanes and turn lanes.
2.) From June 1, 2015 through August 15, 2015 (Phases 3 and 4), Timberline Road shall maintain 2
northbound and 2 southbound lanes at all times (left turn movements from northbound and
southbound Timberline Road to Horsetooth Road may be eliminated).
3.) After August 15, 2015, at a minimum, the Contractor shall have the following movements open
to traffic: all right turn lanes, two through lanes in each direction of Timberline Road and
Horsetooth Road, and at least one left turn lane in all directions.
Q. Traffic Signal (Temporary) – The temporary traffic signal shall meet the requirements of Revision of
Section 630 – Temporary Traffic Signal. There will be a signal head for each lane of open travel.
Designated left turn signals shall be provided in all four directions of travel.
The Contractor shall not have construction equipment or materials in the lanes open to traffic at any time, unless
directed.
Prior to starting construction, the Contractor shall notify the City of Fort Collins Traffic Engineer of the date the
Contractor intends to start construction.
All costs incidental to the foregoing requirements shall be included in the original contract prices for the project.
88
UTILITIES
The following Utilities are known to be within the project limits:
Utility/Agency Contact Phone
Sanitary Sewer – City of Fort Collins Andrew Gingerich (970) 221-6232
Water – City of Fort Collins Andrew Gingerich (970) 221-6232
Storm Water – City of Fort Collins Glen Schlueter (970) 224-6065
Forester – City of Fort Collins Ralph Zentz (970) 221-6302
Light & Power - City of Fort Collins Janet McTague (970) 221-6700
Telephone - Qwest Bill Johnson (970) 377-6401
Gas – Xcel Len Hildebrand (970) 225-7848
Cable – Comcast Don Kapperman (970) 567-0245
Level 3 Rick Miller (720) 888-7568
Traffic Operations – City of Fort Collins Joe Olson (970) 224-6062
The work described in these plans and specifications will require full coordination between the Contractor and the
Utility Companies, in accordance with Subsection 105.10 and while performing their respective operations, so the
utility work can be completed with minimum delays to all parties concerned.
The following utility work shall be performed by the Contractor:
The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the adjustment of all utilities on this project and scheduling
the work to coincide with construction activities.
The Contractor shall keep each utility company advised of any work being done to their facilities by the
Contractor’s forces, so that each utility company can coordinate their inspections for final acceptance with the
Engineer.
Provide written notice to each utility company, with a copy to the Engineer, prior to any work by a utility
company that is to be coordinated with project construction. A minimum of three (3) calendar weeks of prior
notice is required. Contractor to obtain necessary permits form the City and utility companies prior to starting
construction activities.
If needed, or as directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide traffic control for any utility work to be
coordinated with the project’s construction, in accordance with an approved Method of Handling Traffic
(MHT).
The Contractor shall provide electrical connection to bus stop pad as shown on the plans.
The Contractor shall coordinate with the Fort Collins Water Utility Department, when resetting water meter and
resetting fire hydrant.
The Contractor shall coordinate with Fort Collins Light & Power when modifying vault.
The Contractor shall coordinate with the utility owner for adjustment of manholes.
89
UTILITIES
The Contractor shall coordinate with the utility owner for the reset of fiber optic pull boxes.
The Contractor shall coordinate with the utility owener for the adjustment of valve boxes.
The Contractor shall also coordinate with the City of Fort Collins Traffic Department regarding the protection and
adjustment of traffic signal equipment
The following utility work shall be performed by the Utility Company or their agents:
Fiber Optic /Telephone – Qwest: Relocate, adjust and reset pedestals, lines and manholes
Fiber Optic / Cable – Comcast: Relocate and reset pedestals, lines and vaults
Fiber Optic - Level 3: Relocate lines and vaults
Lighting – City of Fort Collins: Relocate existing lights standards
Electric – City of Fort Collins: Relocate vaults and lines
Fiber Optic Traffic Operations – City of Fort Collins: Reset traffic control pull boxes and signal relocations
General
The Contractor shall comply with Article 1.5 of Title 9, CRS (“Excavation Requirements”), when excavation or
grading is planned in the area of underground utility facilities. The Contractor shall notify all affected utilities at
least three (3) business days prior to commencing such operations. Contact the Utility Notification Center of
Colorado (UNCC) to have locations of UNCC-registered lines marked by member companies. Call 1-800-922-
1987 for locate requests outside the Denver Metro area. All other underground facilities shall be located by
contacting the respective company. Utility service laterals shall also be located prior to beginning excavation or
grading.
The locations of utility facilities, as shown on the plans and profile sheets and described herein, were obtained
from the best available information.
All costs incidental to the foregoing requirements will not be paid for separately, but shall be included in the
work.
90
STANDARD SPECIAL PROVISIONS
91
COLORADO DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
CITY OF FORT COLLINS, COLORADO
HORSETOOTH RD/TIMBERLINE ROAD OPERATIONAL IMPROVEMENT PROJECT
FEDERAL AID PROJECT NO. AQC M455-010 (19307)
Item Date Page
Revision of Section 105 - Violation of Working Time Limitation (February 3, 2011) 93
Revision of Sections 105 and 106 - Conformity to the Contract of
Hot Mix Asphalt (Less than 5000 Tons) .............. (January 15, 2015) 94
Revision of Sections 105, 106, 412, 601 and 709 - Conformity to
the Contract of Portland Cement Concrete Pavement and Dowel
Bars and Tie Bars for Joints ................................. (January 15, 2015) 102
Revision of Section 106 - Buy America Requirements (November 6, 2014) 125
Revision of Section 106 - Certificates of Compliance and Certified
Test Reports ......................................................... (February 3, 2011) 126
Revision of Section 106 - Material Sources ............... (October 31, 2013) 127
Revision of Section 106 - Supplier List ...................... (January 30, 2014) 128
Revision of Section 107 - Responsibility for Damage Claims,
Insurance Types and Coverage Limits ................. (February 3, 2011) 129
Revision of Section 107 - Warning Lights for Work Vehicles and
Equipment ............................................................ (January 30, 2014) 130
Revision of Section 108 - Liquidated Damages ......... (May 2, 2013) 131
Revision of Section 108 - Project Schedule ............... (July 31, 2014 132
Revision of Section 108 - Subletting of Contract ....... (January 31, 2013) 138
Revision of Section 108 - Payment Schedule (Single Construction Year) (October 31, 2013) 139
Revision of Section 109 - Asphalt Cement Cost Adjustment
(Asphalt Cement Included in the Work) .............. (April 5, 2013) 140
Revision of Section 109 - Compensation for Compensable Delays (May 5, 2011) 142
Revision of Section 109 - Fuel Cost Adjustment ....... (February 3, 2011) 143
Revision of Section 109 - Measurement of Quantities (February 3, 2011) 146
Revision of Section 109 - Measurement of Water ..... (January 6, 2012) 147
Revision of Section 109 - Prompt Payment ................ (January 31, 2013) 148
Revision of Sections 203, 206, 304 and 613 - Compaction (July 19, 2012) 149
Revision of Section 208 - Aggregate Bag .................. (January 31, 2013) 151
Revision of Section 208 - Erosion Log ...................... (January 31, 2013) 152
Revision of Section 250 - Environmental, Health and Safety
Management ......................................................... (January 15, 2015) 153
Revision of Section 401 - Compaction of Hot Mix Asphalt (April 26, 2012) 168
Revision of Section 401 - Plant Mix Pavements ........ (February 3, 2011) 170
Revision of Section 401 - Temperature Segregation .. (February 3, 2011) 171
Revision of Section 412 - Portland Cement Concrete Pavement
Finishing .............................................................. (February 3, 2011) 172
Revision of Sections 412, 601 and 711 - Liquid Membrane Forming
Compounds for Curing Concrete ......................... (May 5, 2011) 173
Revision of Sections 412 and 705 - Preformed Compression Seals (February 3, 2011) 174
Revision of Section 601 - Concrete Batching ............ (February 3, 2011) 176
Revision of Section 601 - Concrete Finishing ............ (February 3, 2011) 177
Revision of Section 601 - Concrete Form and Falsework Removal (July 28, 2011) 178
Revision of Section 601 - Concrete Slump Acceptance (July 29, 2011) 181
Revision of Section 630 - Construction Zone Traffic Control (February 17, 2012) 182
Revision of Section 630 - Retroreflective Sign Sheeting (May 8, 2014) 183
Revision of Section 630 - Signs and Barricades ......... (January 31, 2013) 185
Revision of Section 703 - Aggregates for Hot Mix Asphalt (November 1, 2012) 186
Revision of Section 703 - Concrete Aggregates ......... (July 28, 2011) 188
92
Revision of Section 712 - Geotextiles ........................ (November 1, 2012) 189
Revision of Section 712 - Water for Mixing or Curing Concrete (February 3, 2011) 191
Affirmative Action Requirements - Equal Employment Opportunity (February 3, 2011) 192
Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) - Definitions and
Requirements ....................................................... (December 26, 2013) 203
U.S. Dept. of Labor Davis Bacon Minimum Wages, Colorado
Highway Construction, General Decision Number - CO150024 (January 9, 2015) 213
On the Job Training .................................................... (July 29, 2011) 223
Partnering Program ..................................................... (February 3, 2011) 227
Required Contract Provisions - Federal-Aid Construction Contracts (October 31, 2013) 228
93
February 3, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 105
VIOLATION OF WORKING TIME LIMITATION
Section 105 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 105.03 shall include the following:
If there is a violation of the working time limitations for traffic control as set forth in the special provisions, a
written notice to stop work will be imposed on the Contractor at the start of the next working day. Work shall not
resume until the Contractor assures the Engineer, in writing, that there will not be a reoccurrence of the working
time violation. If more violations take place, the Engineer will notify the Contractor in writing that there will be a
price reduction charge for each incident in accordance with this specification. This incident price reduction charge
will be deducted from any money due the Contractor. This price reduction will not be considered a penalty but
will be a price reduction for failure to perform traffic control in compliance with the Contract.
An incident is any violation up to 30 minutes in duration. Each 30 minutes or increment thereof will be
considered as an incident. A price reduction will be assessed for each successive or cumulative 30 minute period
in violation of the working time limitations, as determined by the Engineer. The price reduction for each incident
will increase at a progressive rate starting with $150 for the second incident and increasing to $1200 for the fifth
and subsequent incidents in accordance with the following schedule. A 15 minute grace period will be allowed at
the beginning of the second incident on the project before the price reduction is applied. This 15 minute grace
period applies only to the second incident.
The number of incident charges will be accumulative throughout the duration of the Contract.
PRICE REDUCTION SCHEDULE
Incident Incident Rate Total Price
Reduction
1st Notice to Stop Work ----
2nd $150 $150
3rd 300 450
4th 600 1,050
5th 1,200 2,250
6th 1,200 3,450
Etc. 1,200 4,650
Etc. Etc.
94
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105 AND 106
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF HOT MIX ASPHALT
(LESS THAN 5000 TONS)
Sections 105 and 106 of the Standard Specifications are hereby revised for this project as follows:
Delete subsection 105.05 and replace with the following:
105.05 Conformity to the Contract of Hot Mix Asphalt. Conformity to the Contract of all Hot Mix Asphalt,
Item 403, except Hot Mix Asphalt (Patching) and temporary pavement will be determined by tests and
evaluations of elements that include asphalt content, gradation, in-place density and joint density in accordance
with the following:
All work performed and all materials furnished shall conform to the lines, grades, cross sections, dimensions, and
material requirements, including tolerances, shown in the Contract.
For those items of work where working tolerances are not specified, the Contractor shall perform the work in a
manner consistent with reasonable and customary manufacturing and construction practices.
When the Engineer finds the materials or work furnished, work performed, or the finished product are not in
conformity with the Contract and has resulted in an inferior or unsatisfactory product, the work or material shall
be removed and replaced or otherwise corrected at the expense of the Contractor.
Materials will be sampled randomly and tested by the Department in accordance with Section 106 and with the
applicable procedures contained in the Department's Field Materials Manual. The approximate maximum
quantity represented by each sample will be as set forth in Section 106. Additional samples may be selected and
tested as set forth in Section 106 at the Engineer's discretion.
A process will consist of either a single test value or a series of test values resulting from related tests of an
element of the Contractor’s work and materials. An element is a material or workmanship property that can be
tested and evaluated for quality level by the Department approved sampling, testing, and analytical procedures.
All materials produced will be assigned to a process. A change in process is defined as a change that affects the
element involved. For any element, with the exception of the process for joint density element, a process
normally will include all produced materials associated with that element prior to a change in the job mix formula
(Form 43). For joint density, a new process will be established for each new layer of pavement or for changes in
joint construction. Density measurements taken within each compaction test section will be a separate process.
The Engineer may separate a process in order to accommodate small quantities or unusual variations.
Evaluation of materials for pay factors (PF) will be done using only the Department’s acceptance test results.
Each process will have a PF computed in accordance with the requirements of this Section. Test results
determined to have sampling or testing errors will not be used.
Except for in-place density measurements taken within a compaction test section, any test result for an element
greater than the distance 2 x V (see Table 105-2) outside the tolerance limits will be designated as a separate
process and the pay factor will be calculated in accordance with subsection 105.05(a). An element pay factor less
than zero shall be zero. The calculated PF will be used to determine the Incentive/Disincentive Payment (I/DP)
for the process.
In the case of in-place density or joint density the Contractor will be allowed to core the exact location (or
immediately adjacent location for joint density) of a test result more than 2 x V outside the tolerance limit. The
core must be taken and furnished to the Engineer within eight hours after notification by the Engineer of the test
result. The result of this core will be used in lieu of the previous test result. Cores not taken within eight hours
95
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105 AND 106
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF HOT MIX ASPHALT
(LESS THAN 5000 TONS)
after notification by the Engineer will not be used in lieu of the test result. All costs associated with coring will be
at the Contractor s expense.
(a) Representing Small Quantities. When it is necessary to represent a process by only one or two test results, PF
will be the average of PFs resulting from the following:
If the test result is within the tolerance limits then PF = 1.00
If the test result is above the maximum specified limit, then
PF = 1.00 – [0.25(TO
- TU
)/V]
If the test result is below the minimum specified limit, then
PF = 1.00 – [0.25(TL
- TO
)/V]
Where: PF = pay factor.
V = V factor from Table 105-2.
TO
= the individual test result.
TU
= upper specification limit.
TL
= lower specification limit.
The calculated PF will be used to determine the I/DP for the process.
(b) Determining Quality Level. Each process with three or more test results will be evaluated for a quality level
(QL) in accordance with Colorado Procedure 71.
(c) Gradation Element. Each specified sieve, with the exception of 100 percent passing sieves, will be evaluated
for QL separately. The lowest calculated QL for a sieve will be designated as the QL for gradation element
for the process.
(d) Joint Density Element. Joint Density will be tested according to subsection 401.17.
(e) Process Pay Factor. Using the calculated QL for the process, compute PF as follows: The final number of
random samples (Pn) in each process will determine the final pay factor. . As test values are accumulated for
each process, Pn will change accordingly. When the process has been completed, the number of random
samples it contains will determine the computation of PF, based on Table 105-3 and formula (1) below.
When Pn is from 3 to 9, or greater than 200, PF will be computed using the formulas designated in Table 105-
3. Where Pn is equal to or greater than 10 and less than 201, PF will be computed by formula (1):
(PF1
+ PF2
) (PF2
+ PF3
)(PF1
+ PF2
) (Pn2
– PnX
)
(1) PF = ------------------ + [ ------------------ - --------------------] x ------------------
2 2 2 (Pn2
– Pn3
)
96
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105 AND 106
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF HOT MIX ASPHALT
(LESS THAN 5000 TONS)
Where, when referring to Table 105-3:
PF1
= PF determined at the next lowest Pn formula using process QL
PF2
= PF determined using the Pn formula shown for the process QL
PF3
= PF determined at the next highest Pn formula using process QL
Pn2
= the lowest Pn in the spread of values listed for the process Pn formula
Pn3
= the lowest Pn in the spread of values listed for the next highest Pn formula
PnX
= the actual number of test values in the process
When evaluating the item of Furnish Hot mix asphalt, the PF for the element of In-Place Density shall be 1.0.
Regardless of QL, the maximum PF in relation to Pn is limited in accordance with Table 105-3.
As test results become available, they will be used to calculate accumulated QL and PF numbers for
each process. The process I/DP’s will then be calculated and accumulated for each element and for
the item. The test results and the accumulated calculations will be made available to the Contractor
upon request.
Numbers from the calculations will be carried to significant figures and rounded according to AASHTO
Standard Recommended Practice R-11, Rounding Method.
(f) Evaluation of Work. When the PF of a process is 0.75 or greater, the finished quantity of work represented by
the process will be accepted at the appropriate pay factor. If the PF is less than 0.75, the Engineer may:
1. Require complete removal and replacement with specification material at the Contractor’s expense;
or
2. Where the finished product is found to be capable of performing the intended purpose and the value of the
finished product is not affected, permit the Contractor to leave the material in place.
If the material is permitted to remain in place the PF for the process will not be greater than 0.75. When condition
red, as described in Section 106, exists for any element, resolution and correction will be in accordance with
Section 106. Material, which the Engineer determines is defective, may be isolated and rejected without regard to
sampling sequence or location within a process.
If removal and replacement is required because the joint density PF for a process is below 0.75, the Contractor
shall remove and replace the full lane width adjacent to and including at least 6 inches beyond the visible joint
line for the entire length of joint representing the process. If the lane removed is adjacent to another joint, that
joint shall also be removed to a point 6 inches beyond the visible joint line. When a single joint density core is
more than 2V outside the tolerance limits, the removal and replacement limits shall be identified by coring the
failing joint at 25 foot intervals until two successive cores are found to be 1V or less below the minimum
tolerance limit. If removal and replacement is required, the Contractor shall submit documentation identifying the
process to be used to correct the area in question in writing. The process will be approved by the Engineer before
commencing the corrective work.
97
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105 AND 106
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF HOT MIX ASPHALT
(LESS THAN 5000 TONS)
Table 105-2
“W” AND “V” FACTORS FOR VARIOUS ELEMENTS
Hot Mix Asphalt
Element V Factor W Factor
2.36 mm (No. 8) mesh and larger sieves 2.80 N/A
600 μm (No. 30) mesh sieve 1.80 N/A
75 μm (No. 200) mesh sieve 0.80 N/A
Gradation N/A 15
Asphalt Content 0.20 25
In-place Density 1.10 45
Joint Density 1.60 15
Table 105-3
FORMULAS FOR CALCULATING PF BASED ON PN
Pn
When Pn as shown at left is 3 to 9, or greater than 200, use designated
formula below to calculate Pay Factor, PF = ...,
when Pn is 10 to 200, use formula (1) above:
Maximum PF
3 0.31177 + 1.57878 (QL/100) - 0.84862 (QL/100)2
1.025
4 0.27890 + 1.51471 (QL/100) - 0.73553 (QL/100)2
1.030
5 0.25529 + 1.48268 (QL/100) - 0.67759 (QL/100)2
1.030
6 0.19468 + 1.56729 (QL/100) - 0.70239 (QL/100)2
1.035
7 0.16709 + 1.58245 (QL/100) - 0.68705 (QL/100)2
1.035
8 0.16394 + 1.55070 (QL/100) - 0.65270 (QL/100)2
1.040
9 0.11412 + 1.63532 (QL/100) - 0.68786 (QL/100)2
1.040
10 to 11 0.15344 + 1.50104 (QL/100) - 0.58896 (QL/100)2
1.045
12 to 14 0.07278 + 1.64285 (QL/100) - 0.65033 (QL/100)2
1.045
15 to 18 0.07826 + 1.55649 (QL/100) - 0.56616 (QL/100)2
1.050
19 to 25 0.09907 + 1.43088 (QL/100) - 0.45550 (QL/100)2
1.050
26 to 37 0.07373 + 1.41851 (QL/100) - 0.41777 (QL/100)2
1.055
38 to 69 0.10586 + 1.26473 (QL/100) - 0.29660 (QL/100)2
1.055
70 to 200 0.21611 + 0.86111 (QL/100) 1.060
> 201 0.15221 + 0.92171 (QL/100) 1.060
98
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105 AND 106
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF HOT MIX ASPHALT
(LESS THAN 5000 TONS)
(g) Process I/DP Computation.
I/DP = (PF - 1)(QR)(UP)(W/100)
Where: I/DP = Incentive/Disincentive Payment
PF = Pay Factor
QR = Quantity in Tons of HMA Represented by the Process
UP = Unit Bid Price of Asphalt Mix
W = Element Factor from Table 105-2
When AC is paid for separately UP shall be:
UP = [(TonHMA)(UPHMA) + (TonAC)(UPAC)]/TonHMA
Where: TonHMA = Tons of Asphalt Mix
UPHMA = Unit Bid Price of Asphalt Mix
TonAC = Tons of Asphalt Cement
UPAC = Unit Bid Price of Asphalt Cement
For the joint density element:
UP = UPHMA
Where: UPHMA is as defined above.
When AC is paid for separately UP shall be:
UP = [(BTonHMA)(BUPHMA) + (BTonAC)(BUPAC)]/BTonHMA
Where: BTonHMA = Bid Tons of Asphalt Mix
BUPHMA = Unit Bid Price of Asphalt Mix
BTonAC = Bid Tons of Asphalt Cement
BUPAC = Unit Bid Price of Asphalt Cement
(h) Element I/DP. The I/DP for an element shall be computed by accumulating the process I/DP’s for
that element.
(i) I/DP for a Mix Design. The I/DP for a mix design shall be computed by accumulating the individual I/DP’s
for the asphalt content, in-place density, and gradation elements for that mix design. The accumulated
quantities of materials for each element must be the same at the end of I/DP calculations for a mix design.
(j) Project I/DP. The I/DP for the project shall be computed by accumulating the mix design I/DP’s and the joint
density I/DP’s. The accumulated quantities of materials for each element must be the same at the end of I/DP
calculations for the project.
99
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105 AND 106
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF HOT MIX ASPHALT
(LESS THAN 5000 TONS)
Delete subsection 106.05 and replace with the following:
106.05 Sampling and Testing of Hot Mix Asphalt. All hot mix asphalt, Item 403, except Hot Mix Asphalt
(Patching) and temporary pavement shall be tested in accordance with the following program of process control
testing and acceptance testing:
The Contract will specify whether process control testing by the Contractor is mandatory or voluntary.
(a) Process Control Testing.
1. Mandatory Process Control. When process control testing is mandatory the Contractor shall be
responsible for process control testing on all elements and at the frequency listed in Table 106-1. Process
control testing shall be performed at the expense of the Contractor.
After completion of compaction, in-place density tests for process control shall be taken at the frequency
shown in Table 106-1. The results shall be reported in writing to the Engineer on a daily basis. Daily
plots of the test results with tonnage represented shall be made on a chart convenient for viewing by the
Engineer. All of the testing equipment used for in-place density testing shall conform to the requirements
of acceptance testing standards, except nuclear testing devices need not be calibrated on the
Department’s calibration blocks.
For elements other than in-place density, results from quality control tests need not be plotted, or
routinely reported to the Engineer. This does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of
performing such testing along with appropriate plant monitoring as necessary to assure that produced
material conforms to the applicable specifications. Quality control test data shall be made available to the
Engineer upon request.
2. Voluntary Process Control. The Contractor may conduct process control testing. Process control testing
is not required, but is recommended on the elements and at the frequency listed in Table 106-1.
All of the testing equipment used for in-place density testing shall conform to the requirements of
acceptance testing standards, except nuclear testing devices need not be calibrated on the Department’s
calibration blocks.
(b) Acceptance Testing. Acceptance testing is the responsibility of the Department. For acceptance testing the
Department will determine the locations where samples or measurements are to be taken and as designated in
Section 403. The maximum quantity of material represented by each test result, the elements, the frequency
of testing and the minimum number of test results will be in accordance with Table 106-1. The location or
time of sampling will be based on the stratified random procedure as described in CP 75. Acceptance
sampling and testing procedures will be in accordance with the Schedule for Minimum Materials Sampling,
Testing and Inspection in the Department’s Field Materials Manual. Samples for project acceptance testing
shall be taken by the Contractor in accordance with the designated method. The samples shall be taken in the
presence of the Engineer. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall reduce each sample to the size designated
by the Engineer. The Contractor may retain a split of the each sample which cannot be included as part of the
Contractor’s process control testing. Dispute of the acceptance test results in accordance with CP-17 will not
be allowed unless a provision for check testing has been included in the Contract and it has been successfully
completed. All materials being used are subject to inspection and testing at any time prior to or during
incorporation into the work.
100
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105 AND 106
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF HOT MIX ASPHALT
(LESS THAN 5000 TONS)
Table 106-1
SCHEDULE FOR MINIMUM SAMPLING AND TESTING
Element Process Control Acceptance
Asphalt Content 1/500 tons 1/1000 tons
Theoretical
Maximum
Specific Gravity
1.1000 tons, minimum
1/day 1/1000 tons, minimum 1/day
Gradation 1/Day 1/2000 tons
In-Place Density 1/500 tons 1/500 tons
Joint Density 1 core/2500 linear feet of
joint 1 core /5000 linear feet of joint
Aggregate Percent
Moisture (3)
1/2000 tons or 1/Day if
less than 2000 tons 1/2000 tons
Percent Lime (3) (4) 1/Day Not applicable
Notes:
(a) The minimum number of in-place density tests for acceptance will be 5.
(b) Process control tests for gradation are not required if less than 250 tons
are placed in a day. The minimum number of process control tests for
gradation shall be one test for each 1000 tons or fraction thereof.
(c) Not to be used for incentive/disincentive pay. Test according to CP 60B
and report results from Form 106 or Form 565 on Form 6.
(d) Verified per Contractor’s QC Plan.
101
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105 AND 106
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF HOT MIX ASPHALT
(LESS THAN 5000 TONS)
(c) Reference Conditions. Three reference conditions can exist determined by the Moving Quality Level (MQL).
The MQL will be calculated in accordance with the procedure in CP 71 for Determining Quality Level (QL).
The MQL will be calculated using only acceptance tests. The MQL will be calculated on tests 1 through 3,
then tests 1 through 4, then tests 1 through 5, then thereafter on the last five consecutive test results. The
MQL will not be used to determine pay factors. The three reference conditions and actions that will be taken
are described as follows:
1. Condition green will exist for an element when an MQL of 90 or greater is reached, or maintained, and
the past five consecutive test results are within the specification limits.
2. Condition yellow will exist for all elements at the beginning of production or when a new process is
established because of changes in materials or the job-mix formula, following an extended suspension of
work, or when the MQL is less than 90 and equal to or greater than 65. Once an element is at condition
green, if the MQL falls below 90 or a test result falls outside the specification limits, the condition will
revert to yellow or red as appropriate.
3. Condition red will exist for any element when the MQL is less than 65. The Contractor shall be notified
immediately in writing and the process control sampling and testing frequency increased to a minimum
rate of 1/250 tons for that element. The process control sampling and testing frequency shall remain at
1/250 tons until the process control QL reaches or exceeds 78. If the QL for the next five process control
tests is below 65, production will be suspended.
If gradation is the element with MQL less than 65, the Department will test one randomly selected sample
in the first 1250 tons produced in condition red. If this test result is outside the tolerance limits,
production will be suspended. (This test result will not be included as an acceptance test.)
After condition red exists, a new MQL will be started. Acceptance testing will stay at the frequency
shown in Table 106-1. After three acceptance tests, if the MQL is less than 65, production will be
suspended.
Production will remain suspended until the source of the problem is identified and corrected. Each time
production is suspended, corrective actions shall be proposed in writing by the Contractor and approved
in writing by the Engineer before production may resume.
Upon resuming production, the process control sampling and testing frequency for the elements causing
the condition red shall remain at 1/250 tons. If the QL for the next five process control tests is below 65,
production will be suspended again. If gradation is the element with MQL less than 65, the Department
will test one randomly selected sample in the first 1250 tons produced in condition red. If this test result
is outside the tolerance limits, production will be suspended.
102
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
AND DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
Sections 105, 106, 412, 601 and 709 of the Standard Specifications are hereby revised for this project as follows:
Delete subsection 105.06 and replace with the following:
105.06 Conformity to the Contract of Portland Cement Concrete Pavement. Conformity to the Contract of
all Portland Cement Concrete Pavement, Item 412, will be determined in accordance with the following:
When the Engineer finds that the materials furnished, the work performed, or the finished product does not
conform with the Contract, or the Pay Factor (PF) for an element's process is less than 0.75 but that reasonably
acceptable work has been produced, the Engineer will determine the extent of the work that will be accepted and
remain in place. The Engineer will use a Contract Modification Order to document the justification for allowing
the work to remain in place and the price adjustment that will be applied.
When the Engineer finds the materials furnished, work performed, or the finished product is not in conformity
with the Contract, or the PF for an element's process is less than 0.75 and has resulted in an inferior or
unsatisfactory product, the work or material shall be removed and replaced or otherwise corrected by and at the
expense of the Contractor. When the PF for any process is 0.75 or greater, the finished quantity of work
represented by the process will be accepted at the calculated pay factor.
Materials will be sampled and tested by the Contractor and the Department in accordance with subsection 106.06
and with procedures contained in the Department's Field Materials Manual. The approximate quantity
represented by each sample will be as set forth in subsection 106.06, Tables 106-2 and 106-3. Additional samples
may be selected and tested at the Engineer's discretion.
(a) Incentive and Disincentive Payments (I/DP) will be made based on a statistical analysis that yields Pay
Factors (PF) and Quality Levels (QL). The PF and QL will be made based on test results for the elements of
compressive strength and pavement thickness (compressive strength criteria) or the elements of flexural
strength and pavement thickness (flexural strength criteria). The Department will indicate in the plans whether
compressive strength or flexural strength criteria will be used. If the acceptance criteria is not indicated,
flexural strength criteria shall be used..
Incentive or Disincentive payment will not be made for thickness of concrete pavement furnished by the
Contractor and placed by others.
When compressive strength criteria is indicated, then the QL will be calculated for the elements of
compressive strength and pavement thickness on a process basis. When flexural strength criteria is indicated,
then the QL will be calculated for the elements of flexural strength and pavement thickness on a process basis.
A separate process will be established for an element when a change in the process affects that element. A
process will consist of the test results from a series of random samples. Test results determined to have
sampling or testing errors will not be used. All materials produced will be assigned to a process. A change in
process is defined as a change that affects the element involved. Changes in mix design, material source,
design pavement thickness, or the method being utilized to place the pavement are considered changes in
process. The following is provided to clarify changes in processes for each element:
1. Construction of mainline pavement, including the shoulders if placed with the mainline, is a single
process, providing there are no changes in process as described above.
2. Construction of ramps, acceleration and deceleration lanes, shoulders placed separately, and areas
requiring hand work are considered separate processes.
3. A change in the mix design is a process change for the compressive strength element or the flexural
strength element, but is not a process change for the pavement thickness element.
103
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
AND DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
(b) When it is necessary to represent material by one or two tests, each individual test shall have a PF computed
in accordance with the following:
If the value of the test is at or above the lower tolerance limit, then PF = 1.000. If the value of the test is
below the lower tolerance limit, then:
PF = 1.00 – [0.25(TL -T0)/V]
where: PF = pay factor.
V = V factor from Tables 105-4 or 105-5.
T0 = the individual test value.
TL= lower tolerance limit.
(c) The following procedures will be used to compute Incentive and Disincentive Payments (I/DP), quality levels
(QL), and pay factors (PF) for processes represented by three or more tests:
1. Quality Level (QL) will be calculated according to CP-71.
2. Compute the PF for the process. When the process has been completed, the number of tests (Pn) it
includes shall determine the formula to be used to compute the final pay factor in accordance with the
following:
A. For compressive strength and pavement thickness:
When 3 ≤ Pn ≤ 5
If QL ≥ 85, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 85)0.001333
If QL < 85, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 85)0.005208
When 6 ≤ Pn ≤ 9
If QL ≥ 90, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 90)0.002000
If QL < 90, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 90)0.005682
When 10 ≤ Pn ≤ 25
If QL ≥ 93, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 93)0.002857
If QL < 93, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 93)0.006098
When Pn ≥ 26
If QL ≥ 95, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 95)0.004000
If QL < 95, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 95)0.006757
B. For flexural strength:
When 3 ≤ Pn ≤ 5
If QL ≥ 85, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 85)0.002000
If QL < 85, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 85)0.005208
104
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
AND DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
When 6 ≤ Pn ≤ 9
If QL ≥ 90, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 90)0.003000
If QL < 90, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 90)0.005682
When 10 ≤ Pn ≤ 25
If QL ≥ 93, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 93)0.004286
If QL < 93, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 93)0.006098
When Pn ≥ 26
If QL ≥ 95, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 95)0.006000
If QL < 95, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 95)0.006757
3. Compute the I/DP for the process:
I/DP = (PF-1)(QR)(UP)
where: QR = Quantity Represented by the process.
UP = Unit Price bid for the Item.
The total I/DP for an element shall be computed by accumulating the individual I/DP for each process of that
element.
(d) As acceptance test results become available, they will be used to calculate accumulated QL and Incentive and
Disincentive Payments (I/DP) for each element and for the item. The Contractor's test results and the
accumulated calculations shall be made available to the Engineer upon request. The Engineer's test results
and the calculations will be made available to the Contractor as early as reasonably practical. Numbers from
the calculations shall be carried to significant figures and rounded according to AASHTO Standard
Recommended Practice R-11, Rounding Method.
I/DP will be made to the Contractor in accordance with subsection 412.24(a). During production, interim
I/DP will be computed for information only. The Pn will change as production continues and test results
accumulate. The Pn at the time an I/DP is computed shall determine the formula to be used.
(e) The Contractor shall not have the option of accepting a price reduction or disincentive in lieu of producing
specification material. Continued production of non-specification material will not be permitted. Material
which is obviously defective may be isolated and rejected without regard to sampling sequence or location
within a process.
(f) When compressive strength is indicated, the Contractor may take cores at his own expense and in accordance
with Colorado Procedure 65 to provide an alternative determination of strength to replace acceptance test
results with a compressive strength less than 4,500 psi. The higher value of the 28 day compressive strength
of acceptance cylinders or the corresponding core’s compressive strength will be used for I/DP.
When flexural strength is indicated, the Contractor may take cores at his own expense and in accordance with
Colorado Procedure 65 to provide an alternative determination of strength to replace QC test results with a
flexural strength less than 650 psi. The cores shall be obtained prior to 45 days after placement. The higher
value of the 28 day flexural strength of QC beams or the corresponding core’s flexural strength will be used
for I/DP.
105
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
AND DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
Table 105-4
"V" FACTORS AND INCENTIVE PAYMENTS
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH CRITERIA
Element V factor
Maximum
Incentive
Payment
Lower Tolerance
Limit, TL
Compressive Strength 400 psi 3.00 percent 4,500 psi
Pavement Thickness 0.4 inch 2.00 percent Plan Thickness
-0.4 inch
Table 105-5
"V" FACTORS AND INCENTIVE PAYMENTS
FLEXURAL STRENGTH CRITERIA
Element
V factor
Maximum
Incentive
Payment
Lower Tolerance
Limit, TL
Flexural Strength 50 psi 3.00% 570 psi
Pavement Thickness 0.4 inch 2.00% Plan Thickness
-0.4"
Sand Equivalence. If compressive strength criteria is indicated then the sand equivalence (SE) as determined by
CP 37 will be considered acceptable when the running average of three consecutive tests is greater than 80 percent
and no individual test result is less than 75 percent. When the running average of three consecutive SE tests falls
below 80 percent or an individual SE test result falls below 75 percent, paving operations shall be suspended. The
Contractor shall submit a written plan to correct the low SE test results to the Engineer for approval. The
Contractor shall not continue paving operations until the Engineer approves the plan in writing and three SE test
results from random samples in the stockpile are above 80 percent.
Delete subsection 106.06 and replace with the following:
106.06 Sampling and Testing of Portland Cement Concrete Paving. All Portland Cement Concrete
Pavement, Item 412, shall be tested in accordance with the following quality control and acceptance testing
procedures:
(a) Quality Control Testing. The Contractor shall be responsible for quality control testing of all elements listed
in Table 106-2 or 106-3. Quality control testing shall be performed at the expense of the Contractor. The
Contractor shall develop a quality control plan (QCP) in accordance with the following:
1. Quality Control Plan. For each element listed in Tables 106-2 or 106-3, the QCP must provide adequate
details to ensure that the Contractor will perform quality control. The Contractor shall submit the QCP to
the Engineer at the preconstruction conference. The Contractor shall not start any work on the project
until the Engineer has approved the QCP in writing.
A. Frequency of Tests or Measurements. The QCP shall indicate a random sampling frequency, which
shall be equal to or more frequent than that shown in Table 106-2 or 106-3. The quality control tests
shall be independent of acceptance tests.
B. Test Result Chart. Each quality control test result, the appropriate area, volume, and the tolerance
limits shall be plotted. The chart shall be posted daily at a location convenient for viewing by the
Engineer.
106
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
AND DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
C. Quality Level Chart. The QL for each element in Table 106-2 or 106-3 shall be plotted. The QL
shall be calculated in accordance with the procedure in CP 71 for Determining Quality Level. The
QL shall be calculated on tests 1 through 3, then tests 1 through 4, then tests 1 through 5, then
thereafter the last five consecutive test results. The area of material represented by the last test result
shall correspond to the QL.
D. F-test and t-test Charts. If flexural strength criteria is indicated, then the results of F-test and t-test
analysis between the Department's verification tests of flexural strength and the Contractor's quality
control tests of flexural strength shall be shown on charts. The F-test and t-test shall be calculated in
accordance with standard statistical procedures using all verification tests and quality control tests
completed to date. When a verification test is completed, the F-test and t-test calculations shall be
redone. The area of material represented by the last test result shall correspond to the F-test and t-
test. A warning value of 5 percent and an alert value of 1 percent shall be shown on each chart. The
chart shall be posted daily at a location convenient for viewing by the Engineer.
2. Point of Sampling. The material for quality control testing shall be sampled by the Contractor using CP
61. The location where material samples will be taken shall be indicated in the QCP.
3. Testing Standards. The QCP shall indicate which testing standards will be followed. Acceptable
standards are Colorado Procedures, AASHTO and ASTM. The order of precedence is Colorado
Procedures, AASHTO procedures and then ASTM procedures.
The compressive strength test for quality control will be the average strength of two test cylinders cast in
plastic molds from a single sample of concrete, cured under standard laboratory conditions, and tested
three to seven days after molding.
4. Testing Supervisor Qualifications. The person in charge of and responsible for the quality control testing shall be
identified in the QCP. This person shall be present on the project and possess one or more of the following
qualifications:
A. Registration as a Professional Engineer in the State of Colorado.
B. Registration as an Engineer in Training in the State of Colorado with two years of paving experience.
C. A Bachelor of Science in Civil Engineering or Civil Engineering Technology with three years of
paving experience.
D. National Institute for Certification in Engineering (NICET) certification at level III or higher in the
subfields of Transportation Engineering Technology, Highway Materials, or Construction Materials
Testing Engineering Technology, Concrete and four years of paving experience.
5. Technician Qualifications. Technicians performing tests shall meet the requirements of Colorado
Procedure 10.
6. Testing Equipment. All of the testing equipment used to conduct quality control testing shall conform to
the standards specified in the test procedures and be in good working order. If flexural strength criteria is
indicated, then the Contractor shall provide the following equipment and supplies which will not be paid
for separately but shall be included in the work:
A. A separate, temperature controlled facility of at least 300 square feet usable space. This facility shall
be used exclusively for the molding, storage and testing of concrete test specimens as required. This
facility shall be provided in addition to other facilities required in Section 620. The storage facility
shall have sufficient water storage capacity for curing all required test specimens. The storage facility
shall provide separate storage tanks for each type of required testing. Each storage tank shall have a
continuously recording thermometer and sufficient blank charts for the project. Temperatures of each
storage tank shall be recorded for the duration of the project.
107
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
AND DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
B. A machine for testing flexural strength of concrete specimens. The machine shall be one of the
following or an approved equal:
1. Forney model number FHS-300 with a Co-Pilot digital monitor.
2. Humboldt model number HCM-3000 with a iD Digital Indicator
3. Gilson model number MC-400 with Pro Controller
Both the Contractor and the Engineer will use this machine for testing concrete specimens. The
machine shall meet the requirements of AASHTO T 97 and T 22 and the following: The machine
and the flexural strength assembly shall be of a rigid construction. The applied vertical load shall be
uniformly distributed to the third points and uniformly across the width of the beam (transverse
distribution). Uniform distribution of the load is defined as less than a 3 percent variation in the load
between each of the nine strain gages placed in the middle third section of the tension face for loads
from 1,000 to 10,000 pounds. Two firms that can evaluate and assess the ability of the machine to
distribute the load evenly are KPFF Consulting Engineers, Chicago Illinois 847-859-7790 and
Construction Testing Laboratories, Skokie Illinois 847-965-7500 . Other firms may be capable of
evaluating and assessing the load distribution of the machine. The Engineer must approve the firm
prior to assessing the machine. The machine shall be ready for use and certified two days before
paving begins. After the machine has been certified and accepted by the Engineer it shall not be
moved until all portland cement concrete paving and flexural strength acceptance tests have been
completed. A weekly check of the planeness of all bearing surfaces on the flexural strength apparatus
shall be made and recorded in the Contractor’s QC notebook for each week that flexural strength
testing occurs. If the nominal maximum aggregate size of the mix is ¾ inches or less, then the
Contractor shall also provide a separate flexural strength apparatus that is configured to test 4x4x14
inch beam specimens. Swapping flexural strength apparatuses will not require recertification of the
test machine.
C. Beam molds for molding all test specimens required. Beam molds shall have a cross section of
approximately 6 inches by 6 inches. All beam molds shall be checked by the Contractor prior to
being placed in service and monthly. The checks of each beam mold shall be recorded in the
Contractor’s QC notebook. This shall include all testing described in subsection 106.06. If the
nominal maximum aggregate size of the mix is ¾ inches or less, then the Contractor shall also
provide beam molds with a cross section of 4 inches by 4 inches and a minimum length of 14 inches.
7. Reporting and Record Keeping. The Contractor shall report the results of the tests to the Engineer in
writing at least once per day.
The Contractor shall assemble a Quality Control (QC) notebook and update it daily. This notebook shall
contain all worksheets, test results forms, test results charts and quality level charts for each of the
elements listed in Table 106-2 or 106-3. The Contractor shall submit examples of worksheets, test result
forms and test results charts in accordance with CP 12B as part of the Contractor's Quality Control Plan
(QCP). The Contractor shall submit the QC notebook to the Engineer for review once a month on the
date agreed to at the Pre-Construction Conference.
The QC notebook will be returned to the Contractor with a list of recognized deficiencies within two
working days after submittal. Deficiencies may include, but are not limited to, the failure to submit the
notebook on time or an absence of the required reports. For any month in which deficiencies are
identified, the QC notebook will be submitted for review two weeks after the QC notebook is returned.
Upon the second recognized deficiency the Engineer will notify the Contractor, and the pay estimate shall
be withheld until the Contractor submits, in writing, a report detailing the cause for the recognized
deficiency. The report shall include how the Contractor plans to resolve the deficiencies. Additional
108
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
AND DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
recognized deficiencies will result in a delay of the pay estimate until the Contractor has identified and
resolved the deficiency along with revising and resubmitting his QCP to address these issues. Once the
Engineer has reviewed and approved the revised QCP the estimate may be paid. Upon submittal of the
QC notebook for the semi-final estimate, the QC notebook shall become the property of the Department.
The Contractor shall make provisions such that the Engineer can inspect quality control work in progress,
including QC notebook, sampling, testing, plants, and the Contractor's testing facilities at any time.
8. Optimized Gradation. The Contractor will be required to perform quality control testing of the combined aggregate
gradation (CAG) when an Optimized Gradation (OG) is used for Class E or P Concrete. The combined aggregate
gradation testing frequency shall be three per day. Test one shall be sampled and tested after full production begins
but before production reaches 100 cubic yards. Test two shall be sampled and tested after four hours of continuous
production or production reaches 1000 cubic yards, whichever comes first. Test three shall be sampled and tested
after seven hours of continuous production or production reaches 1750 cubic yards, whichever comes first. The
frequency shall be a minimum of one per day if production is less than 750 cubic yards.
The Department will perform one gradation each day that may be a split of one of the three daily QC
samples. This data will not be used to determine acceptability of the material but as information only.
The Contractor’s gradation test data will be used to calculate the coarseness factor (CF) and workability
factor (WF) and must plot within the workability box. No corrective action shall be required if the data
falls within the workability box.
When the Contractor’s gradation test results and the CF and WF fall outside the workability box, the
Contractor shall immediately make corrections to bring the aggregate gradation within the workability
box and notify the Engineer. If two or more consecutive test results for any single day or two successive
days are found to fall outside the workability box, the Contractor shall immediately suspend production
and provide a written corrective plan to the Engineer for approval prior to resuming production.
Upon being allowed to resume production, the Contractor shall follow the daily sampling frequency. If
the next two consecutive gradation tests indicate the CF and WF plot inside the workability box, the
Contractor may continue production. If the first two aggregate samples do not have CF and WF that fall
inside the workability box, production shall be suspended.
Prior to resuming production the Contractor shall be required to sample the individual aggregate
stockpiles at two or more locations to determine the range of variability within each stockpile, make
appropriate adjustments to the percentages for each aggregate component, and discharge and sample the
combined aggregates. The combined aggregate gradation shall be tested to determine if the CF and WF
fall inside the workability box. Production can resume if the CF and WF plot within the workability box.
Production will continue to be suspended for additional evaluation of stockpiles and aggregate feed rates
until gradation sampling and testing indicate the CF and WF fall inside the workability box.
All gradation test information during production shall be provided to the Engineer daily. The Contractor
shall immediately report all gradation test data to the Engineer for evaluation during periods when
production is suspended or upon resuming production. The Contractor will be notified in writing in all
cases when production may resume or shall remain suspended.
(b) Acceptance Testing. Acceptance testing frequencies shall be in accordance with the Schedule (Quality
Assurance) in the Department’s Field Materials Manual. Except for flexural strength, acceptance tests will be
conducted by and at the expense of the Department. Acceptance sampling and testing procedures will be in
accordance with the Department's Field Materials Manual with the following exceptions and inclusions:
109
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
AND DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
A split sample from an acceptance test shall not be used for a quality control test. The Engineer will
designate the location where samples are to be taken. Samples shall be taken by the Contractor in accordance
with CP 61. The Engineer will be present during the sampling and take possession of all acceptance samples.
Samples transported in different containers will be combined and mixed before molding specimens. All
materials are subject to inspection and testing at all times.
Pavement thickness acceptance will be determined by cores.
The compressive strength test for acceptance will be the average compressive strength of three test cylinders
cast in plastic molds from a single sample of concrete and cured under standard laboratory conditions prior to
testing. If the compressive strength of any one specimen differs from the average by more than 10 percent,
that specimen will be deleted and the average strength will be determined using the remaining two specimens.
If the compressive strength of more than one specimen differs from the average by more than 10 percent the
average strength will be determined using all three specimens. Each set of three cylinders will be tested at 28
days after molding.
Acceptance tests for flexural strength shall be the Contractor's quality control tests. The flexural strength tests
shall be the average flexural strength of four test beams. The test beams shall be prepared according to
AASHTO T 23. The flexural strength of each specimen shall be measured according to AASHTO T 97 with
the following additional requirements: If the flexural strength of only one specimen differs from the average
by more than 10 percent, that specimen shall be deleted and the average strength shall be determined using the
remaining three specimens. If the flexural strength of more than one specimen differs from the average by
more than 10 percent, the test value shall be the average of all four specimens. Each set of four beams shall be
tested at 28 days after molding. If the nominal maximum aggregate size of the mix is ¾ inches or less, then
the Contractor shall prepare three additional test beams using the 4x4x14 inch molds. The 4x4x14 inch
specimens will be tested 28 days. The results of the 4x4x14 inch specimens will be for information only and
will not be used to determine the acceptability of the concrete. Results of the 4x4x14 inch specimens will be
reported to the Engineer with the corresponding acceptance test results. These additional specimens are being
used to evaluate the validity of using smaller test specimens for acceptance.
(c) Verification Testing. Verification testing will be used only when flexural strength criteria is indicated and is
the responsibility of the Department. The Department will determine the locations where samples or
measurements are to be taken. The location of sampling shall be based on a stratified random procedure.
Verification sampling and testing procedures will be in accordance with Sections 105, 106, 412, the Schedule
for Minimum Materials Sampling, Testing and Inspection in the Department's Field Materials Manual, and
CP 13. Samples for verification testing shall be taken by the Contractor in accordance with CP 61 in the
presence of the Engineer.
An analysis of test results will be performed after all test results are known using the t-test and F-test
statistical methods with an alpha value set at 0.05. If either the above t-test and F-test analysis shows a
significant difference, then the following items shall be checked: comparison of beam fracture locations and
types, computations and flexural testing machine outputs, curing tank temperature charts, slump and air
contents, plant batch tickets for major changes, review of sampling, molding, testing procedures, along with
IAT check tests and any other investigations that may clarify the significant differences. If after a review of
the data no reasons can be determined for the significant difference, the Department's test data shall be used
for determining Quality Levels and Incentive or Disincentive according to the methods in this Section.
(d) Check Testing. The Contractor and the Engineer shall conduct a check testing program (CTP) prior to the
placement of any concrete pavement. The check testing program will include a conference directed by the
110
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
AND DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
Region Materials Engineer, the Contractor's testers and the Department's testers concerning methods,
procedures and equipment for compressive or flexural strength testing. Check testing shall be completed
before any portland cement concrete pavement is placed. A set of three cylinders or four beams will be
molded by both the Contractor and the Department's project testers from a split sample. The specimens will
be sampled, molded and cured for seven days and tested for compressive or flexural strength according to the
procedures of Section 106. The Department's Independent Assurance Tester will also mold, cure and test a
set of three cylinders or four beams, but the Independent Assurance Test results will not be entered in the
check testing analysis. If the results of the check tests do not meet the following criteria, then the check
testing will be repeated until the following criteria are met:
(1) The average of the Contractor's test results and the average of the Department's test results shall be within
10 percent of the average of all test results.
(2) Each specimen test result shall be within 15 percent of the average of all test results.
When compressive strength criteria is indicated, a check test must also be conducted on the sand equivalent
test. A set of 5 sand equivalents will be run by both the Contractor's and the Department's project tester, from
a split sample. The average of the absolute differences between tests taken by the quality control personnel
and the acceptance testing personnel will be compared to the acceptable limits shown in Table 13-1 of CP 13.
The CTP will be continued until the acceptance and quality control test results are within the permissible
ranges shown in Table 13-1 of CP 13.
During production, split samples of randomly selected acceptance tests will be compared to the permissible
ranges shown in Table 13-1 of CP 13. The minimum frequency will be as shown in Table 106-3.
If production has been suspended and then resumed, the Engineer may order a CTP between tests taken by
quality control and acceptance testing persons to assure the test results are within the permissible ranges
shown in Table 13-1 of CP 13. Check test results shall not be included in quality control testing. The Region
Materials Engineer shall be called upon to resolve differences if a CTP shows unresolved differences beyond
the ranges shown in Table 13-1 of CP 13.
(e) Independent Assurance Testing. The sample for the IAT will be a split sample of the Contractor's quality
control test. The Department's representative performing verification tests shall also use a split sample of the
Contractor's quality control test and participate in the IAT. The IAT for flexural strength will be the average
flexural strength of four test beams prepared according to the requirements of Section 106 and cured for seven
days in the field before being transferred to the IAT lab. IAT specimens will be tested at 28 days.
(f) Testing Schedule. All samples used to determine Incentive or Disincentive payment by quality level formulas
in accordance with Section 105, will be selected by a stratified random process.
111
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
AND DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
Table 106-2
QC TESTING SCHEDULE - ITEM 412
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE
PAVEMENT, FLEXURAL STRENGTH CRITERIA
Table 106-3
QC TESTING SCHEDULE - ITEM 412
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE
PAVEMENT, COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH CRITERIA
Element Minimum Testing Frequency
Contractor's Quality Control
Aggregate Gradation
and Sand Equivalent
For the first five days, minimum of 1/day, then
1/10,000 sq. yds. After 5 days, 1/40,000 sq. yds.
Slump First three loads each day, then as needed for control.
Water Cement Ratio First three loads each day, then 1/500 cu. yds.
Air Content and Yield Minimum of 1/day, then 1/2,500 sq. yds.
Flexural Strength Minimum of 1/day, then 1/2,500 sq. yds.
Compressive Strength 1/10,000 sq. yds.
Pavement Thickness In accordance with subsection 412.21.
Pull Test Joints
Minimum of six transverse and six longitudinal joint
locations for the 1st 2500 linear feet, then three
transverse and three longitudinal joints thereafter
Load Transfer Dowel
Bar Placement In accordance with subsection 412.13 (b) 2
Tining Depth 1 per 528 linear feet in each lane and shoulder wider
than 8 feet.
Element Minimum Testing Frequency
Contractor's Quality Control
Aggregate Gradation Minimum of 1/day, then 1/10,000 sq. yds.
Slump First three loads each day, then as needed for control.
Compressive Strength,
Air Content, Yield, and
Sand Equivalent
Minimum of 1/day, then 1/2,500 sq. yds.
Pavement Thickness In accordance with subsection 412.21.
Pull Test Joints
Minimum of six transverse and six longitudinal joint
locations for the 1st 2500 linear feet, then three
transverse and three longitudinal joints thereafter
Load Transfer Dowel
Bar Placement In accordance with subsection 412.13 (b) 2
Tining Depth 1 per 528 linear feet in each lane and shoulder wider
than 8 feet.
Water Cement Ratio First three loads each day, then 1/500 cu. yds.
112
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
AND DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
Subsection 412.10 shall include the following:
The Contractor shall provide a MIT-Scan-2 which is manufactured by MIT GmbH.
The Contractor shall ensure the MIT-Scan-2 is calibrated for the specific dowel bar size or load transfer device
being placed, and is operating within the manufacturer’s tolerances. The Contractor shall also ensure that the
operator of the MIT-Scan-2 is fully competent in the use of the device. The Contractor shall supply the serial
number of the device to be utilized on the project.
In subsection, 412.13 (a) 3rd paragraph, delete the first sentence and replace with the following:
Holes with a diameter 1/4 inch greater than the bar diameter shall be drilled laterally into the hardened concrete
slabs at one half the slab depth, 36 inches on center, 15 to 16 inches deep.
In subsection 412.13 (a), delete the 5th paragraph and replace with the following:
When tie bars are placed in plastic state concrete or drilled and epoxied into a construction joint, and if required
by the Engineer, the Contractor shall demonstrate by testing at least 15 of the tie bars that the bar pullout
resistance is at least 11,250 pounds with slippage of 1/16 inch or less. If two or more tie bars do not meet the
required pullout resistance, then another 15 tie bars shall be tested. If any of the second 15 do not meet the
required pullout resistance, then all remaining tie bars shall be tested. The Contractor shall perform additional
pullout tests and take corrective action when and as directed. All steps taken to test bars, and to correct, repair or
replace failed tie bars and the surrounding failed area shall be at the Contractor’s expense. Concrete strength shall
have a compressive strength of at least 2500 psi before testing. ASTM E488 shall be used for performing pullout
testing..
Delete subsection 412.13 (b) 1 and 412.13 (b) 2 and replace with the following:
1. Longitudinal Weakened Plane Joints. Epoxy coated deformed steel tie bars shall be inserted into the plastic
state concrete after the auger. In the event the tie bars are placed behind the machine paving mold, vibration will
be required during placement. Other methods of bar placement may be acceptable if the Contractor can
demonstrate satisfactory performance of the alternate method. Proposals of alternate methods or additional costs
associated with other methods shall be at the Contractor’s expense. Tie bars shall be placed according to a method
approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall use an MIT Scan-2 to evaluate the location of tie bars that cannot
be visually inspected. Each longitudinal joint located within the dowel bar test locations described in subsection
412.13 (b) 2 that were not visually inspected shall be evaluated with the MIT Scan-2. The MIT Scan-2 shall be
calibrated for the tie bar size placed. The tie bars shall be located within the middle third of the slab, and a
minimum of ½ inch below the saw cut. Tie bars shall have a minimum embedment of 12 inches on each side of
the joint. The weakened plane joint shall be made by sawing in hardened concrete in accordance with the plan
details.
Tie bars that are cut during sawing operations shall be replaced at the contractor’s expense. Tie bars that are
located less than 2 inches above the bottom of the slab shall be replaced at the contractor’s expense. Tie bars that
are not embedded a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the joint shall be replaced. When the spacing between
two in-place tie bars exceeds 40 inches but less than 72 inches, a tie bar will be installed halfway between the two
tie bars, unless this installation location is within 12 inches of a transverse weakened plane joint. When the
spacing between two in-place tie bars exceeds 72 inches, tie bars will be installed at an even spacing not to exceed
36 inches, but shall not be installed within 12 inches of a transverse weakened plane joint. The Contractor shall
submit to the Engineer a method for replacing the tie bars. The Contractor shall not proceed to replace the tie bars
until the method for replacement has been approved by the Engineer.
113
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
AND DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
2. Transverse Weakened Plane Joints. When dowel bars are specified in the Contract, they shall be installed
within the tolerances and of the size, grade, and spacing specified. Horizontal support wires or shipping braces
shall be non-deformed bars or wires with a diameter less than or equal to 0.307 inches (gauge 0 wire). The
number of horizontal support wires or shipping braces shall be limited to five per assembly. The horizontal
support wires or shipping braces shall not be cut prior to concrete placement. The center of the dowel assembly or
the insertion location shall be marked on both sides of the pavement slab for reference in sawing the joint. Dowel
bars shall be furnished in a rigid welded assembly or placed by a dowel bar insertion (DBI) machine.
When a DBI is used, the Contractor shall submit details and specifications of the proposed slip-form paver and
DBI to the Engineer a minimum of 14 calendar days prior to the Concrete Pavement Pre-Paving Conference. The
Contractor shall detail his methodology for ensuring correct marking of dowel bar insertion points and correct
sawing of the joints. The Contractor shall ensure that the slip-form paver is compatible with the DBI.
The rigid assembly shall be fabricated from number 1/0 wire or heavier with vertical support wires every 1 foot. Assembly
shall be securely fastened to the subbase and constructed to firmly hold all the dowel bars at T/2 depth, parallel to each other
and to the pavement grade and alignment.
See Standard Plan M-412-1 for schematic describing the measurement of each tolerance.
.A weighted-score system will be used to conduct a joint-by-joint evaluation of rotational misalignments of the
dowel bars. The Joint Score is a measure of the combined effects of rotational misaligned dowel bars at a joint. A
Joint Score is determined by summing the product of the weights (given in Table 412-1) and the number of bars
in each misalignment category and adding 1. For example, if a joint has four misaligned bars in the 0.6 to 0.8
inch range, the joint score is 9; if a joint has one misaligned bar in the range 0.6 to 0.8 inch and one bar in the 1 to
1.5 inch range, the score is 8. A Joint Score of 10 is the critical level, above which the risk of joint locking is
considered high.
Table 412-1
WEIGHTING FACTORS USED TO DETERMINE JOINT SCORE
Range of Rotational
Misalignment Weight
< 0.6 in. 0
≥ 0.6 in and < 0.8 in. 2
≥ 0.8 in and < 1 in. 4
≥ 1 in 5
Individual Dowel Bar Rejection Criteria:
Rotational Alignment:
Any bar with a misalignment greater than 1.5 in.
Longitudinal (side) shift:
Any bar that is not embedded at least 6 inches on each side of the joint
Depth:
Any bar within the top 3 inches of the pavement or at a depth less than the saw-cut depth.
Any bar within the bottom 3 inches of the pavement
When rigid assemblies are used to install dowel bars and the bars are rejected for depth, the Contractor may core the
pavement to verify the MIT Scan depth results.
114
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
AND DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
Joint Rejection Criteria:
Any joint with a Joint Score greater than 10. An individual joint may be allowed if the two longitudinally adjacent joints
each have a joint score less than or equal to 10
Any joint that does not have at least three acceptable dowel bars in each wheel path.
Corrective Measures: The following corrective measures will be allowed for the bars or joints that are rejected.
Rotational misalignment.
Saw-cut the misaligned bars. Joints with less than three un-cut bars in each wheel path will require the addition
of dowel bars using an approved dowel bar retrofit method.
Longitudinal (side) Shift and missing bars.
Addition of dowel bars using an approved dowel bar retrofit method.
Depth.
Inadequate cover above the bar—Remove the bar and install a replacement bar using an approved dowel bar
retrofit method.
Inadequate cover below the bar— Addition of dowel bars using an approved dowel bar retrofit method.
Retrofitted dowel bars shall not exceed the dowel bar rejection criteria.
In addition to the above procedures, the Contractor may propose removal and replacement of the affected slabs.
The Contractor shall submit his method of repair to the Engineer for approval.
The Contractor shall demonstrate his ability to place dowel bars in conformance with the specifications by
placement of a test section.
The test section shall be a minimum of 300 feet in length. Upon completion of the test section, the Contractor
shall shut down paving operations. During the shutdown period, the Contractor shall evaluate all joints in the test
section using the MIT-Scan-2, analyze the results and submit the results to the Engineer. Paving operations shall
not be restarted until the Engineer approves the test section results. The test section will be found acceptable if
85% of the dowel bars placed are found to be within the rejection criteria. All dowel bars exceeding the Rejection
Criteria must be addressed using the above corrective measures. The Contractor may continue paving at his own
risk before the test section evaluation is complete.
If the Project has less than 500 linear feet of pavement, the test section will not be required. If a Project does not
have sections of continuous pavement greater than 45 linear feet, the test section will not be required.
Upon completion of the test section(s) and for each week of production, the Contractor shall prepare an electronic
report generated using MagnoProof software and submit it to the Engineer at the start of each working week
during production for the previous weeks work. All data shall be submitted in the manufacturer’s native file
format, along with the calibration files.
The electronic report shall include the following:
(1) Contract number, date, highway number and direction of traffic.
(2) Joint number, lane number and station.
(3) Bar number and x-location of dowel bar.
(4) Horizontal and vertical misalignment of each bar in inches.
(5) Overall misalignment of each bar in inches of each bar
(6) Side shift of each bar in inches.
(7) Depth to center of each bar in inches.
(8) Joint Score
(9) All measurements exceeding the rejection criteria shall be highlighted in red.
115
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
AND DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
Due to potential magnetic interference from tie bars, dowel bars located within 15 inches of a tied joint shall not
be included in the evaluation.
When the test section is found to be unacceptable, the Contractor shall perform corrective actions and place a
second test section. If the second test section is found to be unacceptable, the Contractor shall pave no more than
500 feet per day until an acceptable test section has been achieved.
Once a test section is successfully completed, Dowel Bar Placement testing frequency shall be a minimum of one
location per 1,250 linear feet of each continuous lane including climbing lanes, passing lanes, acceleration and
deceleration lanes and ramps. Sections greater than 45 linear feet and less than 1,250 linear feet require a
minimum one of test location. . Testing locations shall be determined by a random procedure so that each area
has a randomly selected transverse joint location. At each location, five consecutive joints shall be tested.
Sections of continuous pavement constructed by the project less than 45 linear feet will not require Dowel Bar
Placement Testing.
When any joint score is greater than10 or any one bar in a single joint exceeds the rejection criteria, joints shall be
tested in each direction from the rejected joint, until two consecutive joints in each direction are found to be
within the rejection criteria.
All delays or costs associated with equipment being rejected for use by the Engineer will not be paid for by the
Department, and will be considered a Non-excusable Delay in accordance with subsection 108.08 (c) 2.
When concrete shoulders or widenings are constructed subsequent to the driving lanes, transverse weakened plane
joints shall immediately be formed in the plastic concrete of these widenings to create an extension of the existing
transverse joint. This tooled joint shall be formed in such a manner that it controls the cracking and shall be sawed
and sealed in accordance with the above requirements.
In subsection 412.21, delete the first sentence in the sixth paragraph.
In subsection 601.02, delete Class E and P Concrete from Table 601-1 and replace with the following:
Concrete
Class
Required
Field
Compressive
Strength
(psi)
Cementitious
Material
Content:
Minimum or
Range
(lbs/yd3)
Air
Content:
% Range
(Total)
Water
/Cementitious
Material Ratio:
Maximum or
Range
E 4500 at 28
days 520 4 – 8 0.44
P 4500 at 28
days 520 4 – 8 0.44
In subsection 601.02, delete the sixth and ninth paragraphs and replace with the following:
Class E concrete is used for fast track pavements needing early strength in order to open a pavement to service
soon after placement. Class E concrete shall meet the requirements of Class P concrete. ASTM C150 Type III or
ASTM C1157 Type HE cement may be used. Accelerating admixtures may be used.
116
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
AND DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
Class P concrete is used in pavements. Additional requirements are: The Required Field Flexural Strength shall be 650 psi
when flexural strength acceptance is specified. The laboratory trial mix shall produce a minimum average 28 day flexural
strength 700 psi. Two aggregate gradation options are available:
(a) Standard Gradation (SG). The concrete mix shall consist of a minimum 55 percent AASHTO M 43 size No. 357 or
No. 467 coarse aggregate by weight of total aggregate. If all transverse joints are doweled, the concrete mix shall
consist of a minimum 55 percent AASHTO M 43 sizes No. 57, No. 6, No. 67, No. 357, or No. 467 coarse aggregate
by weight of total aggregate.
(b) Optimized Gradation (OG). Aggregate proportions must be a result of an optimized combined aggregate gradation
(CAG) developed by an approved mix design technique such as Shilstone or KU Mix. The amount of aggregate in
the CAG passing the 19 mm (¾ inch) sieve and retained on the12.5 mm (½ inch) sieve shall be a minimum of 8
percent for the trial mix design. The coarseness factor (CF) and workability factor (WF) must plot within the
workability box (ABCD) depicted graphically by the following 4 coordinate points:
a. Point A> (CF,WF) 72, 31
b. Point B> (CF,WF) 44.5, 35
c. Point C> (CF,WF) 44.5, 43.5
d. Point D> (CF,WF) 72, 40
Figure 601-1
CF = (S / T) x 100
Where:
S = Percent Cumulative Retained on 9.5 mm (3/8 inch) Sieve
T = Percent Cumulative retained on 2.36 mm (No. 8) Sieve
WF is the percent passing the 2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve. Increase workability factor by 2.5 percentage points
for every 94 pounds per cubic yard of cementitious material used in excess of 564 pounds per cubic yard
in the mix design. Decrease workability factor by 2.5 percentage points for every 94 pounds per cubic
yard of cementitious material used below 564 pounds per cubic yard in the mix design. Do not adjust the
workability factor if the amount of cementitious material is 564 pounds per cubic yard.
Delete Subsection 601.05 (7) and replace with the following:
(7) Class E and P concrete shall include AASHTO T97 (ASTM C78) Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using
Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading). When compressive strength is indicated, at least two specimens
117
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
AND DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
will be tested at 7 days and four specimens at 28 days. When flexural strength is indicated, at least two
specimens will be tested at 3, 7 and 14 days and four specimens at 28 days.
When flexural strength is indicated, the mix design shall include AASHTO T198 (ASTM C496) Splitting
Tensile Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. At least two specimens will be tested at 3, 7and 14 and
28 days. The splitting tensile strength specimens for each age shall be cast from the same trail batch as the
same age flexural strength specimens. Multiple trial batches may be used. The Engineer will verify the
correlation curve during production by casting and testing Splitting Tensile specimens. If the correlated
flexural strength of the splitting tensile sample is not within 50 psi of the verification beam specimen’s
flexural strength, a new correlation curve shall be required if low flexural strength specimen are to be
evaluated.
Subsection 601.05 shall include the following in the second paragraph:
(8) Class P concrete with an OG shall indicate the gradation proportions that results in a combined aggregate
gradation corresponding to compliance within the specified CF and WF box and shall include the
following charts used to perform aggregate gradation analysis:
(i) Coarseness Factor
(ii) Workability Factor
(iii) 0.45 power
(iv) Combined gradation
Delete Subsection 601.06 (10) and (11) and replace with the following:
(10) Weights of fine and coarse aggregates or combined weight when an OG is pre-blended
(11) Moisture of fine and coarse aggregates or combined moisture when an OG is pre-blended
Subsection 601.06 (c) shall include the following:
Aggregates for Class P concrete using an OG, a combination of aggregates (stockpiled separately) shall be
combined prior to the stationary charging drum to meet the approved CAG.
In subsection, 709.03, delete the first paragraph and replace with the following:
709.03 Dowel Bars and Tie Bars. Tie bars for longitudinal and transverse joints shall conform to AASHTO M
284 and shall be grade 60, epoxy-coated, and deformed. Bar size shall be as designated on the Standard Plan M-
412-1.
118
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
AND DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
Colorado Procedure 65-15a
Standard Practice for
EVALUATING LOW CONCRETE STRENGTH TEST RESULTS OF CONCRETE CYLINDERS
1. SCOPE
1.1 Field test procedures and strength test
results for standard molded and cured cylinders
and beams shall be evaluated separately for each
class of concrete. Such evaluation shall be
conducted to determine if tests have been
conducted in accordance with the ASTM,
AASHTO and/or approved CDOT procedures
and specifications.
1.1.1 The evaluation process will include
investigation to ensure that proper procedures
were followed in the following areas:
-Molding
-Curing methods and temperatures
-Initial curing period
-Laboratory curing period
-Testing procedure
-Personnel qualifications
NOTE: Contact the Central Laboratory at
(303) 398-6543 at least 48 hours before coring
so that additional instruction can be given.
1.2 This practice is comprised of two methods.
Method A for evaluation of low concrete
compressive strength and Method B for the
evaluation of low concrete flexural strength.
2. EVALUATION
2.1 Should cylinders or beams fall below the
specified strength, a field investigation will be
conducted as follows:
2.1.1 If test procedures outlined in
Subsection 1.1 were not followed, results will be
considered to be invalid and the tests shall be
discarded. If cores are required, they will be at
the expense of CDOT to replace acceptance
cylinders and at the expense of the Contractor to
replace QC beams.
2.1.2 The concrete supplier will furnish
concrete batch tickets of the suspected low
strength concrete for comparison against
approved mix design.
2.1.3 Batch tickets will be checked to
determine job site water addition.
2.1.4 Evaluation of the concrete in question
will be made based on Subsections 2.1.1, 2.1.2
and 2.1.3.
3. Section Deleted
4. CORING
4.1 This procedure describes the method used
to obtain and evaluate cores from in-place
concrete. This will be performed in accordance
with the latest revision of AASHTO T 24
(ASTM C 42), with the exception that
119
Method A Compressive Strength
6. PROCEDURE
6.1 Within 45 days after placement, cores with
a diameter at least 3 times the nominal
maximum size of the coarse aggregate used in
the concrete shall be obtained in accordance
with AASHTO T 24 (ASTM C 42). The cores
shall be conditioned in accordance with
Subsection 4.1. The cores will then be tested for
compressive strength between 24 and 48 hours
after removal.
6.2 At least 3 representative cores shall be
taken from the concrete represented by each out-
of-specification cylinder set.
6.3 Coring location shall be in locations
directed by the Engineer. .
6.4 Core holes shall be filled with low slump
concrete or mortar.
6.5 If the compressive strength of any one core
differs from the average by more than 10% that
core will be discarded and the average will be
determined using the compressive strengths of
the remaining two cores. If more than one
core’s compressive strength differs from the
average by more than 10%, the average will be
determined using all three cores.
6.6 Pay factors for strength of structural
concrete shall be according to Table 601-3 of the
CDOT Standard Specifications, and will be used
to price reduce the cores or standard test
cylinders, whichever are higher in strength. Pay
factors for concrete pavement will be evaluated
according to subsection 105.06 of the CDOT
Standard Specifications.
6.7 The following examples are for structural
concrete in accordance with Subsection 601.17
of the CDOT Standard Specifications:
Example 1:
Given: f 'c = 3000 psi
Concrete test cylinders averaged 2800 psi.
PSI
Core 1 2900
Core 2 2850
Core 3 2450
Average compressive strength of 3 cores = 2730
psi.
Find: Is the concrete in the structure adequate
under CDOT specifications?
Solution:
Test Evaluation:
f 'c = 3000 psi
Average compressive strength of 3 cores - 2730
psi
Do any compressive strengths differ from the
average by more than 10%?
10% of Average compressive strength = 273 psi
Core 1: 2900 - 2730 = 170 psi, < 273 therefore
OK
Core 2: 2850 - 2730 = 120 psi, < 273 therefore
120
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
AND DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
Example 2:
Price Reduction of Concrete
In this example calculation, a certain project has a pay item for 720 cubic yards of Concrete Class
D (bridge). The contractor bid $700 per cubic yards. To cover this quantity 8 sets of cylinders were
molded and tested for compressive strength at 28 days. Some of the test results showed the concrete had
less than the required 28-day compressive strength of 4500 psi. The project engineer has used all eight
sets of cylinders to calculate the appropriate price reduction.
Average
Cylinder Cylinder Cylinder Cylinder
Test Strength Strength Strength Strength
Number psi psi psi Psi
1 4510 4270 4580 4450
2 6200 6100 6250 6180
3 3800 4310 3840 3980
4 4210 4380 4060 4220
5 4040 3830 3790 3890
6 4130 4020 3930 4030
7 4710 4670 4790 4720
8 4960 5160 5200 5110
TABLE 65-1
The average strength of three 28-day cylinders is used to determine the acceptability of concrete
placed in a structure. The break results of test numbers 1, 3, 4, 5 & 6 are below the required 28-day
strength of 4500 psi for bridge decks. According to Section 601.17(c) of the CDOT Standard
Specification for Road and Bridge Construction “The concrete will be considered acceptable when the
running average of three consecutive strength tests is equal to or greater than the specified strength and no
single test falls below the specified strength by more than 3.5 MPa (500 psi).”
Average Average
Cylinder of Three Strength
Test Strength Consecutive Below fc'
Number psi Tests (psi) psi
1 4450 --- ---
2 6180 --- ---
3 3980 4870 520
4 4220 4793 280
5 3890 4030 610
6 4030 4047 470
7 4720 4213 ---
8 5110 4620 ---
TABLE 65-2
The table above shows that the running average of three consecutive tests fall below the required
strength of 4500 psi, and the concrete placed will be price reduced according to the pay factors in Table
121
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
AND DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
601-3 in Subsection 601.17. Test numbers 3, 4, 5, & 6 are represented in the low consecutive averages
and will be price reduced. Test number 1 is considered acceptable and will not be price reduced because
its running average with the next two tests is greater than the required strength, and it is not more than
500 psi below the required strength.
To price reduce the low strength results you need to know the bid price for the concrete, and the
quantity represented by each test. As stated above, the concrete was bid at $700.00 per cubic yard. The
contractor placed 720 cubic yards of Concrete Class D (bridge). The 720 cubic yards are represented by 8
sets of cylinders. Therefore, on this project the Engineer determined that each test represents 90 cubic
yards. This is only an example and the quantity represented per test shall be determined by the Project
Engineer. The formula for price reduction is:
PR P ( 1 PF ) CY
Where:
PR = Price Reduction,
P = Bid Price of Concrete,
PF = Pay Factor from Table 601-3 of Subsection 601.17,
CY = Cubic Yards represented by the test.
Average Pay
Average of Three Strength Factor
Test Strength Consecutive Below fc' Table Price
Number Psi Tests (psi) psi 601-2E Reduction
1 4450 --- --- --- ---
2 6180 --- --- --- ---
3 3980 4870 520 0.65 $22,050.00
4 4220 4793 280 0.92 $ 5,040.00
5 3890 4030 610 0.54 $28,980.00
6 4030 4047 470 0.75 $15,750.00
7 4720 4213 --- --- ---
8 5110 4620 --- --- ---
Total Price Reduction $71,820.00
TABLE 65-3
The Contractor has the option to obtain cores from the areas represented by tests 3, 4, 5 & 6 before
the concrete is 45 days old. Coring will be in accordance to CP 65. In this case the contractor elected to
obtain cores from the bridge deck. The following is a summary of the core break results:
Average
Core Core Core Core
Test Strength Strength Strength Strength
Area psi psi psi psi
3 4230 4010 4100 4110
4 4630 4570 4510 4570
5 3690 3740 3700 3710
6 4270 4510 4400 4390
TABLE 65-4
122
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
AND DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
The core strength results will replace the cylinder strength results if the core strengths are higher. In
this case, cores from areas 3, 4 & 6 will replace the cylinder strength results for tests 3, 4 & 6. The
following table shows the new price reductions:
Average Average Pay
Cylinder Core Strength Factor
Test Strength Strength Below fc' Table Price
Number psi psi psi 601-2E Reduction
1 4450 --- --- --- ---
2 6180 --- --- --- ---
3 3980 4110 390 0.84 $ 10,080.00
4 4220 4570 --- --- ---
5 3890 3710 610 0.54 $28,980.00
6 4030 4390 110 0.96 $ 2,520.00
7 4720 --- --- --- ---
8 5110 --- --- --- ---
Total Adjusted Price Reduction $41,580.00
TABLE 65-5
123
Method B Flexural Strength
7. PROCEDURE
7.1 Within 45 days after placement, cores of
the same size as the splitting tensile cylinders
used in the trial mix shall be obtained in
accordance with AASHTO T 24 (ASTM C 42).
The cores shall be conditioned in accordance
with Subsection 4.1. The cores will then be
tested for splitting tensile strength between 24
and 48 hours after removal.
7.2 At least 3 representative cores shall be
taken from a single slab represented by each low
flexural strength. A core containing rebar or
dowel bars shall be discarded and a new core
shall be taken.
7.3 Coring location shall be in locations
directed by the Engineer. .
7.4 Core holes shall be filled with low slump
concrete or mortar.
7.5 If the splitting tensile strength of any one
core differs from the average by more than 10%
that core will be discarded and the average will
be determined using the splitting tensile of the
remaining two cores. If more than one core’s
splitting tensile strength differs from the average
by more than 10%, the average will be
determined using all three cores.
7.6 The flexural strength of the concrete will be
determined by using a correlation of the
concrete’s flexural strength to its splitting tensile
strength.
7.6.1 Using the flexural strength and
splitting tensile strengths from the concrete’s
trial mix, for each age, plot the flexural strength
on one axis and the splitting tensile strength on
the second axis. Determine a linear equation
relating the two strengths.
7.6.2 Using the average splitting tensile
strength from a set of cores, and the equation in
section 7.6.1, determine the corresponding
flexural strength.
7.7 Pay factors for concrete pavement will be
evaluated according to subsection 105.06 of the
CDOT Standard Specifications.
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
AND DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
Example 3:
The following example shows a plot of flexural strength and splitting tensile strength.
Age
Average
Flexural
Strength
(psi)
Average
Splitting
Tensile
Strength (psi)
3 545 480
7 580 505
14 635 560
28 720 650
125
November 6, 2014
REVISION OF SECTION 106
BUY AMERICA REQUIREMENTS
Section 106 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 106.11 shall include the following:
The Contractor shall maintain a document summarizing the date and quantity of all steel and iron material delivered to
the project. The document shall show the pay item, quantity of material delivered to the project, along with the
quantity of material installed by the cutoff date for the monthly progress payment. The summary shall also reconcile
the pay item quantities to the submitted Buy America certifications. The Contractor shall also maintain documentation
of the project delivered cost of all foreign steel or iron permanently incorporated into the project. Both documents
shall be submitted to the Engineer within five days of the cutoff date for the monthly progress payment. A monthly
summary shall be required even if no steel or iron products are incorporated into the project during the month. The
summary document does not relieve the Contractor of providing the necessary Buy America certifications of steel and
or iron prior to permanent incorporation into the project.
126
February 3, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 106
CERTIFICATES OF COMPLIANCE AND
CERTIFIED TEST REPORTS
Section 106 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 106.12, delete the second paragraph and replace it with the following:
The original Certificate of Compliance shall include the Contractor’s original signature as directed above. The original
signature (including corporate title) on the Certificate of Compliance, under penalty of perjury, shall be of a person
having legal authority to act for the manufacturer. It shall state that the product or assembly to be incorporated into the
project has been sampled and passed all specified tests in conformity to the plans and specifications for this project.
One legible copy of the fully signed Certificate of Compliance shall be furnished to the Engineer prior to installation of
material. The original shall be provided to the Engineer before payment for the represented item will be made.
In subsection 106.13, delete the second paragraph and replace it with the following:
The Certified Test Report shall be a legible copy or an original document and shall include the Contractor’s original
signature as directed above. The signature (including corporate title) on the Certified Test Report, under penalty of
perjury, shall be of a person having legal authority to act for the manufacturer or the independent testing laboratory. It
shall state that the test results show that the product or assembly to be incorporated into the project has been sampled
and passed all specified tests in conformity to the plans and specifications for this project. One legible copy or original
document of the fully signed Certified Test Report shall be furnished to the Engineer prior to installation of material.
Failure to comply may result in delays to the project or rejection of the materials.
127
October 31, 2013
REVISION OF SECTION 106
MATERIAL SOURCES
Section 106 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 106.02 (a), delete the third paragraph and replace with the following:
The Contract will indicate whether the Department has or has not obtained the necessary County or City Zoning
Clearance and the required permit from Colorado Department of Natural Resources needed to explore and remove
materials from the available source. If the Department did not obtain the necessary clearances or permits, the
Contractor shall obtain them. Any delays to the project or additional expenses that are incurred while these clearances
or permits are being obtained shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall ensure that the
requirements of the permits do not conflict with the pit construction and reclamation requirements shown in the
Contract for the available source.
In subsection 106.02 (b), delete the first paragraph and replace with the following:
(b) Contractor Source. Sources of sand, gravel, or borrow other than available sources will be known as contractor
sources. The contractor source will be tested by the Department and approved by the Engineer prior to incorporation of
the material into the project. If the submitted materials do not meet the contract specifications it will become the
Contractor’s responsibility to re-sample and test the material. The Contractor will supply the Department with passing
test results from an AASHTO accredited laboratory and signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer. If requested by
the Engineer, the Department will then re-sample and re-test the material for compliance to the contract specifications.
The Contractor shall produce material which meets contract specifications throughout construction of the project.
The cost of sampling, testing, and corrective action by the Contractor will not be paid for separately but shall be
included in the work.
128
January 30, 2014
REVISION OF SECTION 106
SUPPLIER LIST
Section 106 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 106.01 shall include the following:
Prior to beginning any work the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a completed Form 1425, Supplier List.
During the performance of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit an updated Form 1425 when requested by the
Engineer.
Failure to comply with the requirements of this subsection shall be grounds for withholding of progress payments.
129
February 3, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 107
RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGE CLAIMS,
INSURANCE TYPES AND COVERAGE LIMITS
Section 107 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Delete subsection 107.15(c) and replace it with the following:
(c) Each insurance policy shall include provisions preventing cancellation or non-renewal without at least 30 days prior notice to
Contractor. The Contractor shall forward to the Engineer any such notice received within seven days of the Contractor’s receipt of
such notice.
130
January 30, 2014
REVISION OF SECTION 107
WARNING LIGHTS FOR WORK VEHICLES AND EQUIPMENT
Section 107 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 107.06 (b) shall include the following:
All work vehicles and mobile equipment shall be equipped with one or more functioning warning lights mounted as
high as practicable, which shall be capable of displaying in all directions one or more flashing, oscillating, or rotating
lights for warning roadway traffic. The lights shall be amber in color. The warning lights shall be activated when the
work vehicle or mobile equipment is operating within the roadway, right of way or both. All supplemental lights shall
be SAE Class 1 certified.
131
May 2, 2013
REVISION OF SECTION 108
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
Section 108 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 108.09 delete the schedule of liquidated damages and replace with the following:
Original Contract Amount ($) Liquidated Damages per Calendar Day ($)
From More Than To And Including
0 250,000 400
250,000 500,000 700
500,000 1,000,000 1,100
1,000,000 2,000,000 1,600
2,000,000 4,000,000 2,500
4,000,000 10,000,000 3,300
10,000,000
---------------
3,300 plus 200 Per Each Additional 1,000,000
Contract Amount or Part Thereof Over
10,000,000
132
July 31, 2014
REVISION OF SECTION 108
PROJECT SCHEDULE
Section 108 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Delete subsection 108.03 and replace with the following:
108.03 Project Schedule.
(a) Definitions.
Activity. An activity is a project element on a schedule that affects completion of the project. An activity has a
description, start date, finish date, duration, and one or more logic ties.
Activity ID. A unique, alphanumeric, identification code assigned to an activity and remains constant throughout
the project.
Bar Chart. A simple depiction of a Project Schedule without relationships or supporting logic of the schedule.
Calendar. Defined work periods and no work periods that determine when project activities can occur. Multiple
calendars may be used for different activities; e.g., a 5-day work-week and a 7-day work-week calendar.
Constraint. A restriction imposed in a schedule, which fixes a value that would otherwise be calculated within the
schedule. Examples of values that can be fixed by a constraint include start date, end date, and completion date.
Critical Path. The sequence of activities that determines the duration of the project.
Critical Path Method Scheduling. (CPM Scheduling) is a logic-based planning technique using activity durations
and relationships between activities to calculate a schedule determining the minimum total project duration.
Data Date. The starting point from which to schedule all remaining work.
Duration. The estimated amount of time needed to complete an activity.
Float. The amount of time between the earliest date an activity can start and the latest date when an activity must
start ,or the earliest date an activity can finish and latest date when an activity can finish before the activity
becomes critical. The time between the Project Schedule completion date and the Contract completion date is not
considered float.
Gantt Chart. A time-scaled graphical display of the project’s schedule.
Lag. A time-value assigned to a relationship.
Logic. Relationships between activities defining the sequence of work (See also predecessor activity and successor
activity).
Milestone. An activity, with no duration used to represent an event.
Open-Ended Activity. An activity that does not have both a predecessor activity and a successor activity.
133
July 31, 2014
REVISION OF SECTION 108
PROJECT SCHEDULE
Predecessor Activity. An activity that is defined by schedule logic to precede another activity.
Relationship. The interdependence between activities.
Salient Feature. An item of work that is of special interest for CDOT in coordinating the project schedule but may
not affect the overall completion of the project.
Successor Activity. An activity that is defined by schedule logic to follow another activity.
Time-Scaled Logic Diagram. Gantt chart that illustrates logic links depicting both schedule logic and the time at
which activities are performed.
(b) Project Schedule - General
The Contractor shall use either Microsoft Project or Primavera Scheduling software to develop and manage a CPM
Project Schedule to plan, schedule, and report the progress of the work. Prior to, or at the Pre-construction
Conference, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing, which scheduling software the Contractor shall use
to manage the project. The Contractor’s selection and use of particular scheduling software cannot be changed
after the first schedule submittal. If the Contractor selects Primavera, the Contractor shall calculate the schedule
using the Retained Logic scheduling option. The Department will not allow use of bar charts for the Project
Schedule.
The Contractor shall submit schedules for approval by the Engineer. The purpose of these schedules is to allow the
Contractor and the Department to jointly manage the work and evaluate progress. The schedules also serve to
evaluate the affect of changes and delays to the scheduled project completion. Either party may require a formal
schedule review meeting.
The Contractor’s schedule shall consist of a time-scaled logic diagram and shall show the logical progression of all
activities required to complete the work.
The Contractor shall use activity descriptions that ensure the work is easily identifiable. The Contractor shall show
the no-work days in the schedule calendars.
The Contractor shall use durations for individual construction activities that do not exceed 15 calendar days unless
approved by the Engineer. The Contractor may group a series of activities with an aggregate duration of five days
or less into a single activity. Non-construction activities may have durations exceeding 15 working days, as
approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor may include summary bars in the schedule as long as the detailed activities to complete the work
are displayed.
The Contractor shall not use the following:
(1) Negative lags
(2) Lags in excess of 10 working days without approval by the Engineer. The Contractor’s written request shall justify the
need for the lag. Lags shall be identified.
(3) Start-to-finish relationships.
134
July 31, 2014
REVISION OF SECTION 108
PROJECT SCHEDULE
(4) Open-ended activities - every activity shall have at least one predecessor activity and at least one successor activity,
except for the first and last activities in the network. If the contractor uses a start-to-start relationship to link two
activities, then both of those two activities should also have successor activities linked by either a finish-to-start or a
finish-to-finish relationship.
(5) Constraints without approval by the Engineer. The Contractor’s written request shall explain why the use of constraints
in the schedule is necessary.
The Project Schedule shall show all activities required by all parties to complete the work. The Project Schedule
shall include subcontracted work, delivery dates for critical material, submittal and review periods, permits and
governmental approvals, milestone requirements, utility work by others and no work periods. The Contractor, its
subcontractors, suppliers, and engineers, at any tier, shall perform the work according to the approved Project
Schedule.
Float within the Baseline Schedule or any other Project Schedule is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either
party, but is a project resource available to both parties as needed until it is depleted.
For any schedule submittal that shows completion in less than 85 percent of the Contract Time, the Contractor
shall submit planned production rates in the schedule for all activities with float of 10 days or less. The Engineer
may require additional methods statements for activities with float of 10 days or less.
The Engineer’s review of the schedule will not exceed 10 calendar days. The Engineer will provide the Contractor
with one of the following responses within 10 days after receipt of the Project Schedule:
(1) Approved, no exceptions taken;
(2) Approved-as-Noted; or
(3) Revise and Resubmit within 10 days.
The Contractor shall not assume that approval of the Project Schedule relieves the Contractor of its obligation to
complete all work within the Contract Time.
(c) Schedule Submittals. The Contractor shall include a time-scaled logic diagram with all schedule submittals that:
(1) Is plotted on a horizontal time-scale in accordance with the project calendar.
(2) Uses color to clearly identify the critical path.
(3) Is based on early start and early finish dates of activities.
(4) For Schedule Updates and Schedule Revisions, shows actual completion dates up to but not including the data date.
(5) Clearly shows the sequence and relationships of all activities necessary to complete the contract work.
(6) Includes an activity block for each activity with the following information:
135
July 31, 2014
REVISION OF SECTION 108
PROJECT SCHEDULE
Activity ID Activity Description
Original Duration Total Float
Early start date Early finish date
Late start date* Late finish date*
Actual Start date^ Actual Finish date^
Calendar used on the activity Activity Responsibility
Remaining Duration^ Duration Percent Complete^
Gantt chart (time-scaled logic diagram)
*Required with the Preliminary and Baseline Schedule.
^Required with the Project Schedule Update and Schedule Revision.
The Contractor shall include the following with all schedule submittals:
(1) A Job Progress Narrative Report that includes the following:
(i) A description of the work performed since the previous month’s schedule update.
(ii) A description of problems encountered or anticipated since the previous month’s schedule submission.
(iii) A description of unusual labor, shift, equipment, or material conditions or restrictions encountered or anticipated.
(iv) The status of all pending items that could affect the schedule.
(v) Explanations for milestones forecasted to occur late.
(vi) Scheduled completion date status and any change from the previous month’s submission.
(vii) An explanation for a scheduled completion date forecasted to occur before or after the contract completion date or
contract time.
(viii) Schedule Delays:
1. A description of current and anticipated delays including: Identification of the delayed activity or activities by
Activity ID(s) and description(s).
2. Delay type with reference to the relevant specification subsection.
3. Delay cause or causes.
4. Effect of the delay on other activities, milestones, and completion dates.
5. Identification of the actions needed to avoid a potential or mitigate an actual delay.
6. A description of the critical path impact and effect on the scheduled completion date in the previous month’s
schedule update.
(ix) A list of all added and deleted activities along with an explanation for the change.
(x) All logic and duration changes along with an explanation for the change.
(2) A Predecessor Activity and Successor Activity report that defines all schedule logic and clearly indicates all logical
relationships and constraints.
(3) An Early Start report listing all activities, sorted by actual start/early start date.
(4) A Float report listing all activities sorted in ascending order of available float.
(5) A Critical Path report listing all activities not yet complete with the percent complete, sorted by float and then by early
start.
(6) A listing of all non-work days.
For all required schedule submittals, the Contractor shall submit two electronic copies on two compact disk, USB
flash drive, or other media as directed by the Engineer. Electronic copies of CPM schedules shall be submitted
136
July 31, 2014
REVISION OF SECTION 108
PROJECT SCHEDULE
both in the native schedule format and in “PDF” format. The Contractor shall also provide two printed copies of
the CPM Schedule and all reports.
Each schedule submittal shall be appropriately labeled as a Preliminary Schedule, Baseline Schedule, Project
Schedule Update, or Schedule Revision. The title bar shall include the CDOT project number, subaccount, project
name, contractor name, schedule data date. If an originally submitted schedule is revised during review, the title
bar shall also include a revision number (REV1, REV2, etc.) and revision date.
(d) Preliminary Schedule. Within 14 days of award of the Contract, the Contractor may submit a Preliminary Schedule
showing all planned activities from the Notice to Proceed through the first 60 days of the project. If the Contractor elects not
to submit a Preliminary Schedule, then the Contractor shall submit a complete Baseline Schedule within 14 days of award of
the Contract, which will be subject to all requirements of a Baseline submittal. The Preliminary Schedule shall not show any
progress and it will be approved by the Engineer before work can commence. The Preliminary Schedule shall be used as the
basis for the Baseline Schedule.
(e) Baseline Schedule. If the Contractor elects to submit a Preliminary Schedule, within 45 days of the award of Contract, the
Contractor shall submit a Baseline Schedule that includes all work activities completed within Contract Time. The Contractor
shall not show progress in the Baseline Schedule. Further partial payments will not be made beyond 60 days after the start of
Contract Time unless the Baseline Schedule is approved. When approved, the Baseline Schedule shall become the Project
Schedule.
The Contractor shall use all information known by the Contractor at the time of bid submittal to develop the
Baseline Schedule.
If the Contractor elects to submit a Baseline Schedule in lieu of a Preliminary Schedule, the Baseline Schedule
shall be approved before work can commence.
(f) Methods Statements. The Contractor shall submit a Methods Statement for each salient feature or as directed by the Engineer
that describes all work necessary to complete the feature. The Contractor shall include the following information in the
Methods Statement:
(1) Salient feature name;
(2) Responsibility for the salient feature work;
(3) Planned work procedures;
(4) The planned quantity of work per day for each salient feature using the same units of measure as the applicable pay item;
(5) The anticipated labor force by labor type;
(6) The number, types, and capacities of equipment planned for the work;
(7) The planned time for the work including the number of work days per week, number of shifts per day, and the number of
hours per shift.
(g) Project Schedule Update. The Contractor shall submit a monthly update of the Project Schedule updated through the cut-off
date for the monthly progress pay estimate, and a projection for completing all remaining activities. A schedule update may
show a completion date that is different than the Contract completion date, after the baseline schedule is approved. Approval
of this schedule shall not relieve the Contractor of its obligation to complete the work within the Contract Time. In this case,
the Contractor shall provide an explanation for a late scheduled completion date in the Job Progress Narrative Report included
with the schedule submittal.
137
July 31, 2014
REVISION OF SECTION 108
PROJECT SCHEDULE
When approved, the Project Schedule Update will become the Project Schedule. The Engineer will not issue a
monthly progress payment if the Engineer has not received the Project Schedule Update. The Engineer will not
make monthly progress payments for the months following the Project Schedule Update submission until the
Engineer approves the Project Schedule Update.
When the project has a maintenance or landscape establishment period, the Engineer may waive the monthly
update requirement. The Contractor shall submit a final Project Schedule Update that shows all work through the
final acceptance date.
(h) Weekly Planning Schedule. The Contractor shall submit, in writing, a Weekly Planning Schedule that shows the
Contractor’s and all Subcontractor’s planned activities for a minimum of two weeks immediately following the date of
submittal and actual days worked versus planned for the week prior to the date of submittal. This schedule shall include the
description, duration and sequence of work activities and anticipated lane closures for the upcoming two weeks. The Weekly
Planning Schedule may be a time-scaled logic diagram or other standard format as approved by the Engineer. subsection
108.03(c) Schedule Submittal requirements for reports do not apply to the Weekly Planning Schedule.
Schedule Revision. A Schedule Revision is required in the event of any major change to the work. Examples of major changes are:
(1) Significant changes in logic or methods of construction or changes to the critical path;
(2) Addition, deletion, or revision of activities required by contract modification order;
(3) Approval of a Contractor submitted Value Engineering Change Proposal;
(4) Delays in milestones or project completion;
(5) Phasing revisions, or;
(6) If the Engineer determines that the schedule does not reflect the actual work.
This revision shall include a description of the measures necessary to achieve completion of the work within the
Contract Time. The Contractor may also need to submit revised Methods Statements. The Contractor shall provide
a Schedule Revision within 10 days of written notification and shall include the diagrams and reports as described
in subsection 108.03 (b) Schedule - General and (c) Schedule Submittals. In this case, the Contractor shall provide
an explanation for a late scheduled completion date in the Job Progress Narrative Report included with the
schedule.
Once approved, the Schedule Revision becomes the Project Schedule.
(i) Payment. All costs relating to the requirements of this subsection will not be paid for separately, but shall be included in
the work.
138
January 31, 2013
REVISION OF SECTION 108
SUBLETTING OF CONTRACT
Section 108 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Delete subsection 108.01 and replace with the following:
108.01 Subletting of Contract. The Contractor shall not sublet, sell, transfer, assign, or dispose of the Contract or
Contracts, or any portion thereof without written permission of the Engineer. Prior to beginning any work by
subcontractor, the Contractor shall request permission from the Engineer by submitting a completed Sublet Permit
Application, CDOT Form No. 205. The subcontract work shall not begin until the Contractor has received the
Engineer’s written permission. The Contractor shall make all project related written subcontracts, agreements, and
purchase orders available to the Engineer for viewing, upon request and at a location convenient to the Engineer.
The Contractor will be permitted to sublet a portion of the Contract, however, the Contractor’s organization shall
perform work amounting to 30 percent or more of the total original contract amount. Any items designated in the
contract as “specialty items” may be performed by subcontract. The cost of “specialty items” so performed by
subcontract may be deducted from the total original contract amount before computing the amount of work required to
be performed by the Contractor’s own organization. The original contract amount includes the cost of material and
manufactured products which are to be purchased or produced by the Contractor and the actual agreement amounts
between the Contractor and a subcontractor. Proportional value of a subcontracted partial contract item will be verified
by the Engineer. When a firm both sells material to a prime contractor and performs the work of incorporating the
materials into the project, these two phases shall be considered in combination and as constituting a single subcontract.
The calculation of the percentage of subcontracted work shall be based on subcontract unit prices.
Subcontracts or transfer of Contract shall not release the Contractor of liability under the Contract and Bond.
139
October 31, 2013
REVISION OF SECTION 108
PAYMENT SCHEDULE (SINGLE CONSTRUCTION YEAR)
Section 108 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Delete subsection 108.04, and replace with the following:
108.04 Payment Schedule. The Contractor shall prepare a payment schedule which shall show the dollar amount of
work the Contractor expects to complete by the end of each State Fiscal Year (July 1 to June 30). The schedule shall
cover the period from the commencement of work to the expected completion date as shown on the Contractor’s
progress schedule. The payment schedule may be prepared using standard spreadsheet software such as MS Excel and
submitted in electronic format.
The Contractor shall submit the payment schedule at the preconstruction conference. The payment schedule shall show
the total dollar amount of work expected to be completed by the end of each State Fiscal Year.
The amounts shown shall include planned force account work and expected incentive payments.
If the Contractor fails to submit the payment schedule by the required date, the Engineer will withhold further progress
payments until such time as the Contractor has submitted it.
140
April 5, 2013
REVISION OF SECTION 109
ASPHALT CEMENT COST ADJUSTMENT
(ASPHALT CEMENT INCLUDED IN THE WORK)
Section 109 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 109.06 shall include the following:
(i) Asphalt Cement Cost Adjustments. Contract cost adjustments will be made to reflect increases or decreases in the
monthly average price of asphalt cement from the average price for the month preceding the month in which bids
were received for the Contract. These cost adjustments are not a change to the contract unit prices bid.
1. Cost adjustments will be based on the asphalt cement price index established by the Department and calculated
as shown in subsection 109.06(i) 2.D below. The index will be the average for the month of the daily postings
of the spot price per barrel of Flint Hills Resources daily crude oil posting, as published on
http://www.fhr.com/refining/crude_oil.aspx. The index from this source will be converted to US Dollars using
the currency converter at http://finance.yahoo.com/currency; the posted price of Canadian Dollars per cubic
meter of WCS on fhr.com will be converted to US Dollars per cubic meter. A conversion factor of 0.89 cubic
meter per Ton will be used to convert the posted price from cubic meter to tons. The converted daily prices
and the average index number for the month will be posted as soon as they are available on the CDOT website
at:
http://www.coloradodot.info/business/designsupport/construction-specifications/2011-Specs/asphalt-cement-
cost-adjustment
2. Cost adjustments will be made on a monthly basis subject to the following conditions:
A. Adjustment will be based on the pay quantities on the monthly partial pay estimate for the following two
pay items when measured by the ton and asphalt cement is included in the pay items:
Item No. Item Pay Unit
403* Hot Mix Asphalt (Grading __)
(Asphalt)
Ton
403 Stone Matrix Asphalt (Grading __)
(Asphalt)
Ton
*Hot Mix Asphalt (Patching) is not subject to asphalt cement cost adjustment.
B. A cost adjustment will be made only when the asphalt cement price index varies by more than 5 percent
from the asphalt cement price index at the time of bid, and only for that portion of the variance in excess
of 5 percent. Cost adjustments may be either positive or negative dollar amounts.
C. Asphalt cement cost adjustments will not be made for any partial estimate falling wholly after the
expiration of contract time.
D. Adjustment formula:
EP greater than BP:
ACCA = (EP – 1.05 BP)(PA) (Q)
EP less than BP:
ACCA = (EP – 0.95 BP) (PA) (Q)
141
April 5, 2013
REVISION OF SECTION 109
ASPHALT CEMENT COST ADJUSTMENT
(ASPHALT CEMENT INCLUDED IN THE WORK)
Where:
BP = Average Asphalt Cement price index for the calendar month prior to the calendar month in
which bids are opened
EP = Average Asphalt Cement price index for the calendar month prior to the calendar month in
which the partial estimate pay period ends
ACCA = Asphalt Cement Cost Adjustment
PA = Percent of the paving mixture that is asphalt cement. Asphalt Cement content will be
determined by the weighted average of all asphalt cement content percentages obtained from
the field acceptance tests for that item (Use decimal in formula, e.g.: 0.05.). If Reclaimed
Asphalt Pavement (RAP), Reclaimed Asphalt Shingles (RAS), or both is used, the percent
of Virgin Asphalt Cement added to the mix will be determined by subtracting the percent of
asphalt cement in the RAP, RAS, or both from the percent of asphalt cement in the mix as
calculated from Revision of Section 401, Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement and Revision of
Section 401 Reclaimed Asphalt Shingles.
Q = Increased pay quantity for all 403 items shown above on the monthly partial pay estimate in
Tons.
Example: Bids are opened on July 16. The BP will be the average of the daily postings for June 1
through June 30. For an estimate cut-off date selected by the Contractor at the Pre-
Construction Conference of the 20th of the month a February estimate will include HMA
quantities measured from the 21st of January through the 20th of February, and the EP index
used to calculate ACCA will be the average of the daily postings for January 1 through
January 31 as established by CDOT)
E. Cost adjustment will not be made for the quantity of any item that is left in place at no pay or for material
removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense.
F. Cost adjustments will not be made to items of work added to the Contract by Change Order after the
award of the Contract.
G. The asphalt cement cost adjustment will be the sum of the individual adjustments for each of the pay
items shown above. No adjustment will be made for asphalt cement costs on items other than those
shown above.
H. Asphalt cement cost adjustments resulting in an increased payment to the Contractor will be paid for
under the planned force account item: Asphalt Cement Cost Adjustment. Asphalt cement cost
adjustments resulting in a decreased payment to the Contractor will be deducted from monies owed the
Contractor.
142
May 5, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 109
COMPENSATION FOR COMPENSABLE DELAYS
In subsection 109.10, delete the first two paragraphs and replace with the following:
109.10 Compensation for Compensable Delays. If the Engineer determines that a delay is compensable in
accordance with either subsection 105.22, 105.23, 105.24, or 108.08, monetary compensation will be determined in
accordance with this subsection.
(a) These categories represent the only costs that are recoverable by the Contractor. All other costs or categories of
costs are not recoverable:
(1) Actual wages and benefits, including FICA, paid for additional labor not otherwise included in (5) below;
(2) Costs for additional bond, insurance and tax;
(3) Increased costs for materials;
(4) Equipment costs calculated in accordance with subsection 109.04(c) for Contractor owned equipment and
based on invoice costs for rented equipment;
(5) Costs of extended job site overhead;
(6) Costs of salaried employees not otherwise included in (1) or (5) above incurred as a direct result of the delay;
(7) Claims from subcontractors and suppliers at any level (the same level of detail as specified herein is required
for all such claims);
(8) An additional 16 percent will be added to the total of items (1) through (7) as compensation for items for
which no specific allowance is provided, including profit and home office overhead.
143
February 3, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 109
FUEL COST ADJUSTMENT
Section 109 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 109.06 shall include the following:
(h) Fuel Cost Adjustments. Contract cost adjustments will be made to reflect increases or decreases in the monthly
average prices of gasoline, diesel and other fuels from the average price for the month preceding the month in
which bids were received for the Contract. These cost adjustments are not changes to the Contract unit prices bid.
When bidding, the Contractor shall specify on the Form 85 whether the cost adjustment will apply to the Contract.
After bids are submitted, the Contractor will not be given any other opportunity to accept or reject this adjustment.
If the Contractor fails to indicate a choice on the Form 85, the cost adjustment will not apply to the Contract. If the
fuel cost adjustment is accepted by the Contractor, the adjustment will be made in accordance with the following
criteria:
1. Cost adjustments will be based on the fuel price index established by the Department and calculated as shown
in subsection 109.06(h)2.D below. The index will be the monthly average of the rates posted by the Oil Price
Information Service (OPIS) for Denver No. 2 Diesel. The rate used will be the OPIS Average taken from the
OPIS Standard Rack table for Ultra-Low Sulfur w/Lubricity Gross Prices (ULS column), expressed in dollars
per gallon and rounded to two decimal places.
2. Cost adjustments will be made on a monthly basis subject to the following conditions:
A. Adjustment will be based on the pay quantities on the monthly partial pay estimate for each of the pay
items listed in the table below for which fuel factors have been established. Adjustment will be made only
when the pay item is measured by the pay unit specified in the table:
144
February 3, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 109
FUEL COST ADJUSTMENT
Item Pay Unit Fuel Factor (FF)
202-Removal of Asphalt Mat (Planing) Square Yard 0.006 Gal/SY/Inch depth
203-Excavation (muck, unclassified) Embankment,
Borrow
Cubic Yard 0.29 Gal/CY
203-Rock Excavation Cubic Yard 0.39 Gal/CY
206-Structure Excavation and Backfill [applies only
to quantities paid for by separate bid item; no
adjustment will be made for pay items that include
structure excavation & backfill, such as RCP(CIP)]
Cubic Yard 0.29 Gal/CY
304-Aggregate Base Course (Class___) Cubic Yard 0.85 Gal/CY
304-Aggregate Base Course (Class___) Ton 0.47 Gal./Ton
307-Processing Lime Treated Subgrade Square Yard 0.12 Gal/SY
310-Full Depth Reclamation Square Yard 0.06 Gal/SY
403-Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) (Grading __) * Ton 2.47 Gal/Ton
403-Stone Matrix Asphalt (Grading __) Ton 2.47 Gal/Ton
405-Heating and Scarifying Treatment Square Yard 0.44 Gal/SY
405-Heating and Repaving Treatment Square Yard 0.44 Gal/SY
405-Heating and Remixing Treatment Square Yard 0.44 Gal/SY
406-Cold Bituminous Pavement (Recycle) Square Yard 0.01 Gal/SY/Inch depth
412- Concrete Pavement (___Inch) Square Yard 0.03 Gal/SY/Inch thickness
412-Place Concrete Pavement** Square Yard 0.03 Gal/SY/Inch thickness
*Hot Mix Asphalt (Patching) is not subject to fuel cost adjustment.
**Use the thickness shown on the plans.
B. A fuel cost adjustment will be made only when the current fuel price index varies by more than 5 percent
from the price index at the time of bid, and only for that portion of the variance in excess of 5 percent.
Fuel cost adjustments may be either positive or negative dollar amounts.
C. Fuel cost adjustments will not be made for any partial estimate falling wholly after the expiration of
contract time.
D. Adjustment formula:
EP greater than BP:
FA = (EP – 1.05 BP)(Q)(FF)
EP less than BP:
FA = (EP – 0.95 BP)(Q)(FF)
Where:
BP = Average fuel price index for the calendar month prior to the calendar month in which bids are
opened
EP = Average fuel price index for the calendar month prior to the calendar month in which the
partial estimate pay period ends
FA = Adjustment for fuel costs in dollars
FF = Fuel usage factor for the pay item
145
February 3, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 109
FUEL COST ADJUSTMENT
Q = Pay quantity for the pay item on the monthly partial pay estimate
Note: When the pay item is based on area, and the rate of fuel use varies with thickness, Q should be
determined by multiplying the area by the thickness. For example: for 1000 square yards of
8-inch concrete pavement Q should be 8000.
Example: Bids are opened on July 16. The BP will be the average of the daily postings for June 1
through June 30. For an estimate cut-off date selected by the Contractor at the Pre-
Construction Conference of the 20th of the month a February estimate will include HMA
quantities (Q) measured from the 21st of January through the 20th of February, the FF will be
2.47 Gal/Ton, and the EP index used to calculate FA will be the average of the daily postings
for January 1 through January 31 as established by CDOT.
E. Fuel cost adjustment will not be made for the quantity of any item that is left in place at no pay.
F. Fuel cost adjustments will not be made to items of work added to the Contract by Change Order after the
award of the Contract.
The fuel cost adjustment will be the sum of the individual adjustments for each of the pay items shown. No
adjustment will be made for fuel costs on items other than those shown. The factors shown are aggregate
adjustments for all types of fuels used, including but not limited to gasoline, diesel, propane, and burner fuel. No
additional adjustments will be made for any other type of fuel.
Fuel cost adjustments resulting in an increased payment to the Contractor will be paid for under the planned force
account item: Fuel Cost Adjustment. Fuel cost adjustments resulting in a decreased payment to the Contractor will
be deducted from monies owed the Contractor.
146
February 3, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 109
MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES
Section 109 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 109.01, delete the 17th paragraph and replace it with the following:
Vehicles used to haul material being paid for by weight shall bear a plainly legible identification mark. Each of these
vehicles shall be weighed empty daily at times directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer,
in writing, a vehicle identification sheet that lists the following for each delivery vehicle to be used on the project:
(1) identification mark
(2) vehicle length
(3) tare weight
(4) number of axles
(5) the distance between extreme axles
(6) information related to legal weight, including the Permit No. and permitted weight of each vehicle for which the
State has issued an overweight permit.
This information shall be furnished prior to time of delivery of the material and at any subsequent time the Contractor
changes vehicles, combination vehicles, axle length relationships, or overweight permitting of vehicles.
147
January 6, 2012
REVISION OF SECTION 109
MEASUREMENT OF WATER
Section 109 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 109.01, delete the twenty-sixth paragraph and replace with the following:
Water may be measured either by volume or weight. Water meters shall be accurate within a range of ± 3 percent.
When water is metered, the Contractor shall use an approved metering device and shall furnish the Engineer a
certificate showing the meter has been accurately calibrated within the time allowed in the following schedule:
2 inch 4 years
4 inch to 6 inch 2 years
8 inch to 10 inch 1 year
148
January 31, 2013
REVISION OF SECTION 109
PROMPT PAYMENT
Section 109 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised to include the following:
Subsection 109.06 (e) shall include the following:
The Contractor shall submit the Form 1418, Monthly Payment Report, along with the project schedule updates, in
accordance with subsections 108.03 (b) or 108.03 (c) (3). Failure to submit a complete and accurate Form 1418 shall
be grounds for CDOT to withhold subsequent payments or retainage to the Contractor.
149
July 19, 2012
REVISION OF SECTIONS 203, 206, 304 AND 613
COMPACTION
Sections 203, 206, 304 and 613 of Standard Specifications are hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 203.03 (a), delete the fifth paragraph and replace with the following:
1. Soil Embankment. Soil embankment consists of materials with 50 percent or more of the material passing the 4.75
mm (No. 4) sieve.
A soil embankment may also have more than 50 percent of the material retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve, but
no more than 30 percent of the material retained on the 19 mm (3/4 inch) sieve.
Soil embankment shall be constructed with moisture density control in accordance with the requirements of
subsection 203.07.
2. Rock Embankment. Rock embankment consist of materials with 50 percent or more of the material retained on the
4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve and with more than 30 percent of the material retained on the 19 mm (3/4 inch) sieve. All
material shall be smaller than 6 inches. Rock embankments shall be constructed without moisture density control
in accordance with the requirements of subsection 203.08.
Delete Subsection 203.07 and replace with the following:
203.07 Construction of Embankment and Treatment of Cut Areas with Moisture and Density Control. Soil
embankments shall be constructed with moisture and density control and the soil upon which the embankments are to
be constructed shall be scarified to a depth of 6 inches and compacted with moisture and density control. The moisture
content of the soil at the time of compaction shall be as specified or directed.
The material shall be removed from the full width of roadbed in all cut sections to the designated depth. The soil below
the designated depth shall be thoroughly scarified to a depth of 6 inches and the moisture content increased or reduced,
as necessary, to obtain the moisture content specified. This scarified layer shall then be compacted to the relative
compaction specified.
All embankment material shall be compacted to not less than 95 percent relative compaction. Maximum dry density of
all soil types encountered or used will be determined in accordance with AASHTO T 99 as modified by CP 23.
Soils shall be compacted at ± 2 percent of Optimum Moisture Content (OMC) as determined by AASTHO T 99. Soils
having greater than 35 percent passing the 75 µm (No. 200) sieve shall be compacted to 0 to 3 percent above OMC.
Soils which are unstable at the above moisture content shall be compacted at lower moisture content to the specified
density.
Additional work involved in drying embankment material to the required moisture content shall be included in the
contract price paid for excavating or furnishing the material with no additional compensation.
Density requirements will not apply to materials which cannot be tested in accordance with the above procedures for
determining maximum dry density. Compaction for materials which cannot be tested shall be in accordance with
subsection 203.08.
Claystone or soil-like non-durable shale shall be pulverized and compacted to the specified moisture and percent of
relative compaction and shall be compacted with a heavy tamping foot roller, weighing at least 30 tons. Each tamping
150
July 19, 2012
REVISION OF SECTIONS 203, 206, 304 AND 613
COMPACTION
foot roller shall protrude from the drum a minimum of 4 inches. Each embankment layer shall receive a minimum of
three or more coverages with the tamping foot roller to obtain density. One coverage consists of one pass over the
entire surface designated. One pass consists of the passing of an acceptable tamping foot roller over a given spot. The
roller shall be operated at a uniform speed not exceeding 3 miles per hour. No additional compensation will be made
for additional roller coverages to achieve specified density requirements.
In subsection 206.03, delete the fourth and fifth paragraphs and replace with the following:
Backfill shall consist of approved materials uniformly distributed in layers brought up equally on all sides of the
structure. Each layer of backfill shall not exceed 6 inches before compacting to the required density and before
successive layers are placed. Structure backfill (Class 1) shall be compacted to a density of not less than 95 percent of
maximum dry density determined in accordance with AASHTO T 180 as modified by CP 23. Backfill shall be
compacted at ± 2 percent of Optimum Moisture Content (OMC).
Structure backfill (Class 2) shall be compacted to a density of not less than 95 percent of maximum dry density. The
maximum dry density and OMC for A-1, A-2-4. A-2-5 and A-3 materials will be determined in accordance with
AASHTO T 180 as modified by CP 23. The maximum dry density and OMC for all other materials will be determined
in accordance with AASHTO T 99 as modified by CP 23. Materials shall be compacted at ± 2percent of Optimum
Moisture Content (OMC). Materials having greater than 35 percent passing the 75 µm (No. 200) sieve shall be
compacted at 0 to 3 percent above OMC.
In subsection 304.06, delete the first paragraph and replace with the following:
304.06 Shaping and Compaction. Compaction of each layer shall continue until a density of not less than 95 percent
of the maximum density determined in accordance with AASHTO T 180 as modified by CP 23 has been achieved. The
moisture content shall be at +/-2 percent of optimum moisture content. The surface of each layer shall be maintained
during the compaction operations so that a uniform texture is produced and the aggregates are firmly keyed. Moisture
conditioning shall be performed uniformly during compaction.
In subsection 613.07, delete the 15th paragraph and replace with the following:
Trenching shall be backfilled and compacted as follows: Backfill shall be deposited in uniform layers. The thickness of
each layer shall be 6 inches or less thick prior to compaction. The space under the conduit shall be completely filled.
The remainder of the trench and excavation shall be backfilled to the finished grade. The backfill material shall be
compacted to the density of not less than 95 percent of maximum dry density. The maximum dry density and optimum
moisture content (OMC) for A-1, A-2-4. A-2-5 and A-3 materials will determined in accordance with AASHTO T 180
as modified by CP 23. The maximum dry density and OMC for all other materials will determined in accordance with
AASHTO T 99 as modified by CP 23. Materials shall be compacted at ± 2percent of Optimum Moisture Content
(OMC). Materials having greater than 35 percent passing the 75 µm (No. 200) sieve shall be compacted at 0 to 3
percent above OMC. Each layer shall be mechanically compacted by tamping with power tools approved by the
Engineer. Compaction methods or equipment that damage the conduit shall not be used.
151
January 31, 2013
REVISION OF SECTION 208
AGGREGATE BAG
Section 208 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 208.02 delete (l) and replace with the following:
(l) Aggregate Bag. Aggregate bags shall consist of crushed stone or recycled rubber filled fabric with the following
properties:
Diameter (inches) Weight (minimum)
(pounds per foot)
6-8 6
10 10
12 15
Rubber used in bags shall be clean, 95 percent free of metal and particulates.
Crushed stone contained in the aggregate bags shall conform to subsection 703.09, Table 703-7 for Class C.
The aggregate bag shall consist of a woven geotextile fabric with the following properties:
Property Requirement Test Method
Grab Tensile Strength 90 lbs. min. ASTM D 4632
Trapezoid Tear Strength 25 lbs. min. ASTM D 4533
Mullen Burst 300 psi ASTM D 3786
Ultraviolet Resistance 70% ASTM D 4355
Subsection 208.12 shall include the following:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Aggregate Bag Linear Foot
152
January 31, 2013
REVISION OF SECTION 208
EROSION LOG
Section 208 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 208.02, delete (h) and replace with the following:
(h) Erosion log. Shall be one of the following types unless otherwise shown on the plans:
(1) Erosion Log (Type 1) shall be curled aspen wood excelsior with a consistent width of fibers evenly
distributed throughout the log. The casing shall be seamless, photo-degradable tube netting and shall have
minimum dimensions as shown in Table 208-1, based on the diameter of the log called for on the plans. The
curled aspen wood excelsior shall be fungus free, resin free, and free of growth or germination inhibiting
substances.
(2) Erosion Log (Type 2) shall consist of a blend of 30-40 percent weed free compost and 60-70 percent wood
chips. The compost/wood blend material shall pass a 50 mm (2 inch) sieve with a minimum of 70 percent
retained on the 9.5 mm (3/8 inch) sieve and comply to subsection 212.02 for the remaining compost physical
properties. The compost/wood chip blend may be pneumatically shot into a geotextile cylindrical bag or be
pre-manufactured. The geotextile bag shall consist of material with openings of 3/8 inches of HDPE mesh,
and contain the compost/wood chip material while not limiting water infiltration.
Erosion log (Type 1 and Type 2) shall have minimum dimensions as shown in Table 208-1, based on the diameter of
the log.
Table 208-1
NOMINAL DIMENSIONS OF EROSION LOGS
Diameter Length (feet) Weight (minimum)
(pounds/foot)
Stake
Dimensions
(Inches)
Min. Max.
9 inch 10 180 1.6 1.5 by 1.5
(nominal) by 18
12 inch 10 180 2.5 1.5 by 1.5(nominal)
by 24
20 inch 10 100 4.0 2 by 2 (nominal)
by 30
Stakes to secure erosion logs shall consist of pinewood or hardwood.
Subsection 208.11 shall include the following:
All BMPs measured by the linear foot shall be determined along the centerline of the BMP. Measured length will not
include required overlap.
153
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTION 250
ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT
Section 250 of the Standard Specifications is hereby deleted for this projected and replaced with the following:
DESCRIPTION
250.01 This work consists of protection of the environment, persons, and property from contaminants that may be
encountered on the Project. This includes monitoring the work for encounters with contaminants or suspected soil and
groundwater contaminants; the management of solid, special, and hazardous waste; and management of visual
emissions associated with hazardous waste, when encountered on the project.
250.02 The Contractor shall furnish all personnel, materials, equipment, laboratory services and traffic control
necessary to perform the contamination monitoring, testing, and site remediation when required. Traffic control shall
be in accordance with the requirements of Section 630.
Monitoring equipment used to detect flammable gas, oxygen level, and toxic gas shall be capable of detection to meet
the following standards:
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
250.03 General. Prospective bidders, including subcontractors, are required to review the environmental documents
available for this project. These documents are listed in subsection 102.05 as revised for this project.
This project may be in the vicinity of property associated with petroleum products, heavy metal based paint, landfill,
buried foundations, abandoned utility lines, industrial area or other sites which can yield hazardous substances or
produce dangerous gases. These hazardous substances or gases can migrate within or into the construction area and
could create hazardous conditions. The Contractor shall use appropriate methods to reduce and control known landfill,
industrial gases, and visible emissions from asbestos encounters and hazardous substances which exist or migrate into
the construction area. The Contractor shall follow CDOT’s Asbestos-Contaminated Soil Management Standard
Operating Procedure, dated August 22, 2011 for proper handling of asbestos-contaminated soil, and follow all
applicable Solid and Hazardous Waste Regulations for proper handling of soils encountered that contain any other
substance mentioned above.
Encountering suspected contaminated material, including groundwater, old foundations, building materials, demolition
debris, or utility lines that may contain asbestos or be contaminated by asbestos, is possible at some point during the
construction of this project. When suspected contaminated material, including groundwater, is encountered or brought
to the surface, the procedures under subsection 250.03(d) and 250.05 shall be followed.
Transportation of waste materials on public highways, streets and roadways shall be done in accordance with Title 49,
Code of Federal Regulations (CFR). All labeling, manifesting, transportation, etc. of waste materials generated on this
project shall be coordinated with the Engineer. All hazardous waste manifests for waste materials generated on this
Instrument Detection
Constituent Threshold Limit Increments
Flammable Gas 1% LEL 1%
Oxygen 19% 0.1%
Toxic Gas 1 PPM 1 PPM
LEL = lower explosive limit
PPM = parts per million
154
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTION 250
ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT
project shall list the Colorado Department of Transportation as the generator of the waste materials except as otherwise
noted. If the Contractor contaminates the site, the Contractor shall be listed as the generator on the hazardous waste
manifests, permits, and other documents for such material. If the project is not on a State Highway or frontage road,
then the appropriate local governmental entity having jurisdiction over the transportation system facility shall be listed
as the hazardous waste generator.
If waste materials must be handled in a permitted treatment, storage and disposal (TSD) facility, the facility shall be
designated in writing by the Engineer. If the waste materials are the result of the Contractor’s actions, the Contractor
shall designate the facility.
The hazardous waste transportation phase of the work involves insurance required by law and regulations. If the waste
materials are determined to be hazardous, the Contractor must submit proof that the transportation company is covered
by the appropriate type and amount of insurance required by laws and regulations governing the transportation of
hazardous waste.
The Contractor alone bears the responsibility for determining that the work is accomplished in strict accordance
with all applicable federal, state and local laws, regulations, standards, and codes governing special waste,
petroleum and hazardous substance encounters and releases.
The Contract will list known or suspected areas of contamination. Health and Safety Officer, Monitoring
Technician, and Health and Safety Plan shall be required when so stated in the Contract.
(a) Health and Safety Officer (HSO). The Contractor shall designate a HSO, not the project superintendent, who shall
have at least two years field experience in chemical related health and safety. The HSO shall be either a certified
industrial hygienist (CIH), certified hazardous materials manager (CHMM), professional engineer (PE) licensed in
the State of Colorado, certified safety professional (CSP), or registered environmental manager (REM) meeting the
criteria set forth in 29 CFR 1926. When asbestos is present or is suspected to be present, the HSO shall have
additional training and certification in accordance with the Air Quality Control Commission Regulation No. 8 Part
B. The HSO shall meet the minimum training and medical surveillance requirements established by the
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) and the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) for a
supervisory Site Safety Official per 29 CFR 1962.65. The Contractor shall furnish documentation to the Engineer,
at the preconstruction conference, that the above requirements have been met. 250.03.
The HSO shall be equipped with the following:
(1) Communication equipment as required in subsection 250.03(d)2.A. and a vehicle.
(2) Monitoring and detection equipment for flammable gas, oxygen sufficiency, toxic gas, radiological screening
and other hazards. This includes, as required, a combustible gas indicator, flame ionization or photo ionization
detector, oxygen meter, radiation monitor with Geiger Mueller detector and other foreseeable equipment.
(3) Depth gauging equipment, sampling equipment and sampling containers.
(4) Personal protective equipment (levels C and D) when required.
The HSO shall recommend and supervise those actions which will minimize the risk of hazardous substance
related injury to the workers, Department personnel, the general public, property and the environment. Hazardous
substance is defined in 29 CFR 1926.32. The HSO shall prepare written procedures for the monitoring of
confined space entry and working in or near excavations, including but not limited to trenches and drill holes
associated with this project. The HSO shall conduct or supervise all hazardous substance and solid waste related
155
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTION 250
ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT
testing, sampling, monitoring and handling for this project to ensure compliance with applicable statutes and
regulations, and other applicable environmental requirements under subsections 107.01 and 107.02.
The HSO shall be available for consultation and assistance with contaminated materials related testing, sampling,
and field monitoring as required by the Engineer.
The HSO shall prepare and submit a bound and indexed final site report to the Engineer at the end of the project.
This site report shall include a detailed summary of all contaminated materials and contaminated water that were
encountered and their final disposition.
During each week the HSO is utilized, the HSO shall prepare a daily diary which shall be submitted to the
Contractor and the Engineer. This diary shall be submitted at the end of the week and shall become a part of the
Department’s records. The diary shall contain a chronological log of activities on the project including: dates
and times on site, equipment used and calibrations, field monitoring results, visual observations, conversations,
directives both given and received, and disposition of suspected hazardous substances. The Engineer will review
this submittal and approve the actual number of hours to be paid.
(b) Monitoring Technician (MT). The Contractor shall designate a monitoring technician to be responsible for
monitoring of hazardous substances during work on the project. The MT shall have a minimum of two years of
actual field experience in assessment and remediation of hazardous substances that may be encountered during
highway construction projects. The MT shall be experienced in the operation of monitoring devices, identifying
substances based upon experience and observation, and field sampling (for testing) of all media that may be
found on the site. Completion of the 40 hour hazardous waste and 8 hour supervisory training required by OSHA
and U.S. EPA rules and regulations which complies with the accreditation criteria under the provisions of the
proposed 29 CFR 1910.121 is required prior to beginning work. The Contractor shall furnish documentation at
the Preconstruction Conference that demonstrates these requirements have been met.
The MT shall be equipped with the following:
(1) Communication equipment as required in subsection 250.03(d)2.A. and a vehicle.
(2) Monitoring and detection equipment for flammable gas, oxygen sufficiency, toxic gas, radiological screening
and other hazards. This includes, as required, a combustible gas indicator, flame ionization or photo ionization
detector, oxygen meter, radiation monitor with Geiger Mueller detector and other foreseeable equipment.
(3) Personal protective equipment (levels C and D) when required.
The MT shall be present on site and perform monitoring as required by 250.03(d) when work is being performed
in areas of suspected contamination and on a predetermined basis throughout other work on the project.
The MT shall monitor for compliance with regulations, the project Health and Safety Plan and the Materials
Management Plan (if they exist for the project), the Contract, and the environmental documents for the project.
The MT shall immediately notify the Contractor, the Engineer and the HSO of any hazardous condition.
During each week the MT is utilized, the MT shall prepare a daily monitoring diary which shall be submitted to
the Contractor, HSO and the Engineer. This diary shall be submitted at the end of the week and shall become a
part of the Department’s records. The diary shall contain a chronological log of activities on the project
including: dates and times on site, equipment used and calibrations, field monitoring results, visual observations,
conversations, directives both given and received, and disposition of suspected hazardous substances. The
Engineer will review this submittal and approve the actual number of hours to be paid.
156
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTION 250
ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT
(c) Health and Safety Plan (HASP). The HSO shall prepare a written HASP for the project, formatted as shown in
Appendix B, Occupational Safety and Health Guidance Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activities, DHHS
(NIOSH) Publication Number 85-115, available from the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government
Printing Office. The Contractor and the HSO shall review the environmental documents listed prior to
preparation of the HASP.
Four signed copies of the HASP shall be furnished to the Engineer for acceptance. The Engineer shall have
seven calendar days to review and accept or reject the proposed HASP. Within five calendar days after
acceptance, the HSO shall distribute signed and stamped (or sealed) copies of the accepted HASP to each
emergency response agency servicing the project area, the HASP designated emergency hospital, and five copies
to the Engineer. Earth or demolition work shall not occur until after the HASP is accepted and the HASP has
been distributed. The HASP shall also be available to the Contractor’s employees, their representatives, and
officials of OSHA, EPA, Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment (CDPHE), local government
health department, Federal Highway Administration, and other appropriate agencies and officials as may be
designated by the Engineer. The Engineer will distribute the accepted HASP to appropriate Department
personnel. The HASP shall be kept current and shall be revised by the HSO as warranted by changes in the field
conditions.
All on-site workers (Contractor’s, Department’s, Utilities’, and others) shall be briefed by the HSO on the
contents of the HASP and any revisions thereof. The HSO shall conduct briefings (group or individual) to inform
new employees, subcontractors, utility companies and other on-site workers of the HASP contents prior to their
entry on site. All personnel involved in excavation or other soil disturbing activities shall receive the required
two-hour Asbestos Awareness training by a Certified Asbestos Inspector, when asbestos discoveries are
anticipated, or discoveries are made. A signature log of all briefing attendees shall be kept and furnished to the
Engineer. The Contractor shall provide, as required, eye wash equipment and stations, emergency showers, hand
and face washing facilities and first aid equipment.
The Contractor shall provide, as required, decontamination facilities for personnel and equipment employed in
the work. The exact procedure for decontamination and frequency shall be included in the accepted HASP.
Decontamination facilities shall meet the criteria set forth in the Code of Federal Regulations (29 CFR and 40
CFR).
(d) Precautions and Procedures. The following minimum precautions and procedures shall be followed during the
construction of the project:
1. General construction precautions:
A. All monitoring and piezometer wells and test borings shall be established or abandoned by the Contractor
as regulated by the State Engineer’s Office. Copies of all required permits, notification, and abandonment
documents shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to payment approval.
B. Hazardous substance related activities shall have a work plan for each work phase which shall be
coordinated with the Engineer at least three working days prior to commencement of each phase of the
work.
C. The Contractor shall properly handle all investigation derived waste generated by this project.
Documentation shall be submitted to the Engineer of all tests performed for Treatment, Storage and
Disposal (TSD) determination; classification of waste; hauling records; TSD acceptance; manifest (if
157
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTION 250
ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT
required); etc. in accordance with applicable laws and regulations.
D. When the work may involve air emissions, the Contractor shall contact the Colorado Department of
Public Health and Environment (CDPHE), Air Pollution Control Division to ascertain if an air
pollution emission notice (APEN) or permit is required for this operation. The Contractor shall be
responsible for filing the APEN and obtaining said permit, if required. The processing of air pollution
permits, if required, in non-attainment areas or where public hearings are required, likely will take
more than 90 days.
2. For construction on a known or potentially contaminated site, the following conditions shall apply, in addition
to those listed in subsection 250.03(d)1:
A. The HSO shall be on site or readily available by radio, telephone or pager at all times during the work.
When on site, the HSO shall have an operational portable or mobile cellular telephone available for
immediate use in areas where such service is available. When on site in cellular telephone non-service
areas, the HSO shall have available, for immediate use, radio access to a site with telephone service. The
HSO shall be notified at least 24 hours prior to the start of confined space entry, storage tank removal,
drilling, excavation, trenching, or dewatering operations.
B. The HSO shall designate the onsite monitoring equipment for flammable gases, oxygen deficient or
enriched atmosphere, and toxic gases, such as but not limited to, a flame ionization detector,
photoionization detector, combustible gas indicator, and oxygen meter. This designated equipment shall be
on site during all construction operations and be utilized during trenching, drilling, excavating, confined
space entry, underground storage tank removal, and other appropriate construction operations. The exact
equipment to fulfill this requirement shall be specified in the accepted HASP. The HSO shall conduct or
supervise the monitoring. The monitoring equipment shall be calibrated as recommended by the
manufacturer.
C. When drilling, trenching, or excavating in the presence of detectable concentrations of explosive gases,
the soil shall be wetted and the operating equipment shall be provided with spark proof exhausts.
D. The Contractor, through the HSO, is responsible for ensuring that 29 CFR 1926 is fully complied with
during the construction of the project.
E. Affected excavation operations shall be discontinued and personnel shall be removed from the affected
excavation sites where any of the following levels are detected:
(1) 20.0 percent or more LEL flammable gas, or 10.0 percent in an underground or confined space,
(2) Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL) of any toxic gas,
(3) 19.5 percent or less oxygen,
(4) 25.0 percent or more oxygen,
(5) Greater than 2 mrem/hr. (Beta particle & photon radioactivity),
(6) Greater than 15 pCi/L (Gross alpha particle activity), or
(7) Other action levels as determined by the HSO.
(8) Uncovering of suspect Asbestos Containing Material (ACM), including but not limited to, buried
facility components, active or abandoned utility lines, buried foundations and demolition debris, or
158
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTION 250
ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT
miscellaneous ACM dispersed in the soil. The Contractor shall follow the procedures outlined in the
HASP and 29 CFR 1926 to address these conditions. Work shall resume in these areas when approved
by the Engineer.
F. Personnel shall be issued and utilize appropriate Health and Safety equipment as determined by the HSO,
who shall provide the Engineer with a written explanation of what personal protective equipment (PPE)
shall be worn, when, and by which personnel. Except in emergency cases, the Engineer shall be advised
by the HSO of changes in the degree of PPE prior to implementation.
G. Personnel shall avoid the area immediately downwind of any excavation unless the excavation is
monitored and declared safe.
H. The operators of excavating, trenching, or drilling equipment shall wear appropriate PPE as required in the
HASP.
I. Exhaust blowers shall be present at the location where required in the accepted HASP.
J. The Contractor shall accomplish the work with employees who have been trained and equipped as
required by the HASP and applicable provisions of 29 CFR 1910 and 29 CFR 1926.
K. Fire extinguishers, electrical equipment and wiring shall conform to the applicable requirements of 29
CFR 1926 and 49 CFR.
L. Smoking shall not be permitted within 50 feet of any excavation.
3. For construction within 1000 feet of a known or potentially contaminated site, the following conditions, in
addition to those listed in subsection 250.03(d) 1. shall apply:
A. The areas under construction shall be checked with a combustible gas indicator before excavation begins
to determine if flammable or combustible gas is in the area.
B. Excavations, trenches and drill holes shall be monitored by the HSO for flammable gas, toxic gas and
oxygen deficiency or enrichment. This shall be carried out continuously unless the presence of flammable,
combustible or toxic gas, or oxygen deficiency or enrichment in the area can be ruled out by the HSO.
The recommendation to discontinue monitoring must be agreed to by the Engineer and the Contractor.
Prior to implementation, this agreement shall be written, and shall contain specific conditions that will
require re-evaluation of the area.
C. When flammable or toxic gas is found in the area, those precautions and procedures in subsection
250.03(d)2 shall apply.
4. The following procedures shall be followed if the level of contamination as documented in the
environmental documents referenced in subsection 102.05 as revised for this project is exceeded, or if
previously unidentified contaminated air, soil or water, is encountered during the construction of the project:
A. Work in the immediate area of the release or discovery of contamination shall cease. The Engineer shall
be immediately notified.
B. If no HSO is required by the Contract, the Contractor shall designate an HSO as directed, in accordance
with subsection 250.03(a).
C. The Engineer may direct the HSO to evaluate the material for potential hazardous substance or other
contamination or unsafe conditions. This evaluation may include, but is not limited to, on site field
monitoring, on site testing, and on or off site laboratory analysis. Removal of storage tanks and
159
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTION 250
ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT
surrounding contaminated soils shall be in accordance with applicable laws, regulations and established
procedures. If the contaminated material cannot be placed in the embankment or remediated on site, it
must be removed to an appropriate TSD facility, as designated in writing by the Engineer. The HSO shall
supervise the necessary testing required to make appropriate TSD determinations. Disposal of the
unsuitable material shall be considered as remediation work as described in subsection 250.03(d)4.D and
250.03(d)4.E.
D. If this site is determined to be contaminated with petroleum products, hazardous substances or other solid
waste in excess of that indicated in the above listed site investigation documents, a thorough Site
Investigation and Waste Management Plan shall be accomplished under the supervision of the HSO The
Site Investigation and Waste Management Plan shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval and shall
determine the extent of contamination and propose at least three types of remedial action for the
contaminated area as required by applicable statutes and regulations. The HSO shall be available to assist
the Engineer in explaining this study to the regulatory agencies. When requested by the Engineer, the
Contractor shall prepare a Remediation Plan based on the selected remedial method, and shall submit this
to the Engineer for approval. The time required for the Engineer’s review of the Remediation Plan,
including all necessary drawings, calculations, specifications, and other documentation will not exceed
four weeks after a complete submittal is received. This work shall not be done unless authorized in
writing by the Engineer.
E. If the site is determined to be contaminated with petroleum products; hazardous chemicals, materials, or
wastes; or other solid wastes, and is required to be remediated, the HSO or other qualified individuals will
supervise the Remediation Plan implementation as concurred to by the regulatory agencies, as directed.
Hazardous Waste generated by remedial activities shall list the Colorado Department of Transportation as
the hazardous waste generator on the required paperwork for projects on State Highways and their
associated frontage roads. If this project is not on a State Highway or frontage road, then the appropriate
local governmental entity having jurisdiction over the transportation system facility shall be listed as the
hazardous waste generator. If the waste disturbed or produced was caused by Contractor negligence, the
Contractor shall be listed as the hazardous waste generator. Remediation work shall be done only when
authorized by the Engineer in writing.
250.04 Heavy Metal Based Paint Management. When the work includes the removal of paint or items covered
with paint which may contain lead, chromium or other heavy metals, the requirements of this subsection shall apply in
addition to the requirements of subsection 250.03.
The requirements of the HASP shall be in accordance with OSHA Publication Number 3142, Working with Lead
in the Construction Industry.
Paint Removal and Waste Disposal work shall be performed in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62, State and local air
quality regulations, the Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Guide for Containing Debris Generated During Paint
Removal Operations, the Industrial Lead Paint Removal Handbook (SSPC 91-18), and the references contained
therein.
The following minimum precautions and procedures shall be followed unless modified in the approved HASP or
its updates:
(a) The Contractor shall contact the CDPHE, Air Pollution Control Division to ascertain if an air pollution permit is
required for the cleaning or demolition work. If an air pollution permit is required, the Contractor shall obtain the
permit. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a copy of the permit application and the permit issued prior
160
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTION 250
ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT
to starting cleaning or demolition activities. A copy of the Air Pollution Emission Notice [APEN] shall be
provided to the Engineer, if such notice is required under the Colorado Air Quality Control Commission’s
regulations. The processing of air pollution permits in non-attainment areas, or where public hearings are required,
likely will take more than 90 days.
(b) The Contractor shall contain paint chips, corrosion residues, and spent abrasives, herein referred to as waste
materials, resulting from the cleaning or demolition operations. The Contractor shall not deposit or release waste
material into the water, air or onto the ground below or adjacent to the structure. The Contractor shall conduct
cleaning operations to minimize the waste materials produced. Prior to beginning the work, the Contractor shall
submit to the Engineer for acceptance, a detailed methods statement for capturing, testing, and disposing of the
removed materials. The Engineer will have seven calendar days to review, and accept or reject this methods
statement.
(c) Abrasives utilized for blast cleaning shall be low-dusting and low waste. Unless approved otherwise, vacuum
blasting or wheel blasting shall be used.
(d) The HSO shall sample and test the waste material for lead, chromium, and other paint associated heavy metals
using the Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) Test, Method 1311 of the EPA publication, Test
Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste 846. Sample collection methodology and frequency shall be recommended
by the HSO and accepted by the Engineer with an adequate number of samples taken to be representative of all
waste material collected. If the waste material does not pass the TCLP test, it shall be disposed of in a permitted
TSD facility as designated in writing by the Engineer. The waste materials handling decision shall be documented
by a report (five copies) submitted to the Engineer. This documentation shall include a description of sample
collection methodology, testing performed, test results and comparison of test results with hazardous waste
requirements. The waste material shall not be held at an unpermitted TSD facility site in excess of Resource
Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) temporary storage time limits.
(e) When an item coated with paint is removed, all loose paint shall be removed and collected from the item within 24
hours of the time it is removed or placed onto the ground. All loose paint shall be removed and collected from a
painted item before it is removed from the site. The Contractor shall contain loose paint until it is removed and
collected. Loose paint is defined as that which can be removed by manual scraping methods. Over waterways, the
Contractor shall capture all paint debris by the method specified in the methods statement. The paint debris shall
be collected on a daily basis and shall be stored in a properly labeled, tightly sealed container and placed in a
secured location at the end of each working day.
(f) All painted steel components which are not designated to be salvaged shall be recycled. Contractor possession of
the steel for future use shall be considered a form of recycling. Prior to transport of the components off-site, the
Contractor shall obtain a letter from the recipients of the painted steel components stating that they have been fully
informed of the contents of the paint and are capable of handling the paint. If the Contractor is to maintain future
possession of the steel, the Contractor shall supply this letter. If there will be more than one recipient of the
painted material, one letter shall be obtained from each recipient. The Contractor shall provide a copy of each
letter to the Engineer. If the painted steel components will be recycled by melting, the letter from the recipient is
not required. The Contractor shall submit a letter stating the destination of the painted steel components and that
they will be melted.
(g) When the work consists of the removal of a bridge or components of a bridge coated with paint which has been
assumed to contain lead, chromium, other heavy metals, or a combination thereof the Contractor shall capture
161
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTION 250
ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT
paint debris which is dislodged during removal operations. The Contractor may choose any method for
dismantling the bridge, subject to the following required construction sequence limitations:
(1) The concrete deck shall be removed prior to removal of the steel superstructure.
(2) If the methods statement indicates that girders will be dropped to the ground during dismantling, all debris
from the concrete deck removal operation shall be removed from the area below the bridge before any girders
are dropped into this area.
(3) Girders may be cut and dropped only if the span is located entirely over land.
250.05 Material Handling. This work consists of the additional handling of groundwater and soils to be excavated
for construction of the project which are suspected or known to be contaminated. This work also includes stockpiling
or containerization, analytical sampling and testing, and final disposition of contaminated groundwater and soils
requiring special handling.
The Contractor shall maintain vertical trench walls for the work in the specified areas of known or potential
contamination, as shown on the plans. Shoring may be necessary to meet this requirement. The Contractor shall
confine the removal of contaminated groundwater and soils encountered as a result of the excavation activities in the
specified areas to the vertical and horizontal limits of structure excavation specified in the Contract. The Contractor
shall be responsible for any contaminated materials generated beyond the limits of excavation. This shall include any
sampling, analysis, and disposal required, and the costs thereof. The Contractor shall be listed as the generator of any
such material. The limits of excavation shall be determined as 18 inches outside of structures, including sewers, water
lines, inlets, manholes, and other underground structures to be constructed, or as directed.
Specific areas of known or potential contamination have been identified in the project plans. There is the potential of
encountering contaminated groundwater and soil, which has not been summarized in the plans or specifications, at
unknown locations on the site. Suspected contaminated soil and groundwater shall be handled by one of three methods
as follows:
(a) Materials Handling (Stockpile& Containerization). When recommended by the HSO and authorized by the
Engineer, material shall be stockpiled or containerized for analysis and characterization for proper handling and,
disposal, or both. Sampling and testing of materials shall be as described in the Contract. If analysis indicates
that soil samples are designated as uncontaminated, as determined by the criteria shown in the Contract or as
determined by the CDPHE, the associated soils will not require any special handling and will become the
property of the Contractor and may be used on site, subject to other requirements of the Contract. Health and
safety monitoring and strict fugitive dust control shall be conducted during the placement of these soils. If
analysis indicates that groundwater samples are designated as uncontaminated, as determined by the criteria
shown in the Contract or as determined by the CDPHE, the groundwater shall be handled in accordance with
subsection 107.25.
Stockpiled and containerized materials shall be secured in compliance with the following provisions until
they are determined to be uncontaminated:
1. The Contractor shall not store the material for more than 90 days.
2. The Contractor shall prevent any runoff from infiltrating the ground or running out of the containment area.
3. Soils and groundwater containing different contaminants shall be placed in separate containers or stockpiles.
162
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTION 250
ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT
4. The Contractor shall prevent the dispersion of materials or the dilution or mixing of containers and stockpiles.
5. The ground surface on which the contaminated soils will be placed shall be covered with plastic sheeting
which will withstand the placement and removal of stockpiled materials without breaching.
6. The ground surface shall be graded to drain toward the edge of the soil piles and the berm or trench around
them shall be covered by plastic sheeting.
7. Proper security shall be provided in accordance with 40 CFR.
(b) Solid Waste Disposal. Soils determined to be contaminated, but not hazardous, as established by criteria in the
Contract or as determined by CDPHE or other regulatory agencies having jurisdiction, shall be handled and
disposed of, or both as recommended by the HSO and approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall haul this
material to a solid waste disposal facility.
(c) Contaminated Groundwater Disposal. Groundwater determined to be contaminated, but not hazardous, as
established by criteria in the Contract or as determined by CDPHE or other regulatory agencies having
jurisdiction, shall be handled and disposed of, or both as recommended by the HSO and approved by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall prepare a dewatering plan proposing at least three types of treatment and/or
disposal options of contaminated groundwater as required by applicable statutes and regulations. One of the
treatment options shall include permitting and onsite treatment prior to discharge or disposal. The dewatering
plan shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval four weeks before dewatering activities begin.
(d) Hazardous Waste Disposal. Soils and groundwater that are designated or suspected to be hazardous shall be
containerized immediately upon excavation or upon discovery. Hazardous material shall be labeled and
transported to a permitted treatment, storage and disposal (TSD) facility or to a hazardous waste disposal facility
approved by the Engineer.
(e) Additional Requirements. Stockpiled or containerized material characterized as uncontaminated, contaminated or
hazardous shall be stored and disposed of in a manner consistent with current established federal, state, and local
regulations for waste materials.
Materials with contaminants not specifically regulated shall be disposed of by the Contractor as directed, in
consultation with CDPHE. All areas where wastes are generated shall be reviewed by the HSO to identify
potential contaminant sources that may result in a contaminated waste stream.
Contaminated groundwater and soils, which have been identified as solid waste or hazardous waste, requiring
disposal according to federal, state, and local regulations, shall be transported in accordance with 49 CFR by the
Contractor to an appropriately permitted treatment facility, landfill, incinerator or asphalt plant or other facility
approved to accept the waste. CDPHE and the landfill or other treatment or disposal facility shall be notified by
the HSO of the material to be disposed of and the corresponding analytical test results prior to shipment.
Potentially contaminated water collected from the lined trench of a stockpile shall be treated as required by
Colorado Wastewater Discharge Permit System (CDPS) permits, 29 CFR and 40 CFR and reimbursed
separately in accordance with Contract requirements.
250.06 Sample delivery. This work consists of the collection, containerization and delivery of material samples for
analysis to the testing facility designated in the Contract.
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) protocol and standards shall be followed in the collection, containerization
163
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTION 250
ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT
and transport of samples to be analyzed, including the documentation of the proper chain of custody of all samples.
The Contractor shall collect sufficient sample material to perform the required analysis and is responsible for ensuring
that appropriate climate control has been provided for sample transport. Sample delivery shall be made within the
maximum allowable holding time for each sample type, not to exceed 24 hours, excluding weekends. The time period
required for sample collection and delivery to the testing facility will not be considered an excusable delay. The
analysis to be completed and turnaround time shall be approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a copy of documentation indicating that proper chain of custody
requirements have been followed for all samples.
Quality control samples shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with the quality control requirements of
the testing facility designated in the Contract (quality control requirements are available from the Engineer). The
Contractor shall prepare, label and transport these samples to the testing facility in conjunction with the delivery of
other samples authorized for analysis by the Engineer, at no additional cost.
The Engineer may request splits of samples, in advance of collection, which shall be provided at no additional cost
by the Contractor.
250.07 Asbestos-Containing Material Management. Environmental documents or plans listed in the special
provisions should include known or suspected locations that could involve encounters with ACM during excavation
and other soil disturbing construction activities. Unexpected discoveries of ACM may be made during excavation and
soil disturbing construction activities. Asbestos contaminated soil, shall be properly managed or remediated, in
accordance with subsection 250.07(a).
All asbestos related activities shall be performed by Colorado certified asbestos professionals, contractors, or
consultants. Certifications are issued by the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment (CDPHE), Indoor
Air Quality Unit. A Colorado Certified Asbestos professional shall manage the management and disposal of asbestos
contaminated soil and other ACM. The Indoor Air Quality Unit within CDPHE is the only unit that certifies such
professionals. The Contactor shall furnish a copy of the license to the Engineer.
(a) Regulatory Compliance. Asbestos contaminated soil management is governed by 6 CCR 1007-2, Section 5,
which includes and references regulatory compliance with Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA)
Colorado Regulation 8; Inspection and reporting protocol and demolition standards are governed by AHERA;
Demolition and notification standards are governed by National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants
(NESHAPS); Colorado Regulation 8 governs all asbestos activities, demolition, permitting, and certification of
Certified Asbestos Professionals in the State of Colorado. Colorado Regulation 8 is more stringent than AHERA
and NESHAPS and supersedes federal regulations. Conflicting regulatory requirements between AHERA and
NESHAPS, if not specifically addressed in Colorado Regulation 8, shall be addressed and approved protocol
negotiated with CDPHE. The Contractor shall conform to all current regulations, policy directives, or both,
issued by the EPA, CDPHE, and the Department.
(b) Asbestos Management and Visual Inspections Asbestos management must be performed by a certified asbestos
professional. Final Inspections of the area of asbestos contaminated soil removal shall be performed by an
Asbestos Consultant to determine what, if any, controls must be instituted to allow future activity in the
excavation area. All final visual inspections shall be conducted only when soil is dry.
(c) Permitting and Notification. The CDPHE requires notification of any soil disturbing activity where asbestos is
known, suspected, or discovered. A 24-hour notification to CDPHE is required prior to any soil disturbing
164
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTION 250
ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT
activity of an unplanned asbestos discovery. A 10 working day notification to CDPHE is required prior to any
soil disturbing activity in an area with known or potential material suspected of containing asbestos in or on the
soil or asbestos-contaminated soil. Removal of asbestos-containing material on a facility component, that is
located on or in soil that will be disturbed, with asbestos quantities above the following trigger levels must be
permitted and abated in accordance with the requirements of Air Quality Control Commission Regulation No. 8
(5 CCR 1001-10, Part B):
(1) 260 linear feet on pipes,
(2) 160 square feet on other surfaces, or
(3) The volume of a 55-gallon drum.
All permit applications shall be submitted to the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment a
minimum of 10 days prior to start of work for approval. The permit application and notification shall be
submitted simultaneously. The Contractor shall obtain all required State and local permits and shall be
responsible for all associated fees. Permit application, notification, and waiver request forms shall be submitted
to:
Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment Permit Coordinator/APCD - SS - B1 4300
Cherry Creek Drive South Denver, CO 80246-1530 Phone: (303) 692-3100 Fax: (303) 782-0278
Application and waiver forms are available on the CDPHE website: asbestos@state.co.us
(d) CDOT’s Asbestos-Contaminated Soil Management Standard Operating Procedure, dated August 22, 2011.
Asbestos contaminated soil shall be managed in accordance with 6 CCR 1007-2, Section 5, Asbestos Waste
Management Regulations. Regulations apply only upon discovery of asbestos materials during excavation and
soil disturbing activities on construction projects, or when asbestos encounters are expected during construction.
The contractor shall comply with procedures detailed in the CDPHE’s Asbestos-Contaminated Soil Guidance
Document and CDOT’s approved Asbestos-Contaminated Soil Management Standard Operating Procedure,
dated August 22, 2011, including the following minimum requirements:
(1) Immediate actions and implementation of interim controls to prevent visible emissions, exposure, and asbestos
contamination in surrounding areas.
(2) Soil Characterization.
(3) Training required for all personnel involved in excavation and other soil disturbing activities, once asbestos is
encountered during construction or on projects where asbestos encounters are expected. Asbestos Awareness
Training shall be given by a qualified and certified Asbestos Building Inspector with a minimum of six months
experience inspecting asbestos contaminated soil.
(4) Assessment for the presence and extent, within the proposed area of disturbance, of asbestos discoveries,
whether expected or unexpected, by a Certified Asbestos Inspector.
(5) Investigation and sampling required for risk assessment and management. Investigation, if required, shall be
conducted by a Certified Asbestos Inspector.
(6) Risk assessment and determinations for further management or abatement.
(i) Risk assessment and determinations must be made by a Certified Asbestos Inspector, and coordinated with
165
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTION 250
ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT
the Engineer.
(ii) Soil remediation is not necessarily required, depending on the circumstances.
(7) Submit 24-hour Notification of Unplanned Asbestos Discovery.
(8) Submit 10-day Notification of Planned Asbestos Management.
(9) Submit 24-hour Notification of Unplanned Asbestos Discovery.
(10) Submit 10-day Notification of Planned Asbestos Management.
(e) Risk Assessment and Determinations for Further Management Or Remediation. Risk assessment and
determinations for further management or remediation must be closely coordinated with the Project Engineer and
Project Manager of the Statewide Management Plan.
250.08 Methamphetamine Lab Sites. Demolition of former Methamphetamine (meth) labs is enforced by the
Governing Authority, which varies from county to county. The Contractor shall demolish all buildings that are
identified as former meth labs, as listed in public listings by the Governing Authority. The Contractor shall provide
evidence of demolition to the Governing Authority, obtain receipt of such evidence by the Governing Authority, and
shall submit these to Engineer immediately following demolition.
Septic tank removal at known meth lab sites shall undergo preliminary assessment by an Industrial Hygienist or
Certified Industrial Hygienist to determine proper removal and disposal. Work shall proceed in accordance with the
recommendations of the Hygienist.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
250.09 Environmental Health and Safety Management will not be measured, but will be paid for on a lump sum
basis. This will include all work, materials, and hourly time charges by the HSO and other personnel required to
accomplish the following:
(1) Preparation, submittal and briefing of the initial HASP
(2) Preparation and submittal of the Waste Management Plan
1. Preparation and Submittal of the Dewatering Plan
2. Preparation and Submittal of the Remediation Plan
(3) Procedures and equipment specified in subsections 250.03 - 250.07
(4) PPE (levels C and D) for Contractor’s personnel for any contamination identified in the preconstruction
investigations
(5) Preparation and submittal of the final site report
The quantity to be measured for Health and Safety Officer will be the total number of hours that the Health and Safety
Officer is actually used, as authorized, for the following work:
(1) Field monitoring necessary to ensure the safety of workers on the site;
(2) Hours in excess of the items listed under Environmental Health and Safety Management;
(3) Hours that are necessary due to unforeseen site conditions; and
(4) Hours of additional consultation or field work that is requested by the Engineer.
166
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTION 250
ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT
Equipment specified in subsection 250.03(a), preparation and submittal of the daily HSO diary, travel to and from the
project site, and PPE (Levels C and D) required for use by the HSO will not be measured and paid for separately, but
shall be included in the hourly cost of the HSO.
The quantity to be measured for Monitoring Technician will be the total number of hours that Monitoring Technician
is actually used as authorized. Equipment specified in subsection 250.03(b), supervision of the MT, preparation and
submittal of the daily monitoring diary, travel to and from the project site, and PPE required for use by the MT (Levels
C & D) will not be measured and paid for separately, but shall be included in the hourly cost of the MT.
Solid stockpiled materials will be measured by the cubic yard computed from cross sections by the average end area
or other requirements acceptable method. Disposal of solid waste and solid hazardous waste materials will be
measured by the cubic yard in the disposal container.
Materials Sampling and Delivery will be measured by the actual number of samples collected, containerized and
transported to the testing facility indicated in the Contract.
Additional environmental health and safety management work required and authorized by the Engineer, but not
included in the items listed above, will be considered extra work to be paid for in accordance with subsection 109.04,
unless such work is caused by the Contractor’s action.
BASIS OF PAYMENT
250.10 Partial payment for Environmental Health and Safety Management, as determined by the Engineer, will be
made as the work progresses. The Contractor shall submit a schedule of environmental related Health and Safety
Management work before the first partial payment is made. The schedule shall indicate the environmental related
Health and Safety Management time for each work item that requires Contractor environmental related Health and
Safety Management effort and the total time for the project.
The accepted quantity for Health and Safety Officer will be the number of hours actually used and approved for
payment by the Engineer and will be paid for at the contract unit bid price.
The accepted quantity for Monitoring Technician will be the number of hours of onsite monitoring as approved by
the Engineer and will be paid at the Contract unit price.
Environmental Health and Safety Management, Health and Safety Officer and Monitoring Technician bid items shall
include vehicles, phone charges, supplies, printing, postage, office support, and all other miscellaneous costs
associated with the work.
Payment for Groundwater Handling (Containerization & Analysis) will be paid for in accordance with subsection
109.04. Payment for Soil Handling (Stockpile) will be made at the contract unit price for all excavated material
required to be stockpiled for analysis. The contract unit price will be full compensation for furnishing all materials,
labor, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete this work, and all handling of the material prior to disposal.
This includes haul, stockpile, and security. Payment for this work will be in addition to any payment made under other
bid items for excavation, embankment or backfill on the project, or waste disposal of this material.
Payment for Solid Waste Disposal and Solid Hazardous Waste Disposal will be made at the appropriate contract unit
price for the disposal of material determined to be either solid waste or solid hazardous waste. The contract unit prices
will be full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, tools, storage containers for transport,
containerization of material for up to 60 days, and incidentals necessary to complete this work. This includes all
handling of the material, loading for disposal, unloading for disposal, and borrow material required for replacement of
excavated material disposed of offsite. It does not include stockpiling or containerization required for analysis which
is included in the item Materials Handling (Stockpile & Containerization) paid for as described above. Payment for
167
January 15, 2015
REVISION OF SECTION 250
ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT
waste disposal fees and transport of hazardous waste will be made as shown below. Payment for this work will be in
addition to any payment made under other bid items for excavation, embankment, backfill or material handling
(stockpile & containerization) on the project.
(1) Solid Waste. Transport costs to the disposal facility and disposal fees will be included in the contract unit price for
this work.
(2) Solid Hazardous Waste. Transport, Disposal and /or Treatment costs will be paid for by planned force account in
accordance with subsection 109.04.
(3) Liquid Hazardous Waste. Transport, Disposal and /or Treatment costs will paid for by planned force account in
accordance with subsection 109.04.
The cost of shoring required to limit the removal of contaminated materials to the specified limits shall be included in
the bid unit prices for any excavation to be performed. Such shoring ordered by the Engineer in areas other than the
specified areas of known or potential contamination, as shown in the plans, will be paid for in accordance with
subsection 109.04.
Payment for Materials Sampling and Delivery will be made at the contract unit price for each material sample
collected, containerized and transported to the laboratory testing facility as designated in the Contract. The Contract
unit price will be full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to
complete this work including required sampling kits, containers, sample splits and quality control samples.
The Contractor shall be responsible for damage caused by Contractor negligence to the environment, persons, or
property. Expenditures associated with actions of the Contractor shall be borne by the Contractor at no cost to the
project.
Contaminated groundwater containerized, treated or disposed under the requirements of this specification will be paid
for by planned force account in accordance with subsection 109.04.
The accepted quantities will be paid for at the contract unit price for each of the pay items listed below that appear in
the bid schedule.
Pay Item Pay Unit
Environmental Health and Safety
Management
Lump Sum
Health and Safety Officer Hour
Monitoring Technician Hour
Materials Sampling and Delivery Each
Materials Handling (Stockpile) Cubic Yard
Solid Waste Disposal Cubic Yard
168
April 26, 2012
REVISION OF SECTION 401
COMPACTION OF HOT MIX ASPHALT
Section 401 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 401.17, delete the first paragraph and replace with the following:
401.17 Compaction. The hot mix asphalt shall be compacted by rolling. Both steel wheel and pneumatic tire rollers
will be required. The number, weight, and type of rollers furnished shall be sufficient to obtain the required density
while the mixture is in a workable condition. Compaction shall begin immediately after the mixture is placed and be
continuous until the required density is obtained. When the mixture contains unmodified asphalt cement (PG 58-28 or
PG 64-22) or modified (PG 58-34), and the surface temperature falls below 185 °F, further compaction effort shall not
be applied unless approved, provided the Contractor can demonstrate that there is no damage to the finished mat. If the
mixture contains modified asphalt cement (PG 76-28, PG 70-28 or PG 64-28) and the surface temperature falls below
230 °F, further compaction effort shall not be applied unless approved, provided the Contractor can demonstrate that
there is no damage to the finished mat.
Warm Mix Asphalt compaction requirements shall conform to CP 59.
In subsection 401.17, delete the third paragraph and replace with the following:
SMA shall be compacted to a density of 93 to 97 percent of the daily theoretical maximum specific gravity, determined
according to CP 51. All other HMA shall be compacted to a density of 92 to 96 percent of the daily theoretical
maximum specific gravity, determined according to CP 51. If more than one theoretical maximum specific gravity test
is taken in a day, the average of the theoretical maximum specific gravity results will be used to determine the percent
compaction. Field density determinations will be made in accordance with CP 44 or 81.
In subsection 401.17, second to last paragraph, delete the first sentence and replace with the following:
After production paving work has begun, a new Roller Pattern shall be demonstrated when a change in the compaction
process is implemented.
169
April 26, 2012
REVISION OF SECTION 401
COMPACTION OF HOT MIX ASPHALT
Section 401 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 401.17, delete the first paragraph and replace with the following:
401.17 Compaction. The hot mix asphalt shall be compacted by rolling. Both steel wheel and pneumatic tire rollers
will be required. The number, weight, and type of rollers furnished shall be sufficient to obtain the required density
while the mixture is in a workable condition. Compaction shall begin immediately after the mixture is placed and be
continuous until the required density is obtained. When the mixture contains unmodified asphalt cement (PG 58-28 or
PG 64-22) or modified (PG 58-34), and the surface temperature falls below 185 °F, further compaction effort shall not
be applied unless approved, provided the Contractor can demonstrate that there is no damage to the finished mat. If the
mixture contains modified asphalt cement (PG 76-28, PG 70-28 or PG 64-28) and the surface temperature falls below
230 °F, further compaction effort shall not be applied unless approved, provided the Contractor can demonstrate that
there is no damage to the finished mat.
Warm Mix Asphalt compaction requirements shall conform to CP 59.
In subsection 401.17, delete the third paragraph and replace with the following:
SMA shall be compacted to a density of 93 to 97 percent of the daily theoretical maximum specific gravity, determined
according to CP 51. All other HMA shall be compacted to a density of 92 to 96 percent of the daily theoretical
maximum specific gravity, determined according to CP 51. If more than one theoretical maximum specific gravity test
is taken in a day, the average of the theoretical maximum specific gravity results will be used to determine the percent
compaction. Field density determinations will be made in accordance with CP 44 or 81.
In subsection 401.17, second to last paragraph, delete the first sentence and replace with the following:
After production paving work has begun, a new Roller Pattern shall be demonstrated when a change in the compaction
process is implemented.
170
February 3, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 401
PLANT MIX PAVEMENTS
Section 401 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 401.02(b) shall include the following:
After the Form 43 is executed, and all ingredients are available on the project, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer
a minimum of one working day in advance of beginning production of the hot mix asphalt. Any changes in the Form
43 will require the same notification unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
171
February 3, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 401
TEMPERATURE SEGREGATION
Section 401 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 401.16 delete the twelfth (last) paragraph and replace it with the following:
The Engineer may evaluate the HMA for low density due to temperature segregation any time industry best practices,
as detailed on Form 1346, are not being followed or the Engineer suspects temperature segregation is occurring. The
Engineer will first meet with the Contractor to discuss the paving practices that are triggering the temperature
investigation. Areas across the mat, excluding the outside 1 foot of both edges of the mat, that are more than 25 °F
cooler than other material across the width may be marked for density testing. Material for temperature comparison
will be evaluated in 3-foot intervals behind the paver across the width of the mat. The material shall be marked and
tested in accordance with CP 58. If four or more areas within a lot of 500 tons have densities of less than 93 percent of
the material’s maximum specific gravity for SMA mixes or less than 92 percent of the material’s maximum specific
gravity for all other HMA mixes, a 5 percent price disincentive will be applied to the 500 ton lot. The 500 ton count
begins when the Engineer starts looking for cold areas, not when the first cold area is detected. This price disincentive
will be in addition to those described in Sections 105 and 106. Only one area per delivered truck will be counted
toward the number of low density areas. Temperature segregation checks will be performed only in areas where
continuous paving is possible.
172
February 3, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 412
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT FINISHING
Section 412 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Delete subsection 412.12(a) and replace it with the following:
(a) Hand Finishing. Hand finishing should be minimized wherever possible. The Engineer shall be notified prior to
hand finishing work and the proposed hand finished work shall be addressed in the Quality Control Plan for
concrete finishing. Unless otherwise specified, hand finishing methods will be permitted only under the following
conditions. Hand finished concrete shall be struck off and screeded with a portable screed that is at least 2 feet
longer than the maximum width of the slab to be struck off. It shall be sufficiently rigid to retain its shape.
Concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by hand vibrators. Hand finishing shall not be allowed after concrete
has been in-place for more than 30 minutes or when initial set has begun unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer. Finishing tools made of aluminum shall not be used.
The Contractor shall provide a Quality Control Plan (QCP) to ensure that proper hand finishing is accomplished in
accordance with current Industry standards in the concrete pavement placement. It shall also identify the
Contractor’s method for ensuring that the provisions of the QCP are met. The QCP shall be submitted to the
Engineer at the Preconstruction Conference. Paving operations shall not begin until the Engineer has approved the
QCP. The QCP shall identify and address issues affecting the quality of finished concrete pavement including but
not limited to:
(1) Timing of hand finishing operations
(2) Methodology to place and transport concrete
(3) Equipment and tools to be utilized
(4) Qualifications and training of finishers and supervisors
When the Engineer determines that any element of the approved QCP is not being implemented or that hand
finished concrete is unacceptable, work shall be suspended. The Contractor shall supply a written plan to address
improperly placed material and how to remedy future hand finishing failures and bring the work into compliance
with the QCP. The Engineer will review the plan for acceptability prior to authorizing the resumption of
operations.
173
May 5, 2011
REVISION OF SECTIONS 412, 601 AND 711
LIQUID MEMBRANE-FORMING COMPOUNDS
FOR CURING CONCRETE
Sections 412, 601 and 711 of the Standard Specifications are hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 412.14, first paragraph, delete the second sentence and replace with the following:
The impervious membrane curing compound shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 309, Type 2 and shall be volatile
organic content (VOC) compliant.
In subsection 601.13 (b), first paragraph, delete the second sentence and replace with the following:
A volatile organic content (VOC) compliant curing compound conforming to ASTM C 309, Type 2 shall be used on
surfaces where curing compound is allowed, except that Type 1 curing compound shall be used on exposed aggregate
or colored concrete, or when directed by the Engineer.
In subsection 601.16 (a) 1., delete the first sentence and replace with the following:
1. Membrane Forming Curing Compound Method. A volatile organic content (VOC) compliant curing compound
conforming to ASTM C 309, Type 2 shall be uniformly applied to the surface of the deck, curbs and sidewalks at
the rate of 1 gallon per 100 square feet.
Delete subsection 711.01 and replace with the following:
711.01 Curing Materials. Curing materials shall conform to the following requirements:
Burlap Cloth made from Jute or Kenaf AASHTO M 182
Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for
Curing Concrete
ASTM C 309
Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete AASHTO M 171*
*Only the performance requirements of AASHTO M171 shall apply.
Straw used for curing shall consist of threshed straw of oats, barley, wheat, or rye. Clean field or marsh hay may be
substituted for straw when approved by the Engineer. Old dry straw or hay which breaks readily in the spreading
process will not be accepted.
174
February 3, 2011
REVISION OF SECTIONS 412 AND 705
PREFORMED COMPRESSION SEALS
Sections 412 and 705 of the Standard Specifications are hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 412.13 shall include the following:
Transverse and untied longitudinal joints shall be sawed and sealed as shown in the following diagram for preformed
compression seals. Installation shall conform to subsection 412.18, as revised for this project, and the compression seal
and lubricant materials shall conform to subsection 705.01, as revised for this project.
Subsection 412.18 shall include the following:
Before installation of the preformed compression seal the following shall be completed:
(1) Repair of defective pavement slabs and repair and proper curing of cracks or spalls in accordance with subsection
412.16.
(2) Corrective work for tining.
(3) Corrective work for smoothness in accordance with subsection 412.17(c).
Air temperature at the time of installation shall be from 40 to 80 °F or as recommended by the manufacturer. The joint
shall be air cleaned with oil free air at 100 psi minimum just before seal installation. The preformed compression seal
shall have an uncompressed width of 11/16 inch. Installation shall be in conformance with the following diagram and
shall follow the manufacturers recommendations. A machine shall be used for installation which results in proper
depth of the seal without damage or twisting of the seal. Elongation during installation shall not exceed 5 percent.
Subsection 705.01 shall include the following:
(c) Preformed Compression Seals. Preformed compression seals shall conform to AASHTO M 220. The lubricant
adhesive used for installation of the preformed compression seal shall conform to ASTM D 2835. The Contractor
shall provide the Engineer with certified test reports that indicate conformance of the preformed compression seals
and lubricant adhesive with these specifications before installation begins.
175
February 3, 2011
REVISION OF SECTIONS 412 AND 705
PREFORMED COMPRESSION SEALS
JOINT SHAPE AND JOINT FILLER DETAILS FOR
TRANSVERSE SAWED CONTRACTION JOINT AND
UNTIED LONGITUDINAL CONTRACTION JOINT
*Saw Depth
T/4 for transverse sawed contraction joint
T/3 for untied longitudinal contraction joint
Where:
T = pavement thickness
Tolerances of all joint width dimensions: 0 to +1/16 inch
Installation of preformed compression joint seals shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
The joint locations, spacing, and general notes on the standard for concrete pavement joints for
this project shall apply.
All materials and installation required for compression joint seals will be included in the work.
All other joints shall be constructed in accordance with standard specifications.
176
February 3, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 601
CONCRETE BATCHING
Section 601 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 601.06, delete (13) and (17) and replace with the following:
(13) Gallons of water added by truck operator, the time the water was added and the quantity of concrete in the truck
each time water is added.
(17) Water to cementitious material ratio.
177
February 3, 2011
REVISION OF SECTIONS 601
CONCRETE FINISHING
Section 601of the Standard Specifications are hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 601.12 (a) delete the fifth paragraph and replace it with the following:
Water shall not be added to the surface of the concrete to assist in finishing operations.
Hand finishing should be minimized wherever possible. The hand finishing methods shall be addressed in the Quality
Control Plan for concrete finishing. Hand finished concrete shall be struck off and screeded with a portable screed that
is at least 2 feet longer than the maximum width of the surface to be struck off. It shall be sufficiently rigid to retain its
shape. Concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by hand vibrators. Hand finishing shall not be allowed after concrete
has been in-place for more than 30 minutes or when initial set has begun. Finishing tools made of aluminum shall not
be used.
The Contractor shall provide a Quality Control Plan (QCP) to ensure that proper hand finishing is accomplished in
accordance with current Industry standards. It shall identify the Contractor’s method for ensuring that the provisions of
the QCP are met. The QCP shall be submitted to the Engineer at the Preconstruction Conference. Concrete placement
shall not begin until the Engineer has approved the QCP. The QCP shall identify and address issues affecting the
quality finished concrete including but not limited to:
(5) Timing of hand finishing operations
(6) Methodology to place and transport concrete
(7) Equipment and tools to be utilized
(8) Qualifications and training of finishers and supervisors
When the Engineer determines that any element of the approved QCP is not being implemented or that hand finished
concrete is unacceptable, work shall be suspended. The Contractor shall supply a written plan to address improperly
placed material and how to remedy future hand finishing failures and bring the work into compliance with the QCP.
The Engineer will review the plan for acceptability prior to authorizing the resumption of operations.
In subsection 601.14(a) delete the fourth paragraph.
178
July 28, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 601
CONCRETE FORM AND FALSEWORK REMOVAL
Section 601 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 601.09, delete (h) and replace with the following:
(h) Removal of Forms. The forms for any portion of the structure shall not be removed until the concrete is strong
enough to withstand damage when the forms are removed.
Unless specified in the plans, forms shall remain in place for members that resist dead load bending until concrete has
reached a compressive strength of at least 80 percent of the required 28 day strength, 0.80f’c. Forms for columns shall
remain in place until concrete has reached a compressive strength of at least 1,000 psi. Forms for sides of beams, walls
or other members that do not resist dead load bending shall remain in place until concrete has reached a compressive
strength of at least 500 psi.
Forms and supports for cast-in-place concrete box culverts (CBCs) shall not be removed until the concrete
compressive strength exceeds 0.6 fc′ for CBCs with spans up to and including 12 feet, and 0.67 fc′ for CBCs with spans
exceeding 12 feet but not larger than 20 feet. Forms for CBCs with spans larger than 20 feet shall not be removed until
after all concrete has been placed in all spans and has attained a compressive strength of at least 0.80f’c.
Concrete compressive strength shall be determined using information concrete cylinders or by maturity meters. At the
pre-pour conference, the Contractor shall submit the method of determining the structure’s strength and the location
where information cylinders will be taken or maturity meters placed.
If information cylinders are used they shall be cast by the Contractor and cured in the same manner as the structure. A
set of information cylinders shall be taken for each concrete placement on the structure. A set of information cylinders
shall be taken for any load of concrete that is being placed at the mid-span of beams and at support locations and other
locations as directed by the Engineer. Casting of the information cylinders will be witnessed by the Engineer. The
information cylinders shall remain in the molds and cured in the same manner as the structure until they are tested in
the laboratory by the Engineer. Compressive strength shall be determined using the compressive strength of at least
two information cylinders. The contractor shall be responsible for protecting the information cylinders from damage.
Prior to placement of concrete whose strength will be determined with maturity meters, the Contractor shall provide
the Engineer a report of maturity relationships in accordance with CP 69. The Contractor shall provide maturity
meters and all necessary wires and connectors. The Contractor shall be responsible for the placement and maintenance
of the maturity meter and wire. . At a minimum a maturity meter will be placed at the mid-span of beams and at
support locations. Placement shall be as directed by the Engineer.
For structures with multiple sets of information cylinders or maturity meters, the lowest compressive strength shall
determine when the forms can be removed.
Acceptance cylinders shall not be used for determining compressive strength to remove forms.
When field operations are controlled by information cylinder tests or maturity meter, the removal of forms, supports
and housing, and the discontinuance of heating and curing may begin when the concrete is found to have the required
compressive strength.
179
July 28, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 601
CONCRETE FORM AND FALSEWORK REMOVAL
Forms for median barrier, railing or curbs, may be removed at the convenience of the Contractor after the concrete has
hardened.
All forms shall be removed except permanent steel bridge deck forms and forms used to support hollow abutments or
hollow piers when no permanent access is available into the cells. When permanent access is provided into box girders,
all interior forms and loose material shall be removed, and the inside of box girders shall be cleaned.
In subsection 601.11, delete (e) and replace with the following:
(e) Falsework Removal. Unless specified in the plans or specifications, falsework shall remain in place until concrete
has attained a minimum compressive strength of 0.80f’c.
Falsework supporting any span of a simple span bridge shall not be released until after all concrete, excluding concrete
above the bridge deck, has attained a compressive strength of at least 0.80f’c.
Falsework supporting any span of a continuous or rigid frame bridge shall not be released until after all concrete,
excluding concrete above the bridge deck, has been placed in all spans and has attained the compressive strength of at
least 0.80f’c.
Falsework for arch bridges shall be removed uniformly and gradually, beginning at the crown, to permit the arch to
take its load slowly and evenly.
Falsework supporting overhangs and deck slabs between girders shall not be released until the deck concrete has
attained a compressive strength of at least 0.80f’c.
Falsework for pier caps which will support steel or precast concrete girders shall not be released until the concrete has
attained a compressive strength of at least 0.80f’c. Girders shall not be erected onto such pier caps until the concrete in
the cap has attained the compressive strength of at least 0.80f’c.
Falsework for cast-in-place prestressed portions of structures shall not be released until after the pre-stressing steel has
been tensioned.
Concrete compressive strength shall be determined using information concrete cylinders or by maturity meters. At the
pre-pour conference, the Contractor shall submit the method of determining the structure’s strength and the location
that information cylinders will be taken or maturity meters placed.
If information cylinders are used they shall be cast by the Contractor and cured in the same manner as the structure. A
set of information cylinders shall be taken for each concrete placement on the structure. A set of information cylinders
shall be taken for any load of concrete that is being placed at the mid-span of beams and at support locations and other
locations as directed by the Engineer. Casting of the information cylinders will be witnessed by the Engineer. The
information cylinders shall remain in the molds and cured in the same manner as the structure until they are tested in
the laboratory by the Engineer. Compressive strength shall be determined using the compressive strength of at least
two information cylinders. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting the information cylinders from damage.
Prior to placement of concrete whose strength will be determined with maturity meters, the Contractor shall provide
the Engineer a report of maturity relationships in accordance with CP 69. The Contractor shall provide maturity
180
July 28, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 601
CONCRETE FORM AND FALSEWORK REMOVAL
meters and all necessary wires and connectors. The Contractor shall be responsible for the placement and maintenance
of the maturity meters and wires. At a minimum a maturity meter will be placed at the mid-span of beams and at
support locations. Placement shall be as directed by the Engineer.
For structures with multiple sets of information cylinders or maturity meters, the lowest compressive strength shall
determine when the falsework can be removed.
Acceptance cylinders shall not be used for determining compressive strength to remove falsework.
181
July 29, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 601
CONCRETE SLUMP ACCEPTANCE
Section 601 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Delete the fifth paragraph of Subsection 601.05 and replace with the following:
Except for Class BZ concrete, the slump of the delivered concrete shall be the slump of the approved concrete mix
design plus or minus 2.0 inch. The laboratory trial mix must produce an average compressive strength at least 115
percent of the required field compressive strength specified in Table 601-1. When entrained air is specified in the
Contract for Class BZ concrete, an air entraining admixture may be added to an approved Class BZ mix design. A
new trial mix will not be required.
Delete Subsection 601.17 (b), 601.17 (d) and Table 601-3 and replace with the following:
(b) Slump. Slump acceptance, but not rejection, may be visually determined by the Engineer. Any batch that exceeds
the slump of the approved concrete mix design by 2.0 inches will be retested. If the slump is exceeded a second
time, that load is rejected. If the slump is greater than 2 inches lower than the approved concrete mix design, the
load can be adjusted with a water reducer, or by adding water (if the w/cm allows) and retested.
Portions of loads incorporated into structures prior to determining test results which indicate rejection as the
correct course of action shall be subject to reduced payment or removal as determined by the Engineer.
(d) Pay Factors. The pay factor for concrete which is allowed to remain in place at a reduced price shall be according
to Table 601-3 and shall be applied to the unit price bid for Item 601, Structural Concrete.
If deviations occur in air content and strength within the same batch, the pay factor for the batch shall be the
product of the individual pay factors.
Table 601-3
PAY FACTORS
Percent Total Air Strength
Deviations
From
Specified
Air
(Percent)
Pay
Factor
(Percent
)
Below
Specified
Strength (psi)
[ < 4500 psi
Concrete]
Pay
Factor
(Percent
)
Below
Specified
Strength
(psi)
[ ≥ 4500 psi
Concrete]
0.0-0.2 98 1-100 98 1-100
0.3-0.4 96 101-200 96 101-200
0.5-0.6 92 201-300 92 201-300
0.7-0.8 84 301-400 84 301-400
0.9-1.0 75 401-500 75 401-500
Over 1.0 Reject Over 500 Reject
65 501-600
54 601-700
42 701-800
29 801-900
15 901-1000
182
February 17, 2012
REVISION OF SECTION 630
CONSTRUCTION ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
Section 630 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 630.16 delete the fifth paragraph.
183
May 8, 2014
REVISION OF SECTION 630
RETROREFLECTIVE SIGN SHEETING
Section 630 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 630.02, delete the sixth and seventh paragraphs, including Table 630-1, and replace them with the
following:
Retroreflective sheeting for all signs requiring an orange background shall be Type VI or Type Fluorescent.
Retroreflective sheeting for all signs requiring a yellow background shall be Type Fluorescent.
184
May 8, 2014
REVISION OF SECTION 630
RETROREFLECTIVE SIGN SHEETING
Table 630-1
RETROREFLECTIVE SHEETING TYPES
Sheeting
Type IV
Type VI
(Roll-up sign material)
Type Fluorescent1
Application Work Zone Work Zone Work Zone
All Orange Construction
Signs X
Orange Construction
Signs that are used only
during daytime hours for
short term or mobile
operations
X4 X
Barricades (Temporary) X X
Vertical Panels X X
Flaggers Stop/Slow
Paddle X X
Drums2 X X
Non-orange Fixed
Support signs with prefix
“W”
X
Special Warning Signs X
STOP sign (R1-1)
YIELD sign (R1-2)
WRONG WAY sign (R5-
1a)
DO NOT ENTER sign
(R5-1)
EXIT sign (E5-1a)
X
DETOUR sign (M4-9) or
(M4-10) X
All other fixed support
signs3 X X
All other signs used only
during working hours X X
All other signs that are
used only during daytime
hours for short term or
mobile operations
X X5 X
1 Fluorescent Sheeting shall be of a brand that is on the CDOT Approved Products List.
2 Drum Sheeting shall be manufactured for flexible devices.
3 Fixed support signs are defined as all signs that must remain in use outside of working hours. They shall be
mounted in accordance with Standard Plan S-630-1.
4 RS 24 only.
5 White only.
185
January 31, 2013
REVISION OF SECTION 630
SIGNS AND BARRICADES
Section 630 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 630.02, delete the second paragraph, and replace with the following:
Temporary sign support assembly shall be timber, perforated square metal tubing inserted into a larger base post or slip
base or perforated metal U-channel with a slip base. The temporary sign support assembly shall conform to NCHRP
and AASHTO requirements regarding temporary sign supports during construction.
Subsection 630.02 shall include the following:
If a timber post is selected, it shall conform to the requirements of subsection 614.02.
186
November 1, 2012
REVISION OF SECTION 703
AGGREGATES FOR HOT MIX ASPHALT
Section 703 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Delete subsection 703.04 and replace with the following:
703.04 Aggregates for Hot Mix Asphalt. Aggregates for hot mix asphalt (HMA) shall be of uniform quality,
composed of clean, hard, durable particles of crushed stone, crushed gravel, natural gravel, or crushed slag. Excess of
fine material shall be wasted before crushing. A percentage of the aggregate retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve for
Gradings S, SX and SG— and on the 2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve for Gradings SF and ST—shall have at least two
mechanically induced fractured faces when tested in accordance with Colorado Procedure 45. This percentage will be
specified in Table 403-1, as revised for the project in Section 403. The angularity of the fine aggregate shall be a
minimum of 45.0 percent when determined according to AASHTO T 304. Grading SF mixes, when determined by
RME, may not require fine aggregate angularity of 45.0 percent. Aggregate samples representing each aggregate
stockpile shall be non-plastic if the percent of aggregate passing the 2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve is greater than or equal to
10 percent by weight of the individual aggregate sample. Plasticity will be determined in accordance with AASHTO T
90. The material shall not contain clay balls, vegetable matter, or other deleterious substances.
The aggregate for Gradings ST, S, SX and SG shall have a percentage of wear of 45 or less when tested in accordance
with AASHTO T 96.
Table 703-4
MASTER RANGE TABLE FOR HOT MIX ASPHALT
Sieve Size
Percent by Weight Passing Square Mesh Sieves
Grading SF** Grading ST Grading SX Grading
S Grading SG
37.5 mm (1½) 100
25.0 mm (1) 100 90 – 100
19.0 mm (¾) 100 90 – 100
12.5 mm (½) 100 90 – 100 * *
9.5 mm (⅜) 100 90 – 100 * * *
4.75 mm (#4) 90 – 100 * * * *
2.36 mm (#8) * 28 – 58 28 – 58 23 – 49 19 – 45
1.18 mm (#16) 30 – 54
600 m (#30) * * * * *
300 m (#50)
150 m (#100)
75 m (#200) 2 – 12 2 – 10 2 – 10 2 – 8 1 – 7
* These additional Form 43 Specification Screens will initially be established using values from the As Used
Gradation shown on the Design Mix.
**SF applications are limited and the CDOT Pavement Design Manual should be referenced, prior to use.
187
November 1, 2012
REVISION OF SECTION 703
AGGREGATES FOR HOT MIX ASPHALT
Aggregates for stone matrix asphalt (SMA) shall be of uniform quality, composed of clean, hard, durable particles of
crushed stone, crushed gravel, or crushed slag. A minimum of 90 percent of the particles retained on the 4.75 mm (No.
4) sieve shall have at least two mechanically induced fractured faces when tested in accordance with Colorado
Procedure 45. The particles passing the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall be the product of crushing rock larger than 12.5
mm (½ inch) and shall be non-plastic when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 90.
Additionally, each source of aggregate for SMA shall meet the following requirements:
(1) No more than 30 percent when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 96 Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size
Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.
(2) No more than 12 percent when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 104 Soundness of Aggregate by Use of
Sodium Sulfate.
The aggregate for Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) shall meet the requirements of Table 703-4A when tested in accordance
with CP-L 4211 Resistance of Coarse Aggregate to Degradation by Abrasion in the Micro-Deval Apparatus. The
Contractor shall be assessed a price reduction of $1000 for each production sample of the combined aggregate with a
value greater than 20 according to CP-L 4211.
Table 703-4A
AGGREGATE DEGRADATION BY ABRASION
IN THE MICRO-DEVAL CP-L 4211
Not to exceed
Combined Aggregate (Mix Design) 18
Combined Aggregate (1/10,000 tons, or fraction thereof
during production) 20
188
July 28, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 703
CONCRETE AGGREGATES
Section 703 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Delete the second paragraph of subsection 703.00 and Table 703-1.
Delete subsections 703.01 and 703.02 and replace with the following:
703.01 Fine Aggregate for Concrete. Fine aggregate for concrete shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M
6, Class A. The minimum sand equivalent, as tested in accordance with Colorado Procedure 37 shall be 80 unless
otherwise specified. The fineness modulus, as determined by AASHTO T 27, shall not be less than 2.50 or greater than
3.50 unless otherwise approved.
703.02 Coarse Aggregate for Concrete. Coarse aggregate for concrete shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M 80, Class A aggregates, except that the percentage of wear shall not exceed 45 when tested in accordance
with AASHTO T 96.
189
November 1, 2012
REVISION OF SECTION 712
GEOTEXTILES
Section 712 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 712.08, delete the third and fourth paragraphs and replace with the following:
Physical requirements for all geotextiles shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M-288. Materials shall be
selected from the New York Department of Transportation’s Approved Products List of Geosynthetic materials that
meet the National Transportation Product Evaluation Program (NTPEP) and AASHTO M-288 testing requirements.
The current list of products that meet these requirements is located at:
www.dot.ny.gov
The Geotextile Approved Products List may be accessed by clicking on the following tabs once on the NYDOT site to:
(1) A To Z Site Index
(2) Approved List
(3) Approved Products
(4) Materials and Equipment
(5) Geosynthetics for Highway Construction
(6) Geotextiles
In subsection 712.08, delete Table 712-2 and replace with the following
190
November 1, 2012
REVISION OF SECTION 712
GEOTEXTILES
Table 712-2
TYPICAL VALUES OF PERMEABILITY COEFFICIENTS1
Turbulent Flow
Particle
Size Range
Millimeters (inches)
Effective
Size Permeability
Coefficient k
D max D min cm/s
D 20
mm
(inches)
Derrick STONE 3000 (120) 900 (36) 1200
(48) 100
One-man STONE 300 (12) 100 (4) 150 (6) 30
Clean, fine to
coarse GRAVEL 80 (3) 10 (¼) 13 (½) 10
Fine, uniform
GRAVEL 8 (⅜) 1.5 (1/16) 3 (⅛) 5
Very coarse, clean,
uniform SAND 3 (⅛) 0.8 (1/32) 1.5 (1/16) 3
Laminar Flow
Uniform, coarse
SAND 2 (⅛) 0.5 (1/64) 0.6 0.4
Uniform, medium
SAND 0.5 0.25 0.3 0.1
Clean, well-graded
SAND & GRAVEL 10 0.05 0.1 0.01
Uniform, fine
SAND 0.25 0.05 0.06 40 x 10-4
Well-graded, silty
SAND & GRAVEL 5 0.01 0.02 4 x 10-4
Silty SAND 2 0.005 0.01 1.0 x 10-4
Uniform SILT 0.05 0.005 0.006 0.5 x 10-4
Sandy CLAY 1.0 0.001 0.002 0.05 x 10-4
Silty CLAY 0.05 0.001 0.0015 0.01 x 10-4
CLAY (30% to 50%
clay sizes) 0.05 0.0005 0.0008 0.001 x 10-4
Colloidal CLAY (-2
μm 50%) 0.01 10 40 10-9
1 Basic Soils Engineering, R.K. Hough, 2nd Edition, Ronald Pess Co.;
1969, Page 76.
Note: Since the permeability coefficient of the soil will be unknown in
most non-critical, non-severe applications for erosion control and
drainage, the soil-permeability coefficients listed in Table 712-2
may be used as a guide for comparing the permeability coefficient
of the fabric with that of the in-place soil
191
February 3, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 712
WATER FOR MIXING OR CURING CONCRETE
Section 712 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Delete subsection 712.01 and replace it with the following:
712.01 Water. Water used in mixing or curing concrete shall be reasonably clean and free of oil, salt, acid, alkali,
sugar, vegetation, or other substance injurious to the finished product. Concrete mixing water shall meet the
requirements of ASTM C1602. The Contractor shall perform and submit tests to the Engineer at the frequencies listed
in ASTM C1602. Potable water may be used without testing. Where the source of water is relatively shallow, the
intake shall be so enclosed as to exclude silt, mud, grass, and other foreign materials.
192
February 3, 2011
AFFIRMATIVE ACTION REQUIREMENTS
EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY
A. AFFIRMATIVE ACTION REQUIREMENTS
Notice of Requirement for Affirmative Action to Ensure Equal Employment Opportunity (Executive Order 11246)
1. The Bidder’s attention is called to the “Equal Opportunity Clause” and the “Standard Federal Equal Employment
Opportunity Construction Contract Specifications” set forth herein.
2. The goals and timetables for minority and female participation, expressed in percentage terms for the Contractor’s
aggregate workforce in each trade on all construction work in the covered area are as follows:
Goals and Timetable for Minority Utilization
Timetable - Until Further Notice
Economic
Area
Standard Metropolitan
Statistical Area (SMSA)
Counties
Involved
Goal
157
(Denver)
2080 Denver-Boulder Adams, Arapahoe, Boulder, Denver,
Douglas, Gilpin, Jefferson................... 13.8%
2670 Fort Collins Larimer................................................ 6.9%
3060 Greeley Weld.................................................... 13.1%
Non SMSA Counties Cheyenne, Clear Creek, Elbert,
Grand, Kit Carson, Logan, Morgan,
Park, Phillips, Sedgwick, Summit,
Washington &
Yuma............................
12.8%
158
(Colo. Spgs. -
Pueblo)
1720 Colorado Springs El Paso, Teller..................................... 10.9%
6560 Pueblo Pueblo................................................. 27.5%
Non SMSA Counties Alamosa, Baca, Bent, Chaffee,
Conejos, Costilla, Crowley, Custer,
Fremont, Huerfano, Kiowa, Lake,
Las Animas, Lincoln, Mineral, Otero,
Prowers, Rio Grande, Saguache........ 19.0%
159
(Grand Junction)
Non SMSA Archuleta, Delta, Dolores, Eagle,
Garfield, Gunnison, Hinsdale,
La Plata, Mesa, Moffat, Montezuma,
Montrose, Ouray, Pitkin, Rio Blanco,
Routt, San Juan, San Miguel 10.2%
156 (Cheyenne -
Casper WY)
Non SMSA Jackson County, Colorado.................. 7.5%
GOALS AND TIMETABLES FOR FEMALE UTILIZATION
Until Further Notice......................................................................................................................6.9% -- Statewide
193
February 3, 2011
AFFIRMATIVE ACTION REQUIREMENTS
EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY
These goals are applicable to all the Contractor’s construction work (whether or not it is Federal or federally assisted)
performed in the covered area. If the Contractor performs construction work in a geographical area located outside of
the covered area, it shall apply the goals established for such geographical area where the work is actually performed.
With regard to this second area, the Contractor also is subject to the goals for both its federally involved and non-
federally involved construction.
The Contractor’s compliance with the Executive Order and the regulations in 41 CFR Part 60-4 shall be based on its
implementation of the Equal Opportunity Clause specific affirmative action obligations required by the specifications
set forth in 41 CFR 60-4.3(a), and its efforts meet the goals established for the geographical area where the contract
resulting form this solicitation is to be performed. The hours of minority and female employment and training must be
substantially uniform throughout the length of the contract, and in each trade, and the Contractor shall make a good
faith effort to employ minorities and women evenly on each of its projects. The transfer of minority or female
employees or trainees from Contractor to Contractor or from project to project for the sole purpose of meeting the
Contractor’s goals shall be a violation of the contract, the Executive Order and the regulations in 41 CFR Par 60-4.
Compliance with the goals will be measured against the total work hours performed.
3. The Contractor shall provide written notification to the Director of the Office of Federal Contract Compliance
Programs within 10 working days of award of any construction subcontract in excess of $10,000 at any tier for
construction work under the contract resulting from this solicitation. The notification shall list the name,
address and telephone number of the subcontractor; employer identification number; estimated dollar amount
of the subcontract; estimated starting and completion dates of the subcontract; and the geographical area in
which the contract is to be performed.
4. As used in this specification, and in the contract resulting from this solicitation, the “covered area” is the county or
counties shown on the Invitation for Bids and on the plans. In cases where the work is in two or more counties
covered by differing percentage goals, the highest percentage will govern.
B. STANDARD FEDERAL EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
SPECIFICATIONS
Standard Federal Equal Employment Opportunity Construction Contract Specifications (Executive Order 11246)
1. As used in these Specifications:
a. “Covered area” means the geographical area described in the solicitation from which this contract resulted;
b. “Director” means Director, Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs, United States Department of
Labor, or any person to whom the Director delegates authority;
c. “Employer identification number” means the Federal Social Security number used on the Employer’s
Quarterly Federal Tax Return, U.S. Treasury Department Form 941.
d. “Minority” includes;
(i) Black (all persons having origins in any of the Black African racial groups not of Hispanic origin);
194
February 3, 2011
AFFIRMATIVE ACTION REQUIREMENTS
EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY
(ii) Hispanic (all persons of Mexican, Puerto Rican, Cuban, Central or South American or other Spanish
Culture or origin, regardless of race);
(iii) Asian and Pacific Islander (all persons having origins in any of the original peoples of the Far East,
Southeast Asia, the Indian Subcontinent, or the Pacific Islands); and
(iv) American Indian or Alaskan Native (all persons having origins in any of the original peoples of North
America and maintaining identifiable tribal affiliations through membership and participation or
community identification).
2. Whenever the Contractor, or any Subcontractor at any tier, subcontracts a portion of the work involving any
construction trade, it shall physically include in each subcontract in excess of $10,000 the provisions of these
specifications and the Notice which contains the applicable goals for minority and female participation and
which is set forth in the solicitations from which this contract resulted.
3. If the Contractor is participating (pursuant to 41 CFR 60-4.5) in a Hometown Plan approved by the U.S.
Department of Labor in the covered area either individually or through an association, its affirmative action
obligations on all work in the Plan area (including goals and timetables) shall be in accordance with that Plan
for those trades which have unions participating in the Plan. Contractors must be able to demonstrate their
participation in and compliance with the provisions of any such Hometown Plan. Each Contractor or
Subcontractor participating in an approved Plan is individually required to comply with its obligations under
the EEO clause, and to make a good faith effort to achieve each goal under the Plan in each trade in which it
has employees. The overall good faith performance by other Contractors or Subcontractor toward a goal in an
approved Plan does not excuse any covered Contractor’s or Subcontractor’s failure to take good faith efforts to
achieve the Plan goals and timetables.
4. The Contractor shall implement the specific affirmative action standards provided in paragraphs 7a through p of
these specifications. The goals set forth in the solicitation from which this contract resulted are expressed as
percentages of the total hours of employment and training of minority and female utilization the Contractor
should reasonably be able to achieve in each construction trade in which it has employees in the covered area.
Covered Construction contractors performing construction work in geographical areas where they do not have
a Federal or federally assisted construction contract shall apply the minority and female goals established for
the geographical area where the work is being performed. Goals are published periodically in the Federal
Register in notice form, and such notices may be obtained from any office of Federal Contract Compliance
Programs Office or from Federal procurement contracting officers. The Contractor is expected to make
substantially uniform progress in meeting its goals in each craft during the period specified.
5. Neither the provisions of any collective bargaining agreement, nor the failure by a union with whom the
Contractor has a collective bargaining agreement, to refer either minorities or women shall excuse the
Contractor’s obligations under these specifications, Executive Order 11246, or the regulations promulgated
pursuant thereto.
6. In order for the nonworking training hours of apprentices and trainees to be counted in meeting the goals, such
apprentices and trainees must be employed by the Contractor during the training period, and the Contractor
must have made a commitment to employ the apprentices and trainees at the completion of their training,
subject to the availability of employment opportunities. Trainees must be trained pursuant to training
programs approved by the U.S. Department of Labor.
195
February 3, 2011
AFFIRMATIVE ACTION REQUIREMENTS
EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY
7. The Contractor shall take specific affirmative actions to ensure equal employment opportunity. The evaluation of
the Contractor’s compliance with these specifications shall be based upon its effort to achieve maximum
results from its actions. The Contractor shall document these efforts fully, and shall implement affirmative
action steps at least as extensive as the following;
a. Ensure and maintain a working environment free of harassment, intimidation , and coercion at all sites, and in
all facilities at which the Contractor’s employees are assigned to work. The Contractor, where possible,
will assign two or more women to each construction project. The Contractor shall specifically ensure that
all foremen, superintendents, and other on-site supervisory personnel are aware of and carry out the
Contractor’s obligation to maintain such a working environment, with specific attention to minority or
female individuals working at such sites or in such facilities.
b. Establish and maintain a current list of minority and female recruitment sources, provide written notification to
minority and female recruitment sources and to community organizations when the Contractor or its union
have employment opportunities available, and maintain a record of the organization’s responses.
c. Maintain a current file of the names, addresses and telephone numbers of each minority and female off-the-
street applicant and minority or female referral from a union, a recruitment source of community
organization and of what action was taken with respect to each individual. If such individual was sent to
the union hiring hall for referral and was not referred back to the Contractor by the union or, if referred,
not employed by the Contractor, this shall be documented in the file with the reason therefor, along with
whatever additional actions the Contractor may have taken.
d. Provide immediate written notification to the Director when the union with which the Contractor has a
collective bargaining agreement has not referred to the Contractor a minority person or woman sent by the
Contractor, or when he Contractor has other information that the union referral process has impeded the
Contractor’s efforts to meet its obligations.
e. Develop on-the-job training opportunities and/or participate in training programs for the area which expressly
include minorities and women, including upgrading programs and apprenticeship and trainee programs
relevant to the Contractor’s employment needs, especially those programs funded or approved by the
Department of Labor. The Contractor shall provide notice of these programs to the sources compiled
under 7b above.
f. Disseminate the Contractor’s EEO policy by providing notice of the policy to unions and training programs
and requesting their cooperation in assisting the Contractor in meeting its EEO obligations; by including it
in any policy manual and collective bargaining agreement; by publicizing it in the company newspaper,
annual report, etc., by specific review of the policy with all management personnel and with all minority
and female employees at least once a year, and by posting the Contractor’s EEO policy on bulletin boards
accessible to all employees at each location where construction work is performed.
g. Review, at least annually, the Contractor’s EEO policy and affirmative action obligations under these
specifications with all employees having any responsibility for hiring, assignment, layoff, termination or
other employment decisions including specific review of these items with onsite supervisory personnel
such as Superintendents, General Foreman, etc., prior to the initiation of construction work
196
February 3, 2011
AFFIRMATIVE ACTION REQUIREMENTS
EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY
at any job site. A written record shall be made and maintained identifying the time and place of these
meetings, persons attending, subject matter discussed, and disposition of the subject matter.
h. Disseminate the Contractor’s EEO policy externally by including it in any advertising in the news media,
specifically including minority and female news media, and providing written notification to and
discussing the Contractors and Subcontractors with whom the Contractor does or anticipates doing
business.
i. Direct its recruitment efforts, both oral and written, to minority, female and community organizations, to
schools with minority and female students and to minority and female recruitment and training
organizations serving the Contractor’s recruitment area and employment needs. Not later than one month
prior to the date for the acceptance of applications for apprenticeship or other training by any recruitment
source, the Contractor shall send written notification to organizations such as the above, describing the
openings, screening procedures, and tests to be used in the selection process.
j. Encourage present minority and female employees to recruit other minority persons and women and, where
reasonable, provide after school, summer and vacation employment to minority and female youth both on
the site and in other areas of a Contractor’s workforce.
k. Validate all tests and other selection requirements where there is an obligation to do so under 41 CFR Part 60-
3.
l. Conduct, at least annually, an inventory and evaluation at least of all minority and female personnel for
promotional opportunities and encourage these employees to seek or to prepare for, through appropriate
training, etc. such opportunities.
m. Ensure that seniority practices, job classifications, work assignments and other personnel practices, do not
have a discriminatory effect by continually monitoring all personnel and employment related activities to
ensure that the EEO policy and the Contractor’s obligations under these specifications are being carried
out.
n. Ensure that all facilities and Contractor’s activities are nonsegregated except that separate or single-user toilet
and necessary changing facilities shall be provided to assure privacy between the sexes.
o. Document and maintain a record of all solicitations of offers for subcontracts from minority and female
construction contractors and suppliers, including circulation of solicitations to minority and female
contractor associations and other business associations.
p. Conduct a review, at least annually, of all supervisor’s adherence to and performance under the Contractor’s
EEO policies and affirmative action obligation.
8. Contractors are encouraged to participate in voluntary associations which assist in fulfilling one or more of their
affirmative action obligations (7a through p). The efforts of a contractor association, joint contractor-union
contractor-community, or other similar group of which the Contractor is a member and participant, may be
asserted as fulfilling any one or more of its obligations under 7a through p of these specifications provided that
the Contractor actively participates in the group, makes every effort to assure that the group has a positive
impact on the employment of minorities and women in the industry, ensures
197
February 3, 2011
AFFIRMATIVE ACTION REQUIREMENTS
EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY
that the concrete benefits of the program are reflected in the Contractor’s minority and female workforce
participation, makes a good faith effort to meet its individual goal and timetables, and can provide access to
documentation which demonstrates the effectiveness of actions taken on behalf of the Contractor. The
obligation to comply, however, is the Contractor’s and failure of such a group to fulfill an obligation shall not
be a defense for the Contractor’s noncompliance.
9. A single goal for minorities and a separate single goal for women have been established. The Contractor,
however, is required to provide equal employment opportunity and to take affirmative action for all minority
groups, both male and female, and all women, both minority and non-minority. Consequently, the Contractor
may be in violation of the Executive Order if a particular group is employed in a substantially disparate
manner (for example, even thought the Contractor has achieved its goals for women generally, the
Contractor may be in violation of the Executive Order if a specific minority group of women is underutilized).
10. The Contractor shall not use the goals and timetables or affirmative action standards to discriminate against any
person because of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin.
11. The Contractor shall not enter into any Subcontract with any person or firm debarred from Government contracts
pursuant to Executive Order 11246.
12. The Contractor shall carry out such sanctions and penalties for violation of these specifications and of the Equal
Opportunity Clause, including suspension, termination and cancellation of existing subcontracts as may be
imposed or ordered pursuant to Executive Order 11246, as amended, and its implementing regulations, by the
Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs. Any Contractor who fails to carry out such sanctions and
penalties shall be in violation of these specifications and Executive Order 11246, as amended.
13 The Contractor in fulfilling its obligations under these specifications, shall implement specific affirmative action
steps, at least as extensive as those standards prescribed in paragraph 7 of these specifications, so as to achieve
maximum results from its efforts to ensure equal employment opportunity. If the Contractor fails to comply
with the requirements of the Executive Order, the implementing regulations, or these specifications, the
Director shall proceed in accordance with 41 CFR 60-4.8.
14. The Contractor shall designate a responsible official to monitor all employment related activity to ensure that the
company EEO policy is being carried out, to submit reports relating to the provisions hereof as may be
required by the Government and to keep records. Records shall at least include for each employee the name,
address, telephone numbers, construction trade, union affiliation if any, employee identification number when
assigned, social security number, race, sex, status (e.g., mechanic, apprentice, trainee, helper, or laborer), dates
of changes in status, hours worked per week in the indicated trade, rate of pay, and locations at which the work
was performed. Records shall be maintained in an easily understandable and retrievable form, however, to the
degree that existing records satisfy this requirement, contractors shall not be required to maintain separate
records.
15. Nothing herein provided shall be construed as a limitation upon the application of other laws which establish
different standards of compliance or upon application of requirements for the hiring of local or other area
residents (e.g., those under the Public Works Employment Act of 1977 and the Community Development
Block Grant Program).
198
February 3, 2011
AFFIRMATIVE ACTION REQUIREMENTS
EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY
C. SPECIFIC EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY RESPONSIBILITIES.
1. General.
a. Equal employment opportunity requirements not to discriminate and to take affirmative action to assure equal
employment opportunity as required by Executive Order 11246 and Executive Order 11375 are set forth in
Required Contract. Provisions (Form FHWA 1273 or 1316, as appropriate) and these Special Provisions
which are imposed pursuant to Section 140 of Title 23, U.S.C., as established by Section 22 of the Federal-
Aid highway Act of 1968. The requirements set forth in these Special Provisions shall constitute the
specific affirmative action requirements for project activities under this contract and supplement the equal
employment opportunity requirements set forth in the Required Contract provisions.
b. The Contractor will work with the State highway agencies and the Federal Government in carrying out equal
employment opportunity obligations and in their review of his/her activities under the contract.
c. The Contractor and all his/her subcontractors holding subcontracts not including material suppliers, of $10,000
or more, will comply with the following minimum specific requirement activities of equal employment
opportunity: (The equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as set forth in
Volume 6, Chapter 4, Section 1, Subsection 1 of the Federal-Aid Highway Program Manual, are
applicable to material suppliers as well as contractors and subcontractors.) The Contractor will include
these requirements in every subcontract of $10,000 or more with such modification of language as is
necessary to make them binding on the subcontractor.
2. Equal Employment Opportunity Policy. The Contractor will accept as his operating policy the following statement
which is designed to further the provision of equal employment opportunity to all persons without regard to
their race, color, religion, sex, or national origin, and to promote the full realization of equal employment
opportunity through a positive continuing program;
It is the policy of this Company to assure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during
employment, without regard to their race, religion, sex, color, or national origin. Such action shall include;
employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination;
rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship,
preapprenticeship, and/or on-the-job training.
3. Equal Employment Opportunity Officer. The Contractor will designate and make known to the State highway
agency contracting officers and equal employment opportunity officer (herein after referred to as the EEO
Officer) who will have the responsibility for an must be capable of effectively administering and promoting an
active contractor program of equal employment opportunity and who must be assigned adequate authority and
responsibility to do so.
4. Dissemination of Policy.
a. All members of the Contractor’s staff who are authorized to hire, supervise, promote, and discharge
employees, or who recommend such action, or who are substantially involved in such action, will be made
fully cognizant of, and will implement, the Contractor’s equal employment opportunity policy and
contractual responsibilities to provide equal employment opportunity in each grade and
199
February 3, 2011
AFFIRMATIVE ACTION REQUIREMENTS
EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY
classification of employment. To ensure that the above agreement will be met, the following actions will
be taken as a minimum;
(1) Periodic meetings of supervisory and personnel office employees will be conducted before the start of
work and then not less often than once every six months, at which time the Contractor’s equal
employment opportunity policy and its implementation will be reviewed and explained. The meetings
will be conducted by the EEO Officer or other knowledgeable company official.
(2) All new supervisory or personnel office employees will be given a thorough indoctrination by the EEO
Officer or other knowledgeable company official, covering all major aspects of the Contractor’s equal
employment opportunity obligations within thirty days following their reporting for duty with the
Contractor.
(3) All personnel who are engaged in direct recruitment for the project will be instructed by the EEO Officer
or appropriate company official in the Contractor’s procedures for locating and hiring minority group
employees.
b. In order to make the Contractor’s equal employment opportunity policy known to all employees, prospective
employees and potential sources of employees, i.e., schools, employment agencies, labor unions (where
appropriate), college placement officers, etc., the Contractor will take the following actions:
(1) Notices and posters setting forth the Contractor’s equal employment opportunity policy will be placed
in areas readily accessible to employees, applicants for employment and potential employees.
.
(2) The Contractor’s equal employment opportunity policy and the procedures to implement such policy
will be brought to the attention of employees by means of meetings, employee handbooks, or other
appropriate means.
5. Recruitment.
a. When advertising for employees, the Contractor will include in all advertisements for employees the
notation; “An Equal Opportunity Employer.” All such advertisements will be published in
newspapers or other publications having a large circulation among minority groups in the area from
which the project work force would normally be derived.
b. The Contractor will, unless precluded by a valid bargaining agreement, conduct systematic and direct
recruitment through public and private employee referral sources likely to yield qualified minority
group applicants, including, but not limited to, State employment agencies, schools, colleges and
minority group organizations. To meet this requirement, the Contractor will, through his EEO Officer,
identify sources of potential minority group employees, and establish with such identified sources
procedures whereby minority group applicants may be referred to the Contractor for employment
consideration.
In the event the Contractor has a valid bargaining agreement providing for exclusive hiring hall referrals,
he is expected to observe the provisions of that agreement to the extent that the system permits the
Contractor’s compliance with equal employment opportunity contract provisions. (The U.S.
Department of Labor has held that where implementation of such agreements have the effect of
discriminating against minorities or women, or obligates the Contractor to do the same, such
implementation violates Executive Order 11246, as amended.)
200
February 3, 2011
AFFIRMATIVE ACTION REQUIREMENTS
EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY
c. The Contractor will encourage his present employees to refer minority group applicants for employment
by posting appropriate notices or bulletins in areas accessible to all such employees. In addition,
information and procedures with regard to referring minority group applicants will be discussed with
employees.
`6. Personnel Actions. Wages, working conditions, and employee benefits shall be established and administered,
and personnel actions of every type, including hiring, upgrading, promotion, transfer, demotion, layoff,
and termination, shall be taken without regard to race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. The
following procedures shall be followed;
a. The Contractor will conduct periodic inspections of project sites to insure that working conditions and
employee facilities do not indicate discriminatory treatment of project site personnel.
b. The Contractor will periodically evaluate the spread of wages paid within each classification to determine
any evidence of discriminatory wage practices.
c. The Contractor will periodically review selected personnel actions in depth to determine whether there is
evidence of discrimination. Where evidence is found, the Contractor will promptly take corrective
action. If the review indicates that the discrimination may extend beyond the actions reviewed, such
corrective action shall include all affected persons.
d. The Contract will promptly investigate all complaints of alleged discrimination made to the Contractor in
connection with his obligations under this contract, will attempt to resolve such complaints, and will
take appropriate corrective action within a reasonable time. If the investigation indicates that the
discrimination may affect persons other than the complainant, such corrective action shall include such
other persons. Upon completion of each investigation, the Contractor will inform every complainant
of all of his avenues of appeal.
7. Training and Promotion.
a. The Contractor will assist in locating, qualifying, and increasing the skills of minority group and women
employees, and applicants for employment.
b. Consistent with the Contractor’s work force requirements and as permissible under Federal and State
regulations, the Contractor shall make full use of training programs, i.e., apprenticeship, and on-the-
job training programs for the geographical area of contract performance. Where feasible, 25 percent
of apprentices or trainees in each occupation shall be in their first year of apprenticeship or training.
c. The Contractor will advise employees and applicants for employment of available training programs and
entrance requirements for each.
d. The Contractor will periodically review the training and promotion potential of minority group and women
employees and will encourage eligible employees to apply for such training and promotion.
8. Unions. If the Contractor relies in whole or in part upon unions as a source of employees, the Contractor will
use his/her best efforts to obtain the cooperation of such unions to increase opportunities for minority
groups and women with the unions, and to effect referrals by such unions of minority and
201
February 3, 2011
AFFIRMATIVE ACTION REQUIREMENTS
EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY
female employees. Actions by the Contractor either directly or thorough a contractor’s association acting
as agent will include the procedures set forth below:
a. The Contractor will use best efforts to develop, in cooperation with the unions, joint training programs
aimed toward qualifying more minority group members and women for membership in the unions and
increasing the skills of minority group employees and women so that they may qualify for higher
paying employment.
b. The Contractor will use best efforts to incorporate an equal employment opportunity clause into each
union agreement to the end that such union will be contractually bound to refer applicants without
regard to their race, color, religion, sex, or national origin.
c. The Contractor is to obtain information as to the referral practices and policies of the labor union except
that to the extent such information is within the exclusive possession of the labor union and such labor
union refuses to furnish such information to the Contractor, the Contractor shall so certify to the State
highway department and shall set forth what efforts have been made to obtain such information.
d. In the event the union is unable to provide the Contractor with a reasonable flow of minority and women
referrals within he time limit set forth in the collective bargaining agreement, the Contractor will, through
independent recruitment efforts, fill the employment vacancies without regard to race, color, religion , sex
or national origin; making full efforts to obtain qualified and/or qualifiable minority group persons and
women. (The U.S. Department of Labor has held that it shall be no excuse that the union with which the
Contractor has a collective bargaining agreement providing for exclusive referral failed to refer minority
employees.) In the event the union referral practice prevents the Contractor from meeting the obligations
pursuant to Executive Order 11246, as amended, and these special provisions, such Contractor shall
immediately notify the State highway agency.
9. Subcontracting.
a. The Contractor will use his best efforts to solicit bids from and to utilize minority group subcontractors or
subcontractors with meaningful minority group and female representation among their employees.
Contractors shall obtain lists of minority-owned construction firms from State highway agency personnel.
b. The Contractor will use his best efforts to ensure subcontractor compliance with their equal employment
opportunity obligations.
10. Records and Reports.
a. The Contractor will keep such records as are necessary to determine compliance with the Contractor’s equal
employment opportunity obligations. The records kept by the Contractor will be designed to indicate:
(1) The number of minority and nonminority group members and women employed in each work
classification on the project.
202
February 3, 2011
AFFIRMATIVE ACTION REQUIREMENTS
EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY
(2) The Progress and efforts being made in cooperation with unions to increase employment opportunities for
minorities and women (applicable only to contractors who rely in whole or in part on unions as a
source of their work force).
(3) The progress and efforts being made in locating, hiring, training, qualifying, and upgrading minority and
female employees, and
(4) The progress and efforts being made in securing the services of minority group subcontractors or
subcontractors with meaningful minority and female representation among their employees.
b. All such records must be retained for a period of three years following completion of the contract work and
shall be available at reasonable times and places for inspection by authorized representatives of the State
highway agency and the Federal Highway Administration.
c. The Contractors will submit an annual report to the State highway agency each July for the duration of the
project, indicating the number of minority, women, and non-minority group employees currently engaged
in each work classification required by the contract work. This information is to be reported on Form PR
1391.
203
December 26, 2013
DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (DBE)
DEFINITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
1. Overview
The Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Program is a federally-mandated program that seeks to ensure non-
discrimination in the award of U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)-assisted contracts and to create a level
playing field on which DBEs can compete fairly for DOT-assisted contracts. To such end, CDOT sets a contract goal
for DBE participation for each DOT-assisted Contract.
In order to be awarded the Contract, the bidder shall show that it has committed to DBE participation sufficient to meet
the goal or has otherwise made good faith efforts to do so. CDOT will amend the goal prior to award if the lowest
apparent bidder demonstrates that good faith efforts were made but sufficient commitments to meet the goal could not
be obtained.
CDOT will monitor the progress of the Contractor throughout the project to ensure that the Contractor’s DBE
commitments are being fulfilled. Modifications to the commitments must be approved by CDOT. CDOT may withhold
payment or seek other contractual remedies if the Contractor is not complying with the requirements of this special
provision. Upon completion of the Contract, CDOT may reduce the final payment to the Contractor if the Contractor
has failed to fulfill the commitments or made good faith efforts to meet the contract goal.
For general assistance regarding the DBE program and compliance, contact CDOT’s Civil Rights and Business
Resource Center (CRBRC) at (303)757-9234. For project specific issues, contact the Engineer.
All forms referenced herein can be found on the CDOT website in the forms library:
http://www.coloradodot.info/library/forms/cdot-forms-by-number
2. Contract Assurance
By submitting a proposal for this Contract, the bidder agrees to the following assurance and shall include it verbatim in
all (including non-DBE) subcontracts:
The contractor, subrecipient or subcontractor shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in
the performance of this contract. The contractor shall carry out applicable requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 in the award
and administration of DOT-assisted contracts. Failure by the contractor to carry out these requirements is a material
breach of this contract, which may result in the termination of this contract or such other remedy as CDOT deems
appropriate.
3. Definitions
Terms not defined herein shall have the meaning provided in the CDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction.
A. Commitment. A commitment is a portion of the Contract, identified by dollar amount and work area,
designated by the bidder or Contractor for participation by a particular DBE. Commitments are submitted to
CDOT via Form 1414, Anticipated DBE Participation Plan, or via Form 1420, DBE Plan Modification Request.
Once approved, commitments are obligations of the Contract that are enforceable by CDOT.
B. Commercially Useful Function (CUF). Responsibility for the execution of the work and carrying out such
responsibilities by actually performing, managing and supervising the work as further described in Section 8
below.
204
December 26, 2013
DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (DBE)
DEFINITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
C. Contract Goal. The percentage of the contract designated by CDOT for DBE participation. The contract goal
for this contract is provided in the Project Special Provision Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Contract Goal.
(1) The bidder/Contractor shall make good faith efforts to fulfill the contract goal with eligible DBE
participation. For determining whether the contract goal was met prior to award, the contract goal
shall be based upon the proposal amount excluding force account items. For determining whether
the contract goal was met during and upon completion of the project, the contract goal shall be
based upon the total earnings amount.
(2) If the lowest apparent bidder demonstrates that it was unable to meet the contract goal but made
good faith efforts to do so, the contract goal will be amended and the revised contract goal will be
provided on Form 1417, Approved DBE Participation Plan.
D. Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE). A Colorado-certified Disadvantaged Business Enterprise listed on
the Colorado Unified Certification Program (UCP) DBE Directory at www.coloradodbe.org.
E. DBE Program Manual. The manual maintained by the CRBRC which details CDOT’s policies and procedures
for administering the DBE program. A copy of the DBE Program Manual is available on the CRBRC webpage.
F. Eligible Participation. Work by a DBE that counts toward fulfillment of the contract goal as described in
Section 4 below.
G. Good Faith Efforts. All necessary and reasonable steps to achieve the contract goal which, by their scope,
intensity, and appropriateness to the objective, could reasonably be expected to obtain sufficient DBE
participation, even if not fully successful. Good faith efforts are evaluated prior to award and throughout
performance of the Contract. For guidance on good faith efforts, see 49 CFR Part 26, Appendix A.
H. Joint Check. A check issued by the Contractor or one of its subcontractors to a DBE firm and a material
supplier or other third party for materials or services to be incorporated into the work.
I. Reduction. A reduction occurs when the Contractor reduces a commitment to a DBE. A reduction constitutes
a partial termination.
J. Subcontractor. An individual, firm, corporation or other legal entity to whom the Contractor sublets part of the
Contract. For purposes of this special provision, the term subcontractor includes suppliers.
K. Substitution. Substitution occurs when a Contractor seeks to find another DBE to perform work on the
contract as a result of a reduction or termination.
L. Termination. A termination occurs when a Contractor no longer intends to use a DBE for fulfillment of a
commitment.
M. Total Earnings Amount: Amount of the Contract earned by the Contractor, including approved changes and
approved force account work performed, but not including any deductions for liquidated damages, price
reduced material, work time violations, overweight loads or liens. The amount of the Contract earned does not
include plan force account items (i.e. OJT, pavement incentives, etc).
N. Work Code. A code to identify the work that a DBE is certified to perform. A work code includes a six digit
North American Industry Classifications System code plus a descriptor. Work codes are listed on a firm’s
205
December 26, 2013
DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (DBE)
DEFINITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
profile on the UCP DBE Directory. The Contractor may contact the CRBRC to receive guidance on whether a
work code covers the work to be performed.
4. Eligible Participation
The following rules will be used to determine whether work performed by a DBE qualifies as eligible participation on
the Contract:
A. Work Must be Identified in Commitment. The work performed by the DBE must be reasonably construed to be
included in the work area and work code identified by the Contractor in the approved commitment.
(1) If the Contractor intends to use a DBE for work that was not listed in the commitment, the
Contractor shall submit Form 1420, DBE Participation Plan Modification for approval of the
modification. Unapproved work will not count toward the contract goal.
(2) A DBE commitment cannot be modified to include work for which the DBE was not certified at the
time of the approval of the original commitment.
B. DBE Must be Certified to Perform the Work. The DBE must be certified to perform the work upon submission
of the commitment and upon execution of the DBE’s subcontract.
(1) When a commitment has been made, but upon review of Form 205 or 205B, Sublet Permit, CDOT
determines that the DBE is no longer certified in the work code which covers the work to be
performed, the Contractor may not use the DBE’s participation toward the contract goal. The
Contractor shall terminate the DBE commitment and seek substitute DBE participation in
accordance with Section 9 below.
(2) A DBE’s work will continue to count as eligible participation if the DBE was certified upon approval
of Form 205 or 205B, Sublet Permit and the certification status changes during the performance of
the work.
(3) Suppliers must be certified upon execution of the purchase order.
C. DBE Performs the Work. Eligible participation will only include work actually performed by the DBE with its
own forces.
(1) Work performed by the DBE includes the cost of supplies and materials obtained by the DBE for its
work on the Contract, including any equipment leased by the DBE, provided that such supplies or
equipment are not purchased or leased from the Contractor or a subcontractor that is subletting to
the DBE.
(2) If CDOT determines that a DBE has not performed a CUF on the project, no participation by such
DBE shall count toward the contract goal.
D. DBE Subcontracts to Another Firm. When a DBE subcontracts part of the work, the value of the
subcontracted work may only be counted toward the goal if the subcontractor is a DBE. Performance by non-
DBE subcontractors, including non-DBE trucking firms and owner-operators, shall be deducted from the DBE’s
participation.
206
December 26, 2013
DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (DBE)
DEFINITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
E. DBE Received Payment for the Work. Eligible participation only includes work for which the DBE has received
payment, including the release of its retainage.
F. Special Calculations for Suppliers. When a DBE supplies goods on a project, the DBE may be classified as a
manufacturer, dealer or broker. The DBE’s status as a manufacturer, dealer or broker is determined on a
contract-by-contract basis and is based upon the actual work performed.
(1) When a DBE is deemed to be acting as a manufacturer, one hundred percent of the commitment
will count as eligible participation.
(2) When a DBE is deemed to be acting as a regular dealer (i.e. non-manufacturer supplier), only sixty
percent of the commitment will count as eligible participation.
(3) When a DBE is deemed to be acting as a broker, only the reasonable brokerage fee will count as
eligible participation.
G. Reasonable Fee for Contract-Specific Services. Services shall count toward the contract goal only if they are
specifically required for the performance of the Contract. Non-contract specific expenses may not be counted
toward the contract goal. Fees for services must be reasonable. Services include but are not limited to
professional services, public involvement, etc. In the case of temporary employment placement agencies, only
the placement fee for an individual to be specifically and exclusively used for work on the contract shall count
as eligible participation.
H. Pre-Approval for Joint Venture Participation. When a DBE is a participant in a joint venture, the DBE must
apply to CDOT to determine how much of the work performed by the joint venture will count toward the
contract goal. The DBE shall complete Form 893, Information for Determining DBE Participation when a Joint
Venture Includes a DBE. Form 893 shall be submitted to CDOT no less than ten days before the submission
of the Proposal to ensure sufficient time for review.
5. Proposal Requirements
In order to be eligible for award, the following shall be submitted with the proposal, or, for electronic bidders, via email
to cdot_hq_dbeforms@state.co.us by the proposal submission deadline. In order to avoid an error within the electronic
bidding system, electronic bidders shall also enter the total percentage of anticipated eligible DBE participation into the
Form 714 and electronically sign the form.
A. Form 1413, Bidders List. The bidder shall list each subcontractor (including both DBE and non-DBE
subcontractors) that submitted a quote for participation on the project. Failure to submit a signed Form 1413
will result in rejection of the proposal.
B. Form 1414, Anticipated DBE Participation Plan. If the Contract Goal is greater than zero, the bidder shall
submit Form 1414 to document anticipated DBE participation.
(1) If the Bidder has not obtained any DBE commitments, it shall still submit Form 1414 documenting zero
anticipated participation. If the Contract Goal is greater than zero, failure to submit a signed Form
1414 shall result in rejection of the proposal.
(2) The bidder shall list the DBE, work area(s), commitment amount and estimated eligible participation
for each commitment. Once Form 1414 is submitted, a commitment may only be terminated or
reduced in accordance with Section 9 below. The bidder is responsible for ensuring that
207
December 26, 2013
DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (DBE)
DEFINITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
commitments, and the estimated eligible participation resulting therefrom, have been properly
calculated prior to submitting its proposal.
(3) If the bidder is a DBE, the bidder must include itself in Form 1414 and list the work area(s) and amount
that it intends to self-perform and count as eligible participation on the contract.
(4) Commitments may be made to second tier or lower DBE subcontractors; however, the Contractor is
ultimately responsible for the fulfillment of the commitment and shall sign the Form 1415, Commitment
Confirmation.
6. Additional Forms Due Prior to Award.
If the contract goal is greater than zero, or if the bidder has voluntarily made commitments, the Bidder shall submit the
following forms within five calendar days of selection as the lowest apparent bidder:
A. Form 1415, Commitment Confirmation. A Form 1415, Commitment Confirmation shall be obtained from each
DBE listed on Form 1414. The bidder shall complete Section 1 and the DBE shall complete Section 2 of
Form 1415. Form 1415s shall be consistent with the commitments listed on Form 1414. The bidder shall not
modify commitments listed on Form 1414 without good cause and approval from CDOT. The bidder shall
contact CDOT if any issues arise which may require the bidder to alter or terminate a commitment.
B. Form 1416, Good Faith Effort Report. If the total eligible participation listed on Form 1414 does not meet the
contract goal, the lowest apparent bidder shall also submit Form 1416, Good Faith Effort Report and any
supporting documentation that the bidder would like considered by CDOT as evidence of good faith efforts.
7. Commitment and Good Faith Effort Review
A. Commitment Review. CDOT will evaluate the Form 1414 and each Form 1415 to ensure that it the
commitment is valid and has been properly calculated. CDOT may investigate or request additional
information in order to confirm the accuracy of a commitment. If CDOT determines that the total estimated
eligible participation of the commitments does not meet the contract goal, within two business days of notice
from CDOT or within the original five calendar day deadline, whichever is later, the bidder shall submit Form
1416 to CDOT.
B. Good Faith Effort Review. If the total eligible participation of Form 1414 and all supporting Form 1415s does
not meet the contract goal, CDOT will review Form 1416 and all supporting documentation submitted by the
bidder in order to determine whether the bidder has demonstrated good faith efforts to obtain DBE
participation. CDOT will use 49 CFR Part 26, Appendix A as a guide for determining whether the bidder
made good faith efforts to meet the contract goal. A bidder will be deemed to not have made good faith efforts
if the bidder lists a DBE for a work area for which the DBE is not certified and the bidder cannot establish a
reasonable basis for its determination. CDOT may consider and approve commitments made after submission
of the bid if the Bidder demonstrates that (1) good faith efforts were made prior to submission of the bid and
(2) there is a reasonable justification for not obtaining the commitments prior to submission of the bid.
C. Administrative Reconsideration. If CDOT determines that the bidder did not demonstrate good faith efforts to
meet the contract goal, it will provide the bidder with written notice of its determination and an opportunity to
appeal. The process for reconsideration is set forth in the Good Faith Effort Appeal Process, which is an
Appendix I to the DBE Program Manual. A copy of the Good Faith Effort Appeal Process will be included in the
written notice from CDOT.
D. Form 1417, Approved DBE Participation Plan. If CDOT determines that the bidder has met the contract goal
208
December 26, 2013
DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (DBE)
DEFINITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
or made good faith efforts to do so, CDOT will issue Form 1417, Approved DBE Participation Plan,
documenting the approved commitments. If CDOT determines that the bidder did not meet the contract goal
but made good faith efforts to do so, via the Form 1417 CDOT will amend the contract goal in accordance with
the commitments that were obtained and attach an explanation of its determination.
8. Ongoing Oversight of DBE Participation
A. Consistency Review. CDOT will review Form 205 or 205B, Sublet Permit Application to determine whether the
work being sublet is consistent with the DBE commitments. CDOT may withhold approval of the sublet or stop
performance of the work if the Contractor has reduced, terminated, or otherwise modified the type or amount
of work to be performed by a DBE without seeking prior approval.
B. Form 1419, DBE Participation Report. The Contractor shall submit Form 1419, DBE Participation Report to
the Engineer on a quarterly basis (January 15, April 15, July 15, and October 15) and upon completion of the
Contract. CDOT may withhold progress payments if the quarterly Form 1419 is not received on time. CDOT
will not provide final payment on the Contract in accordance with subsection 109.09 of CDOT’s Standard
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction until the final Form 1419 has been reviewed and approved.
C. Joint Checks. All joint checks must be approved by CDOT before they are used in payment to a DBE. Joint
checks used in payments to DBEs will be monitored closely to ensure (1) the DBE is performing a CUF and (2)
the joint checks are not being used in a discriminatory manner. The Contractor shall request approval for the
use of a joint check in a written letter signed by the DBE and the Contractor, stating the reason for the joint
checks and the approximate number of checks that will be needed.
D. Commercially Useful Function. CDOT will monitor performance during the Contract to ensure each DBE is
performing a CUF. If CDOT determines that a DBE is not performing a CUF, no work performed by such DBE
shall count as eligible participation. The DBE, Contractor, and any other involved third parties may also be
subject to additional enforcement actions.
(1) When determining whether a DBE is performing a CUF, CDOT will consider the amount of work
subcontracted, industry practices, the amount the firm is to be paid compared to the work performed and
eligible participation claimed, and any other relevant factors.
(2) With respect to material and supplies used on the Contract, in order to perform a CUF the DBE must be
responsible for negotiating price, determining quality and quantity, ordering the material, installing the
material, if applicable, and paying for the material itself.
(3) With respect to trucking, in order to perform a CUF, the DBE trucking firm must own and operate at least
one fully licensed, insured and operational truck used on the Contract. Additionally, the DBE trucking
firm must be responsible for the management and supervision of the entire trucking operation for which it
is responsible on the Contract.
(4) A DBE does not perform a CUF when its role is limited to that of an extra participant in a transaction,
contract or project through which funds are passed in order to obtain the appearance of DBE
participation. CDOT will evaluate similar transactions involving non-DBEs in order to determine whether
a DBE is an extra participant.
209
December 26, 2013
DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (DBE)
DEFINITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
(5) If a DBE does not perform or exercise responsibility for at least 30 percent of the total cost of its contract
with its own work force, or the DBE subcontracts a greater portion of the work than would be expected
on the basis of normal industry practice for the type of work involved, CDOT will presume that the DBE
is not performing a CUF. The DBE may present evidence to rebut this presumption.
(6) If the Contractor disagrees with CDOT’s determination regarding CUF, in accordance with 49 CFR 26.55
the Contractor may seek review of the determination by the applicable USDOT operating administration,
however, CUF determination is not subject to administrative appeal.
9. DBE Participation Plan Modifications
A. Form 1420, DBE Participation Plan Modification Request. During the performance of the Contract, the
Contractor shall use Form 1420, DBE Participation Plan Modification Request to communicate all requests for
termination, reduction, substitution, and waivers to CDOT. One Form 1420 may include multiple requests and
must be submitted at the time of the occurrence or, if that is not possible, within a reasonable time of the
occurrence requiring termination, reduction, substitution or waiver.
B. Commitment Terminations and Reductions. No commitment shall be terminated or reduced without CDOT’s
approval. Terminations and reductions include, but are not limited to, instances in which a Contractor seeks to
perform work originally designated for a DBE subcontractor with its own forces, those of an affiliate, a non-
DBE firm or with another DBE firm. In order to receive approval, the Contractor shall:
(1) Have good cause for termination or reduction. Good cause may include:
(i) the DBE fails or refuses to execute a written contract;
(ii) the DBE fails or refuses to perform the work of its subcontract consistent with normal industry
standards, provided that such failure is not the result of bad faith or discriminatory actions of the
Contractor or one of its subcontractors;
(iii) the DBE fails to meet reasonable, nondiscriminatory bond requirements;
(iv) the DBE becomes bankrupt, insolvent, or exhibits credit unworthiness;
(v) the DBE is ineligible to work because of suspension or debarment proceedings or other state law;
(vi) the DBE is not a responsible contractor;
(vii) the DBE voluntarily withdraws from the project and provides written notice to CDOT,
(viii) the DBE is ineligible to receive DBE credit for the work required;
(ix) the DBE owner dies or becomes disabled and is unable to complete the work;
(x) the DBE ceases business operations or otherwise dissolves;
(xi) or other documented good cause that compels termination. Good cause does not exist if the
Contractor seeks to terminate a DBE it relied upon to obtain the contract so that the Contractor can
self-perform the work for which the DBE was engaged or so that the Contractor can substitute another
DBE or non-DBE contractor after contract award.
210
December 26, 2013
DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (DBE)
DEFINITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
(2) Provide the DBE notice of the Contractor’s intent to terminate or reduce the commitment and the
reason for such termination or reduction, with a copy to CDOT;
(3) In the notice of intent, provide the DBE at least five calendar days to respond to the notice and inform
CDOT and the Contractor of the reasons, if any, why it objects to the proposed termination or
reduction and any reasons that it shall not be approved. The Contractor is not required to provide the
five calendar days written notice in cases where the DBE in question has provided written notice that it
is withdrawing from the subcontract or purchase order. The notice period may be reduced by CDOT if
required by public necessity.
(4) Following the notice period, if the Contractor decides to proceed, submit Form 1420 requesting
approval of the termination or reduction.
(5) When a commitment is terminated or reduced (including when a DBE withdraws), make good faith
efforts to find another DBE to substitute. These good faith efforts shall be directed at finding another
DBE to perform at least the same amount of work under the contract as the participation that was
terminated or reduced up to the contract goal.
C. Contract Changes. In the event of a contract change:
(1) If CDOT eliminates or reduces work committed to a DBE, such change shall be considered good
cause for termination or reduction in accordance with Section 9.B above. The Contractor shall follow
the processes outlined in Section 9.B but is not required to substitute. If the change reduces the
Contractor’s DBE participation to below the contract goal, the Contractor shall indicate so on a Form
1420 and request a waiver of the unmet participation.
(2) If CDOT issues a change which increases or adds new work items, the Contractor shall ensure that it
has obtained sufficient DBE participation to meet the Contract Goal, or has made good faith efforts to
do so.
D. Process for Substitution or Increase in Participation to Meet the Contract Goal. When the Contractor must
obtain additional DBE participation to meet the Contract Goal, whether resulting from an approved termination
or reduction or a change to the Contract, the Contractor shall:
(1) Increase the participation of a DBE for any work items previously identified in an approved
commitment without seeking CDOT approval; provided, however, that at its discretion, CDOT may
request a Form 1420 documenting such additional participation; or
(2) If the Contractor needs to add new work to a commitment or obtain additional participation from a DBE
that is not already participating on the contract pursuant to an approved commitment, submit a Form
1420 and Form 1415 requesting approval of the additional participation; or
(3) If the Contractor determines that additional DBE participation cannot be obtained, submit a Form 1420
requesting waiver of the participation. The Contractor shall include its justification for not obtaining
additional participation and, at its discretion, CDOT may require additional information regarding the
211
December 26, 2013
DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (DBE)
DEFINITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
efforts of the Contractor.
10. Payment Reduction
The Contractor’s retainage will not be released until CDOT has determined whether the Contractor will be subject to a
payment reduction. Payment reductions will be calculated as follows:
A. Failure to Fulfill Commitments. If the Contractor terminated or reduced a commitment, the Contractor will be
subject to a payment reduction for any termination or reduction which was not approved via a Form 1420.
B. Failure to Meet Contract Goal. If the Contractor failed to meet the contract goal, the Contractor will be subject
to a payment reduction for the portion of the contract goal that was not met and was not waived via an
approved Form 1420.
C. Duplication. The contractor will not be subject to duplicate reduction for the same offense.
D. Adjustments. CDOT may adjust the payment reduction wherein the Contractor demonstrates that its failure to
obtain DBE participation was due to circumstances outside of its control.
11. Other Enforcement
A. Investigations. As it determines necessary, CDOT may conduct reviews or investigations of participants. All
participants, including, but not limited to, DBE firms and applicants for DBE certification, complainants, and
contractors using DBE firms to meet contract goals, are required to cooperate fully and promptly with
compliance reviews, certification reviews, investigations, and other requests for information.
B. Intimidation and retaliation. Participants shall not intimidate, threaten, coerce, or discriminate against any
individual or firm for the purpose of interfering with any right or privilege secured by the DBE program or
because the individual or firm has made a complaint, testified, assisted, or participated in any manner in an
investigation, proceeding, or hearing under the DBE program.
C. Consequences of Non-Compliance. Failure to comply with subsections 11 A. or 11 B. shall be a ground for
appropriate action against the party involved (e.g., with respect to recipients, a finding of noncompliance; with
respect to DBE firms, denial of certification or removal of eligibility and/or suspension and debarment; with
respect to a complainant or appellant, dismissal of the complaint or appeal; with respect to a contractor which
uses DBE firms to meet goals, findings of non-responsibility for future contracts and/or suspension and
debarment).
D. Fraud and Misrepresentation. If CDOT determines that a Contractor or subcontractor was a knowing and
willing participant in any intended or actual subcontracting arrangement contrived to artificially inflate DBE
participation or any other business arrangement determined by CDOT to be unallowable, or if the Contractor
engages in repeated violations, falsification or misrepresentation, CDOT may:
(1) refuse to count any fraudulent or misrepresented DBE participation;
(2) withhold progress payments to the Contractor commensurate with the violation;
(3) suspend or reduce the Contractor’s prequalification status;
212
December 26, 2013
DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (DBE)
DEFINITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
(4) refer the matter to the Office of Inspector General of the US Department of Transportation for
investigation; or
(5) seek any other available contractual remedy.
213
January 9, 2015
U.S. DEPT. OF LABOR DAVIS BACON MINIMUM WAGES, COLORADO
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL DECISION NUMBER – CO150024
Decision Nos. CO150024 dated January 02, 2015 supersedes
Decision Nos. CO140024 dated January 03, 2014.
Modifications ID
MOD
Number
Date
Page
Number(s)
When work within a project is located in two or more counties
and the minimum wages and fringe benefits are different for
one or more job classifications, the higher minimum wages
and fringe benefits shall apply throughout the project.
General Decision No. CO150024 applies to the following counties: Larimer, Mesa, and Weld counties.
General Decision No. CO150024
The wage and fringe benefits listed below reflect collectively bargained rates.
Code Classification Basic Hourly
Rate Fringe Benefits
Last
Mod
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR:
Drill Rig Caisson
1714 Smaller than Watson 2500 and similar 24.73 9.15
1715 Watson 2500 similar or larger 25.04 9.15
Oiler
1716 Weld 24.88 9.15
The wage and fringe benefits listed below do not reflect collectively bargained rates.
CARPENTER:
1717 Excludes Form Work 20.72 5.34
Form Work Only
1718 Larimer, Mesa 18.79 3.67
1719 Weld 16.54 3.90
CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER:
1720 Larimer 16.05 3.00
1721 Mesa 17.53 3.00
1722 Weld 17.48 3.00
ELECTRICIAN:
Excludes Traffic Signalization
1723 Weld 33.45 7.58
Traffic Signalization
1724 Weld 25.84 6.66
214
General Decision No. CO150024
The wage and fringe benefits listed below do not reflect collectively bargained rates.
Code Classification Basic Hourly
Rate Fringe Benefits
Last
Mod
FENCE ERECTOR:
1725 Weld 17.46 3.47
GUARDRAIL INSTALLER:
1726 Larimer, Weld 12.89 3.39
HIGHWAY/PARKING LOT STRIPING:
Painter
1727 Larimer 14.79 3.98
1728 Mesa 14.75 3.21
1729 Weld 14.66 3.21
IRONWORKER:
Reinforcing (Excludes Guardrail Installation)
1730 Larimer, Weld 16.69 5.45
Structural (Excludes Guardrail Installation)
1731 Larimer, Weld 18.22 6.01
LABORER:
Asphalt Raker
1732 Larimer 18.66 4.66
1733 Weld 16.72 4.25
1734 Asphalt Shoveler 21.21 4.25
1735 Asphalt Spreader 18.58 4.65
1736 Common or General 16.29 4.25
1737 Concrete Saw (Hand Held) 16.29 6.14
1738 Landscape and Irrigation 12.26 3.16
1739 Mason Tender - Cement/Concrete 16.29 4.25
Pipelayer
1740 Larimer 17.27 3.83
1741 Mesa, Weld 16.23 3.36
215
1742 Traffic Control (Flagger) 9.55 3.05
216
General Decision No. CO150024
The wage and fringe benefits listed below do not reflect collectively bargained rates.
Code Classification Basic Hourly
Rate Fringe Benefits
Last
Mod
LABORER (con’t):
Traffic Control (Sets Up/Moves Barrels, Cones, Installs
signs, Arrow Boards and Place Stationary Flags),
(Excludes Flaggers)
1743 Larimer, Weld 12.43 3.22
1744 PAINTER (Spray Only) 16.99 2.87
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR:
Asphalt Laydown
1745 Larimer 26.75 5.39
1746 Mesa, Weld 23.93 7.72
1747 Asphalt Paver 21.50 3.50
Asphalt Roller
1748 Larimer 23.57 3.50
1749 Mesa 24.25 3.50
1750 Weld 27.23 3.50
Asphalt Spreader
1751 Larimer 25.88 6.80
1752 Mesa, Weld 23.66 7.36
Backhoe/Trackhoe
1753 Larimer 21.46 4.85
1754 Mesa 19.81 6.34
1755 Weld 20.98 6.33
Bobcat/Skid Loader
1756 Larimer 17.13 4.46
1757 Mesa, Weld 15.37 4.28
1758 Boom 22.67 8.72
Broom/Sweeper
1759 Larimer 23.55 6.20
217
1760 Mesa 23.38 6.58
1761 Weld 23.23 6.89
218
General Decision No. CO150024
The wage and fringe benefits listed below do not reflect collectively bargained rates.
Code Classification Basic Hourly
Rate Fringe Benefits
Last
Mod
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (con’t):
Bulldozer
1762 Larimer, Weld 22.05 6.23
1763 Mesa 22.67 8.72
1764 Crane 26.75 6.16
Drill
1765 Larimer, Weld 31.39 0.00
1766 Mesa 35.06 0.00
1767 Forklift 15.91 4.68
Grader/Blade
1768 Larimer 24.82 5.75
1769 Mesa 23.42 9.22
1770 Weld 24.53 6.15
1771 Guardrail/Post Driver 16.07 4.41
1772 Loader (Front End)
1773 Larimer 20.45 3.50
1774 Mesa 22.44 9.22
1775 Weld 23.92 6.67
Mechanic
1776 Larimer 27.68 4.57
1777 Mesa 25.50 5.38
1778 Weld 24.67 5.68
Oiler
1779 Larimer 24.16 8.35
1780 Mesa 23.93 9.22
Roller/Compactor (Dirt and Grade Compaction)
1781 Larimer 23.67 8.22
219
1782 Mesa, Weld 21.33 6.99
220
General Decision No. CO150024
The wage and fringe benefits listed below do not reflect collectively bargained rates.
Code Classification Basic Hourly
Rate Fringe Benefits
Last
Mod
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (con’t.):
Rotomill
1783 Larimer 18.59 4.41
1784 Weld 16.22 4.41
Scraper
1785 Larimer 21.33 3.50
1786 Mesa 24.06 4.13
1787 Weld 30.14 1.40
Screed
1788 Larimer 27.20 5.52
1789 Mesa 27.24 5.04
1790 Weld 27.95 3.50
1791 Tractor 13.13 2.95
TRAFFIC SIGNALIZATION:
Groundsman
1792 Larimer 11.44 2.84
1793 Mesa 16.00 5.85
1794 Weld 16.93 3.58
TRUCK DRIVER:
Distributor
1795 Larimer 19.28 4.89
1796 Mesa 19.17 4.84
1797 Weld 20.61 5.27
Dump Truck
1798 Larimer 18.86 3.50
1799 Mesa 15.27 4.28
1800 Weld 15.27 5.27
221
General Decision No. CO150024
The wage and fringe benefits listed below do not reflect collectively bargained rates.
Code Classification Basic Hourly
Rate Fringe Benefits
Last
Mod
TRUCK DRIVER (con’t.):
Lowboy Truck
1801 Larimer 18.96 5.30
1802 Mesa, Weld 18.84 5.17
1803 Mechanic 26.48 3.50
Multi-Purpose Specialty & Hoisting Truck
1804 Larimer, Mesa 16.65 5.46
1805 Weld 16.87 5.56
1806 Pickup and Pilot Car 13.93 3.68
1807 Semi/Trailer Truck 18.39 4.13
1808 Truck Mounted Attenuator 12.43 3.22
Water Truck
1809 Larimer 19.14 4.99
1810 Mesa 15.96 5.27
1811 Weld 19.28 5.04
WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental.
====================================================================================
=====
Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after
award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(ii)).
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------
In the listing above, the "SU" designation means that rates listed under the identifier do not reflect collectively
bargained wage and fringe benefit rates. Other designations indicate unions whose rates have been determined to be
prevailing.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------
222
January 9, 2015
U.S. DEPT. OF LABOR DAVIS BACON MINIMUM WAGES, COLORADO
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL DECISION NUMBER – CO150024
WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS
1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can
be:
* an existing published wage determination
* a survey underlying a wage determination
* a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter
* a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling
On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and
Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have
responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program.
If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in
2.) and 3.) should be followed.
With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the
Branch of
Construction Wage Determinations. Write to:
Branch of Construction Wage Determinations
Wage and Hour Division
U.S. Department of Labor
200 Constitution Avenue, N.W.
Washington, DC 20210
2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review
and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7).
Write to:
Wage and Hour Administrator
U.S. Department of Labor
200 Constitution Avenue, N.W.
Washington, DC 20210
The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage
payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue.
3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative
Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to:
Administrative Review Board
U.S. Department of Labor
200 Constitution Avenue, N.W.
Washington, DC 20210
4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final.
END OF GENERAL DECISION NO. CO150024
223
July 29, 2011
ON THE JOB TRAINING
This training special provision is an implementation of 23 U.S.C. 140 (a). The Contractor shall meet the requirements
of the FHWA 1273 for all apprentices and trainees.
As part of the Contractor's Equal Employment Opportunity Affirmative Action Program, training shall be provided on
projects as follows:
1. The Contractor shall provide on the job training aimed at developing full journey workers in the skilled craft
identified in the approved training plan. The Contractor shall provide at a minimum, required training hours
listed in the Project Special Provisions for each project.
2. The primary objective of this specification is to train and upgrade women and minority candidates to full
journey worker status. The Contractor shall make every reasonable effort to enroll and train minority and
women workers. This training commitment shall not be used to discriminate against any applicant for training
whether or not the applicant is a woman or minority.
3. The Contractor may employ temporary workers from CDOT supportive services providers to meet OJT
requirements. Information pertaining to supportive services providers may be obtained by calling the CDOT
OJT Coordinator at the number shown on the link http://www.coloradodot.info/business/equal-
opportunity/training.html
4. An employee shall not be employed or utilized as a trainee in a skilled craft in which the employee has
achieved journey status.
5. The minimum length and type of training for each skilled craft shall be as established in the training program
selected by the Contractor and approved by the Department and the Colorado Division of the Federal Highway
Administration (FHWA), or the U. S Department of Labor (DOL), Office of Apprenticeship or recognized
state apprenticeship agency. To obtain assistance or program approval contact:
CDOT Center for Equal Opportunity
4201 East Arkansas Avenue
Denver, CO 80222
eo@dot.state.co.us
1-800-925-3427
6. The Contractor shall pay the training program wage rates and the correct fringe benefits to each approved
trainee employed on the project and enrolled in an approved program. The minimum trainee wage shall be no
less than the wage for the Guardrail Laborer classification as indicated in the wage decision for the project.
7. The CDOT Regional Civil Rights Manager must approve all proposed apprentices and trainees for the
participation to be counted toward the project goal and reimbursement. Approval must occur before training
begins. Approval for the apprentice or trainee to begin work on a CDOT project will be based on:
A. Evidence of the registration of the trainee or apprentice into the approved training program.
B. The completed Form 838 for each trainee or apprentice as submitted to the Engineer.
8. Before training begins, the Contractor shall provide each trainee with a copy of the approved training program,
pay scale, pension and retirement benefits, health and disability benefits, promotional opportunities, and
company policies and complaint procedures.
224
July 29, 2011
ON THE JOB TRAINING
9. Before training begins, the Contractor shall submit a copy of the approved training program and CDOT Form
1337 to the Engineer. Progress payments may be withheld until this is submitted and approved and may be
withheld if the approved program is not followed.
10. On a monthly basis, the Contractor shall provide to the Engineer a completed On the Job Training Progress
Report (Form 832) for each approved trainee or apprentice on the project. The Form 832 will be reviewed and
approved by the Engineer before reimbursement will be made. The Contractor will be reimbursed for no more
than the OJT Force Account budget. At the discretion of the Engineer and if funds are available, the Engineer
may increase the force account budget and the number of reimbursable training hours through a Change Order.
The request to increase the force account must be approved by the Engineer prior to the training.
11. Upon completion of training, transfer to another project, termination of the trainee or notification of final
acceptance of the project, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a “final” completed Form 832 for each
approved apprentice or trainee.
12. All forms are available from the CDOT Center for Equal Opportunity, through the CDOT Regional Civil
Rights Manager, or on CDOT’s website at
http://www.coloradodot.info/business/bidding/Bidding%20Forms/Bid%20Winner%20Forms
13. Forms 838 and 832 shall be completed in full by the Contractor. Reimbursement for training is based on the
number of hours of on the job training documented on the Form 832 and approved by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall explain discrepancies between the hours documented on Form 832 and the corresponding
certified payrolls.
14. The OJT goal (# of training hours required) for the project will be included in the Project Special Provisions
and will be determined by the Regional Civil Rights Manager after considering:
A. Availability of minorities, women, and disadvantaged for training;
B. The potential for effective training;
C. Duration of the Contract;
D. Dollar value of the Contract;
E. Total normal work force that the average bidder could be expected to use;
F. Geographic location;
G. Type of work; and
H. The need for additional journey workers in the area
I. The general guidelines for minimum total training hours are as follows:
225
July 29, 2011
ON THE JOB TRAINING
Contract dollar
value
Minimum total
training hours to
be provided on the
project
Up to 1 million 0
>1 - 2 million 320
>2 - 4 million 640
>4 - 6 million 1280
>6 - 8 million 1600
>8 - 12 million 1920
>12 - 16 million 2240
>16 - 20 million 2560
For each
increment of $5
million, over $20
million
1280
15. The number of training hours for the trainees to be employed on the project shall be as shown in the
Contract. The trainees or apprentices employed under the Contract shall be registered with the
Department using Form 838, and must be approved by the Regional Civil Rights Manager before training
begins for the participation to be counted toward the OJT project goal. The goal will be met by an
approved trainee or apprentice working on that project; or, if a Contractor’s apprentice is enrolled in a
DOL approved apprenticeship program and registered with CDOT using Form 838 and working for the
Contractor on a non-CDOT project. The hours worked on the non-CDOT project may be counted toward
the project goal with approved documentation on Form 832. Training hours will be counted toward one
project goal.
16. Subcontractor trainees who are enrolled in an approved Program may be used by the Contractor to satisfy
the requirements of this specification.
17. The Contractor will be reimbursed $2.00per hour worked for each apprentice or trainee working on a
CDOT project and whose participation toward the OJT project goal has been approved
18. The Contractor shall have fulfilled its responsibilities under this specification if the CDOT Regional Civil
Rights Manager has determined that it has provided acceptable number of training hours.
19. Failure to provide the required training will result in the following disincentives: A sum representing the
number of training hours specified in the Contract, minus the number of training hours worked as certified
on Form 832, multiplied by the journey worker hourly wages plus fringe benefits [(A hours – B hours
worked) x (C dollar per hour + D fringe benefits)] = Disincentives Assessed. Wage rate will be determined
by averaging the wages for the crafts listed on Form 1337. The Engineer will provide the Contractor with a
226
July 29, 2011
ON THE JOB TRAINING
written notice at Final Acceptance of the project informing the Contractor of the noncompliance with this
specification which will include a calculation of the disincentives to be assessed.
227
February 3, 2011
PARTNERING PROGRAM
The Colorado Department of Transportation actively encourages partnering and invites the Contractor and his
subcontractors and suppliers to participate in a voluntary partnering agreement for this project.
The following information summarizes the partnering process. More information is available through the Resident
Engineer listed in the project special provisions.
This partnership will be structured to draw on the strengths of each organization to identify and achieve mutual goals.
The objectives are effective and efficient Contract performance with reciprocal cooperation, and completion within
budget, on schedule, and in accordance with the Contract.
This partnership will be bilateral in make-up and all costs associated with this partnership will be agreed to by both
parties and will be shared equally. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all costs associated with
partnering during the implementation of the partnering process. CDOT will reimburse the Contractor for the agreed
amount.
The CDOT Program Engineer or the Resident Engineer will contact the Contractor within ten days after the award of
this project to ask if the Contractor wants to implement this partnership initiative. If the Contractor agrees, the
Contractor's on-site project manager shall meet with CDOT's Resident Engineer to plan a partnering development and
team building workshop. At this planning session, arrangements shall be made to determine the facilitator and the
workshop, attendees, agenda, duration, and location.
The workshop shall be held prior to the commencement of any major work item and preferably before the
preconstruction conference. The following persons shall attend the workshop: CDOT's Resident Engineer, Project
Engineer, and key project personnel; the Contractor's on-site project manager and key project supervision personnel;
and the subcontractors' key project supervision personnel. The following personnel shall also be invited to attend as
needed: project design engineer, key local government personnel, suppliers, design consultants, CDOT maintenance
foreman, CDOT environmental manager, key railroad personnel, and key utility personnel. The Contractor and CDOT
shall also have Regional or District managers and Corporate or State level managers on the partnering team.
Follow-up workshops may be held periodically throughout the duration of the Contract as agreed by the Contractor
and the Engineer at the initial workshop. A closeout workshop shall be held to evaluate the effectiveness of the
partnership.
The establishment of a partnership charter, which identifies the workshop participants' mutual goals on the project, will
not change the legal relationship of the parties to the Contract or relieve either party from any terms of the Contract.
228
October 31, 2013
REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS
FEDERAL-AID CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
Attached is Form FHWA 1273 titled Required Contract Provisions Federal-Aid Construction Contracts. As described
in Section I. General, the provisions of Form FHWA 1273 apply to all work performed under the Contract and are to
be included in all subcontracts with the following modification:
For TAP (Transportation Alternatives Program) funded Recreational Trails projects, Section I (4) regarding convict
labor and all of Section IV of the FHWA 1273 do not apply.
229
October 31, 2013
REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS
FEDERAL-AID CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
I. General
II. Nondiscrimination
III. Nonsegregated Facilities
IV. Davis-Bacon and Related Act Provisions
V. Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act Provisions
VI. Subletting or Assigning the Contract
VII. Safety: Accident Prevention
VIII. False Statements Concerning Highway Projects
IX. Implementation of Clean Air Act and Federal Water Pollution Control Act
X. Compliance with Governmentwide Suspension and Debarment Requirements
XI. Certification Regarding Use of Contract Funds for Lobbying
ATTACHMENTS
A. Employment and Materials Preference for Appalachian Development Highway System or Appalachian Local
Access Road Contracts (included in Appalachian contracts only)
I. GENERAL
1. Form FHWA-1273 must be physically incorporated in each construction contract funded under Title 23 (excluding
emergency contracts solely intended for debris removal). The contractor (or subcontractor) must insert this form in
each subcontract and further require its inclusion in all lower tier subcontracts (excluding purchase orders, rental
agreements and other agreements for supplies or services).
The applicable requirements of Form FHWA-1273 are incorporated by reference for work done under any purchase
order, rental agreement or agreement for other services. The prime contractor shall be responsible for compliance by
any subcontractor, lower-tier subcontractor or service provider.
Form FHWA-1273 must be included in all Federal-aid design-build contracts, in all subcontracts and in lower tier
subcontracts (excluding subcontracts for design services, purchase orders, rental agreements and other agreements for
supplies or services). The design-builder shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor, lower-tier
subcontractor or service provider.
Contracting agencies may reference Form FHWA-1273 in bid proposal or request for proposal documents, however,
the Form FHWA-1273 must be physically incorporated (not referenced) in all contracts, subcontracts and lower-tier
subcontracts (excluding purchase orders, rental agreements and other agreements for supplies or services related to a
construction contract).
2. Subject to the applicability criteria noted in the following sections, these contract provisions shall apply to all work
performed on the contract by the contractor's own organization and with the assistance of workers under the
contractor's immediate superintendence and to all work performed on the contract by piecework, station work, or by
subcontract.
230
October 31, 2013
REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS
FEDERAL-AID CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
3. A breach of any of the stipulations contained in these Required Contract Provisions may be sufficient grounds for
withholding of progress payments, withholding of final payment, termination of the contract, suspension / debarment
or any other action determined to be appropriate by the contracting agency and FHWA.
4. Selection of Labor: During the performance of this contract, the contractor shall not use convict labor for any
purpose within the limits of a construction project on a Federal-aid highway unless it is labor performed by convicts
who are on parole, supervised release, or probation. The term Federal-aid highway does not include roadways
functionally classified as local roads or rural minor collectors.
II. NONDISCRIMINATION
The provisions of this section related to 23 CFR Part 230 are applicable to all Federal-aid construction contracts and to
all related construction subcontracts of $10,000 or more. The provisions of 23 CFR Part 230 are not applicable to
material supply, engineering, or architectural service contracts.
In addition, the contractor and all subcontractors must comply with the following policies: Executive Order 11246, 41
CFR 60, 29 CFR 1625-1627, Title 23 USC Section 140, the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended (29 USC 794),
Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, as amended, and related regulations including 49 CFR Parts 21, 26 and 27;
and 23 CFR Parts 200, 230, and 633.
The contractor and all subcontractors must comply with: the requirements of the Equal Opportunity Clause in 41 CFR
60-1.4(b) and, for all construction contracts exceeding $10,000, the Standard Federal Equal Employment Opportunity
Construction Contract Specifications in 41 CFR 60-4.3.
Note: The U.S. Department of Labor has exclusive authority to determine compliance with Executive Order 11246 and
the policies of the Secretary of Labor including 41 CFR 60, and 29 CFR 1625-1627. The contracting agency and the
FHWA have the authority and the responsibility to ensure compliance with Title 23
USC Section 140, the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended (29 USC 794), and Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of
1964, as amended, and related regulations including 49 CFR Parts 21, 26 and 27; and 23 CFR Parts 200, 230, and 633.
The following provision is adopted from 23 CFR 230, Appendix A, with appropriate revisions to conform to the U.S.
Department of Labor (US DOL) and FHWA requirements.
1. Equal Employment Opportunity: Equal employment opportunity (EEO) requirements not to discriminate and to
take affirmative action to assure equal opportunity as set forth under laws, executive orders, rules, regulations (28 CFR
35, 29 CFR 1630, 29 CFR 1625-1627, 41 CFR 60 and 49 CFR 27) and orders of the Secretary of Labor as modified by
the provisions prescribed herein, and imposed pursuant to 23 U.S.C. 140 shall constitute the EEO and specific
affirmative action standards for the contractor's project activities under this contract. The provisions of the Americans
with Disabilities Act of 1990 (42 U.S.C. 12101 et seq.) set forth under 28 CFR 35 and 29 CFR 1630 are incorporated
by reference in this contract. In the execution of this contract, the contractor agrees to comply with the following
minimum specific requirement activities of EEO:
a. The contractor will work with the contracting agency and the Federal Government to ensure that it has made every
good faith effort to provide equal opportunity with respect to all of its terms and conditions of employment and in their
review of activities under the contract.
231
October 31, 2013
REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS
FEDERAL-AID CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
b. The contractor will accept as its operating policy the following statement:
"It is the policy of this Company to assure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during
employment, without regard to their race, religion, sex, color, national origin, age or disability. Such action shall
include: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination;
rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship, pre-apprenticeship,
and/or on-the-job training."
2. EEO Officer: The contractor will designate and make known to the contracting officers an EEO Officer who will
have the responsibility for and must be capable of effectively administering and promoting an active EEO program and
who must be assigned adequate authority and responsibility to do so.
3. Dissemination of Policy: All members of the contractor's staff who are authorized to hire, supervise, promote, and
discharge employees, or who recommend such action, or who are substantially involved in such action, will be made
fully cognizant of, and will implement, the contractor's EEO policy and contractual responsibilities to provide EEO in
each grade and classification of employment. To ensure that the above agreement will be met, the following actions
will be taken as a minimum:
a. Periodic meetings of supervisory and personnel office employees will be conducted before the start of work and
then not less often than once every six months, at which time the contractor's EEO policy and its implementation will
be reviewed and explained. The meetings will be conducted by the EEO Officer.
b. All new supervisory or personnel office employees will be given a thorough indoctrination by the EEO Officer,
covering all major aspects of the contractor's EEO obligations within thirty days following their reporting for duty with
the contractor.
c. All personnel who are engaged in direct recruitment for the project will be instructed by the EEO Officer in the
contractor's procedures for locating and hiring minorities and women.
d. Notices and posters setting forth the contractor's EEO policy will be placed in areas readily accessible to
employees, applicants for employment and potential employees.
e. The contractor's EEO policy and the procedures to implement such policy will be brought to the attention of
employees by means of meetings, employee handbooks, or other appropriate means.
4. Recruitment: When advertising for employees, the contractor will include in all advertisements for employees the
notation: "An Equal Opportunity Employer." All such advertisements will be placed in publications having a large
circulation among minorities and women in the area from which the project work force would normally be derived.
a. The contractor will, unless precluded by a valid bargaining agreement, conduct systematic and direct recruitment
through public and private employee referral sources likely to yield qualified minorities and women. To meet this
requirement, the contractor will identify sources of potential minority group employees, and establish with such
identified sources procedures whereby minority and women applicants may be referred to the contractor for
employment consideration.
232
October 31, 2013
REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS
FEDERAL-AID CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
b. In the event the contractor has a valid bargaining agreement providing for exclusive hiring hall referrals, the
contractor is expected to observe the provisions of that agreement to the extent that the system meets the contractor's
compliance with EEO contract provisions. Where implementation of such an agreement has the effect of
discriminating against minorities or women, or obligates the contractor to do the same, such implementation violates
Federal nondiscrimination provisions.
c. The contractor will encourage its present employees to refer minorities and women as applicants for employment.
Information and procedures with regard to referring such applicants will be discussed with employees.
5. Personnel Actions: Wages, working conditions, and employee benefits shall be established and administered, and
personnel actions of every type, including hiring, upgrading, promotion, transfer, demotion, layoff, and termination,
shall be taken without regard to race, color, religion, sex, national origin, age or disability. The following procedures
shall be followed:
a. The contractor will conduct periodic inspections of project sites to insure that working conditions and employee
facilities do not indicate discriminatory treatment of project site personnel.
b. The contractor will periodically evaluate the spread of wages paid within each classification to determine any
evidence of discriminatory wage practices.
c. The contractor will periodically review selected personnel actions in depth to determine whether there is evidence
of discrimination. Where evidence is found, the contractor will promptly take corrective action. If the review
indicates that the discrimination may extend beyond the actions reviewed, such corrective action shall include all
affected persons.
d. The contractor will promptly investigate all complaints of alleged discrimination made to the contractor in
connection with its obligations under this contract, will attempt to resolve such complaints, and will take appropriate
corrective action within a reasonable time. If the investigation indicates that the discrimination may affect persons
other than the complainant, such corrective action shall include such other persons. Upon completion of each
investigation, the contractor will inform every complainant of all of their avenues of appeal.
6. Training and Promotion:
a. The contractor will assist in locating, qualifying, and increasing the skills of minorities and women who are
applicants for employment or current employees. Such efforts should be aimed at developing full journey level status
employees in the type of trade or job classification involved.
b. Consistent with the contractor's work force requirements and as permissible under Federal and State regulations,
the contractor shall make full use of training programs, i.e., apprenticeship, and on-the-job training programs for the
geographical area of contract performance. In the event a special provision for training is provided under this contract,
this subparagraph will be superseded as indicated in the special provision. The contracting agency may reserve
training positions for persons who receive welfare assistance in accordance with 23 U.S.C. 140(a).
c. The contractor will advise employees and applicants for employment of available training programs and entrance
requirements for each.
233
October 31, 2013
REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS
FEDERAL-AID CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
d. The contractor will periodically review the training and promotion potential of employees who are minorities and
women and will encourage eligible employees to apply for such training and promotion.
7. Unions: If the contractor relies in whole or in part upon unions as a source of employees, the contractor will use
good faith efforts to obtain the cooperation of such unions to increase opportunities for minorities and women.
Actions by the contractor, either directly or through a contractor's association acting as agent, will include the
procedures set forth below:
a. The contractor will use good faith efforts to develop, in cooperation with the unions, joint training programs
aimed toward qualifying more minorities and women for membership in the unions and increasing the skills of
minorities and women so that they may qualify for higher paying employment.
b. The contractor will use good faith efforts to incorporate an EEO clause into each union agreement to the end that
such union will be contractually bound to refer applicants without regard to their race, color, religion, sex, national
origin, age or disability.
c. The contractor is to obtain information as to the referral practices and policies of the labor union except that to the
extent such information is within the exclusive possession of the labor union and such labor union refuses to furnish
such information to the contractor, the contractor shall so certify to the contracting agency and shall set forth what
efforts have been made to obtain such information.
d. In the event the union is unable to provide the contractor with a reasonable flow of referrals within the time limit
set forth in the collective bargaining agreement, the contractor will, through independent recruitment efforts, fill the
employment vacancies without regard to race, color, religion, sex, national origin, age or disability; making full efforts
to obtain qualified and/or qualifiable minorities and women. The failure of a union to provide sufficient referrals (even
though it is obligated to provide exclusive referrals under the terms of a collective bargaining agreement) does not
relieve the contractor from the requirements of this paragraph. In the event the union referral practice prevents the
contractor from meeting the obligations pursuant to Executive Order 11246, as amended, and these special provisions,
such contractor shall immediately notify the contracting agency.
8. Reasonable Accommodation for Applicants / Employees with Disabilities: The contractor must be familiar
with the requirements for and comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act and all rules and regulations
established there under. Employers must provide reasonable accommodation in all employment activities unless to do
so would cause an undue hardship.
9. Selection of Subcontractors, Procurement of Materials and Leasing of Equipment: The contractor shall not
discriminate on the grounds of race, color, religion, sex, national origin, age or disability in the selection and retention
of subcontractors, including procurement of materials and leases of equipment. The contractor shall take all necessary
and reasonable steps to ensure nondiscrimination in the administration of this contract.
a. The contractor shall notify all potential subcontractors and suppliers and lessors of their EEO obligations under
this contract.
b. The contractor will use good faith efforts to ensure subcontractor compliance with their EEO obligations.
10. Assurance Required by 49 CFR 26.13(b):
234
October 31, 2013
REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS
FEDERAL-AID CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
a. The requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 and the State DOT’s U.S. DOT-approved DBE program are incorporated by
reference.
b. The contractor or subcontractor shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in the
performance of this contract. The contractor shall carry out applicable requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 in the award
and administration of DOT-assisted contracts. Failure by the contractor to carry out these requirements is a material
breach of this contract, which may result in the termination of this contract or such other remedy as the contracting
agency deems appropriate.
11. Records and Reports: The contractor shall keep such records as necessary to document compliance with the EEO
requirements. Such records shall be retained for a period of three years following the date of the final payment to the
contractor for all contract work and shall be available at reasonable times and places for inspection by authorized
representatives of the contracting agency and the FHWA.
a. The records kept by the contractor shall document the following:
(1) The number and work hours of minority and non-minority group members and women employed in each
work classification on the project;
(2) The progress and efforts being made in cooperation with unions, when applicable, to increase employment
opportunities for minorities and women; and
(3) The progress and efforts being made in locating, hiring, training, qualifying, and upgrading minorities and
women;
b. The contractors and subcontractors will submit an annual report to the contracting agency each July for the
duration of the project, indicating the number of minority, women, and non-minority group employees currently
engaged in each work classification required by the contract work. This information is to be reported on Form FHWA-
1391. The staffing data should represent the project work force on board in all or any part of the last payroll period
preceding the end of July. If on-the-job training is being required by special provision, the contractor will be required
to collect and report training data. The employment data should reflect the work force on board during all or any part
of the last payroll period preceding the end of July.
III. NONSEGREGATED FACILITIES
This provision is applicable to all Federal-aid construction contracts and to all related construction subcontracts of
$10,000 or more.
The contractor must ensure that facilities provided for employees are provided in such a manner that segregation on the
basis of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin cannot result. The contractor may neither require such segregated
use by written or oral policies nor tolerate such use by employee custom. The contractor's obligation extends further to
ensure that its employees are not assigned to perform their services at any location, under the contractor's control,
where the facilities are segregated. The term "facilities" includes waiting rooms, work areas, restaurants and other
eating areas, time clocks, restrooms, washrooms, locker rooms, and other storage or dressing areas, parking lots,
drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing provided for employees. The
235
October 31, 2013
REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS
FEDERAL-AID CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
contractor shall provide separate or single-user restrooms and necessary dressing or sleeping areas to assure privacy
between sexes.
IV. DAVIS-BACON AND RELATED ACT PROVISIONS
This section is applicable to all Federal-aid construction projects exceeding $2,000 and to all related subcontracts and
lower-tier subcontracts (regardless of subcontract size). The requirements apply to all projects located within the right-
of-way of a roadway that is functionally classified as Federal-aid highway. This excludes roadways functionally
classified as local roads or rural minor collectors, which are exempt. Contracting agencies may elect to apply these
requirements to other projects.
The following provisions are from the U.S. Department of Labor regulations in 29 CFR 5.5 “Contract provisions and
related matters” with minor revisions to conform to the FHWA-1273 format and FHWA program requirements.
1. Minimum wages
a. All laborers and mechanics employed or working upon the site of the work, will be paid unconditionally and not
less often than once a week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll
deductions as are permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act (29 CFR part 3)),
the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at time of payment computed
at rates not less than those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached hereto and
made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the contractor and
such laborers and mechanics.
Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under section 1(b)(2) of the Davis-
Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the
provisions of paragraph 1.d. of this section; also, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a weekly
period (but not less often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs which cover the particular weekly period, are
deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such weekly period. Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid
the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits on the wage determination for the classification of work actually
performed, without regard to skill, except as provided in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics performing work in
more than one classification may be compensated at the rate specified for each classification for the time actually
worked therein: Provided, That the employer's payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each classification
in which work is performed. The wage determination (including any additional classification and wage rates
conformed under paragraph 1.b. of this section) and the Davis-Bacon poster (WH–1321) shall be posted at all times by
the contractor and its subcontractors at the site of the work in a prominent and accessible place where it can be easily
seen by the workers.
b. (1) The contracting officer shall require that any class of laborers or mechanics, including helpers, which is not
listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the contract shall be classified in conformance
with the wage determination. The contracting officer shall approve an additional classification and wage rate and
fringe benefits therefore only when the following criteria have been met:
(i) The work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage
determination; and
236
October 31, 2013
REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS
FEDERAL-AID CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
(ii) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; and
(iii) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage
rates contained in the wage determination.
(2) If the contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed in the classification (if known), or their
representatives, and the contracting officer agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount
designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by the contracting officer
to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment Standards Administration, U.S. Department of
Labor, Washington, DC 20210. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will approve, modify, or
disapprove every additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or
will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary.
(3) In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification or their
representatives, and the contracting officer do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the
amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), the contracting officer shall refer the questions, including
the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of the contracting officer, to the Wage and Hour
Administrator for determination. The Wage and Hour Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a
determination within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer
within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary.
(4) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) determined pursuant to paragraphs 1.b.(2) or 1.b.(3)
of this section, shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classification under this contract from the first day
on which work is performed in the classification.
c. Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe
benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage
determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof.
d. If the contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third person, the contractor may consider as part of
the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe
benefits under a plan or program, Provided, That the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the
contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis-Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require
the contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or program.
2. Withholding
The contracting agency shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the
Department of Labor, withhold or cause to be withheld from the contractor under this contract, or any other Federal
contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract subject to Davis-Bacon prevailing
wage requirements, which is held by the same prime contractor, so much of the accrued payments or advances as may
be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees, and helpers, employed by the
contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the contract. In the event of failure to pay any
laborer or mechanic, including any apprentice, trainee, or helper, employed or working on the site of the work, all or
237
October 31, 2013
REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS
FEDERAL-AID CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
part of the wages required by the contract, the contracting agency may, after written notice to the contractor, take such
action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such
violations have ceased.
3. Payrolls and basic records
a. Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be maintained by the contractor during the course of the work and
preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working at the site of the work. Such
records shall contain the name, address, and social security number of each such worker, his or her correct
classification, hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe
benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act), daily and
weekly number of hours worked, deductions made and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found
under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv) that the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably
anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act, the
contractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the
plan or program is financially responsible, and that the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the
laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing
such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain written evidence
of the registration of apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices
and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs.
b. (1) The contractor shall submit weekly for each week in which any contract work is performed a copy of all
payrolls to the contracting agency. The payrolls submitted shall set out accurately and completely all of the
information required to be maintained under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(3)(i), except that full social security numbers and home
addresses shall not be included on weekly transmittals. Instead the payrolls shall only need to include an individually
identifying number for each employee ( e.g. , the last four digits of the employee's social security number). The
required weekly payroll information may be submitted in any form desired. Optional Form WH–347 is available for
this purpose from the Wage and Hour Division Web site at http://www.dol.gov/esa/whd/forms/wh347instr.htm or its
successor site. The prime contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all subcontractors.
Contractors and subcontractors shall maintain the full social security number and current address of each covered
worker, and shall provide them upon request to the contracting agency for transmission to the State DOT, the FHWA
or the Wage and Hour Division of the Department of Labor for purposes of an investigation or audit of compliance
with prevailing wage requirements. It is not a violation of this section for a prime contractor to require a subcontractor
to provide addresses and social security numbers to the prime contractor for its own records, without weekly
submission to the contracting agency..
(2) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a “Statement of Compliance,” signed by the contractor or
subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the persons employed under the contract and
shall certify the following:
(i) That the payroll for the payroll period contains the information required to be provided under §5.5 (a)(3)(ii) of
Regulations, 29 CFR part 5, the appropriate information is being maintained under §5.5 (a)(3)(i) of Regulations, 29
CFR part 5, and that such information is correct and complete;
238
October 31, 2013
REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS
FEDERAL-AID CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
(ii) That each laborer or mechanic (including each helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on the contract
during the payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or indirectly,
and that no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other than
permissible deductions as set forth in Regulations, 29 CFR part 3;
(iii) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or
cash equivalents for the classification of work performed, as specified in the applicable wage determination
incorporated into the contract.
(3) The weekly submission of a properly executed certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form WH–
347 shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the “Statement of Compliance” required by paragraph 3.b.(2) of
this section.
(4) The falsification of any of the above certifications may subject the contractor or subcontractor to civil or
criminal prosecution under section 1001 of title 18 and section 231 of title 31 of the United States Code.
c. The contractor or subcontractor shall make the records required under paragraph 3.a. of this section available for
inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of the contracting agency, the State DOT, the
FHWA, or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such representatives to interview employees during working
hours on the job. If the contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required records or to make them available, the
FHWA may, after written notice to the contractor, the contracting agency or the State DOT, take such action as may be
necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, failure to
submit the required records upon request or to make such records available may be grounds for debarment action
pursuant to 29 CFR 5.12.
4. Apprentices and trainees
a. Apprentices (programs of the USDOL).
Apprentices will be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work they performed when they are
employed pursuant to and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S.
Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and
Labor Services, or with a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Office, or if a person is employed in his or
her first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, who is not
individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by the Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer
and Labor Services or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment
as an apprentice.
The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft classification shall not be greater than the
ratio permitted to the contractor as to the entire work force under the registered program. Any worker listed on a
payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise employed as stated above, shall be paid not less
than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition,
any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be
paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a
239
October 31, 2013
REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS
FEDERAL-AID CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
contractor is performing construction on a project in a locality other than that in which its program is registered, the
ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate) specified in the contractor's or
subcontractor's registered program shall be observed.
Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the registered program for the apprentice's level of
progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeymen hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination.
Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the
apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits
listed on the wage determination for the applicable classification. If the Administrator determines that a different
practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be paid in accordance with that
determination.
In the event the Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services, or a State Apprenticeship Agency
recognized by the Office, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the contractor will no longer be permitted
to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program
is approved.
b. Trainees (programs of the USDOL).
Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees will not be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the
work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a program which has received
prior approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training
Administration.
The ratio of trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than permitted under the plan approved by the
Employment and Training Administration.
Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for the trainee's level of progress,
expressed as a percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall
be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If the trainee program does not
mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination
unless the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that there is an apprenticeship program associated
with the corresponding journeyman wage rate on the wage determination which provides for less than full fringe
benefits for apprentices. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered and participating in a
training plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration shall be paid not less than the applicable wage
rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any trainee performing
work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the
applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed.
In the event the Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of a training program, the contractor
will no longer be permitted to utilize trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed
until an acceptable program is approved.
240
October 31, 2013
REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS
FEDERAL-AID CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
c. Equal employment opportunity. The utilization of apprentices, trainees and journeymen under this part shall be in
conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR
part 30.
d. Apprentices and Trainees (programs of the U.S. DOT).
Apprentices and trainees working under apprenticeship and skill training programs which have been certified by the
Secretary of Transportation as promoting EEO in connection with Federal-aid highway construction programs are not
subject to the requirements of paragraph 4 of this Section IV. The straight time hourly wage rates for apprentices and
trainees under such programs will be established by the particular programs. The ratio of apprentices and trainees to
journeymen shall not be greater than permitted by the terms of the particular program.
5. Compliance with Copeland Act requirements. The contractor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR
part 3, which are incorporated by reference in this contract.
6. Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert Form FHWA-1273 in any subcontracts and also require
the subcontractors to include Form FHWA-1273 in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be
responsible for the compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all the contract clauses in 29 CFR
5.5.
7. Contract termination: debarment. A breach of the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5 may be grounds for
termination of the contract, and for debarment as a contractor and a subcontractor as provided in 29 CFR 5.12.
8. Compliance with Davis-Bacon and Related Act requirements. All rulings and interpretations of the Davis-
Bacon and Related Acts contained in 29 CFR parts 1, 3, and 5 are herein incorporated by reference in this contract.
9. Disputes concerning labor standards. Disputes arising out of the labor standards provisions of this contract shall
not be subject to the general disputes clause of this contract. Such disputes shall be resolved in accordance with the
procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause
include disputes between the contractor (or any of its subcontractors) and the contracting agency, the U.S. Department
of Labor, or the employees or their representatives.
10. Certification of eligibility.
a. By entering into this contract, the contractor certifies that neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm who has
an interest in the contractor's firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded Government contracts by virtue of
section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1).
b. No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any person or firm ineligible for award of a Government contract
by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1).
c. The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U.S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. 1001.
241
October 31, 2013
REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS
FEDERAL-AID CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
V. CONTRACT WORK HOURS AND SAFETY STANDARDS ACT
The following clauses apply to any Federal-aid construction contract in an amount in excess of $100,000 and subject to
the overtime provisions of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. These clauses shall be inserted in
addition to the clauses required by 29 CFR 5.5(a) or 29 CFR 4.6. As used in this paragraph, the terms laborers and
mechanics include watchmen and guards.
1. Overtime requirements. No contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part of the contract work which may
require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics shall require or permit any such laborer or mechanic in
any workweek in which he or she is employed on such work to work in excess of forty hours in such workweek unless
such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay for
all hours worked in excess of forty hours in such workweek.
2. Violation; liability for unpaid wages; liquidated damages. In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in
paragraph (1.) of this section, the contractor and any subcontractor responsible therefor shall be liable for the unpaid
wages. In addition, such contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States (in the case of work done
under contract for the District of Columbia or a territory, to such District or to such territory), for liquidated damages.
Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen
and guards, employed in violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (1.) of this section, in the sum of $10 for each
calendar day on which such individual was required or permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek of forty
hours without payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in paragraph (1.) of this section.
3. Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated damages. The FHWA or the contacting agency shall upon its own
action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be
withheld, from any moneys payable on account of work performed by the contractor or subcontractor under any such
contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract subject
to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the same prime contractor, such sums as may
be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and
liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in paragraph (2.) of this section.
4. Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in paragraph (1.)
through (4.) of this section and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier
subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier
subcontractor with the clauses set forth in paragraphs (1.) through (4.) of this section.
VI. SUBLETTING OR ASSIGNING THE CONTRACT
This provision is applicable to all Federal-aid construction contracts on the National Highway System.
1. The contractor shall perform with its own organization contract work amounting to not less than 30 percent (or a
greater percentage if specified elsewhere in the contract) of the total original contract price, excluding any specialty
242
October 31, 2013
REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS
FEDERAL-AID CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
items designated by the contracting agency. Specialty items may be performed by subcontract and the amount of any
such specialty items performed may be deducted from the total original contract price before computing the amount of
work required to be performed by the contractor's own organization (23 CFR 635.116).
a. The term “perform work with its own organization” refers to workers employed or leased by the prime contractor,
and equipment owned or rented by the prime contractor, with or without operators. Such term does not include
employees or equipment of a subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor, agents of the prime contractor, or any other
assignees. The term may include payments for the costs of hiring leased employees from an employee leasing firm
meeting all relevant Federal and State regulatory requirements. Leased employees may only be included in this term if
the prime contractor meets all of the following conditions:
(1) the prime contractor maintains control over the supervision of the day-to-day activities of the leased
employees;
(2) the prime contractor remains responsible for the quality of the work of the leased employees;
(3) the prime contractor retains all power to accept or exclude individual employees from work on the
project; and
(4) the prime contractor remains ultimately responsible for the payment of predetermined minimum wages, the
submission of payrolls, statements of compliance and all other Federal regulatory requirements.
b. "Specialty Items" shall be construed to be limited to work that requires highly specialized knowledge, abilities, or
equipment not ordinarily available in the type of contracting organizations qualified and expected to bid or propose on
the contract as a whole and in general are to be limited to minor components of the overall contract.
2. The contract amount upon which the requirements set forth in paragraph (1) of Section VI is computed includes the
cost of material and manufactured products which are to be purchased or produced by the contractor under the contract
provisions.
3. The contractor shall furnish (a) a competent superintendent or supervisor who is employed by the firm, has full
authority to direct performance of the work in accordance with the contract requirements, and is in charge of all
construction operations (regardless of who performs the work) and (b) such other of its own organizational resources
(supervision, management, and engineering services) as the contracting officer determines is necessary to assure the
performance of the contract.
4. No portion of the contract shall be sublet, assigned or otherwise disposed of except with the written consent of the
contracting officer, or authorized representative, and such consent when given shall not be construed to relieve the
contractor of any responsibility for the fulfillment of the contract. Written consent will be given only after the
contracting agency has assured that each subcontract is evidenced in writing and that it contains all pertinent
provisions and requirements of the prime contract.
5. The 30% self-performance requirement of paragraph (1) is not applicable to design-build contracts; however,
contracting agencies may establish their own self-performance requirements.
VII. SAFETY: ACCIDENT PREVENTION
This provision is applicable to all Federal-aid construction contracts and to all related subcontracts.
243
October 31, 2013
REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS
FEDERAL-AID CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
1. In the performance of this contract the contractor shall comply with all applicable Federal, State, and local laws
governing safety, health, and sanitation (23 CFR 635). The contractor shall provide all safeguards, safety devices and
protective equipment and take any other needed actions as it determines, or as the contracting officer may determine,
to be reasonably necessary to protect the life and health of employees on the job and the safety of the public and to
protect property in connection with the performance of the work covered by the contract.
2. It is a condition of this contract, and shall be made a condition of each subcontract, which the contractor enters into
pursuant to this contract, that the contractor and any subcontractor shall not permit any employee, in performance of
the contract, to work in surroundings or under conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous or dangerous to his/her
health or safety, as determined under construction safety and health standards (29 CFR 1926) promulgated by the
Secretary of Labor, in accordance with Section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C.
3704).
3. Pursuant to 29 CFR 1926.3, it is a condition of this contract that the Secretary of Labor or authorized representative
thereof, shall have right of entry to any site of contract performance to inspect or investigate the matter of compliance
with the construction safety and health standards and to carry out the duties of the Secretary under Section 107 of the
Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C.3704).
VIII. FALSE STATEMENTS CONCERNING HIGHWAY PROJECTS
This provision is applicable to all Federal-aid construction contracts and to all related subcontracts.
In order to assure high quality and durable construction in conformity with approved plans and specifications and a
high degree of reliability on statements and representations made by engineers, contractors, suppliers, and workers on
Federal-aid highway projects, it is essential that all persons concerned with the project perform their functions as
carefully, thoroughly, and honestly as possible. Willful falsification, distortion, or misrepresentation with respect to
any facts related to the project is a violation of Federal law. To prevent any misunderstanding regarding the
seriousness of these and similar acts, Form FHWA-1022 shall be posted on each Federal-aid highway project (23 CFR
635) in one or more places where it is readily available to all persons concerned with the project:
18 U.S.C. 1020 reads as follows:
"Whoever, being an officer, agent, or employee of the United States, or of any State or Territory, or whoever, whether
a person, association, firm, or corporation, knowingly makes any false statement, false representation, or false report as
to the character, quality, quantity, or cost of the material used or to be used, or the quantity or quality of the work
performed or to be performed, or the cost thereof in connection with the submission of plans, maps, specifications,
contracts, or costs of construction on any highway or related project submitted for approval to the Secretary of
Transportation; or
Whoever knowingly makes any false statement, false representation, false report or false claim with respect to the
character, quality, quantity, or cost of any work performed or to be performed, or materials furnished or to be
furnished, in connection with the construction of any highway or related project approved by the Secretary of
Transportation; or
244
October 31, 2013
REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS
FEDERAL-AID CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
Whoever knowingly makes any false statement or false representation as to material fact in any statement, certificate,
or report submitted pursuant to provisions of the Federal-aid Roads Act approved July 1, 1916, (39 Stat. 355), as
amended and supplemented;
Shall be fined under this title or imprisoned not more than 5 years or both."
IX. IMPLEMENTATION OF CLEAN AIR ACT AND FEDERAL WATER POLLUTION CONTROL ACT
This provision is applicable to all Federal-aid construction contracts and to all related subcontracts.
By submission of this bid/proposal or the execution of this contract, or subcontract, as appropriate, the bidder,
proposer, Federal-aid construction contractor, or subcontractor, as appropriate, will be deemed to have stipulated as
follows:
1. That any person who is or will be utilized in the performance of this contract is not prohibited from receiving an
award due to a violation of Section 508 of the Clean Water Act or Section 306 of the Clean Air Act.
2. That the contractor agrees to include or cause to be included the requirements of paragraph (1) of this Section X in
every subcontract, and further agrees to take such action as the contracting agency may direct as a means of enforcing
such requirements.
X. CERTIFICATION REGARDING DEBARMENT, SUSPENSION, INELIGIBILITY AND VOLUNTARY
EXCLUSION
This provision is applicable to all Federal-aid construction contracts, design-build contracts, subcontracts, lower-tier
subcontracts, purchase orders, lease agreements, consultant contracts or any other covered transaction requiring
FHWA approval or that is estimated to cost $25,000 or more – as defined in 2 CFR Parts 180 and 1200.
1. Instructions for Certification – First Tier Participants:
a. By signing and submitting this proposal, the prospective first tier participant is providing the certification set out
below.
b. The inability of a person to provide the certification set out below will not necessarily result in denial of
participation in this covered transaction. The prospective first tier participant shall submit an explanation of why it
cannot provide the certification set out below. The certification or explanation will be considered in connection with
the department or agency's determination whether to enter into this transaction. However, failure of the prospective
first tier participant to furnish a certification or an explanation shall disqualify such a person from participation in this
transaction.
c. The certification in this clause is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when the
contracting agency determined to enter into this transaction. If it is later determined that the prospective participant
245
October 31, 2013
REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS
FEDERAL-AID CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
knowingly rendered an erroneous certification, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government, the
contracting agency may terminate this transaction for cause of default.
d. The prospective first tier participant shall provide immediate written notice to the contracting agency to whom
this proposal is submitted if any time the prospective first tier participant learns that its certification was erroneous
when submitted or has become erroneous by reason of changed circumstances.
e. The terms "covered transaction," "debarred," "suspended," "ineligible," "participant," "person," "principal," and
"voluntarily excluded," as used in this clause, are defined in 2 CFR Parts 180 and 1200. “First Tier Covered
Transactions” refers to any covered transaction between a grantee or subgrantee of Federal funds and a participant
(such as the prime or general contract). “Lower Tier Covered Transactions” refers to any covered transaction under a
First Tier Covered Transaction (such as subcontracts). “First Tier Participant” refers to the participant who has entered
into a covered transaction with a grantee or subgrantee of Federal funds (such as the prime or general contractor).
“Lower Tier Participant” refers any participant who has entered into a covered transaction with a First Tier Participant
or other Lower Tier Participants (such as subcontractors and suppliers).
f. The prospective first tier participant agrees by submitting this proposal that, should the proposed covered
transaction be entered into, it shall not knowingly enter into any lower tier covered transaction with a person who is
debarred, suspended, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this covered transaction, unless
authorized by the department or agency entering into this transaction.
g. The prospective first tier participant further agrees by submitting this proposal that it will include the clause titled
"Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion-Lower Tier Covered
Transactions," provided by the department or contracting agency, entering into this covered transaction, without
modification, in all lower tier covered transactions and in all solicitations for lower tier covered transactions exceeding
the $25,000 threshold.
h. A participant in a covered transaction may rely upon a certification of a prospective participant in a lower tier
covered transaction that is not debarred, suspended, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from the covered transaction,
unless it knows that the certification is erroneous. A participant is responsible for ensuring that its principals are not
suspended, debarred, or otherwise ineligible to participate in covered transactions. To verify the eligibility of its
principals, as well as the eligibility of any lower tier prospective participants, each participant may, but is not required
to, check the Excluded Parties List System website (https://www.epls.gov/), which is compiled by the General Services
Administration.
i. Nothing contained in the foregoing shall be construed to require the establishment of a system of records in order
to render in good faith the certification required by this clause. The knowledge and information of the prospective
participant is not required to exceed that which is normally possessed by a prudent person in the ordinary course of
business dealings.
j. Except for transactions authorized under paragraph (f) of these instructions, if a participant in a covered
transaction knowingly enters into a lower tier covered transaction with a person who is suspended, debarred, ineligible,
or voluntarily excluded from participation in this transaction, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal
Government, the department or agency may terminate this transaction for cause or default.
* * * * *
246
October 31, 2013
REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS
FEDERAL-AID CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
2. Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion – First Tier Participants:
a. The prospective first tier participant certifies to the best of its knowledge and belief, that it and its principals:
(1) Are not presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded
from participating in covered transactions by any Federal department or agency;
(2) Have not within a three-year period preceding this proposal been convicted of or had a civil judgment rendered
against them for commission of fraud or a criminal offense in connection with obtaining, attempting to obtain, or
performing a public (Federal, State or local) transaction or contract under a public transaction; violation of Federal or
State antitrust statutes or commission of embezzlement, theft, forgery, bribery, falsification or destruction of records,
making false statements, or receiving stolen property;
(3) Are not presently indicted for or otherwise criminally or civilly charged by a governmental entity (Federal,
State or local) with commission of any of the offenses enumerated in paragraph (a)(2) of this certification; and
(4) Have not within a three-year period preceding this application/proposal had one or more public transactions
(Federal, State or local) terminated for cause or default.
b. Where the prospective participant is unable to certify to any of the statements in this certification, such
prospective participant shall attach an explanation to this proposal.
2. Instructions for Certification - Lower Tier Participants:
(Applicable to all subcontracts, purchase orders and other lower tier transactions requiring prior FHWA approval or
estimated to cost $25,000 or more - 2 CFR Parts 180 and 1200)
a. By signing and submitting this proposal, the prospective lower tier is providing the certification set out below.
b. The certification in this clause is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when this
transaction was entered into. If it is later determined that the prospective lower tier participant knowingly rendered an
erroneous certification, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government, the department, or agency
with which this transaction originated may pursue available remedies, including suspension and/or debarment.
c. The prospective lower tier participant shall provide immediate written notice to the person to which this proposal
is submitted if at any time the prospective lower tier participant learns that its certification was erroneous by reason of
changed circumstances.
d. The terms "covered transaction," "debarred," "suspended," "ineligible," "participant," "person," "principal," and
"voluntarily excluded," as used in this clause, are defined in 2 CFR Parts 180 and 1200. You may contact the person to
which this proposal is submitted for assistance in obtaining a copy of those regulations. “First Tier Covered
Transactions” refers to any covered transaction between a grantee or subgrantee of Federal funds and a participant
(such as the prime or general contract). “Lower Tier Covered Transactions” refers to any covered transaction under a
First Tier Covered Transaction (such as subcontracts). “First Tier Participant” refers to the participant who has entered
into a covered transaction with a grantee or subgrantee of Federal funds (such as the prime or general contractor).
247
October 31, 2013
REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS
FEDERAL-AID CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
“Lower Tier Participant” refers any participant who has entered into a covered transaction with a First Tier Participant
or other Lower Tier Participants (such as subcontractors and suppliers).
e. The prospective lower tier participant agrees by submitting this proposal that, should the proposed covered
transaction be entered into, it shall not knowingly enter into any lower tier covered transaction with a person who is
debarred, suspended, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this covered transaction, unless
authorized by the department or agency with which this transaction originated.
f. The prospective lower tier participant further agrees by submitting this proposal that it will include this clause
titled "Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion-Lower Tier Covered
Transaction," without modification, in all lower tier covered transactions and in all solicitations for lower tier covered
transactions exceeding the $25,000 threshold.
g. A participant in a covered transaction may rely upon a certification of a prospective participant in a lower tier
covered transaction that is not debarred, suspended, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from the covered transaction,
unless it knows that the certification is erroneous. A participant is responsible for ensuring that its principals are not
suspended, debarred, or otherwise ineligible to participate in covered transactions. To verify the eligibility of its
principals, as well as the eligibility of any lower tier prospective participants, each participant may, but is not required
to, check the Excluded Parties List System website (https://www.epls.gov/), which is compiled by the General Services
Administration.
h. Nothing contained in the foregoing shall be construed to require establishment of a system of records in order to
render in good faith the certification required by this clause. The knowledge and information of participant is not
required to exceed that which is normally possessed by a prudent person in the ordinary course of business dealings.
i. Except for transactions authorized under paragraph e of these instructions, if a participant in a covered transaction
knowingly enters into a lower tier covered transaction with a person who is suspended, debarred, ineligible, or
voluntarily excluded from participation in this transaction, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal
Government, the department or agency with which this transaction originated may pursue available remedies,
including suspension and/or debarment.
* * * * *
Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion--Lower Tier
Participants:
1. The prospective lower tier participant certifies, by submission of this proposal, that neither it nor its principals is
presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participating
in covered transactions by any Federal department or agency.
2. Where the prospective lower tier participant is unable to certify to any of the statements in this certification, such
prospective participant shall attach an explanation to this proposal.
* * * * *
XI. CERTIFICATION REGARDING USE OF CONTRACT FUNDS FOR LOBBYING
248
October 31, 2013
REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS
FEDERAL-AID CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
This provision is applicable to all Federal-aid construction contracts and to all related subcontracts which exceed
$100,000 (49 CFR 20).
1. The prospective participant certifies, by signing and submitting this bid or proposal, to the best of his or her
knowledge and belief, that:
a. No Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid, by or on behalf of the undersigned, to any person
for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any Federal agency, a Member of Congress, an
officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with the awarding of any
Federal contract, the making of any Federal grant, the making of any Federal loan, the entering into of any cooperative
agreement, and the extension, continuation, renewal, amendment, or modification of any Federal contract, grant, loan,
or cooperative agreement.
b. If any funds other than Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid to any person for influencing or
attempting to influence an officer or employee of any Federal agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee
of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with this Federal contract, grant, loan, or
cooperative agreement, the undersigned shall complete and submit Standard Form-LLL, "Disclosure Form to Report
Lobbying," in accordance with its instructions.
2. This certification is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when this transaction was
made or entered into. Submission of this certification is a prerequisite for making or entering into this transaction
imposed by 31 U.S.C. 1352. Any person who fails to file the required certification shall be subject to a civil penalty of
not less than $10,000 and not more than $100,000 for each such failure.
3. The prospective participant also agrees by submitting its bid or proposal that the participant shall require that the
language of this certification be included in all lower tier subcontracts, which exceed $100,000 and that all such
recipients shall certify and disclose accordingly.
249
October 31, 2013
REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS
FEDERAL-AID CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
ATTACHMENT A - EMPLOYMENT AND MATERIALS PREFERENCE FOR APPALACHIAN DEVELOPMENT
HIGHWAY SYSTEM OR APPALACHIAN LOCAL ACCESS ROAD CONTRACTS
This provision is applicable to all Federal-aid projects funded under the Appalachian Regional Development Act of
1965.
1. During the performance of this contract, the contractor undertaking to do work which is, or reasonably may be,
done as on-site work, shall give preference to qualified persons who regularly reside in the labor area as designated by
the DOL wherein the contract work is situated, or the subregion, or the Appalachian counties of the State wherein the
contract work is situated, except:
a. To the extent that qualified persons regularly residing in the area are not available.
b. For the reasonable needs of the contractor to employ supervisory or specially experienced personnel necessary to
assure an efficient execution of the contract work.
c. For the obligation of the contractor to offer employment to present or former employees as the result of a lawful
collective bargaining contract, provided that the number of nonresident persons employed under this subparagraph (1c)
shall not exceed 20 percent of the total number of employees employed by the contractor on the contract work, except
as provided in subparagraph (4) below.
2. The contractor shall place a job order with the State Employment Service indicating (a) the classifications of the
laborers, mechanics and other employees required to perform the contract work, (b) the number of employees required
in each classification, (c) the date on which the participant estimates such employees will be required, and (d) any
other pertinent information required by the State Employment Service to complete the job order form. The job order
may be placed with the State Employment Service in writing or by telephone. If during the course of the contract
work, the information submitted by the contractor in the original job order is substantially modified, the participant
shall promptly notify the State Employment Service.
3. The contractor shall give full consideration to all qualified job applicants referred to him by the State Employment
Service. The contractor is not required to grant employment to any job applicants who, in his opinion, are not
qualified to perform the classification of work required.
4. If, within one week following the placing of a job order by the contractor with the State Employment Service, the
State Employment Service is unable to refer any qualified job applicants to the contractor, or less than the number
requested, the State Employment Service will forward a certificate to the contractor indicating the unavailability of
applicants. Such certificate shall be made a part of the contractor's permanent project records. Upon receipt of this
certificate, the contractor may employ persons who do not normally reside in the labor area to fill positions covered by
the certificate, notwithstanding the provisions of subparagraph (1c) above.
5. The provisions of 23 CFR 633.207(e) allow the contracting agency to provide a contractual preference for the use
of mineral resource materials native to the Appalachian region.
6. The contractor shall include the provisions of Sections 1 through 4 of this Attachment A in every subcontract for
work which is, or reasonably may be, done as on-site work.
January 2, 2014
Muller Engineering Company
777 South Wadsworth Boulevard, #4-100
Lakewood, Colorado 80226
Attention: Ms. Nancy Lambertson, P.E., PTOE
Subject: Pavement Design Report, Horsetooth Road and Timberline Road Intersection
Improvements, RockSol Project No. 315.01
Dear Ms. Lambertson:
RockSol Consulting Group, Inc. (RockSol) has performed a geotechnical investigation for the
Horsetooth Road and Timberline Road Intersection Improvements Project in Fort Collins,
Colorado. The Horsetooth Road and Timberline Road intersection is located in the southeast
portion of Fort Collins, approximately 2.3 miles west of Interstate 25 and about ¾-mile southeast
of Nelson Reservoir (See Figure 1, Site Vicinity Map).
RockSol prepared a Soil Investigation Report, dated December 30, 2013, presenting information
on the subsurface soil and groundwater conditions obtained from soil borings performed within
the project limits.
This Pavement Design Report was prepared in general accordance with the requirements of the
Larimer County Urban Area Street Standards (LCUASS), April 2007, Chapter 10 – Pavement
Design and Report.
Project Description
Project descriptions are based discussions with Muller Engineering Company, on information
provided in the conceptual project plan sheets provided by Muller Engineering Company titled
Horsetooth & Timberline West and East Legs (Sheet 1 of 3), South Leg (Sheet 2 of 3), and
North Leg (Sheet 3 of 3) prepared by Muller Engineering, Dated November 21, 2011, and on
information presents in a Muller Engineering Company Memorandum presenting the Horsetooth
Road and Timberline Road Traffic Analysis and Proposed Roadway Improvements, dated
August 12, 2013.
Improvements to the Horsetooth Road and Timberline Road Intersection include widening both
Horsetooth Road and Timberline Road to accommodate double left turn lanes on the
southbound, northbound, and eastbound approaches as well as adding southbound and
eastbound exclusive right-turn lanes.
Based on the project plan sheets provided, RockSol understands that changes in roadway
grade at the intersection are not anticipated. Two new traffic signal poles, at opposite corners,
are also proposed for the intersection improvement project. RockSol further understands that
the existing concrete pavement located at the intersection is being considered to remain in
place.
Pavement Design Report
Horsetooth Road and Timberline Road Intersection improvements
Fort Collins, Colorado
RockSol Project No. 315.01 2 January 2, 2014
Existing Site Conditions
Horsetooth Road and Timberline Road are designated as major arterials within the City of Fort
Collins transportation system. The intersection of Horsetooth Road and Timberline Road
consists of rigid pavement with short segments of Horsetooth Road, east of Timberline Road
and a short segment of southbound Timberline Road, north of Horsetooth Road constructed
with rigid pavement. All other pavement in the project limits is flexible pavement.
The current configuration of Horsetooth Road is four through lanes (two in each direction) with
center raised medians and left turn lanes. The current configuration for Timberline Road is four
through lanes with center raised medians to the east and line delineated medians to the west of
the intersection. Timberline Road also has designated left turn lanes and a designated right
turn lane from westbound Timberline Road to northbound Horsetooth Road.
Irrigated landscape sod and concrete sidewalk is adjacent to the roadway pavement within the
roadway right-of-way. The proposed turn lanes will be located within the area presently
surfaced with irrigated sod. Underground utilities are present in the landscape areas. RockSol
understands that potholing to locate the utilities will be performed, by others.
Commercial and residential development borders the project area. Topography at the site
generally consists of flat to mild slopes with a general trend of decreasing elevation toward the
north and east.
Subsurface Investigation
RockSol drilled eight geotechnical boreholes to evaluate the subsurface conditions for the
Horsetooth Road and Timberline Road Intersection Improvements project. Cores of the existing
pavement were also obtained at ten locations. The borehole locations are identified as PV-1
through PV-6, TL-1 and TL-2, and the pavement core locations are identified as C-1 through C-
10, as shown on Figure 2, Borehole/Core Location Map. Boreholes PV-1 through PV-6 were
drilled to assist with pavement design recommendations and TL-1 and TL-2 were drilled at the
approximate location of the proposed traffic light locations to assist with foundation design. Top
of borehole elevations were determined by RockSol from interpolation between ground surface
contours shown on the project digital terrain model. The interpolated ground surface elevations
are rounded to the nearest foot.
A truck mounted CME-45 drill rig was used for drilling and sampling. The boreholes were
advanced using 4-inch and 6-inch outside diameter solid stem augers to maximum depths
ranging from approximately 10 feet to 20 feet below existing grades. The boreholes were
logged in the field by a representative of RockSol then backfilled at the completion of drilling and
groundwater level checks. Where pavement cores were obtained, the coreholes were patched
with concrete and/or asphalt patch mixes.
Subsurface materials were sampled using a modified California barrel sampler. The modified
California barrel sampler has an outside diameter of approximately 2.5 inches and an inside
diameter of 2 inches. Brass tube liners are used with the modified California barrel sampler to
retain samples for density, swell, and unconfined compressive strength testing.
Penetration Tests were performed at selected intervals using an automatic lift system with a
hammer weighing 140 pounds and falling 30 inches. The standard split spoon sampling method
is the Standard Penetration Test (SPT) described by the American Society for Testing and
Materials (ASTM) Method D-1586. Penetration Tests were performed using the modified
California barrel sampler with a standard hammer weighing 140 pounds falling 30 inches per
ASTM D3550. The modified California Barrel sampling method is similar to the SPT test with
Pavement Design Report
Horsetooth Road and Timberline Road Intersection improvements
Fort Collins, Colorado
RockSol Project No. 315.01 3 January 2, 2014
the difference being the sampler dimensions and the number of 6-inch intervals driven with the
hammer. Correlation of blow counts obtained from a modified California sampler to blow counts
obtained from a standard split spoon sampler is not available. However, it is RockSol’s
experience that blow counts obtained with the modified California sampler tend to be slightly
greater than a standard split spoon sampler. Penetration resistance values (blow counts) were
recorded for each sampling event. Blow counts, when properly evaluated, indicate the relative
density or consistency of the soils. Depths at which the samples were taken, the type of
sampler used, and the blow counts that were obtained are shown on the Boring Logs for each
borehole.
Office copies of the borehole logs are presented in Appendix A
Laboratory Testing
Samples obtained from the geotechnical boreholes were examined and visually classified in the
RockSol laboratory by the RockSol project engineer. Laboratory testing was performed on
selected samples to evaluate their classification (sieve analysis and Atterberg Limits), moisture
content, dry density, swell/consolidation potential, moisture-density relationship, unconfined
compressive strength, and water soluble sulfate content. Results of the laboratory testing are
presented in Appendix B. The testing was conducted in general accordance with recognized
test procedures, primarily those of the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) and
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).
Natural Moisture Content (ASTM D-2216)
Percent Passing No. 200 Sieve (ASTM D-1140)
Liquid and Plastic Limits (ASTM D-4318)
Dry Density (ASTM D-2937)
Sieve Analysis (ASTM D-6913)
Water Soluble Sulfates (CDOT CP-L 2103)
Soil Classification (ASTM D-2487, ASTM D-2488, and AASHTO M145)
Swell Test (ASTM D-4546) (with 150 psf surcharge)
Moisture Density Relationship (Proctor Test) (AASHTO T99)
Unconfined Compressive Strength (ASTM D-2166)
Resistance Value (R-Value) (AASHTO T-190)
A summary of laboratory test results is presented in Appendix B.
Subsurface Conditions
Flexible pavement, (asphalt) was encountered at the surface at eight corehole locations. Where
flexible pavement was encountered, the thickness generally ranged from 6½ inches to 16½
inches. Rigid pavement was encountered at two corehole locations with thicknesses of 8¾
inches and 9¼ inches. A summary of the pavement thicknesses encountered at each corehole
location is presented in Table 1.
Pavement Design Report
Horsetooth Road and Timberline Road Intersection improvements
Fort Collins, Colorado
RockSol Project No. 315.01 4 January 2, 2014
Table 1 – Existing Pavement Thicknesses
Core No. Core Location
Asphalt
Thickness
(Inches)
Concrete
Thickness
(Inches)
(Note 1)
Total
Pavement
Thickness
(Inches)
C-1 EB Horsetooth Rd, Lane 1 7 ⅜ NE 7 ⅜
C-2 WB Horsetooth Rd, Lane 2 6 ½ NE 6 ½
C-3 EB Horsetooth Rd, Lane 1 NE 8 ¾ 8 ¾
C-4 WB Horsetooth Rd, Lane 2 16 ½ NE 16 ½
C-5 NB Timberline Rd, Lane 1 10 NE 10
C-6 SB Timberline Rd, Left Turn Lane 10 ¼ NE 10 ¼
C-7 NB Timberline Rd, Lane 2 NE 9 ¼ 9 ¼
C-8 SB Timberline Rd, Bike Lane 10 ½ NE 10 ½
C-9 NB Timberline Rd, Left Turn Lane 7 ⅝ NE 7 ⅝
C-10 SB Timberline Rd, Left Turn Lane 6 ¾ NE 6 ¾
Note 1: NE = Not Encountered
Aggregate base course material was noted below the pavement section at core locations C-1,
C-2, C-3, C-5, C-6, C-7, C-9, and C-10. A summary of the pavement thickness measured from
recovered cores is presented in Appendix C, Existing Pavement Core Log Summary. Included
in the core logs are photographs of the recovered core sections and RockSol’s general
assessment of the condition of each core.
Topsoil was encountered at the ground surface at all geotechnical borehole locations. The
topsoil encountered was generally sandy clay which supported landscape sod. Topsoil
thickness ranged from approximately 3 inches to 12 inches and was estimated based on field
observations (visual-manual).
Beneath the topsoil, subsurface conditions encountered generally consisted of native material to
the maximum depths drilled, 10 feet to 20 feet below existing grades. The native material
encountered generally consisted of medium stiff to very stiff clay with sand and silty to clayey
sand in parts, which was moist to very moist. In boreholes TL-1 and TL-2, native material
consisting of medium dense gravelly sand was encountered at depths of 18 feet to 19 feet
below the existing ground surface. The gravelly sand was wet and light brown.
Sedimentary bedrock was not encountered to the maximum depths drilled, 10 feet to 20 feet.
The majority of the native soils tested were classified as sandy clay and clayey sand soils
(AASHTO A-6 classification) with Plasticity Index ranging from 17 to 24. For pavement design
purposes, RockSol considers the A-6 soil classification as representative of the subgrade soils
within the project limits. AASHTO A-2-6 soil was also encountered within the project limits.
Groundwater was encountered at in Boreholes TL-1 and TL-2 at depths of 18 feet and 19 feet
(approximate elevations of 4,933 feet to 4,935 feet). Groundwater elevations are based on
approximations from project topographic data (digital terrain model) provided by Muller. It
should be noted that groundwater elevations are subject to change depending on climatic
conditions, local irrigation practices, and changes in surface storm water management. Long
term monitoring of the groundwater elevation is needed to determine the seasonal variation and
is beyond the scope of this investigation. Based on the subsurface conditions encountered it is
RockSol’s opinion that seasonal variation in the groundwater elevation on the order of several
feet (total variation) may occur at the project site. Along the Front Range, high groundwater
elevations are typically encountered in the summer months and the low groundwater elevations
are typically encountered in the late winter months.
Pavement Design Report
Horsetooth Road and Timberline Road Intersection improvements
Fort Collins, Colorado
RockSol Project No. 315.01 5 January 2, 2014
Moisture-Density Relationship (Proctor Test) Results
Proctor tests were performed on bulk samples of A-6 subgrade soil obtained from Boreholes
PV-1, PV-4, PV-5, and PV-6. The tests were performed in general accordance with AASHTO
T99 (Standard Proctor). Maximum Dry Density (MDD) ranged from 107.9 pcf to 109.6 pcf with
Optimum Moisture Content (OMC) ranging from 16.7 percent to 18.2 percent. Moisture
contents of the in-situ clay soils typically ranged from about 18 percent to about 23 percent,
indicating the existing subgrade soils are at, and above, the optimum moisture content. This
elevated moisture condition will result in a yielding subgrade surface when exposed to traffic
loading, especially heavily loaded construction equipment. The elevated moisture condition is
likely primarily due to landscape irrigation with capillary rise from the underlying groundwater
contributing to some degree.
Expansive Soil Discussion
Swell potential in the subgrade soils within the upper 5 feet below existing grades ranged from
0.0 percent to 1.1 percent, when tested with a 150 pound per square foot (psf) surcharge. The
average swell potential in the subgrade soils within the upper 5 feet below existing grades is 0.6
percent, based on the samples tested. The swell test results indicate a “low” swell potential in
the subgrade soils. The elevated moisture condition of the subgrade soils is likely contributing
to the “low” swell potential.
Seven samples obtained within the upper 5 feet below existing grades were tested for Plasticity
Index (PI) and all samples resulted in a PI of less than 25, with an average PI of 21.8. The PI
tests results suggest that if the clay subgrade soils were to become significantly drier, a
“moderate” swell potential is possible in the clay subgrade soils.
Cement Type Discussion
Cementitious material requirements for concrete in contact with site soils or groundwater are
based on the percentage of water soluble sulfate in either soil or groundwater that will be in
contact with concrete constructed for this project. Mix design requirements for concrete
exposed to water soluble sulfates in soils or water is considered by CDOT as shown in Table 2
and in the Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, dated 2011 (CDOT Table
601-2).
Table 2 - Requirements to Protect Against Damage to Concrete
by Sulfate Attack from External Sources of Sulfate
Severity of
sulfate
exposure
Water-soluble
sulfate (SO4), in dry
soil, percent
Sulfate (SO4), in
water, ppm
Water Cementitious
Ratio, maximum
Cementitious
Material
Requirements
Class 0 0.00 to 0.10 0 to 150 0.45 Class 0
Class 1 0.11 to 0.20 151 to 1,500 0.45 Class 1
Class 2 0.21 to 2.0 1,500 to 10,000 0.45 Class 2
Class 3 2.01 or greater 10,001 or greater 0.40 Class 3
The average concentration of water soluble sulfates measured in nine soil samples obtained
from RockSol’s exploratory boreholes was 0.00 percent by weight. The water soluble sulfate
concentrations ranged from 0.00 percent by weight to 0.01 percent by weight. Based on the
results of the water soluble sulfate testing, Exposure Class 0 is considered appropriate for
concrete in contact with subgrade materials for this project.
Pavement Design Report
Horsetooth Road and Timberline Road Intersection improvements
Fort Collins, Colorado
RockSol Project No. 315.01 6 January 2, 2014
Subgrade Support Discussion
R-Value tests were performed on a sample of A-6 (18) soil from Borehole PV-3 and on a sample
of A-6 (16) soil from Borehole PV-5. Testing resulted in an R-Value of 7 for the material from
Borehole PV-3 and an R-Value of 8 for the material from Borehole PV-5. Moisture contents of
the samples tested were approximately 20 percent at the 300 psi exudation pressure that
determines the R-Value test result. These R-Values indicate a “low” subgrade support value
when moisture conditions are at, and above, the optimum moisture content, as determined by
the standard proctor test.
Based on the results of the R-Value testing and subgrade soil classification testing, RockSol
considers the existing subgrade soils in the project area to generally possess an R-Value of at
least 5 for pavement design purposes. An R-Value of 5 was used by RockSol for pavement
design.
Pavement Thickness Recommendations
The new pavement sections will be designed and constructed in accordance with Larimer
County Urban Area Street Standards (LCUASS), which have been adopted by the City of Fort
Collins. The LCUASS uses pavement design methodology based on the AASHTO 1993 Guide
for the Design of Pavement Structures. Subsequent to the 1993 Guide publication, AASHTO
issued the 1998 Supplemental Guide for rigid pavement thickness design.
The LCUASS requires a minimum 18kip Equivalent Single Axle Load (ESAL) design lane value
of 1,460,000 for a 20-year design for four lane arterial roadways (Chapter 10 – Pavement
Design Report, Table 10-1). For this report, RockSol used 1.5 million for a design lane ESAL
value for a 20-year design. For information purposes, RockSol also used a design lane ESAL
value of 3,000,000 for the rigid pavement alternative to show its effect on the rigid pavement
thickness.
Pavement thicknesses were calculated using the AASHTOWare DARWin Pavement Design
and Analysis System, Version 3.1 for flexible pavement and the NCHRP rigid pavement design
supplemental spreadsheet software, based on the 1998 AASHTO Supplemental Guide for rigid
pavement. Structural coefficients of 0.11 and 0.44 were used for CDOT Class 6 aggregate
base course and hot mix asphalt, respectively, when developing flexible pavement thickness
recommendations. Elastic modulus values of 25,000 psi and 3,400,000 psi were used for
CDOT Class 6 aggregate base course and portland cement concrete, respectively, when
developing rigid pavement thickness recommendations. A Reliability Level of 90 percent was
used for the subject roadway.
Flexible pavement thicknesses presented are to be placed on top of 15 inches of Colorado
Department of Transportation (CDOT) Class 6 Aggregate Base Course (ABC).
Pavement thickness recommendations for flexible and rigid pavement sections are presented in
Table 3:
Pavement Design Report
Horsetooth Road and Timberline Road Intersection improvements
Fort Collins, Colorado
RockSol Project No. 315.01 7 January 2, 2014
Table 3 – Pavement Thickness Recommendations
Street
Pavement
Type
Design
Life
(years)
Design Lane
18k ESALs
Recommended Pavement
Thickness, inches
Subgrade R-Value = 5
Horsetooth Road
Flexible
(Note 1)
20 1,500,000 8.0
Rigid
(Note 2)
20 1,500,000 8.5
Rigid
(Note 2)
20 3,000,000 9.0
Timberline Road
Flexible
(Note 1)
20 1,500,000 8.0
Rigid
(Note 2)
20 1,500,000 8.5
Rigid
(Note 2)
20 3,000,000 9.0
Note 1) Flexible Pavement sections placed on 15 inches of CDOT Class 6 ABC.
Note 2) Rigid Pavement sections do not include a structural ABC section but an ABC layer may be
included as a working platform.
The recommended flexible pavement thickness values presented in Table 3 are rounded up to
the nearest ½-inch, per CDOT methodology. Recommended pavement thickness values for
rigid pavement shown in Table 3 include a ¼-inch thickness added to the calculated thickness
and then rounded up to the nearest ½-inch, per CDOT methodology. Pavement thickness
calculation sheets from DARWin (flexible pavement) and the 1998 AASHTO Supplement (rigid
pavement) are included in Appendix D.
All pavements shall be constructed using City of Fort Collins approved mix designs. Most mix
designs approved for CDOT roadway projects are accepted by the City of Fort Collins.
For flexible pavement, RockSol recommends using Grade SX mix for the surface layer and
Grade S mix for the lower (intermediate and base) layers. A gyratory design revolution (Ndes)
of 75 is recommended. Performance Grade Binder of PG 76-28 is recommended for the
surface layer (Grade SX). Performance Grade Binder of PG 64-22 is recommended for the
intermediate and base layers (Grade S mix).
Pavement lifts (from surface to bottom) of 2 inches of SX mix for the surface layer, 3 inches of S
mix for the intermediate layer, and 3 inches of S mix for the base layer are suggested for the 8
inch flexible pavement section over 15 inches of ABC.
For rigid pavement, RockSol recommends using CDOT Class P mix. Rigid pavement design
shall include load transfer devices (dowels) and tied curb and gutters.
Subgrade Preparation (New Pavement)
For all new pavement areas, RockSol understands that existing landscaped sod areas will be
cut down slightly to achieve roadway subgrade elevations for the widened sections of
Pavement Design Report
Horsetooth Road and Timberline Road Intersection improvements
Fort Collins, Colorado
RockSol Project No. 315.01 8 January 2, 2014
subgrade will be encountered at all locations where new pavement is to be constructed and that
some form of subgrade stabilization will be required as part of construction of the new pavement
sections.
Subgrade stabilization options include use of 1) geofabrics or geogrids with select fill material;
or 2) subexcavation and replacement with improved subgrade materials. Chemically stabilized
subgrade was considered by RockSol but given the limited area of the project, chemical
stabilization of the subgrade soil is not considered a viable alternative.
To provide a stable subgrade for the widened sections of Horsetooth and Timberline the
following subgrade stabilization configurations are suggested by RockSol:
Option A)
Remove existing materials to a sufficient depth to provide at least 16 inches of CDOT Class
2 Aggregate Base Course (ABC), compacted. The Class 2 ABC material can be considered
as “sub-base.” Place Class 1 separator/stabilization geotextile material on top of the
excavated subgrade. Place and compact the Class 2 ABC. Placement and compaction in
at least two lifts is recommended.
Option B)
Remove existing materials to a sufficient depth to provide at least 12 inches of CDOT Class
2 Aggregate Base Course, compacted. Prior to placement of Class 2 ABC, place Class 1
separator/stabilization geotextile material on top of the excavated subgrade. Place and
compact the Class 2 ABC (sub-base). After placement and compaction of the sub-base,
place the same type of Class 1 geotextile material on top of the completed sub-base. This
will result in a two-layer geotextile system.
For both subgrade stabilization options (A and B):
For the HMA pavement section option (8 inches of HMA over 15 inches of Class 6
ABC), place the recommended Class 6 ABC over the completed sub-base, followed
by the HMA.
For the PCC pavement section option, place 4 to 6 inches of Class 6 ABC on top of
the upper geotextile, grade and compact prior to placement of pavement concrete.
The subexcavation and replacement with Class 2 ABC is intended to stabilize the subgrade
during construction. If the contractor will not run heavy equipment on the subgrade, the
stabilization would not be needed. If the contractor uses heavy equipment on the exposed
subgrade, such as heavy loaders, a paving machine, asphalt and concrete delivery trucks, the
subgrade would need to be stabilized.
During construction, surface drainage should be controlled to minimize collection of water in the
excavated subgrade area. If water collects in the excavation, it should be removed and the
subgrade allowed to sufficiently dry to allow the activities described above to proceed.
Prior to pavement construction, proof rolling with pneumatic tire equipment shall be performed
using a minimum axle load of 18 kips per axle after specified subgrade compaction has been
obtained. Areas found to be weak and those areas which exhibit soft spots, non-uniform
deflection or excessive deflection as determined by the project engineer shall be ripped,
scarified, wetted or dried if necessary, and re-compacted to the requirements for density and
moisture. Complete coverage of the proof roller will be required.
•RockSol
Consulting Group, Inc.
Pavement Design Report
Horsetooth Road and Timberline Road Intersection improvements
Fort Collins, Colorado
All pavement subgrade preparation, pavement materials, and pavement construction shall
conform to City of Fort Collins standards. At a minimum, subgrade moisture conditioning and
compaction should meet the compaction specifications outlined in Table 4.
Table 4 -Compaction Specifications
AASHTO
Minimum Relative
Moisture Content
Classification Compaction
(Deviation from OMC)
(Percentage of MOD), %
A-1, A-2-4, A-2-5, A-3, 95% of AASHTO T99 -3 to +3
A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5
95% of AASHTO T99 -2 to +2
A-6 and A-7
Limitations
This geotechnical field investigation and laboratory results were conducted in general
accordance with the scope of work. The testing was performed to provide preliminary design
level information. Additional testing is suggested for final design. The geotechnical practices
are similar to that used in the Colorado Front Range area with similar soil conditions and our
understanding of the proposed work. This report has been prepared by RockSol for use by
Muller Engineering Company and The City of Fort Collins for the Horsetooth and Timberline
Intersection Improvements project. RockSol understands that additional boreholes and
geotechnical evaluation will be performed for the final design phase. The information presented
is based on our exploratory boreholes and does not take into account variations in the
subsurface conditions that may exist between boreholes. Additional investigation is required to
address such variation. RockSol is not responsible for liability associated with interpretation of
subsurface data by others.
Prepared by RockSol Consulting Group, Inc.:
I~, . , {, ,_ . ,,,,,
Donald G:'Hi!Jn1:'\f::1:E.
Senior Geotechnical Engineer
Attachments:
Figure 1 - Site Vicinity Map
Figure 2 - Borehole/Core Location Map
Appendix A - Legend and Individual Borehole Logs
Appendix B - Laboratory Test Results
Appendix C - Existing Pavement Core Log Summary
Appendix D - Flexible and Rigid Pavement Calculation Sheets
RockSol Project No. 315.01 9 January 2, 2014
:5
.0 s
E 0
I
0
..;
;;;
/
(/)
1-
u
!15
"CJ 0.' .
:/ :.:
"0.' .
"""0 ~ ' ' '
c
0
0
i'
§
.u ll
E
IMAGE COURTESY OF THE U.S. GEOLOGICAL
Print Date: 12/24/2013
File Name: 13021-Site_ Vicinity .dgn
Horiz. Scale: AS NOTED
9RockSol
Consulting Group, Inc.
6510 W91stAve. Ste 130
Westminster, CO 80031
SURVEY, JUNE-AUGUST 2009,FORT COLLINS, COLORADO QUADRANGLE, 2010
0 500
HDRSETDDTH AND TIMBERLINE
SITE VICINITY MAP
1000 1500 Designer: J. Biller
Project No./Code
13021
Detailer: S. McKanna-Koon t--------------1
(FEET, APPROXIMATE SCALE) Sheet Subset: Figure
1
Pavement Design Report
Horsetooth Road and Timberline Road Intersection Improvements
Fort Collins, Colorado
RockSol Project No. 315.01 January 2, 2014
APPENDIX A
LEGEND
AND
INDIVIDUAL BOREHOLE LOGS
PV-1 through PV-6, TL-1 and TL-2
CLIENT Muller Engineering Company
PROJECT NUMBER 315.01
PROJECT NAME Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
PROJECT LOCATION Fort Collins, CO
LITHOLOGY
SAMPLE TYPE
GROUND WATER LEVEL NOTED AT THE TIME OF DRILLING
MODIFIED CALIFORNIA SAMPLER
2.5" O.D. AND 2" I.D.
WITH BRASS LINERS INCLUDED
15/12 Indicates 15 blows of a 140 pound hammer falling 30 inches was required to drive
the sampler 12 inches.
50/11 Indicates 50 blows of a 140 pound hammer falling 30 inches was required to drive
the sampler 11 inches.
5,5,5 Indicates 5 blows, 5 blows, 5 blows of a 140 pound hammer falling 30 inches was
required to drive the sampler 18 inches.
LEGEND
Native - SAND, silty
Native - SAND, gravelly Native - SAND, clayey
Native - CLAY Native - CLAY, sandy
PROJECT LEGEND 315.01-HOORSETOOTH AND TIMBERLINE.GPJ ROCKSOL TEMPLATE.GDT 12/24/13
LL=Liquid Limit
PL=Plasticity Limit
PI=Plasticity Index
-200=Percent passing U.S. No. 200
Sieve
WSS=Water Soluble Sulfate Content
TOPSOIL
0.4 102.0
92.2
105.8
22.5
27.2
19.5
MC
MC
MC
9/12
5/12
7/12
Topsoil, CLAY, sandy, lightly organic, moist, dark brown,
approximately 8"
(Native) CLAY, with sand, moist, light brown, stiff to medium
stiff
Bottom of hole at 10.0 feet.
DRILLING CONTRACTOR Old Dirt Drilling
COMPLETED 10/3/13
NOTES Landscape Sod at Surface
LOGGED BY J. Biller GROUND WATER LEVELS:
DRILLING CONTRACTOR Old Dirt Drilling
DATE STARTED 10/3/13 COMPLETED 10/3/13
NOTES Landscape Sod at Surface
LOGGED BY J. Biller
DATE STARTED 10/3/13
HOLE SIZE 6"
WATER DEPTH None Encountered on 10/3/13
DRILLING METHOD Solid Stem Auger
NORTH EAST
GROUND ELEVATION 4950.0 ft
BORING LOCATION: NB Timberline off Shoulder 400' South of the Intersection
ATTERBERG
LIMITS
SWELL
POTENTIAL (%)
SULFATE (%)
DRY UNIT WT.
(pcf)
MOISTURE
CONTENT (%)
FINES CONTENT
(%)
LIQUID
LIMIT
PLASTIC
LIMIT
PLASTICITY
INDEX
GRAPHIC
LOG
ELEVATION
(ft)
4950
4945
4940
DEPTH
(ft)
0
5
0.0 97.9
87.1
122.3
22.8
26.0
12.5
MC
MC
MC
5/12
4/12
12/12
Topsoil, CLAY, sandy, lightly organic, moist, brown,
approximately 6"
(Native) CLAY, with sand, grading to clayey SAND in parts,
very moist to moist, light brown, medium stiff
(Native) CLAY, sandy with gravel, moist , light brown, stiff
Bottom of hole at 10.0 feet.
DRILLING CONTRACTOR Old Dirt Drilling
COMPLETED 10/3/13
NOTES Landscape Sod at Surface
LOGGED BY J. Biller GROUND WATER LEVELS:
DRILLING CONTRACTOR Old Dirt Drilling
DATE STARTED 10/3/13 COMPLETED 10/3/13
NOTES Landscape Sod at Surface
LOGGED BY J. Biller
DATE STARTED 10/3/13
HOLE SIZE 6"
WATER DEPTH None Encountered on 10/3/13
DRILLING METHOD Solid Stem Auger
NORTH EAST
GROUND ELEVATION 4951.0 ft
BORING LOCATION: SB off Shoulder 200' South of Intersection
ATTERBERG
LIMITS
SWELL
POTENTIAL (%)
SULFATE (%)
DRY UNIT WT.
(pcf)
MOISTURE
CONTENT (%)
FINES CONTENT
(%)
LIQUID
LIMIT
PLASTIC
LIMIT
PLASTICITY
INDEX
GRAPHIC
LOG
ELEVATION
(ft)
4951
4946
4941
DEPTH
(ft)
0
0.4
0.01
99.5
95.5
112.9
20.2
25.4
18.1
MC
MC
MC
6/12
6/12
16/12
Topsoil, CLAY, sandy, lightly organic, moist, brown,
approximately 8"
(Native) CLAY, with sand, moist, brown, medium stiff
Bottom of hole at 10.0 feet.
DRILLING CONTRACTOR Old Dirt Drilling
COMPLETED 10/3/13
NOTES Landscape Sod at Surface
LOGGED BY J. Biller GROUND WATER LEVELS:
DRILLING CONTRACTOR Old Dirt Drilling
DATE STARTED 10/3/13 COMPLETED 10/3/13
NOTES Landscape Sod at Surface
LOGGED BY J. Biller
DATE STARTED 10/3/13
HOLE SIZE 6"
WATER DEPTH None Encountered on 10/3/13
DRILLING METHOD Solid Stem Auger
NORTH EAST
GROUND ELEVATION 4953.0 ft
BORING LOCATION: SB off Shoulder 200' North of Intersection
ATTERBERG
LIMITS
SWELL
POTENTIAL (%)
SULFATE (%)
DRY UNIT WT.
(pcf)
MOISTURE
CONTENT (%)
FINES CONTENT
(%)
LIQUID
LIMIT
PLASTIC
LIMIT
PLASTICITY
INDEX
GRAPHIC
LOG
ELEVATION
(ft)
4953
4948
4943
DEPTH
(ft)
0
1.1 110.3
107.2
104.7
17.9
19.6
20.9
MC
MC
MC
16/12
12/12
9/12
Topsoil, CLAY, sandy, lightly organic, moist, dark brown,
approximately 12"
(Native) CLAY, with sand, moist, brown, very stiff
Bottom of hole at 10.0 feet.
DRILLING CONTRACTOR Old Dirt Drilling
COMPLETED 10/3/13
NOTES Landscape Sod at Surface
LOGGED BY J. Biller GROUND WATER LEVELS:
DRILLING CONTRACTOR Old Dirt Drilling
DATE STARTED 10/3/13 COMPLETED 10/3/13
NOTES Landscape Sod at Surface
LOGGED BY J. Biller
DATE STARTED 10/3/13
HOLE SIZE 6"
WATER DEPTH None Encountered on 10/3/13
DRILLING METHOD Solid Stem Auger
NORTH EAST
GROUND ELEVATION 4952.0 ft
BORING LOCATION: SB off Shoulder 400' North of the Intersection
ATTERBERG
LIMITS
SWELL
POTENTIAL (%)
SULFATE (%)
DRY UNIT WT.
(pcf)
MOISTURE
CONTENT (%)
FINES CONTENT
(%)
LIQUID
LIMIT
PLASTIC
LIMIT
PLASTICITY
INDEX
GRAPHIC
LOG
ELEVATION
(ft)
4952
4947
4942
DEPTH
(ft)
0
5
10
0.6 105.6
77.3
97.3
17.5
30.8
9.0
MC
MC
MC
11/12
7/12
10/12
Topsoil, silty SAND, lightly organic, moist, brown,
approximately 6"
(Native) CLAY, with sand, moist to very moist, brown, stiff to
medium stiff
(Native) SAND, clayey, very moist, brown, medium dense
Bottom of hole at 10.0 feet.
DRILLING CONTRACTOR Old Dirt Drilling
COMPLETED 10/3/13
NOTES Landscape Sod at Surface
LOGGED BY J. Biller GROUND WATER LEVELS:
DRILLING CONTRACTOR Old Dirt Drilling
DATE STARTED 10/3/13 COMPLETED 10/3/13
NOTES Landscape Sod at Surface
LOGGED BY J. Biller
DATE STARTED 10/3/13
HOLE SIZE 6"
WATER DEPTH None Encountered on 10/3/13
DRILLING METHOD Solid Stem Auger
NORTH EAST
GROUND ELEVATION 4955.0 ft
BORING LOCATION: EB SHoulder West of Horsetooth
ATTERBERG
LIMITS
SWELL
POTENTIAL (%)
SULFATE (%)
DRY UNIT WT.
(pcf)
MOISTURE
CONTENT (%)
FINES CONTENT
(%)
LIQUID
LIMIT
PLASTIC
LIMIT
PLASTICITY
INDEX
GRAPHIC
LOG
ELEVATION
(ft)
4955
4950
4945
DEPTH
(ft)
0
0.8 97.3
95.3
109.0
22.6
23.3
18.6
MC
MC
MC
8/12
7/12
11/12
Topsoil, SAND, clayey, lightly organic moist, brown,
approximately 3"
(Native) CLAY, with sand, moist, brown, medium stiff
(Native) CLAY, sandy, moist, brown, stiff
Bottom of hole at 10.0 feet.
DRILLING CONTRACTOR Old Dirt Drilling
COMPLETED 10/3/13
NOTES Landscape Sod at Surface
LOGGED BY J. Biller GROUND WATER LEVELS:
DRILLING CONTRACTOR Old Dirt Drilling
DATE STARTED 10/3/13 COMPLETED 10/3/13
NOTES Landscape Sod at Surface
LOGGED BY J. Biller
DATE STARTED 10/3/13
HOLE SIZE 6"
WATER DEPTH None Encountered on 10/3/13
DRILLING METHOD Solid Stem Auger
NORTH EAST
GROUND ELEVATION 4950.0 ft
BORING LOCATION: EB Shoulder East of Intersection
ATTERBERG
LIMITS
SWELL
POTENTIAL (%)
SULFATE (%)
DRY UNIT WT.
(pcf)
MOISTURE
CONTENT (%)
FINES CONTENT
(%)
LIQUID
LIMIT
PLASTIC
LIMIT
PLASTICITY
INDEX
GRAPHIC
LOG
ELEVATION
(ft)
4950
4945
4940
DEPTH
(ft)
0
5
0.00 100.9
107.2
116.2
110.0
127.8
20.9
17.1
14.8
17.9
11.9
38 16 22 47.5
MC
MC
MC
MC
MC
6/12
6/12
14/12
10/12
18/12
Topsoil, SAND, lightly organic moist, light brown,
approximately 3"
(Native) CLAY, with sand, grading to clayey SAND in parts,
moist, light brown, medium stiff to stiff
(Native) SAND, gravelly, wet, light brown, medium dense
Bottom of hole at 20.0 feet.
DRILLING CONTRACTOR Old Dirt Drilling
COMPLETED 10/3/13
NOTES Landscape Sod at Surface
LOGGED BY J. Biller GROUND WATER LEVELS:
DRILLING CONTRACTOR Old Dirt Drilling
DATE STARTED 10/3/13 COMPLETED 10/3/13
NOTES Landscape Sod at Surface
LOGGED BY J. Biller
DATE STARTED 10/3/13
HOLE SIZE 4"
WATER DEPTH 18.0 ft on 10/3/13
DRILLING METHOD Solid Stem Auger
NORTH EAST
GROUND ELEVATION 4953.0 ft
BORING LOCATION: SW Corner of Intersection
ATTERBERG
LIMITS
SWELL
POTENTIAL (%)
SULFATE (%)
DRY UNIT WT.
(pcf)
MOISTURE
CONTENT (%)
FINES CONTENT
(%)
LIQUID
LIMIT
PLASTIC
LIMIT
PLASTICITY
INDEX
GRAPHIC
0.00
112.6
97.4
122.6
112.1
123.0
16.9
23.8
9.3
16.3
8.4
32 15 17 23.6
MC
MC
MC
MC
MC
12/12
6/12
9/12
12/12
19/12
Topsoil, CLAY, sandy, lightly organic, moist, brown,
approximately 6"
(Native) CLAY, with sand, moist, brown, medium stiff to stiff
(Native) SAND, silty, with clay, moist, light brown, loose
(Native) CLAY, with sand, trace gravel, moist, light brown, stiff
(Native) SAND, gravelly, wet, light brown, medium dense
Bottom of hole at 20.0 feet.
DRILLING CONTRACTOR Old Dirt Drilling
COMPLETED 10/3/13
NOTES Landscape Sod at Surface
LOGGED BY J. Biller GROUND WATER LEVELS:
DRILLING CONTRACTOR Old Dirt Drilling
DATE STARTED 10/3/13 COMPLETED 10/3/13
NOTES Landscape Sod at Surface
LOGGED BY J. Biller
DATE STARTED 10/3/13
HOLE SIZE 4"
WATER DEPTH 19.0 ft on 10/3/13
DRILLING METHOD Solid Stem Auger
NORTH EAST
GROUND ELEVATION 4952.0 ft
BORING LOCATION: NE Corner of Intersection
ATTERBERG
LIMITS
SWELL
POTENTIAL (%)
SULFATE (%)
DRY UNIT WT.
(pcf)
MOISTURE
CONTENT (%)
FINES CONTENT
(%)
LIQUID
LIMIT
PLASTIC
LIMIT
PLASTICITY
Pavement Design Report
Horsetooth Road and Timberline Road Intersection Improvements
Fort Collins, Colorado
RockSol Project No. 315.01 January 2, 2014
APPENDIX B
LABORATORY TEST RESULTS
PV-1 0-5 40 16 24 83 CL A-6 (19) 0.00 107.9 18.2 S
PV-1 2 0.4 22.5 102.0
PV-1 4 27.2 92.2
PV-1 9 19.5 105.8
PV-2 0-5 32 15 17 40 SC A-6 (3) 0.00
PV-2 2 0.0 22.8 97.9
PV-2 4 26.0 87.1
PV-2 9 12.5 122.3
PV-3 0-5 40 16 24 79 CL A-6 (18) 0.00
PV-3 2 0.4 20.2 99.5
PV-3 4 25.4 95.5
PV-3 9 18.1 112.9 0.01
PV-4 0-5 39 16 23 80 CL A-6 (17) 0.00 109.6 17.8 S
PV-4 2 1.1 17.9 110.3
PV-4 4 19.6 107.2
PV-4 9 20.9 104.7
PV-5 0-5 37 15 22 81 CL A-6 (16) 0.00 109.1 17.2 S
PV-5 2 0.6 17.5 105.6
PV-5 4 30.8 77.3
PV-5 9 9.0 97.3
PV-6 0-5 35 14 21 81 CL A-6 (15) 0.00 108.1 16.7 S
PV-6 2 0.8 22.6 97.3
PV-6 4 23.3 95.3
PV-6 9 18.6 109.0
TL-1 2 20.9 100.9 0.00
TL-1 4 38 16 22 48 SC A-6 (6) 17.1 107.2
TL-1 9 14.8 116.2 48.2
TL-1 14 17.9 110.0 23.7
TL-1 19 11.9 127.8
TL-2 2 16.9 112.6
Swell
Potential
(%)
Water
Content
(%)
pH
MDD S/M
S=Standard M=Modified
Borehole Liquid
Limit
Plastic
Limit OMC
Plasticity
Index
%<#200
Sieve
Classification
Sulfate
(%)
Proctor
USCS
Resistivity
(ohm-cm)
Depth
(ft)
SUMMARY OF PHYSICAL & CHEMICAL TEST RESULTS
PAGE 1 OF 2
Dry
Density
TL-2 4 23.8 97.4 0.00
TL-2 9 32 15 17 24 SC A-2-6 (1) 9.3 122.6
TL-2 14 16.3 112.1 23.2
TL-2 19 8.4 123.0
Swell
Potential
(%)
Water
Content
(%)
pH
MDD S/M
S=Standard M=Modified
Borehole Liquid
Limit
Plastic
Limit OMC
Plasticity
Index
%<#200
Sieve
Classification
Sulfate
(%)
Proctor
USCS
Resistivity
(ohm-cm)
Depth
(ft)
SUMMARY OF PHYSICAL & CHEMICAL TEST RESULTS
PAGE 2 OF 2
Dry
Density
AASHTO (pcf)
Unconfined
Compressive
Strength
(psi)
CLIENT Muller Engineering Company
PROJECT NUMBER 315.01
PROJECT NAME Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
PROJECT LOCATION Fort Collins, CO
SUMMARY - STANDARD LANDSCAPE 315.01-HOORSETOOTH AND TIMBERLINE.GPJ ROCKSOL TEMPLATE.GDT 12/24/13
R-Value
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.001
LEAN CLAY with SAND (CL)
CLAYEY SAND with GRAVEL (SC)
LEAN CLAY with SAND (CL)
LEAN CLAY with SAND (CL)
LEAN CLAY with SAND (CL)
Specimen Identification Classification
Specimen Identification
16
15
16
16
15
D100 D60 D30
6 3 1.5 3/4 3/8 4 8 14 20 40 60 140
82.9
39.6
79.0
80.3
81.2
PI Cc
COBBLES
GRAVEL
12.5
19
12.5
19
9.5
PERCENT FINER BY WEIGHT
40
32
40
39
37
LL Cu
D10 %Gravel
0.345
PV-1
PV-2
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.001
LEAN CLAY with SAND (CL)
CLAYEY SAND (SC)
CLAYEY SAND (SC)
Specimen Identification Classification
Specimen Identification
14
16
15
D100 D60 D30
6 3 1.5 3/4 3/8 4 8 14 20 40 60 140
80.8
47.5
23.6
PI Cc
COBBLES
GRAVEL
19
0.075
0.075
PERCENT FINER BY WEIGHT
35
38
32
LL Cu
D10 %Gravel
PV-6
TL-1
TL-2
coarse
SILT OR CLAY
mediumfine
%Sand %Silt %Clay
3 100
PV-6
TL-1
TL-2
4 2 1 1/2 6 10 16 30 50 200
U.HYDROMETERS. SIEVE OPENING IN INCHES U.S. SIEVE NUMBERS
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
0 20 40 60 80 100
Fines Classification
40
32
40
39
37
35
38
32
16
15
16
16
15
14
16
15
LEAN CLAY with SAND (CL)
CLAYEY SAND with GRAVEL (SC)
LEAN CLAY with SAND (CL)
LEAN CLAY with SAND (CL)
LEAN CLAY with SAND (CL)
LEAN CLAY with SAND (CL)
CLAYEY SAND (SC)
CLAYEY SAND (SC)
82.9
39.6
79.0
80.3
81.2
80.8
47.5
23.6
PV-1
PV-2
PV-3
PV-4
PV-5
PV-6
TL-1
TL-2
ML
CL
MH
CH
Specimen Identification
CL-ML
P
L
A
S
T
90
95
100
105
110
115
120
125
130
135
140
145
150
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Manual Hammer
Automatic Hammer
LEAN CLAY with SAND(CL)
X
Source of Material
Description of Material
Test Method
107.9
18.2
Maximum Dry Density
TEST RESULTS
PCF
%
2.80
2.70
2.60
Curves of 100% Saturation
for Specific Gravity Equal to:
Optimum Water Content
PERCENT MOISTURE, %
DRY DENSITY, pcf
PV-1 0-5
AASHTO T99 A
CLIENT Muller Engineering Company PROJECT NAME Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
PROJECT NUMBER 315.01 PROJECT LOCATION Fort Collins, CO
PROCTOR - STANDARD 315.01-HOORSETOOTH AND TIMBERLINE.GPJ ROCKSOL TEMPLATE.GDT 12/23/13
RockSol Consulting Group Inc.
6510 W 91st Ave, Ste 130
Westminster, CO, 80031
Telephone: 303-962-9300
LL PL PI
ATTERBERG LIMITS
40 16 24
90
95
100
105
110
115
120
125
130
135
140
145
150
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Manual Hammer
Automatic Hammer
LEAN CLAY with SAND(CL)
X
Source of Material
Description of Material
Test Method
109.6
17.8
Maximum Dry Density
TEST RESULTS
PCF
%
2.80
2.70
2.60
Curves of 100% Saturation
for Specific Gravity Equal to:
Optimum Water Content
PERCENT MOISTURE, %
DRY DENSITY, pcf
PV-4 0-5
AASHTO T99 A
CLIENT Muller Engineering Company PROJECT NAME Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
PROJECT NUMBER 315.01 PROJECT LOCATION Fort Collins, CO
PROCTOR - STANDARD 315.01-HOORSETOOTH AND TIMBERLINE.GPJ ROCKSOL TEMPLATE.GDT 12/23/13
RockSol Consulting Group Inc.
6510 W 91st Ave, Ste 130
Westminster, CO, 80031
Telephone: 303-962-9300
LL PL PI
ATTERBERG LIMITS
39 16 23
90
95
100
105
110
115
120
125
130
135
140
145
150
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Manual Hammer
Automatic Hammer
LEAN CLAY with SAND(CL)
X
Source of Material
Description of Material
Test Method
109.1
17.2
Maximum Dry Density
TEST RESULTS
PCF
%
2.80
2.70
2.60
Curves of 100% Saturation
for Specific Gravity Equal to:
Optimum Water Content
PERCENT MOISTURE, %
DRY DENSITY, pcf
PV-5 0-5
AASHTO T99 A
CLIENT Muller Engineering Company PROJECT NAME Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
PROJECT NUMBER 315.01 PROJECT LOCATION Fort Collins, CO
PROCTOR - STANDARD 315.01-HOORSETOOTH AND TIMBERLINE.GPJ ROCKSOL TEMPLATE.GDT 12/23/13
RockSol Consulting Group Inc.
6510 W 91st Ave, Ste 130
Westminster, CO, 80031
Telephone: 303-962-9300
LL PL PI
ATTERBERG LIMITS
37 15 22
90
95
100
105
110
115
120
125
130
135
140
145
150
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Manual Hammer
Automatic Hammer
LEAN CLAY with SAND(CL)
X
Source of Material
Description of Material
Test Method
108.1
16.7
Maximum Dry Density
TEST RESULTS
PCF
%
2.80
2.70
2.60
Curves of 100% Saturation
for Specific Gravity Equal to:
Optimum Water Content
PERCENT MOISTURE, %
DRY DENSITY, pcf
PV-6 0-5
AASHTO T99 A
CLIENT Muller Engineering Company PROJECT NAME Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
PROJECT NUMBER 315.01 PROJECT LOCATION Fort Collins, CO
PROCTOR - STANDARD 315.01-HOORSETOOTH AND TIMBERLINE.GPJ ROCKSOL TEMPLATE.GDT 12/23/13
RockSol Consulting Group Inc.
6510 W 91st Ave, Ste 130
Westminster, CO, 80031
Telephone: 303-962-9300
LL PL PI
ATTERBERG LIMITS
35 14 21
-5.0
-4.5
-4.0
-3.5
-3.0
-2.5
-2.0
-1.5
-1.0
-0.5
0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
0.01 0.1 1 10
STRAIN, %
STRESS, ksf
102.0 22.5
SWELL - CONSOLIDATION TEST
0.4
Specimen Identification
PV-1
Classification
Lean CLAY with SAND (CL)
(pcf) MC%
Swell/Consol.
(%)
2
CLIENT Muller Engineering Company
PROJECT NUMBER 315.01
PROJECT NAME Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
PROJECT LOCATION Fort Collins, CO
SWELL - STANDARD 315.01-HOORSETOOTH AND TIMBERLINE.GPJ ROCKSOL TEMPLATE.GDT 12/23/13
-5.0
-4.5
-4.0
-3.5
-3.0
-2.5
-2.0
-1.5
-1.0
-0.5
0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
0.01 0.1 1 10
STRAIN, %
STRESS, ksf
97.9 22.8
SWELL - CONSOLIDATION TEST
0.0
Specimen Identification
PV-2
Classification
Clayey SAND (SC)
(pcf) MC%
Swell/Consol.
(%)
2
CLIENT Muller Engineering Company
PROJECT NUMBER 315.01
PROJECT NAME Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
PROJECT LOCATION Fort Collins, CO
SWELL - STANDARD 315.01-HOORSETOOTH AND TIMBERLINE.GPJ ROCKSOL TEMPLATE.GDT 12/23/13
-5.0
-4.5
-4.0
-3.5
-3.0
-2.5
-2.0
-1.5
-1.0
-0.5
0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
0.01 0.1 1 10
STRAIN, %
STRESS, ksf
99.5 20.2
SWELL - CONSOLIDATION TEST
0.4
Specimen Identification
PV-3
Classification
Lean CLAY with SAND (CL)
(pcf) MC%
Swell/Consol.
(%)
2
CLIENT Muller Engineering Company
PROJECT NUMBER 315.01
PROJECT NAME Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
PROJECT LOCATION Fort Collins, CO
SWELL - STANDARD 315.01-HOORSETOOTH AND TIMBERLINE.GPJ ROCKSOL TEMPLATE.GDT 12/23/13
-5.0
-4.5
-4.0
-3.5
-3.0
-2.5
-2.0
-1.5
-1.0
-0.5
0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
0.01 0.1 1 10
STRAIN, %
STRESS, ksf
110.3 17.9
SWELL - CONSOLIDATION TEST
1.1
Specimen Identification
PV-4
Classification
Lean CLAY with SAND (CL)
(pcf) MC%
Swell/Consol.
(%)
2
CLIENT Muller Engineering Company
PROJECT NUMBER 315.01
PROJECT NAME Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
PROJECT LOCATION Fort Collins, CO
SWELL - STANDARD 315.01-HOORSETOOTH AND TIMBERLINE.GPJ ROCKSOL TEMPLATE.GDT 12/23/13
-5.0
-4.5
-4.0
-3.5
-3.0
-2.5
-2.0
-1.5
-1.0
-0.5
0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
0.01 0.1 1 10
STRAIN, %
STRESS, ksf
105.6 17.5
SWELL - CONSOLIDATION TEST
0.6
Specimen Identification
PV-5
Classification
Lean CLAY wiht SAND (CL)
(pcf) MC%
Swell/Consol.
(%)
2
CLIENT Muller Engineering Company
PROJECT NUMBER 315.01
PROJECT NAME Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
PROJECT LOCATION Fort Collins, CO
SWELL - STANDARD 315.01-HOORSETOOTH AND TIMBERLINE.GPJ ROCKSOL TEMPLATE.GDT 12/23/13
-5.0
-4.5
-4.0
-3.5
-3.0
-2.5
-2.0
-1.5
-1.0
-0.5
0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
0.01 0.1 1 10
STRAIN, %
STRESS, ksf
97.3 22.6
SWELL - CONSOLIDATION TEST
0.8
Specimen Identification
PV-6
Classification
Lean CLAY with SAND (CL)
(pcf) MC%
Swell/Consol.
(%)
2
CLIENT Muller Engineering Company
PROJECT NUMBER 315.01
PROJECT NAME Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
PROJECT LOCATION Fort Collins, CO
SWELL - STANDARD 315.01-HOORSETOOTH AND TIMBERLINE.GPJ ROCKSOL TEMPLATE.GDT 12/23/13
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
0 4 8 12 16 20 24
UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST
STRAIN, %
STRESS, psi
48.2 116.2 14.8
CLIENT Muller Engineering Company
PROJECT NUMBER 315.01
PROJECT NAME Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
PROJECT LOCATION Fort Collins, CO
Specimen Identification
TL-1
Classification
Clayey SAND (SC)
(pcf) MC%
Compressive
Strength (psi)
9
UNCONFINED - STANDARD 315.01-HOORSETOOTH AND TIMBERLINE.GPJ ROCKSOL TEMPLATE.GDT 11/11/13
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
0 4 8 12 16 20 24
UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST
STRAIN, %
STRESS, psi
23.7 110.0 17.9
CLIENT Muller Engineering Company
PROJECT NUMBER 315.01
PROJECT NAME Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
PROJECT LOCATION Fort Collins, CO
Specimen Identification
TL-1
Classification
Lean CLAY with SAND (CL)
(pcf) MC%
Compressive
Strength (psi)
14
UNCONFINED - STANDARD 315.01-HOORSETOOTH AND TIMBERLINE.GPJ ROCKSOL TEMPLATE.GDT 11/11/13
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
0 4 8 12 16 20 24
UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST
STRAIN, %
STRESS, psi
23.2 112.1 16.3
CLIENT Muller Engineering Company
PROJECT NUMBER 315.01
PROJECT NAME Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
PROJECT LOCATION Fort Collins, CO
Specimen Identification
TL-2
Classification
Lean CLAY with SAND (CL)
(pcf) MC%
Compressive
Strength (psi)
14
UNCONFINED - STANDARD 315.01-HOORSETOOTH AND TIMBERLINE.GPJ ROCKSOL TEMPLATE.GDT 11/11/13
R-Value 1321633
7108 South Alton Way, Building B • Centennial, Colorado 80112 • www.cesareinc.com
Phone 303-220-0300 • Fax 303-220-0442 Rev. 3/30/12
Project Number: Date: 28-Oct-13
Project Name: Technician: RAZ/JPC
Lab ID Number: Reviewer: R. Zoetewey
Sample Location:
Visual Description:
R-Value @ Exudation Pressure 300 psi:
Specification:
Test Specimen: 1 2 3
S1 =[(R-5)/11.29]+3 S1= 3.27 Moisture Content, %: 18.2 20.4 22.4
MR =10[(S
1
+18.72)/6.24] MR= 3,337 Expansion Pressure, psi: 0.18 0.00 -0.15
MR = Resilient Modulus, psi Dry Density, pcf: 109.0 105.3 100.1
S1 = the Soil Support Value R-Value: 12 8 4
R = the R-Value obtained Exudation Pressure, psi: 428 297 187
Note: The R-Value is measured; the MR is an approximation from correlation formulas.
R-Value Test Graph (AASHTO T-190 / Colorado Procedure CP-L 3101)
8
CLAY, sandy, brown
Horsetooth and Timberline (RockSol Proj. No. 315.01)
PV-5 at 0 to 5', Horsetooth Road ROW - West of Timberline Road
1321633
CDOT Pavement Design Manual, 2011.
Eq. 2.1 & 2.2, page 2-3.
13.023, RockSol Consulting Group
8
0
20
40
60
80
100
800 700 600 500 400 300 200 100
R-Value
Exudation Pressure (psi)
R-Value 1321634
7108 South Alton Way, Building B • Centennial, Colorado 80112 • www.cesareinc.com
Phone 303-220-0300 • Fax 303-220-0442 Rev. 3/30/12
Project Number: Date: 29-Oct-13
Project Name: Technician: JPC
Lab ID Number: Reviewer: R. Zoetewey
Sample Location:
Visual Description:
R-Value @ Exudation Pressure 300 psi:
Specification:
Test Specimen: 1 2 3
S1 =[(R-5)/11.29]+3 S1= 3.18 Moisture Content, %: 18.8 19.6 22.0
MR =10[(S
1
+18.72)/6.24] MR= 3,230 Expansion Pressure, psi: 0.09 0.03 0.00
MR = Resilient Modulus, psi Dry Density, pcf: 108.9 107.2 100.8
S1 = the Soil Support Value R-Value: 10 9 6
R = the R-Value obtained Exudation Pressure, psi: 490 368 261
Note: The R-Value is measured; the MR is an approximation from correlation formulas.
R-Value Test Graph (AASHTO T-190 / Colorado Procedure CP-L 3101)
7
CLAY, sandy, brown
Horsetooth and Timberline (RockSol Proj. No. 315.01)
PV-3 at 0 to 5', Horsetooth Road ROW - North of Horsetooth Road
1321634
CDOT Pavement Design Manual,
2011. Eq. 2.1 & 2.2, page 2-3.
13.023, RockSol Consulting Group
7
0
20
40
60
80
100
800 700 600 500 400 300 200 100
R-Value
Exudation Pressure (psi)
Pavement Design Report
Horsetooth Road and Timberline Road Intersection Improvements
Fort Collins, Colorado
RockSol Project No. 315.01 January 2, 2014
APPENDIX C
EXISTING PAVEMENT CORE LOG SUMMARY
C-1 through C-10
Existing Pavement Core Log Summary
Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
City of Fort Collins, Colorado
RockSol Project No. 315.01 C-1 January 2, 2014
CORE ID: C-1 General Location: Eastbound (EB) Horsetooth Road, Station 45+00, Lane 1
Total thickness of Asphalt Pavement: 7 ⅜ inches
Number of Identifiable Asphalt layers: 2
Layer 1. 3 ⅛ inches (top)
Layer 2. 4 ¼ inches
Condition of Asphalt: Good
Comments:
Aggregate Base Course (ABC)
Yes
No
Approximate Thickness of ABC: 6 inches
Date Core Obtained: 9/30/2013
CORE ID: C-2 General Location: Westbound (WB) Horsetooth Road, Station 47+90, Lane 2
Total thickness of Asphalt Pavement: 6 ½ inches
Number of Identifiable Asphalt layers: 2
Layer 1. 2 ⅞ inches (top)
Layer 2. 3 ⅝ inches
Condition of Asphalt: Good
Comments: No loss of fines or de-lamination
observed. Slight raveling at bottom.
Aggregate Base Course (ABC)
Yes
No
Approximate Thickness of ABC: 6 inches
Date Core Obtained: 9/30/2013
Existing Pavement Core Log Summary
Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
City of Fort Collins, Colorado
RockSol Project No. 315.01 C-2 January 2, 2014
CORE ID: C-3 General Location: EB Horsetooth Road, Station 51+80, Lane 1
Total thickness of Concrete Pavement: 8 ¾ inches
Condition of Concrete: Good
Comments: No visible signs of deterioration.
Aggregate Base Course (ABC)
Yes
No
Approximate Thickness of ABC: >2 inches with
non-standard base material
Date Core Obtained: 9/30/2013
CORE ID: C-4 General Location: WB Horsetooth Road, Station 54+90, Lane 2
Total thickness of Asphalt Pavement: 16 ½ inches
Number of Identifiable Asphalt layers: Difficult to
determine below the top layer (Layer 1)
Layer 1. 3 inches (top)
Condition of Asphalt: Good
Comments: Broken section at top is due to core
removal from hole.
Aggregate Base Course (ABC)
Yes
No
Date Core Obtained: 9/30/2013
Existing Pavement Core Log Summary
Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
City of Fort Collins, Colorado
RockSol Project No. 315.01 C-3 January 2, 2014
CORE ID: C-5 General Location: Northbound (NB) Timberline Road, Station 156+70, Lane 1
Total thickness of Asphalt Pavement: 10 inches
Number of Identifiable Asphalt layers: 3
Layer 1. 3 ½ inches (top)
Layer 2. 2 ½ inches
Layer 3. 4 inches (Lower 2 inches lost
upon recovery)
Layer 4.
Condition of Asphalt: Layers 1 and 2 Good.
Layer 3 Poor
Comments: Lower 2 inches of Layer 3 crumbled
upon core recovery
Aggregate Base Course (ABC)
Yes
No
Approximate Thickness of ABC: 2 inches
Date Core Obtained: 9/30/2013
CORE ID: C-6 General Location: Southbound (SB) Timberline Rd, Station 153+20, Left Turn Lane
Total thickness of Asphalt Pavement: 10 ¼ inches
Number of Identifiable Asphalt layers: 3
Layer 1. 4 ¼ inches (top)
Layer 2. 2 ¾ inches
Layer 3. 3 ¼ inches
Condition of Asphalt: Layers 1 and 3 Good.
Layer 2 contains voids, possibly due to mix
segregation during placement.
Comments:
Aggregate Base Course (ABC)
Yes
No
Approximate Thickness of ABC: 6 inches
Date Core Obtained: 9/30/2013
Existing Pavement Core Log Summary
Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
City of Fort Collins, Colorado
RockSol Project No. 315.01 C-4 January 2, 2014
CORE ID: C-7 General Location: NB Timberline Road, Station 151+30, Lane 2
Total thickness of Concrete Pavement: 9¼ inches
Condition of Concrete: Good
Comments: No visible signs of deterioration.
Aggregate Base Course (ABC)
Yes
No
Approximate Thickness of ABC: >1 inch with non-
standard base material
Date Core Obtained: 9/30/2013
CORE ID: C-8 General Location: SB Timberline Rd, Station 147+40, Bike Lane
Total thickness of Asphalt Pavement: 10 ½ inches
Number of Identifiable Asphalt layers: Difficult to
determine below the top layer (Layer 1)
Layer 1. 2 ½ inches (top)
Condition of Asphalt: Good
Comments:
Aggregate Base Course (ABC)
Yes
No
Date Core Obtained: 9/30/2013
Existing Pavement Core Log Summary
Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
City of Fort Collins, Colorado
RockSol Project No. 315.01 C-5 January 2, 2014
CORE ID: C-9 General Location: NB Timberline Road, Station 145+10, Left Turn lane
Thickness of Asphalt Pavement: 7 ⅝ inches
Number of Identifiable Asphalt layers: 2
Layer 1. 3 ⅞ inches (top)
Layer 2. 3 ¾ inches
Condition of Asphalt: Good
Comments:
Aggregate Base Course (ABC)
Yes
No
Approximate Thickness of ABC: 6 inches
Date Core Obtained: 9/30/2013
CORE ID: C-10 General Location: SB Timberline Road, Station 142+70, Left Turn Lane
Thickness of Asphalt Pavement: 6 ¾ inches
Number of Identifiable Asphalt layers: 3
Layer 1. 3 ¼ inches (top)
Layer 2. ¾ inches
Layer 3. 2 ¾ inches
Condition of Asphalt: Fair to Good
Comments: Layer 2 possibly the remaining
portion of a layer partially removed during a mill
and overlay project.
Aggregate Base Course (ABC)
Yes
No
Approximate Thickness of ABC: 4 inches
Date Core Obtained: 9/30/2013
Pavement Design Report
Horsetooth Road and Timberline Road Intersection Improvements
Fort Collins, Colorado
RockSol Project No. 315.01 January 2, 2014
APPENDIX D
PAVEMENT THICKNESS CALCULATION SHEETS
Page 1
1993 AASHTO Pavement Design
DARWin Pavement Design and Analysis System
A Proprietary AASHTOWare
Computer Software Product
Flexible Structural Design Module
Full Depth HMA
Flexible Structural Design
18-kip ESALs Over Initial Performance Period 1,500,000
Initial Serviceability 4.5
Terminal Serviceability 2.5
Reliability Level 90 %
Overall Standard Deviation 0.44
Roadbed Soil Resilient Modulus 3,025 psi
Stage Construction 1
Calculated Design Structural Number 4.86 in
Specified Layer Design
Layer
Material Description
Struct
Coef.
(Ai)
Drain
Coef.
(Mi)
Thickness
(Di)(in)
Width
(ft)
Calculated
SN (in)
1 HMA 0.44 1 11.25 12 4.95
Total - - - 11.25 - 4.95
Layered Thickness Design
Thickness precision Actual
Layer
Material Description
Struct
Coef.
(Ai)
Drain
Coef.
(Mi)
Spec
Thickness
(Di)(in)
Min
Thickness
(Di)(in)
Elastic
Modulus
(psi)
Width
(ft)
Calculated
Thickness
(in)
Calculated
SN (in)
Total - - - - - - - - -
Page 1
1993 AASHTO Pavement Design
DARWin Pavement Design and Analysis System
A Proprietary AASHTOWare
Computer Software Product
Flexible Structural Design Module
HMA over ABC
Flexible Structural Design
18-kip ESALs Over Initial Performance Period 1,500,000
Initial Serviceability 4.5
Terminal Serviceability 2.5
Reliability Level 90 %
Overall Standard Deviation 0.44
Roadbed Soil Resilient Modulus 3,025 psi
Stage Construction 1
Calculated Design Structural Number 4.86 in
Specified Layer Design
Layer
Material Description
Struct
Coef.
(Ai)
Drain
Coef.
(Mi)
Thickness
(Di)(in)
Width
(ft)
Calculated
SN (in)
1 HMA 0.44 1 7.5 12 3.30
2 CDOT Class 6 0.11 1 15 12 1.65
Total - - - 22.50 - 4.95
Layered Thickness Design
Thickness precision Actual
Layer
Material Description
Struct
Coef.
(Ai)
Drain
Coef.
(Mi)
Spec
Thickness
(Di)(in)
Min
Thickness
(Di)(in)
Elastic
Modulus
(psi)
Width
(ft)
Calculated
Thickness
(in)
Calculated
SN (in)
Rigid Pavement Design - Based on AASHTO Supplemental Guide
Reference: LTPP DATA ANALYSIS - Phase I: Validation of Guidelines for k-Value Selection and Concrete
Pavement Performance Prediction
Results
Project # 315.01
Description: Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
Location: Fort Collins, Colorado
Slab Thickness Design
Pavement Type JRCP
18-kip ESALs Over Initial Performance Period (million) 1.50 million
Initial Serviceability 4.5
Terminal Serviceability 2.5
28-day Mean PCC Modulus of Rupture 650 psi
Elastic Modulus of Slab 3,400,000 psi
Elastic Modulus of Base 25,000 psi
Base Thickness in.
Mean Effective k-Value 64 psi/in
Reliability Level 90 %
Overall Standard Deviation 0.34
Calculated Design Thickness 8.09 in
Temperature Differential
Mean Annual Wind Speed 8.8 mph
Mean Annual Air Temperature 50.2
o
F
Mean Annual Precipitation 16 in
Maximum Positive Temperature Differential 6.61 o
F
Modulus of Subgrade Reaction
Period Description Subgrade k-Value, psi
Seasonally Adjusted Modulus of Subgrade Reaction psi/in
Modulus of Subgrade Reaction Adjusted for Rigid Layer
and Fill Section psi/in
Traffic
Performance Period years
Two-Way ADT
Number of Lanes in Design Direction
Percent of All Trucks in Design Lane
Percent Trucks in Design Direction
Vehicle Class Percent of Annual Initial Annual Accumulated
ADT Growth Truck Factor Growth in 18-kip ESALs
Truck Factor (millions)
Total Calculated Cumulative ESALs million
Faulting
Doweled
Dowel Diameter 1.5 in
Drainage Coefficient 1.00
Average Fault for Design Years with Design Inputs 0.03 in
Criteria Check PASS
Nondoweled
Drainage Coefficient 1
Average Fault for Design Years with Design Inputs in
Criteria Check
Rigid Pavement Design - Based on AASHTO Supplemental Guide
Reference: LTPP DATA ANALYSIS - Phase I: Validation of Guidelines for k-Value Selection and Concrete
Pavement Performance Prediction
Results
Project # 315.01
Description: Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
Location: Fort Collins, Colorado
Slab Thickness Design
Pavement Type JRCP
18-kip ESALs Over Initial Performance Period (million) 3.00 million
Initial Serviceability 4.5
Terminal Serviceability 2.5
28-day Mean PCC Modulus of Rupture 650 psi
Elastic Modulus of Slab 3,400,000 psi
Elastic Modulus of Base 25,000 psi
Base Thickness in.
Mean Effective k-Value 64 psi/in
Reliability Level 90 %
Overall Standard Deviation 0.34
Calculated Design Thickness 8.91 in
Temperature Differential
Mean Annual Wind Speed 8.8 mph
Mean Annual Air Temperature 50.2
o
F
Mean Annual Precipitation 16 in
Maximum Positive Temperature Differential 7.21 o
F
Modulus of Subgrade Reaction
Period Description Subgrade k-Value, psi
Seasonally Adjusted Modulus of Subgrade Reaction psi/in
Modulus of Subgrade Reaction Adjusted for Rigid Layer
and Fill Section psi/in
Traffic
Performance Period years
Two-Way ADT
Number of Lanes in Design Direction
Percent of All Trucks in Design Lane
Percent Trucks in Design Direction
Vehicle Class Percent of Annual Initial Annual Accumulated
ADT Growth Truck Factor Growth in 18-kip ESALs
Truck Factor (millions)
Total Calculated Cumulative ESALs million
Faulting
Doweled
Dowel Diameter 1.5 in
Drainage Coefficient 1.00
Average Fault for Design Years with Design Inputs 0.04 in
Criteria Check PASS
Nondoweled
Drainage Coefficient 1
Average Fault for Design Years with Design Inputs in
Criteria Check
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
Total - - - - - - - - -
*Note: This value is not represented by the inputs or an error occurred in calculation.
*Note: This value is not represented by the inputs or an error occurred in calculation.
I
C
I
T
Y
I
N
D
E
X
LIQUID LIMIT
LL PL PI
24
17
24
23
22
21
22
17
ATTERBERG LIMITS RESULTS
AASHTO T89
0-5.0
0-5.0
0-5.0
0-5.0
0-5.0
0-5.0
4
9
CLIENT Muller Engineering Company
PROJECT NUMBER 315.01
PROJECT NAME Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
PROJECT LOCATION Fort Collins, CO
ATTERBERG LIMITS - STANDARD 315.01-HOORSETOOTH AND TIMBERLINE.GPJ ROCKSOL TEMPLATE.GDT 12/23/13
1.9 17.3
PL
21
22
17
GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION
SAND
GRAIN SIZE IN MILLIMETERS
coarse fine
0-5.0
4
9
0-5.0
4
9
CLIENT Muller Engineering Company PROJECT NAME Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
PROJECT NUMBER 315.01 PROJECT LOCATION Fort Collins, CO
GRADATION - STANDARD 315.01-HOORSETOOTH AND TIMBERLINE.GPJ ROCKSOL TEMPLATE.GDT 12/23/13
RockSol Consulting Group Inc.
6510 W 91st Ave, Ste 130
Westminster, CO, 80031
Telephone: 303-962-9300
PV-3
PV-4
PV-5
coarse
SILT OR CLAY
mediumfine
%Sand %Silt %Clay
3 100
PV-1
PV-2
PV-3
PV-4
PV-5
4 2 1 1/2 6 10 16 30 50 200
U.HYDROMETERS. SIEVE OPENING IN INCHES U.S. SIEVE NUMBERS
16.3
44.3
20.2
18.9
18.6
0.8
16.2
0.8
0.8
0.2
PL
24
17
24
23
22
GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION
SAND
GRAIN SIZE IN MILLIMETERS
coarse fine
0-5.0
0-5.0
0-5.0
0-5.0
0-5.0
0-5.0
0-5.0
0-5.0
0-5.0
0-5.0
CLIENT Muller Engineering Company PROJECT NAME Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
PROJECT NUMBER 315.01 PROJECT LOCATION Fort Collins, CO
GRADATION - STANDARD 315.01-HOORSETOOTH AND TIMBERLINE.GPJ ROCKSOL TEMPLATE.GDT 12/23/13
RockSol Consulting Group Inc.
6510 W 91st Ave, Ste 130
Westminster, CO, 80031
Telephone: 303-962-9300
AASHTO (pcf)
Unconfined
Compressive
Strength
(psi)
CLIENT Muller Engineering Company
PROJECT NUMBER 315.01
PROJECT NAME Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
PROJECT LOCATION Fort Collins, CO
SUMMARY - STANDARD LANDSCAPE 315.01-HOORSETOOTH AND TIMBERLINE.GPJ ROCKSOL TEMPLATE.GDT 12/24/13
R-Value
18.2
7
8
INDEX
GRAPHIC
LOG
ELEVATION
(ft)
4952
4947
4942
4937
4932
DEPTH
(ft)
0
5
10
15
20
SAMPLE TYPE
BLOW
COUNTS
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
PAGE 1 OF 1
BORING : TL-2
CLIENT Muller Engineering Company
PROJECT NUMBER 315.01
PROJECT NAME Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
PROJECT LOCATION Fort Collins, CO
LOG - STANDARD 315.01-HOORSETOOTH AND TIMBERLINE.GPJ ROCKSOL TEMPLATE.GDT 12/23/13
LOG
ELEVATION
(ft)
4953
4948
4943
4938
4933
DEPTH
(ft)
0
5
10
15
20
SAMPLE TYPE
BLOW
COUNTS
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
PAGE 1 OF 1
BORING : TL-1
CLIENT Muller Engineering Company
PROJECT NUMBER 315.01
PROJECT NAME Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
PROJECT LOCATION Fort Collins, CO
LOG - STANDARD 315.01-HOORSETOOTH AND TIMBERLINE.GPJ ROCKSOL TEMPLATE.GDT 12/23/13
10
SAMPLE TYPE
BLOW
COUNTS
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
PAGE 1 OF 1
BORING : PV-6
CLIENT Muller Engineering Company
PROJECT NUMBER 315.01
PROJECT NAME Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
PROJECT LOCATION Fort Collins, CO
LOG - STANDARD 315.01-HOORSETOOTH AND TIMBERLINE.GPJ ROCKSOL TEMPLATE.GDT 12/24/13
Bulk Sample 0-5'
LL=35
PL=14
PI=21
-200=80.8%
WSS=0.00
5
10
SAMPLE TYPE
BLOW
COUNTS
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
PAGE 1 OF 1
BORING : PV-5
CLIENT Muller Engineering Company
PROJECT NUMBER 315.01
PROJECT NAME Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
PROJECT LOCATION Fort Collins, CO
LOG - STANDARD 315.01-HOORSETOOTH AND TIMBERLINE.GPJ ROCKSOL TEMPLATE.GDT 12/24/13
Bulk Sample 0-5'
LL=37
PL=15
PI=22
-200=81.2%
WSS=0.00
R-Value=8
SAMPLE TYPE
BLOW
COUNTS
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
PAGE 1 OF 1
BORING : PV-4
CLIENT Muller Engineering Company
PROJECT NUMBER 315.01
PROJECT NAME Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
PROJECT LOCATION Fort Collins, CO
LOG - STANDARD 315.01-HOORSETOOTH AND TIMBERLINE.GPJ ROCKSOL TEMPLATE.GDT 12/24/13
Bulk Sample 0-5'
LL=39
PL=16
PI=23
-200=80.3%
WSS=0.00
5
10
SAMPLE TYPE
BLOW
COUNTS
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
PAGE 1 OF 1
BORING : PV-3
CLIENT Muller Engineering Company
PROJECT NUMBER 315.01
PROJECT NAME Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
PROJECT LOCATION Fort Collins, CO
LOG - STANDARD 315.01-HOORSETOOTH AND TIMBERLINE.GPJ ROCKSOL TEMPLATE.GDT 12/24/13
Bulk Sample 0-5'
LL=40
PL=16
PI=24
-200=79.0%
WSS=0.00
R-Value=7
5
10
SAMPLE TYPE
BLOW
COUNTS
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
PAGE 1 OF 1
BORING : PV-2
CLIENT Muller Engineering Company
PROJECT NUMBER 315.01
PROJECT NAME Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
PROJECT LOCATION Fort Collins, CO
LOG - STANDARD 315.01-HOORSETOOTH AND TIMBERLINE.GPJ ROCKSOL TEMPLATE.GDT 12/24/13
Bulk Sample 0-5'
LL=32
PL=15
PI=17
-200=39.6%
WSS=0.00
10
SAMPLE TYPE
BLOW
COUNTS
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
PAGE 1 OF 1
BORING : PV-1
CLIENT Muller Engineering Company
PROJECT NUMBER 315.01
PROJECT NAME Horsetooth and Timberline Intersection Improvements
PROJECT LOCATION Fort Collins, CO
LOG - STANDARD 315.01-HOORSETOOTH AND TIMBERLINE.GPJ ROCKSOL TEMPLATE.GDT 12/24/13
Bulk Sample 0-5'
LL=40
PL=16
PI=24
-200=82.9%
WSS=0.00
Timberline Road and Horsetooth Road. Based on conditions encountered in our boreholes,
RockSol anticipates A-6 clay soils will be the predominant soil type encountered after removal of
the topsoil. The clay soils encountered were predominantly characterized as medium stiff with
blow counts typically ranging from 6 to 10. The moisture content of the clay was characterized
as moist to very moist, typically above optimum moisture content as determined by the standard
proctor method (ASTM D698 or AASHTO T99). As a result, RockSol anticipates a yielding
Reject Over 1000
OK
Core 3: 2730 - 2450 = 280 psi, > 273 therefore -
discard core and re-compute average
compressive strength using two
remaining cores.
New average compressive strength = 2875 psi
Use Table 601-3 to compute appropriate price
reduction based on 2875 psi, since core strengths
were higher than the cylinders strengths.
immediately after removal from the structure,
cores will be cured at a temperature between 60o
- 80oF (15o - 27oC) and at a relative humidity
below 60% for the first 24 hours.
4.2 Cores taken for the determination of
strength shall be of a standard size and within
appropriate tolerance.
NOTE 1 Bits cut approximately 1/4" smaller
than nominal OD (outside diameter). The 4 1/4"
and 6 1/4" OD bits produce 4" and 6".
5. APPARATUS
5.1 The apparatus shall be as described in
AASHTO T 24 (ASTM C 42).
considered a coarse gradation if they pass below the maximum density line at the #4
screen.
Gradations for mixes with a nominal maximum aggregate size of ¾ inch or smaller are
considered a coarse gradation if they pass below the maximum density line at the #8
screen.